EMC® NetWorker®

Module for Databases and Applications

Release 1.2

Administration Guide
P/N 300-012-086
REV A02

EMC Corporation
Corporate Headquarters:
Hopkinton, MA 01748-9103
1-508-435-1000
www.EMC.com
Copyright © 2009 - 2012 EMC Corporation. All rights reserved.

Published January, 2012

EMC believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information is subject to change
without notice.

THE INFORMATION IN THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” EMC CORPORATION MAKES NO
REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WITH RESPECT TO THE INFORMATION IN THIS PUBLICATION,
AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.

Use, copying, and distribution of any EMC software described in this publication requires an applicable software license.

For the most up-to-date regulatory document for your product line, go to the Technical Documentation and Advisories section
on EMC Powerlink.

For the most up-to-date listing of EMC product names, see EMC Corporation Trademarks on EMC.com.

All other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.

2 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Contents

Preface

Revision History

Chapter 1 Overview of Product Software and Features

Naming conventions used in this guide............................................................... 24
Importance of backups............................................................................................ 25
NMDA product features......................................................................................... 25
Basic backup and recovery features............................................................... 26
Scheduled backups versus manual backups ................................................ 26
Deduplication backups and restores with Avamar ..................................... 27
Deduplication backups and restores with Data Domain............................ 27
Probe-based (event-based) backups............................................................... 28
PowerSnap snapshot backups and restores.................................................. 28
Virtualization support...................................................................................... 29
Cluster backups and restores .......................................................................... 30
Configuration wizards..................................................................................... 30
Configuration conversion................................................................................ 31
Internationalization (I18N).............................................................................. 31
IPv6 support for backups and restores.......................................................... 31
Multiple databases on the same host............................................................. 31
Parallelism ......................................................................................................... 32
DB2-specific NMDA features................................................................................. 32
Full and incremental DB2 backups ................................................................ 32
DB2 transaction log backups........................................................................... 32
DB2 history pruning......................................................................................... 32
Informix-specific NMDA features......................................................................... 33
Full and incremental Informix backups ........................................................ 33
Logical log backups.......................................................................................... 33
Lotus-specific NMDA features .............................................................................. 34
Files backed up during Lotus backups.......................................................... 34
Full and incremental Lotus backups.............................................................. 34
Backups of Lotus database or directory links............................................... 35
Lotus DAOS backups and restores ................................................................ 35
Restartable scheduled backups ...................................................................... 35
Types of Lotus restores .................................................................................... 36
NetWorker User for Lotus program............................................................... 36
Partitioned Domino servers ............................................................................ 36
Oracle-specific NMDA features............................................................................. 37

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 3
Contents

Full and incremental Oracle backups............................................................. 37

Archived redo log backups.............................................................................. 38
Control file and server parameter file autobackups .................................... 38
Automatic channel allocation.......................................................................... 38
Backup and restore optimization.................................................................... 38
Backup copies .................................................................................................... 39
Backup of backup sets ...................................................................................... 39
Oracle Data Guard support ............................................................................. 39
Oracle Exadata support.................................................................................... 40
Restartable backups .......................................................................................... 41
Retention policies .............................................................................................. 41
Save set bundling .............................................................................................. 42
Policy uniformity .............................................................................................. 44
Other Oracle features........................................................................................ 45
Sybase-specific NMDA features.............................................................................48
Full and incremental Sybase backups ............................................................ 48
Password-protected database backups and restores ................................... 49
Database consistency check............................................................................. 49
Database backup and restore verification ..................................................... 49
Exclusion of multiple user-defined temporary databases from backup... 49
Sybase in-memory and relaxed durability databases.................................. 50
NetWorker User for Sybase program ............................................................. 50
NMDA components.................................................................................................50
NMDA backup and restore processes...................................................................52
Regular scheduled backup processes............................................................. 52
Regular restore processes................................................................................. 53

Chapter 2 Backup Configuration

Backup configuration roadmap ............................................................................ 56
Configuring internationalization (I18N) support................................................57
Requirements for I18N support ...................................................................... 58
Informix-specific requirements for I18N support ........................................ 59
Oracle-specific requirements for I18N support ............................................ 59
Verifying the database or application server configuration...............................60
Verifying the basic NetWorker resource configurations.....................................60
NetWorker Server resource.............................................................................. 60
NetWorker User Group resource .................................................................... 61
NetWorker Client resource .............................................................................. 63
NetWorker Device resource............................................................................. 63
NetWorker Pool and Label Template resources ........................................... 63
Firewall support ................................................................................................ 63
Converting a client-side to server-side configuration ........................................64
NetWorker resources modified by the conversion....................................... 65
Syntax and options of the nsrdaadmin conversion command................... 65
Configuring a scheduled backup with the wizard..............................................66
Requirements for using the backup configuration wizard ......................... 67
Configure a scheduled backup with the wizard .......................................... 67
Configuring a scheduled backup without the wizard........................................68
Configure the NMDA parameters without the wizard............................... 68
Configure the NetWorker resources with NMC........................................... 70
Configure the Group resource......................................................................... 70
Configure the Schedule resource .................................................................... 71
Configure the Client resource ......................................................................... 72
Configuring a manual backup .............................................................................. 75

4 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Contents

Configuring a deduplication backup with Avamar .......................................... 76

Best practices for an Avamar deduplication backup................................... 76
Configure a scheduled Avamar deduplication backup .............................. 78
Configure a manual Avamar deduplication backup................................... 79
Configuring a deduplication backup with Data Domain................................. 80
Best practices for a Data Domain backup ..................................................... 80
Configure a Data Domain backup with deduplication on NMDA host .. 81
Configure a Data Domain backup with deduplication on storage node . 82
Configure an Informix or Sybase backup to different pools ...................... 82
Configuring a probe-based backup...................................................................... 83
NMDA probe..................................................................................................... 83
User-defined probe........................................................................................... 84
Configure a probe-based backup ................................................................... 84
Configuring a parallel backup .............................................................................. 89
Configure a DB2 parallel backup ................................................................... 91
Configure an Informix parallel backup......................................................... 91
Configure a Lotus parallel backup................................................................. 91
Configure an Oracle parallel backup............................................................. 91
Configure a Sybase parallel (multistripe) backup ....................................... 92
DB2 backup considerations.................................................................................... 92
Considerations for automated deletion of DB2 recovery objects .............. 92
Configure DB2 automatic transaction log backups ..................................... 93
Informix backup considerations............................................................................ 94
Configure Informix automatic (continuous) logical log backups.............. 94
Lotus backup considerations ................................................................................. 94
Ensure the environment settings for Lotus operations ............................... 94
Considerations for Lotus database or directory link backups ................... 94
Considerations for Lotus transaction log backups ...................................... 95
Comfort span..................................................................................................... 96
Partitioned Domino server backups .............................................................. 96
Lotus DAOS backups....................................................................................... 97
Lotus restartable scheduled backups........................................................... 100
Oracle backup considerations.............................................................................. 101
RMAN scripts for manual backups ............................................................. 101
RMAN scripts for scheduled backups......................................................... 102
Configure automatic channel allocation ..................................................... 104
Oracle backup copies ..................................................................................... 105
Configure save set bundling for scheduled Oracle backups.................... 107
Configure policy uniformity for scheduled Oracle backups.................... 108
Sybase backup considerations ............................................................................. 109
Set up Sybase roles and permissions ........................................................... 109
Verification of Sybase database backups..................................................... 109
Volume pools for incremental Sybase backups.......................................... 110
Sybase transaction log backups .................................................................... 110
Configure a Sybase threshold procedure .................................................... 112
Set LD_PRELOAD for Sybase backups on HP-UX.................................... 114

Chapter 3 Backup Procedures

Performing a scheduled NMDA backup............................................................ 116
Test a scheduled backup ................................................................................ 116
Cancel a scheduled backup ........................................................................... 117
Restart a failed scheduled backup ............................................................... 118
Monitor a scheduled backup ........................................................................ 118
Performing a manual NMDA backup ................................................................ 119

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 5
Contents

Perform a DB2 manual backup ..................................................................... 120

Perform an Informix manual backup........................................................... 121
Perform a Lotus manual backup .................................................................. 121
Perform an Oracle manual backup............................................................... 122
Perform a Sybase manual backup ................................................................ 122
Manual backup through NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI ....... 124
Cancel a manual backup ................................................................................ 129
Monitor a manual backup.............................................................................. 130
Verifying the backup information in the NetWorker indexes .........................131
Avamar deduplication backup information in NetWorker indexes ........ 131
Data Domain backup information in NetWorker indexes ........................ 132
Lotus restartable backup information in NetWorker indexes .................. 133
Backup catalog synchronization and backup deletion .....................................134
Delete DB2 backups ........................................................................................ 134
Delete Informix backups ................................................................................ 136
Crosscheck and delete Oracle backups........................................................ 136

Chapter 4 Data Restore and Recovery

About data restore and recovery..........................................................................140
NetWorker indexes and policies used for restores..................................... 140
Roadmap for NMDA data restore ...................................................................... 141
Cancel a data restore or recovery........................................................................ 143
DB2 data restore and recovery ............................................................................ 143
Determine how many restore devices and sessions to use ....................... 144
Restore DB2 data ............................................................................................. 145
Recover DB2 data ............................................................................................ 147
Informix data restore and recovery .................................................................... 149
Informix restore modes .................................................................................. 150
Restore Informix data ..................................................................................... 151
Lotus data restore and recovery.......................................................................... 152
Database restore and recovery through the nsrnotesrc command .......... 153
Recovery of partitioned Domino servers..................................................... 156
Lotus DAOS recovery considerations.......................................................... 156
Document-level recovery through the nsrdocrc command ...................... 157
Document-level recovery through the Notes client GUI .......................... 159
Oracle data restore and recovery ........................................................................ 161
Determine volumes for restore ..................................................................... 162
Prevent degradation of restore performance with Oracle 10.2 or later... 165
RMAN scripts for restore and recovery....................................................... 165
Recovery configuration wizard (Oracle only) ............................................ 166
Restore through the RMAN command line interface ................................ 169
Restore through Oracle Enterprise Manager .............................................. 169
Recover Oracle data ........................................................................................ 170
Sybase data restore and recovery........................................................................ 170
Verification of Sybase database restores ...................................................... 171
Restore through the nsrsybrc command...................................................... 171
Database recovery with NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI .............. 174
Lotus recover options ..................................................................................... 177
Sybase recover options ................................................................................... 178
Directed recovery through the NetWorker User for Lotus ....................... 179

Chapter 5 Disaster Recovery

Preparing for disaster recovery ............................................................................184

6 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Contents

DB2 disaster recovery............................................................................................ 185

Informix disaster recovery.................................................................................... 186
Informix imported restore ............................................................................. 187
Recovery from an Informix server disk crash ............................................ 189
Lotus disaster recovery ......................................................................................... 189
Recovery of a nonlogged Lotus environment ............................................ 190
Recovery of a logged Lotus environment ................................................... 191
Oracle disaster recovery........................................................................................ 193
Create the DBID text file................................................................................ 194
Set up a postcommand script for backup of Oracle-related files............. 194
Set up RMAN backups of the database and related files ......................... 196
Set up RMAN backups of Recovery Catalog.............................................. 196
Perform an Oracle disaster recovery ........................................................... 196
Sybase disaster recovery ....................................................................................... 197
Recover the master database......................................................................... 197
Recover user databases after database device failure ............................... 198

Chapter 6 Cluster Systems

Active-passive clusters.......................................................................................... 202
Backup failover ............................................................................................... 203
Cluster configuration requirements............................................................. 204
Convert a client-side to server-side configuration in a cluster ................ 205
Configure a scheduled backup in a cluster................................................. 205
Configure a manual backup in a cluster ..................................................... 208
Configure an Avamar deduplication backup in a cluster......................... 208
Configure a Data Domain deduplication backup in a cluster ................. 209
Configure a probe-based backup in a cluster ............................................. 209
Setting up nodes to back up to a local storage node ................................. 209
Configure a recovery in a cluster ................................................................. 210
Active-active application clusters (overview) ................................................... 210
Active-active cluster configuration requirements ..................................... 211
Restarting a backup after a system failure.................................................. 211
DB2 DPF systems................................................................................................... 212
Backup and restore configuration in a DPF environment ........................ 213
Manual backup configuration in a DPF environment .............................. 214
Scheduled backup configuration in DB2 9.1.x DPF environment ........... 215
Scheduled backup configuration in DB2 9.5 or later DPF environment 216
Restoring a DPF backup ................................................................................ 218
Informix MACH 11 systems................................................................................. 218
Backup and Restore with Continuous Log Restore................................... 219
Backups of primary and HDR or RSS or SDS servers ............................... 220
Restores of primary and HDR or RSS or SDS servers ............................... 220
Oracle RAC systems .............................................................................................. 221
Backup and restore configuration in a RAC environment ....................... 221
Connect-time failover..................................................................................... 222
Parallel RAC backups and restores.............................................................. 223
Creating RMAN backup and restore scripts .............................................. 223
Archived redo logs ......................................................................................... 225
Sybase ASE Cluster Edition systems .................................................................. 226
Backup and restore configuration for ASE Cluster Edition ..................... 227
Backup of temporary databases ................................................................... 228
Restoring an ASE Cluster Edition backup .................................................. 228
Backup and recovery of the quorum device............................................... 228
Recovery of the master database on clusters.............................................. 229

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 7
Contents

Chapter 7 Multiple Installations on a Single Host

Multiple database or application installations...................................................232
Multiple databases or applications with the same bitness...............................232
Multiple databases or applications with 32-bit and 64-bit coexistence..........232

Chapter 8 Snapshot Backups and Restores

PowerSnap snapshot operations..........................................................................236
Required software for PowerSnap snapshot operations ........................... 236
Types of PowerSnap backups........................................................................ 237
Types of PowerSnap restores......................................................................... 239
PowerSnap backup processes ....................................................................... 239
Configuring a PowerSnap backup...................................................................... 241
Configure internationalization (I18N) support .......................................... 242
Configure the NetWorker Pool resources.................................................... 242
Configure the NetWorker Snapshot Policy resource ................................. 242
Configure the NetWorker Group resource .................................................. 242
Configure the NetWorker Client resource................................................... 243
Configure an Avamar deduplication PowerSnap backup ........................ 244
Test a PowerSnap backup .............................................................................. 244
Cancel a PowerSnap backup ......................................................................... 244
Configuring a PowerSnap restore and recovery............................................... 245
PowerSnap parameters..........................................................................................245
DB2 considerations for PowerSnap operations .................................................247
Restoring a DB2 PowerSnap backup............................................................ 247
Managing and deleting DB2 PowerSnap backups..................................... 247
Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations .............................................249
Configuring the required Oracle settings.................................................... 250
Configuring the NWORA resource file ....................................................... 251
Creating RMAN scripts for Oracle PowerSnap backups .......................... 251
Checking configuration consistency ............................................................ 255
Performing Oracle PowerSnap backups...................................................... 256
Oracle PowerSnap backup information in NetWorker indexes............... 258
Restoring an Oracle PowerSnap backup ..................................................... 260
Catalog synchronization for Oracle PowerSnap backups......................... 263
PowerSnap backups and restores on cluster systems................................ 276
Replication Manager snapshot operations with Oracle ASM .........................279
About NMDA integration with Replication Manager .............................. 279
Requirements for snapshot backups of Oracle ASM data ........................ 281
Configuring snapshot backups of Oracle ASM data ................................. 281
Performing backups and restores of Oracle ASM data ............................. 288
Sample preprocessing and postprocessing scripts..................................... 289

Appendix A NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

About NMDA parameters ................................................................................... 294
NMDA configuration file..................................................................................... 294
Syntax rules for the NMDA configuration file ........................................... 295
Common NMDA parameters.............................................................................. 296
DB2-specific NMDA parameters ........................................................................ 303
Informix-specific NMDA parameters ................................................................ 306
Lotus-specific NMDA parameters ...................................................................... 307
Wildcard support for Lotus operations ....................................................... 313
Setting the NSR_RECOVER_TIME parameter ........................................... 314
Oracle-specific NMDA parameters .................................................................... 315

8 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Contents

Sybase-specific NMDA parameters ................................................................... 319

Appendix B Oracle RMAN Commands

The pool option of the backup command ......................................................... 324
The send command .............................................................................................. 324
Syntax rules ..................................................................................................... 324
Two ways to run the send command .......................................................... 326
Precedence rules ............................................................................................. 328

Appendix C Troubleshooting and Error Messages

General troubleshooting tips............................................................................... 330
Debug log files ................................................................................................ 331
Wizard backup configuration fails, authentication denied...................... 332
Backup hangs .................................................................................................. 332
NMDA error messages ........................................................................................ 332
NetWorker XBSA error messages ................................................................ 333
DB2-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages ................................... 335
Removal of failed backup.............................................................................. 335
The load libnsrdb2 command ....................................................................... 336
DB2-specific error messages ......................................................................... 336
Informix-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages ........................... 339
No dbspaces/blobspaces found to back up or restore.............................. 339
Unable to open connection to server ........................................................... 339
Default value assigned to LTAPEDEV causes failure............................... 339
ON-Bar returned codes 2 through 34 .......................................................... 340
Lotus-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages................................. 340
"Invalid Time Specified" error ...................................................................... 340
Backup failure caused by time conversion ................................................. 340
Notes API 525 error ........................................................................................ 341
NMC Group Details window displays “command not found” .............. 341
Restore problem due to NSR_BACKUP_PATHS=NOTES: ..................... 342
Failure of a document-level recovery on a remote Domino server......... 342
NMDA Lotus-specific error messages......................................................... 342
Oracle-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages ............................... 345
Diagnosing Oracle-specific problems.......................................................... 345
RMAN error messages................................................................................... 346
The trace option of the backup command .................................................. 346
NMDA Oracle-specific error messages ....................................................... 347
Sybase-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages............................... 358
NMDA Sybase-specific error messages....................................................... 358

Glossary

Index

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 9
Contents

10 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Figures

Title Page

1 Regular scheduled NMDA backup .................................................................................... 53

2 NetWorker User for Sybase Backup window ................................................................. 125
3 NetWorker User for Lotus Backup Options dialog box ................................................ 126
4 NetWorker User for Sybase Backup Options dialog box .............................................. 127
5 NetWorker User for Lotus Properties window .............................................................. 129
6 Backup messages in Sessions tab of Monitoring window ............................................ 130
7 Lotus restartable backup information in NMC Console ............................................... 133
8 NetWorker User for Lotus Recover window .................................................................. 175
9 NetWorker User for Lotus Recover Options dialog box ............................................... 177
10 NetWorker User for Sybase Recover Options dialog box ............................................. 179
11 Single database node with failover capability ................................................................ 202
12 Multiple database nodes with failover capability .......................................................... 203
13 Multiple database nodes with mutual failover capability ............................................ 203
14 Single DPF host with shared memory ............................................................................. 212
15 Two DPF hosts with multiple nodes ................................................................................ 213
16 Software used in the NMDA environment for PowerSnap backups and restores.... 237
17 PowerSnap live backup and restore data flow ............................................................... 240
18 Application Credentials window in the Replication Manager console ...................... 282
19 Advanced Replication Settings in the Replication Manager console .......................... 283
20 Mount options in the Replication Manager console ...................................................... 284
21 Starting the Job window in the job wizard...................................................................... 285

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 11
Figures

12 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Tables

Title Page

1 Naming conventions............................................................................................................. 24
2 NMDA components.............................................................................................................. 50
3 NMDA parameters that support non-ASCII values ........................................................ 58
4 NetWorker Server resource attributes ............................................................................... 61
5 User group privileges for NMDA operations ................................................................... 61
6 Options of the nsrdaadmin command for configuration conversion............................ 65
7 Mandatory parameters for scheduled NMDA backups.................................................. 69
8 Backup levels specified in NetWorker Schedule resource.............................................. 71
9 NetWorker Client resource attributes ................................................................................ 72
10 Mandatory parameters for manual NMDA backups ...................................................... 75
11 Configuring a Data Domain backup .................................................................................. 82
12 NetWorker Probe resource attributes ................................................................................ 85
13 Sybase roles and permissions............................................................................................ 109
14 Full backups with NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT.................................................................... 111
15 Incremental backups with NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT ..................................................... 111
16 Threshold procedure location ........................................................................................... 113
17 Supported procedures for a manual NMDA backup .................................................... 119
18 Consistency check options of the nsrsybcc command................................................... 123
19 Toolbar buttons on the Backup window ......................................................................... 125
20 Supported procedures for NMDA data restore.............................................................. 142
21 Toolbar buttons on the Recover window ........................................................................ 176
22 Configuration file parameters corresponding to Recover Options fields................... 178
23 Command/library names for 32-bit and 64-bit coexistence ......................................... 233
24 Typical configuration for PowerSnap snapshot operations with NMDA .................. 236
25 Supported PowerSnap backup types ............................................................................... 237
26 Supported PowerSnap restore types ................................................................................ 239
27 Sample NetWorker Group resource attributes for a snapshot backup....................... 243
28 PowerSnap parameters ...................................................................................................... 246
29 DB2 resource file parameters............................................................................................. 249
30 NWORA parameter resources .......................................................................................... 266
31 NWORA SID resource components ................................................................................. 268
32 Common NMDA parameters............................................................................................ 296
33 DB2-specific NMDA parameters ...................................................................................... 303
34 Informix-specific NMDA parameters .............................................................................. 306
35 Lotus-specific NMDA parameters.................................................................................... 308
36 Oracle-specific NMDA parameters .................................................................................. 316
37 Sybase-specific NMDA parameters.................................................................................. 319
38 Option values in the send command ............................................................................... 326
39 NetWorker XBSA error messages..................................................................................... 333
40 Path and suffix for the load libnsrdb2 command........................................................... 336

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 13
Tables

Title Page

41 DB2 SQL error messages .................................................................................................... 337

42 Error messages from Lotus backups and restores .......................................................... 343
43 Trace option values and conditions traced ...................................................................... 347
44 Error messages from Oracle backups and restores......................................................... 347
45 Error messages from the nsroraadmin program............................................................. 355
46 Error messages from the nsrorainfo program ................................................................. 357
47 Error messages from Sybase consistency checks, backups, and restores.................... 359
48 Sybase backup server and libnsrsyb error messages ..................................................... 362

14 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Examples

Title Page

1 Save set bundling for a 1-week scheduled backup cycle of a tablespace ..................... 44
2 Save set bundle join .............................................................................................................. 44
3 Splitting a save set bundle across volumes ....................................................................... 44
4 Using the nsrdaadmin command for configuration conversion .................................... 66
5 Multiple probes for a probe-based backup ....................................................................... 88
6 Using NSR_RETAIN_NUM_LOGS to control reusable logs .......................................... 95
7 RMAN script for a manual backup .................................................................................. 101
8 RMAN script for a scheduled backup .............................................................................. 103
9 Using the configure channel command with parms option for automatic channels 105
10 Specifying parameter values per automatic channel ..................................................... 105
11 Using the set backup copies command in the RMAN script ........................................ 106
12 Using automatic channels for backup copies .................................................................. 107
13 Recovery of a database to a specific point in time .......................................................... 154
14 Recovery of specific Lotus data files or directories ........................................................ 154
15 Recovery of all Lotus database files ................................................................................. 154
16 Relocated data restore ........................................................................................................ 155
17 Restore of a logged database without applying transaction logs ................................ 155
18 Relocation of a linked database during Lotus recovery ................................................ 155
19 Recovery of a database with a change of DBIID ............................................................ 156
20 Recovering deleted documents for a logged database .................................................. 159
21 Using restore...preview to determine volumes for restore ........................................... 162
22 Sample nsrorainfo commands for Oracle restores ......................................................... 164
23 Volume information displayed by the nsrorainfo command ....................................... 165
24 RMAN script for a tablespace restore .............................................................................. 166
25 RMAN script for a restore from a specified pool ........................................................... 166
26 Restores of single or multiple Sybase databases ............................................................ 172
27 Point-in-time recovery of Sybase data ............................................................................. 172
28 Sample postcommand script on UNIX ............................................................................ 195
29 Setting up an Oracle RAC configuration ......................................................................... 224
30 PowerSnap parameter settings for different types of primary storage ....................... 246
31 RMAN scripts with multiple channels ............................................................................ 252
32 Setting the PowerSnap parameter NSR_SNAPSHOT_POSTCMD ............................. 254
33 Setting the PowerSnap parameter RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER ..................................... 254
34 Oracle PowerSnap backup failure .................................................................................... 256
35 Oracle PowerSnap backup entries in the client file index ............................................. 259
36 Oracle PowerSnap backup entries in the media database ............................................ 259
37 Resource file backup entry in the client file index ......................................................... 260
38 Resource file backup entry in the media database ......................................................... 260
39 Symbolic link specified in the set newname command ................................................. 263
40 Relocation of a raw volume ............................................................................................... 263

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 15
Examples

Title Page

41 Default NWORA parameter resources ............................................................................. 267

42 Connection file contents ..................................................................................................... 270
43 Adding an NWORA SID resource .................................................................................... 272
44 Using RMAN commands to synchronize the RMAN catalog entries ......................... 275
45 PowerSnap backup entries in the index of a physical cluster client ............................ 277
46 PowerSnap backup entries in the index of a virtual cluster client ............................... 278
47 A send command sets the parameters for a specified channel ..................................... 326
48 An rman send command sets a parameter for all channels .......................................... 327
49 Order of parameters set according to the precedence rules .......................................... 328

16 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Preface

As part of an effort to improve and enhance the performance and capabilities of its product
lines, EMC periodically releases revisions of its hardware and software. Therefore, some
functions described in this document may not be supported by all versions of the software or
hardware currently in use. For the most up-to-date information on product features, refer to
your product release notes.
If a product does not function properly or does not function as described in this document,
please contact your EMC representative.

Note: This document was accurate as of the time of publication. However, as information is
added, new versions of this document may be released to the EMC Powerlink website. Check
the Powerlink website to ensure that you are using the latest version of this document.

Purpose This document describes how to configure and use the EMC NetWorker Module for
Databases and Applications (NMDA) release 1.2 software.

Audience This document is intended for system administrators or database administrators

(DBAs) who are responsible for installing software and maintaining backup and
recovery systems for databases or applications. Operators who monitor backups may
also find this document useful.
Readers of this document are expected to be familiar with the following topics:
◆ Backup, recovery, database, applications, and network terminology
◆ Backup and recovery procedures
◆ Disaster recovery procedures

Related The following EMC publications related to the use of this product can be found at the
documentation EMC website, http://Powerlink.EMC.com:
◆ The NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications release 1.2
documentation set:
• Administration guide
• Installation guide
• Release notes
• Command reference guide
◆ The NetWorker documentation set:
• Administration guide
• Installation guide
• Release notes
• Command reference guide
• Disaster recovery guide
• NetWorker licensing guide

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 17
Preface

◆ Other EMC documentation:

• NetWorker PowerSnap Module documentation
• Software compatibility guide
• UNIX man pages
The following additional documentation may be useful:
◆ Database or application server documentation
◆ Database or application backup and recovery documentation

Conventions used in EMC uses the following conventions for special notices:
this document
Note: A note presents information that is important, but not hazard-related.

IMPORTANT
An important notice contains information essential to software or hardware
operation.

Typographical conventions
EMC uses the following type style conventions in this document:
Normal Used in running (nonprocedural) text for:
• Names of interface elements (such as names of windows, dialog boxes, buttons,
fields, and menus)
• Names of resources, attributes, pools, Boolean expressions, buttons, DQL
statements, keywords, clauses, environment variables, functions, utilities
• URLs, pathnames, filenames, directory names, computer names, links, groups,
service keys, file systems, notifications
Bold Used in running (nonprocedural) text for:
• Names of commands, daemons, options, programs, processes, services,
applications, utilities, kernels, notifications, system calls, man pages
Used in procedures for:
• Names of interface elements (such as names of windows, dialog boxes, buttons,
fields, and menus)
• What user specifically selects, clicks, presses, or types
Italic Used in all text (including procedures) for:
• Full titles of publications referenced in text
• Emphasis (for example, a new term)
• Variables
Courier Used for:
• System output, such as an error message or script
• URLs, complete paths, filenames, prompts, and syntax when shown outside of
running text
Courier bold Used for:
• Specific user input (such as commands)
Courier italic Used in procedures for:
• Variables on command line
• User input variables
<> Angle brackets enclose parameter or variable values supplied by the user
[] Square brackets enclose optional values
| Vertical bar indicates alternate selections — the bar means “or”
{} Braces indicate content that you must specify (that is, x or y or z)
... Ellipses indicate nonessential information omitted from the example

18 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Preface

Where to get help EMC support, product, and licensing information can be obtained as follows.
Product information — For documentation, release notes, software updates, or for
information about EMC products, licensing, and service, go to the EMC Powerlink
website (registration required) at:
http://Powerlink.EMC.com

Technical support — For technical support, go to Powerlink and select Support. On

the Support page, you will see several options, including one for making a service
request. Note that to open a service request, you must have a valid support
agreement. Please contact your EMC sales representative for details about obtaining a
valid support agreement or with questions about your account.

Your comments Your suggestions will help us continue to improve the accuracy, organization, and
overall quality of the user publications. Please send your opinion of this document to:
BSGdocumentation@emc.com

If you have issues, comments, or questions about specific information or procedures,

please include the title and, if available, the part number, the revision (for example,
A01), the page numbers, and any other details that will help us locate the subject you
are addressing.

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 19
Preface

20 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Revision History

Email your clarifications or suggestions for this document to:

BSGdocumentation@emc.com

The following table lists the revision history of this document.

Revision Date Description of added or changed sections

A02 January 12, 2012 Updated the following for General Availability (GA) of NMDA 1.2:
• “Naming conventions used in this guide” on page 24 - Added Informix IDS term.
• “Restartable scheduled backups” on page 35 - Added details on checkpoint granularity for Lotus backups.
• Table 8 on page 71 - Clarified details on Informix and Oracle backup levels.
• “Configure the Client resource” on page 72 - Modified details on the Save Set attribute.
• “Considerations for automated deletion of DB2 recovery objects” on page 92 - Added this new section.
• “Configure DB2 automatic transaction log backups” on page 93 - Added first paragraph and modified step 2.
• “Oracle backup copies” on page 105 - Corrected the first sentence. Support is offered for manual backups only.
• Table 14 on page 111 - Modified details in third column for Sybase full backups with NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT
option.
• “Configuring a PowerSnap restore and recovery” on page 245 - Added information on NSR_DATA_MOVER.
• “PowerSnap parameters” on page 245 - Updated the method of setting DB2 PowerSnap parameters.
• Table 28 on page 246 - Updated the NSR_DATA_MOVER parameter description.
• “NSR_PREFETCH_LOGS” on page 311 - Modified details on the Lotus parameter valid value.
• “NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT” on page 320 - Modified details on the “no_log” value for the Sybase parameter.

A01 September 29, 2011 Initial release of this document for Restricted Availability (RA) of NMDA 1.2.

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 21
Revision History

22 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 1
Overview of Product
Software and
Features

This chapter includes the following major sections:

◆ Naming conventions used in this guide .................................................................... 24
◆ Importance of backups ................................................................................................. 25
◆ NMDA product features .............................................................................................. 25
◆ DB2-specific NMDA features ...................................................................................... 32
◆ Informix-specific NMDA features .............................................................................. 33
◆ Lotus-specific NMDA features.................................................................................... 34
◆ Oracle-specific NMDA features .................................................................................. 37
◆ Sybase-specific NMDA features.................................................................................. 48
◆ NMDA components...................................................................................................... 50
◆ NMDA backup and restore processes........................................................................ 52

Overview of Product Software and Features 23

Overview of Product Software and Features

Naming conventions used in this guide

This guide uses the naming conventions outlined in Table 1 on page 24.

Table 1 Naming conventions

Term Description

Client-side configuration Backup configuration that is created without the configuration wizard.

Configuration wizard Configuration wizard, integrated with the EMC® NetWorker® Management Console
(NMC) GUI, which can be used to configure the following:
• NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications (NMDA) scheduled backup
for all applications
• NMDA recovery for Oracle only

Server-side configuration Backup configuration that is created with the configuration wizard.

Database host, application Host where both the particular database or application software and NMDA
host, or NMDA host software are installed.

EMC PowerSnap™ Backup or restore that is implemented by using snapshot technologies through the
snapshot backup or restore EMC NetWorker PowerSnap Module software.

IDS For Informix releases prior to 11.70, Informix Dynamic Server.

For Informix release 11.70 or later, Informix Database Server.

Note: For Informix release 11.70 or later, replace instances of “Informix Dynamic
Server” in this guide with “Informix Database Server”.

Legacy NetWorker module One of the NetWorker modules that NMDA replaces: NMDB2, NMI, NML, NMO, or
NMS.

NMC NetWorker Management Console user interface.

NMDA NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications.

NMDB2 NetWorker Module for DB2.

NMI NetWorker Module for Informix.

NML NetWorker Module for Lotus.

NMO NetWorker Module for Oracle.

NMS NetWorker Module for Sybase.

Regular backup or restore NMDA backup or restore that does not use snapshot technologies through the
PowerSnap Module software.

Restore and recover Unlike NetWorker, which uses the term recover for all backup retrieval activities,
NMDA distinguishes between restore and recovery of a database:
• Restore means to retrieve individual data from backup and store it on disk.
• Recover means to apply the transaction, redo, or logical logs to make the
database consistent.

UNIX Both UNIX and Linux operating systems, unless specified otherwise.

Windows All the supported Microsoft Windows operating systems, unless specified
otherwise.

“Glossary” provides a complete list of terms used in this guide.

24 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

Importance of backups
The reliability of computer equipment has improved greatly in recent years, but
system and hardware failures still occur, sometimes with catastrophic results.
Software bugs, procedural flaws, and simple user errors are common problems that
require database or application restores from backup storage media.
For the complete protection of a database or application system, a viable backup
strategy must include regular backups of the following:
◆ Database or application data
◆ Transaction (or archived) logs
◆ Database or application configuration and control files
These backups are important for the following reasons:
◆ Without backups, you cannot restore a database at all.
◆ Without transaction logs, you can restore a database only to the time of its last
consistent backup.
◆ Without the configuration and control files, you might not be able to re-create the
database or application setup.
The NetWorker server maintains an online client file index and online media
database, which together comprise the online indexes. During a backup, the
NetWorker server makes an entry in the online client file index and records the
location of the data in the online media database. These entries provide recovery
information required for all backed-up data.
During a scheduled backup, the NetWorker server backs up the client index and
other server configuration information (called bootstrap), such as the resource
database. The client index and bootstrap information is mandatory for performing
disaster recovery of the NetWorker server.
If you do not run scheduled NMDA backups, you must back up the bootstrap
information manually to protect your NMDA backups in case of a NetWorker server
disaster. The EMC NetWorker Disaster Recovery Guide provides details on how to back
up the bootstrap information and other steps required for NetWorker server disaster
protection.

NMDA product features

The NMDA software works with the supported database or application software and
the NetWorker software to provide a data protection solution for DB2, Informix,
Lotus Domino/Notes, Oracle, and Sybase data, including:
◆ Capability to perform the following:
• Manual backups
• Scheduled backups
• Restores of backup data
◆ Capability to integrate database and file system backups, which relieves the
burden of backup from the database administrator while allowing the
administrator to retain control of the restore process
◆ Automatic backup storage management through automated scheduling,
autochanger support, electronic tape labeling, and tracking

Importance of backups 25
Overview of Product Software and Features

◆ Support for backup to a centralized backup server

◆ High performance through support for multiple, concurrent high-speed devices
If PowerSnap is supported with a particular database or application (for example, on
a DB2 or Oracle server), NMDA works with the NetWorker PowerSnap Module to
perform snapshot backups and restores.

Basic backup and recovery features

The NMDA software supports the following basic backup and recovery features:
◆ Online backup — NMDA can back up an online database or application without
requiring any down time.
◆ Full and incremental backup — NMDA can back up all data or just the data that
has changed. Application-specific sections of this guide provide details on the
supported types of backups.
◆ Backup of transaction logs and other files required for recovery — NMDA can
back up all the database or application components required for recovery.
Application-specific sections of this guide provide details.
◆ Automatic recovery of a database or application to the current time or to an
arbitrary point in time.
◆ Recovery to the original location or to an alternate location.
◆ Granular backup and recovery — NMDA supports the following backup and
recovery granularities:
• DB2 database or tablespace level backup and recovery
• Informix IDS instance or dbspace level backup and recovery
• Lotus database backup and Lotus database or document-level recovery
• Oracle database, tablespace, or datafile level backup and recovery

Note: In addition, Oracle can perform block-level recovery.

• Sybase ASE server level or database level backup and recovery

Scheduled backups versus manual backups

An NMDA backup can be either a scheduled or manual (unscheduled) backup:
◆ An NMDA scheduled backup is initiated by the NetWorker server through the
savegrp program interface. The scheduled backup start time depends on the
settings in the NetWorker resources. The scheduled backup automatically backs
up the NetWorker bootstrap and client index, which are required for NetWorker
server disaster recovery:
• A regular (time-based) scheduled backup starts at a time specified in the
NetWorker Group resource.
• A probe-based scheduled backup starts when specified conditions are met as
described in “Probe-based (event-based) backups” on page 28.
• A PowerSnap snapshot backup is supported only by using a scheduled
backup, as described in “PowerSnap snapshot backups and restores” on
page 28.

26 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

◆ An NMDA manual backup is initiated by a user on the application host through a

database or application-specific command or procedure that runs the appropriate
backup utility. The manual backup does not back up the NetWorker bootstrap or
client index, which are required for NetWorker server disaster recovery. The
bootstrap and client index backup may be done separately. The NetWorker
disaster recovery documentation provides details.
Chapter 2, “Backup Configuration,” provides details on the configuration of both
scheduled and manual backups.
Chapter 3, “Backup Procedures,” provides details on the procedures for both
scheduled and manual backups.

Deduplication backups and restores with Avamar

The NMDA software provides support for deduplication backups and restores with
EMC Avamar®.
An EMC Avamar server interacts with the NetWorker server and NMDA software
during deduplication backups and restores. The Avamar server is configured as a
NetWorker deduplication node, and deduplicates the data from various clients,
including the NMDA clients.
The initial backup to a deduplication node (Avamar server) backs up all the specified
data. During subsequent deduplication backups, the Avamar software identifies
redundant data blocks on the NMDA client host and backs up only the unique blocks
that contain changes.
As data deduplication is performed on the client host, deduplication backups
typically require less time, network bandwidth, and storage space than
nondeduplication backups.

Note: Deduplication can be offloaded to a proxy host for the application that supports
snapshot-based backups. The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release
Notes provides details on the required PowerSnap release. The PowerSnap documentation
provides more details on deduplication support.

A deduplication backup can be a manual or scheduled backup, including a

probe-based backup.
You must configure a scheduled or manual deduplication backup according to
“Configuring a deduplication backup with Avamar” on page 76.

Deduplication backups and restores with Data Domain

The NMDA software provides support for deduplication backups and restores with a
Data Domain® system that uses NetWorker advanced file type (AFTD) devices,
virtual tape library (VTL) devices, or Data Domain devices for data storage.
A Data Domain deduplication backup to an AFTD, VTL, or NetWorker Data Domain
device can be a manual or scheduled backup, including a probe-based backup.
The first Data Domain backup backs up all the specified data, which achieves the
least amount of data deduplication, called compression or global compression in
Data Domain documentation. Subsequent Data Domain backups achieve improved
deduplication rates as more and more redundant data blocks are identified.
An NMDA backup to a Data Domain system that is configured as NetWorker AFTD
or VTL devices sends all the data through the NetWorker storage node to the Data

NMDA product features 27

Overview of Product Software and Features

Domain system where the deduplication occurs. During a restore, the Data Domain
system converts the stored data to its original nondeduplicated state and sends it to
the NetWorker storage node, which propagates the data to the NMDA client.
An NMDA backup to a Data Domain system that is configured as a NetWorker Data
Domain device can take advantage of the Data Domain “distributed segment
processing” (DSP) feature. DSP enables the backup data to be deduplicated on the
NetWorker storage node or the NMDA host directly. Deduplication on the
NetWorker storage node has many advantages but requires all the data to be sent
from the NMDA client to the storage node. To reduce the amount of transferred data,
NMDA can use the DSP feature to deduplicate the data locally and send only the
unique blocks directly to the NetWorker Data Domain device through direct file
access (DFA) technology.
Specific factors determine how the deduplicated data is restored from the NetWorker
Data Domain storage device. If an NMDA client has direct access to the NetWorker
Data Domain storage device, then it restores data directly from the device, regardless
of whether the backup was done directly from the NMDA client or through the
storage node. If the NMDA software cannot access the data directly, then the restore
process reverts to the traditional method that uses the storage node. Regardless of the
restore method used, the Data Domain system converts the stored data to its original
nondeduplicated state before sending it over the network.
You must configure a deduplication backup with a Data Domain system according to
“Configuring a deduplication backup with Data Domain” on page 80.

Probe-based (event-based) backups

The NMDA software provides support for probe-based backups, also known as
event-based backups. A probe-based backup is a type of scheduled backup that is
started by the NetWorker server when specified conditions are met, as determined by
the probe program.
NMDA supports two types of probes, an NMDA probe and user-defined probes:
◆ NMDA probe
The NMDA probe is implemented through the NMDA program nsrdaprobe. The
nsrdaprobe program determines the amount of logs generated since the previous
backup. The backup runs when that amount is equal to or exceeds the
user-configured log threshold.
◆ User-defined probes
A user-defined probe checks if any user-defined condition has been met since the
previous backup.
You must configure a probe-based backup according to “Configuring a probe-based
backup” on page 83.

PowerSnap snapshot backups and restores

The NMDA software works with the NetWorker server and NetWorker PowerSnap
Module software to perform snapshot backups and restores of DB2 or Oracle server
data that resides on specific types of primary storage.

28 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

The PowerSnap snapshot backups create point-in-time copies or snapshots of DB2 or

Oracle data on primary storage devices supported by the PowerSnap Modules (for
EMC Symmetrix®, EMC CLARiiON®, and so on), and optionally back up the data to
secondary storage from the point-in-time copies.
PowerSnap restores can be used to restore the DB2 or Oracle data from the snapshots
or secondary storage.
Chapter 8, “Snapshot Backups and Restores,” provides more information.

Virtualization support
NMDA supports several types of virtualization software, such as VMware, Solaris
zones, Microsoft Hyper-V, and so on. The EMC Information Protection Software
Compatibility Guide on the EMC Powerlink® website provides a full list of supported
environments and platforms.

Note: NMDA must be installed in a guest operating system.

VMware support
The NMDA software supports regular backups and restores of the database or
application installed on a VMware Virtual Machine (VM) on an ESX server.
NMDA also supports the following advanced features of a VMware ESX server:
◆ VMotion — The VMotion feature enables migration of virtual machines from one
ESX server to another while the servers are on. The migration is seamless to the
applications that run on the virtual machines, and users do not experience
disconnections. If a migration occurs during an NMDA backup or restore, the
backup or restore is not interrupted. VMware documentation provides details on
the VM requirements for VMotion.
◆ Distributed Resource Scheduler (DRS) — The DRS feature enables dynamic
balancing and allocation of resources across multiple ESX servers. Depending on
the DRS policies set by the user, the DRS can migrate or recommend that users
migrate a virtual machine to a different ESX server by using VMotion. DRS can
also start (at boot-up time) a virtual machine on a different ESX server. As this
feature uses VMotion, if a migration occurs during an NMDA backup or restore,
the backup or restore is not interrupted.
◆ High Availability (HA) — The HA feature enables VMware to be restarted on the
same ESX server, on a different ESX server, or on a physical machine, depending
on the type of VMware cluster configured. During a restart, users are
disconnected, and must reconnect.
If a restart occurs during an NMDA backup or restore, the backup or restore fails:
• A manual backup or restore must be restarted manually when the guest
operating system is restarted.
• In the case of a scheduled backup, the NetWorker server retries the backup if
the Client Retries attribute in the Group resource is set to a nonzero value.

Solaris zones support

The NMDA software supports Solaris global zones, whole root zones, and sparse root
zones. The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Installation Guide
provides installation details for sparse root zone environments.

NMDA product features 29

Overview of Product Software and Features

Cluster backups and restores

The NMDA software supports backups and restores of cluster systems for high
availability or improved computer performance.
NMDA supports active-passive clusters and active-active application clusters:
◆ An active-passive cluster includes multiple hosts (nodes) connected by a shared
SCSI bus to which common storage is attached. Cluster services such as disk
services can be defined and assigned their own IP addresses and names (virtual
cluster hosts). The services and their associated storage can migrate for failover
between the hosts in the cluster.
◆ An active-active application cluster includes multiple database nodes on the same
or different hosts that each contain a data server and can continue the data
processing if other nodes in the cluster fail. DB2 Database Partitioning Feature
(DPF), Informix Multi-instance Active Cluster for High-availability (MACH 11),
Oracle Real Application Cluster (RAC), and Sybase ASE Cluster Edition systems
are examples of active-active application clusters that NMDA supports.
Chapter 6, “Cluster Systems,” provides more detail about cluster systems and their
configuration for NMDA backups and restores.

Configuration wizards
The NMDA software provides support for backup and recovery configuration
wizards that are integrated with the NetWorker Management Console (NMC).
You can run the NMDA wizards from the NetWorker Console Administration
window, which you can start on any supported host by using a web browser session
and specifying the Console server URL.
The NMDA software supports the following configuration wizards:
◆ Backup configuration wizard that configures scheduled backups (either typical or
custom) of DB2, Informix, Lotus Domino/Notes, Oracle, and Sybase data.
“Configuring a scheduled backup with the wizard” on page 66 provides details
on using the backup configuration wizard.
◆ Recovery configuration wizard that generates Oracle Recovery Manager (RMAN)
scripts designed to:
• Restore and recover Oracle data to the original host.
• Create a duplicate Oracle database on a local or remote host.
“Recovery configuration wizard (Oracle only)” on page 166 provides details on
using the recovery configuration wizard.
The wizards provide security and ease of management for backup and recovery
configurations. For example, the wizards use NetWorker lockbox services to store
sensitive data.

30 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

Configuration conversion
The NMDA software supports two types of conversions:
◆ Conversion of a scheduled backup configuration when you update from a legacy
NetWorker module to NMDA.
You can use the nsrdaadmin -M command to perform either of the following:
• Convert the client-side configuration of a legacy NetWorker module to an
NMDA client-side configuration.
or
• Convert the server-side configuration of a legacy NMDB2 or NMO module to
an NMDA server-side configuration.
The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Installation Guide
provides details on how to convert the backup configuration of a legacy
NetWorker module.
◆ Conversion of an NMDA client-side configuration to an NMDA server-side
configuration.
You can use the nsrdaadmin -W command to convert an NMDA client-side
configuration to an NMDA server-side configuration, which uses the
configuration storage framework supported by the NMDA wizard.
“Converting a client-side to server-side configuration” on page 64 provides
details on how to convert an NMDA client-side to server-side configuration with
the nsrdaadmin -W command.

Internationalization (I18N)
NMDA I18N is the capability of the NMDA software to operate in a non-English
environment or locale without itself being localized. After you set up NMDA I18N as
described in “Configuring internationalization (I18N) support” on page 57, NMDA
can process and display non-ASCII data that is passed to it by the operating system,
NetWorker software, and database or application software. The non-ASCII data can
include text messages, dates, times, numbers, and so on.

IPv6 support for backups and restores

The NMDA software provides support for Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) for both
regular and PowerSnap backups and restores.
The EMC NetWorker Installation Guide provides details on the use of NetWorker
software in an IPv6 environment.

Multiple databases on the same host

The NMDA software supports multiple instances or installations of the same
application or different applications on the same host.
“Multiple database or application installations” on page 232 provides details on how
to configure manual or scheduled backups and recovery operations with multiple
applications on the same system, including coexistence of 32-bit and 64-bit NMDA
applications on the same system.

NMDA product features 31

Overview of Product Software and Features

Parallelism
Parallelism is a feature that enables many data streams from a single backup or
restore at the same time. “Configuring a parallel backup” on page 89 provides details.

DB2-specific NMDA features

The following sections provide details on product features that are specific to the DB2
backup and restore operations performed with the NMDA software.

Full and incremental DB2 backups

NMDA supports all the backup types that DB2 supports:
◆ Full backup — A DB2 full backup is the building block of any recovery strategy.
Without a full backup, you cannot start to restore. If an online backup is
performed, you require the logs of all the transactions that transpired during the
backup, unless the include logs option is specified during the online backup.
◆ Incremental backup — A DB2 incremental backup includes all the changes since
the last full backup.
◆ Delta backup — A DB2 delta backup backs up all the changes since the last
backup of any type.

DB2 transaction log backups

The NMDA software supports DB2 backups of transaction logs and rollforward
recovery with the DB2 transaction logs.
The DB2 transaction logs keep records of changes made to DB2 databases. DB2
software provides two types of transaction logging:
◆ Circular logging is the default behavior when a new DB2 database is created. With
this type of logging, the transaction logs are deleted with each full backup and
only full backups may be restored. Only full, offline backups of databases are
allowed.
◆ Archive logging is used specifically for online backups and rollforward recovery.
With this type of logging, the transaction logs are retained as archive logs and can
be backed up. This allows a database or tablespace to be recovered to a specific
point in time by “rolling forward” through the transaction logs in sequence until
the specified point.

DB2 history pruning

The NMDA software supports the synchronous removal of snapshot backup entries
from the DB2 history file when the corresponding entries expire and are removed in
the NetWorker indexes. “Pruning of DB2 snapshots” on page 248 includes
configuration details for this synchronous removal (“pruning”) of snapshot entries
from the DB2 history file.

32 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

For regular backups, the backup entries for databases or tablespaces may be deleted
from both the DB2 server and NetWorker server with the db2 prune command.
Deleting backup entries may be necessary if the NetWorker index and DB2 history
files become excessively large and the retention period is high. “Delete DB2 backups”
on page 134 provides details.

Note: The db2 prune command is not supported for deleting snapshot backups.

Informix-specific NMDA features

The following sections provide details on product features that are specific to the
Informix backup and restore operations performed with the NMDA software.

Full and incremental Informix backups

NMDA supports all the Informix backup levels that the IDS ON-Bar utility supports:
◆ Level 0 backup — An Informix level 0 backup is a full backup, which includes all
the (full) records in the selected dbspaces. This is the only type of Informix
backup that allows a complete restore without performing any recovery steps,
such as applying logs and incremental backups.
◆ Level 1 backup — An Informix level 1 backup is an incremental backup, which
backs up the (incremental) records that have changed since the last level 0 backup
in the selected dbspaces.
◆ Level 2 backup — An Informix level 2 backup backs up the records that have
changed since the last level 1 backup in the selected dbspaces.

Logical log backups

NMDA supports the following types of IDS logical log backups:
◆ Automatic, continous logical log backups (recommended)
◆ Manual logical log backups
“Configure Informix automatic (continuous) logical log backups” on page 94
provides details on configuration of the IDS logical log backups to ensure that
ON-Bar automatically backs up the logical logs as they become full.

Note: You can send the Informix data and logs to separate backup pools during a single NMDA
backup.

Informix-specific NMDA features 33

Overview of Product Software and Features

Lotus-specific NMDA features

The following sections provide details on product features that are specific to the
Lotus Domino and Notes backup and restore operations performed with the NMDA
software.

Files backed up during Lotus backups

The NMDA software backs up the following Lotus files by default:
◆ .nsf, .ntf, and .box files
The NMDA software considers files with these filename extensions to be database
files, and backs up the files by using the Lotus application programming interface
(API) for databases.
◆ .ncf, .njf, .dic, .dsk, .id, and notes.ini files
The NMDA software considers these files to be regular operating system
(nondatabase) files and backs up the files at the file system level.
◆ Domino transaction logs in archive mode

Note: NMDA does not back up transaction logs in circular or linear mode.

The NMDA software can also be used to back up the following when the
NSR_BACKUP_ALL_EXTENSIONS parameter is set to TRUE:
◆ DAOS files (with .nlo filename extension)
“Lotus DAOS backups” on page 97 provides details on DAOS backups.
◆ Any other files that exist in a Lotus directory, such as .gif, .html, and .doc files
“Full and incremental Lotus backups” on page 34 provides information on which
files are backed up and at which backup level.

Full and incremental Lotus backups

The NMDA software supports full and incremental backups of Lotus data:
◆ Full backup — Backs up the specified files, regardless of whether or not they have
changed since the last backup operation. If Lotus transactional logging is enabled
(and set to archive mode), the logs are not backed up unless specifically requested
by a user through the configuration parameter NSR_BACKUP_LOGS_MODE.
◆ Incremental backup — The behavior of an incremental backup is based on the
settings for Lotus transactional logging on the Domino server:
• If Lotus transactional logging is enabled and set to archive mode, then an
incremental backup will back up transaction logs, and any database files that
are not logged and have changed since the last backup.
• If Lotus archived transaction logging is enabled and the database instance ID
(DBIID) property has changed since the last backup of the database, then the
database file is backed up before the logs are backed up.
• If Lotus transactional logging is disabled (or enabled but not set to archive
mode), then an incremental backup backs up only the database files that have
changed since the last backup.

34 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

The incremental backup always backs up nondatabase files that have changed
since the last backup, regardless of the transactional logging mode.

Backups of Lotus database or directory links

By default, during Lotus backups, the NMDA software follows directory and
database links when it forms the file list for backup. NMDA backs up both the Lotus
link files and the data files or directories that the link files point to.
“Considerations for Lotus database or directory link backups” on page 94 provides
details on how to disable the default behavior during database or directory link
backups.

Lotus DAOS backups and restores

The NMDA software supports backups and restores of the attachments managed by
the Domino Attachment Object Service (DAOS), supported by Domino 8.5 and later.
You can configure a manual or scheduled NMDA backup to back up the DAOS base
directory, separate DAOS subdirectories, or individual DAOS objects, and to run as
either of the following:
◆ A stand-alone backup
◆ An integrated backup, where the DAOS files are backed up after the Domino
database data is backed up
The appropriate IBM documentation provides details on the features and setup of
DAOS directories and the DAOS files, which are called NLO files by IBM.
“Lotus DAOS backups” on page 97 provides details on how to configure backups of
Domino with DAOS enabled.
“Lotus data restore and recovery” on page 152 provides details on how to properly
restore the databases that contain links to missing DAOS files.

Restartable scheduled backups

The NMDA software supports restartable scheduled backups through the NetWorker
checkpoint restart feature, which enables you to restart an NMDA Lotus backup from
a known good point called a checkpoint. The NMDA software prevents files that
were successfully backed up during the failed backup from being backed up again
during the restarted backup. The backup is restarted only within the restart window
of the backup group.
The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides details on the behavior of the
restarted backups for a backup group.
For NMDA Lotus restartable backups, the checkpoint granularity is always at the file
level. The setting of the Checkpoint granularity attribute in the NetWorker Client
resource is ignored.

Note: Configuring a scheduled backup as checkpoint-enabled might impact the backup speed
due to the synchronous communication between the NMDA Lotus client and the NetWorker
server and storage node.

Lotus-specific NMDA features 35

Overview of Product Software and Features

Depending on when a given backup fails, the restarted backup might or might not
back up files that have been successfully backed up by the failed backup but have
changed since that time:
◆ If the backup fails while backing up data files, the restarted backup rescans all the
data files and backs up any files that were not backed up previously or that have
changed since the previous backup.
◆ If the backup fails while saving transaction logs, the NMDA software does not
rescan the data files. The NMDA software restarts the backup at the transaction
log level.
◆ If the integrated DAOS backup fails while saving the NLO files, the NMDA
software does not rescan the database data files, but it does rescan the DAOS files.
You must configure a restartable backup for an NMDA Lotus client according to
“Lotus restartable scheduled backups” on page 100.

Types of Lotus restores

The NMDA software supports the following types of restore methods for Lotus data:
◆ Database-level (file-level) restore — Restores the databases associated with a
Domino server.
◆ Document-level restore — Restores modified or deleted Notes documents in a
single database, whether the database is logged or not:
• You can perform document-level recovery of deleted Notes documents in the
local database through the nsrdocrc command-line program. “Document-level
recovery through the nsrdocrc command” on page 157 provides configuration
details.
• On Windows systems only, you can perform document-level recovery of
modified and deleted Notes documents in either the local Notes or Domino
database or a remote Domino database through the Lotus Notes client GUI.
“Document-level recovery through the Notes client GUI” on page 159
provides configuration details.

NetWorker User for Lotus program

On Windows systems only, the NetWorker User for Lotus graphical user interface
program (nwbml.exe) is installed with the NMDA software.
The NetWorker User for Lotus program provides a graphical interface for performing
manual backup and recovery operations.
The following sections provide more information on how to use the NetWorker User
for Lotus program for backups and restores:
◆ “Manual backup through NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI” on page 124
◆ “Database recovery with NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI” on page 174

Partitioned Domino servers

The NMDA software supports the backup and recovery of partitioned Domino
servers.
“Partitioned Domino server backups” on page 96 provides details on how to
configure the backups of partitioned Domino servers.

36 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

Oracle-specific NMDA features

The following sections provide details on product features that are specific to the
Oracle Server backup and restore operations performed with the NMDA software.
The appropriate Oracle documentation provides more details on the Oracle RMAN
backup and restore features described in the following sections, including the RMAN
commands used to specify:
◆ Full backups and different types of incremental backups
◆ Archived redo log backups
◆ Control file and server parameter file autobackups
◆ Automatic channel allocation
◆ Backup and restore optimization
◆ Oracle backup copies
◆ Backup and deletion of backup sets
◆ Restartable backups

Full and incremental Oracle backups

The NMDA software supports full and incremental backups of Oracle data:
◆ A full (or stand-alone full) backup includes every used block of the database
objects listed in the RMAN backup script (never used blocks will be skipped).
This type of backup is created when you do not specify a backup level with the
RMAN backup command.

Note: A full backup cannot be the parent of a subsequent incremental backup. Incremental
backups cannot be dependent on a stand-alone full backup.

◆ An incremental backup includes blocks that have changed since the previous
specified backup. Incremental backups are created when you specify either
incremental level=0 or incremental level=1 with the RMAN backup command.
Incremental backups are dependent on preceding incremental backups in the
same scheduled backup cycle:
• A level 0 incremental is physically identical to a full backup, but is recorded as
incremental in the RMAN repository.

Note: A level 0 backup may also be referred to as "full" in other sections of this guide.

• A level 1 incremental can be either of the following:

– A differential backup, which contains only the data blocks changed since
the most recent incremental backup, whether level 0 or 1. The differential
backup is dependent on the preceding level 0 or 1 backup. Incremental
backups are differential by default.
– A cumulative backup, which contains only the data blocks changed since
the most recent level 0 incremental backup. The cumulative backup is
dependent on the preceding level 0 backup.

Oracle-specific NMDA features 37

Overview of Product Software and Features

Archived redo log backups

Archived redo log backups enable recovery of the database to its predisaster state.
Without archived redo log backups, the database can be recovered only to the time of
the last consistent Oracle backup. In this case, transactions that occurred between the
time of the last consistent backup and the time of the database corruption will be lost.
Archived redo logs can be backed up by using the appropriate option of the RMAN
backup command.
“Backing up all archived logs from each node” on page 226 provides a sample script
to back up the archived redo log files in an Oracle Real Application Cluster (RAC)
system.

Control file and server parameter file autobackups

In addition to regular control file backups, Oracle performs a control file autobackup
after each RMAN backup command if the control file autobackup has been enabled.
With a control file autobackup, RMAN can recover the database even if the current
control file, recovery catalog, and server parameter file are inaccessible because the
path used to store the autobackup follows a well-known format.
Specify persistent settings for the control file autobackups with the configure
controlfile autobackup command. For example, enable control file autobackup and
specify the persistent setting for the format of the control file autobackup name with
the following commands:
configure controlfile autobackup on
configure controlfile autobackup format for device type ’sbt_tape’ to
’/NMDA_%F/’

If the control file autobackup is set to on and the RMAN backup is performed with
NMDA, the control file will be backed up.
With the control file autobackup, Oracle backs up the current server parameter file.

Automatic channel allocation

Oracle RMAN supports automatic channel allocation. This feature enables the
configuration of persistent settings for automatic channels, for use in all RMAN
sessions.
“Configure automatic channel allocation” on page 104 provides configuration details.

Backup and restore optimization

If Oracle backup optimization is enabled with the configure backup optimization on
command, RMAN skips selected files during a backup, based on several criteria. The
Oracle backup and recovery documentation provides more details on these criteria.

Note: To force a backup that would otherwise be skipped due to backup optimization, use the
force option in the backup command.

The restore optimization function prevents RMAN from restoring a file if the original
file is already in the correct location and contains the expected information.

38 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

Note: To force a restore that would otherwise be skipped due to restore optimization, use the
force option in the restore command.

IMPORTANT
When using Oracle backup optimization with NMDA backups and restores, run
the crosscheck command monthly to synchronize the Recovery Catalog and
NetWorker indexes. This ensures that backups which were expired by the
NetWorker server are also marked as expired in the Recovery Catalog and RMAN
does not skip a backup when a referenced backup has already expired in
NetWorker. The Oracle documentation provides details on the crosscheck
command.

Backup copies
RMAN with NMDA can create copies of the backup, or duplex the backup. RMAN
can produce up to four identical copies of each backup piece on different NetWorker
volumes with one backup command.
The NMDA software supports backup copies with manual Oracle backups only.
NMDA does not support the use of RMAN backup copies commands during
scheduled Oracle backups.
“Oracle backup copies” on page 105 describes the requirements for generating
backup copies during manual Oracle backups.

Backup of backup sets

Oracle RMAN supports the backup of backup sets. If Oracle data has been backed up
with device type disk, NMDA can be used to back up these backup sets from disk to
NetWorker volumes.
For example, to back up all backup sets from disk to NetWorker volumes, use the
following command:
backup device type sbt backupset all

The backup set on disk can also be deleted with the delete input option in the backup
device type sbt backupset... command. For example, to back up the backup sets that
were created on disk more than a week ago and then remove the backup sets from
disk, use the following command:
backup device type sbt backupset completed before sysdate-7 delete
input

Oracle Data Guard support

The NMDA software supports Oracle Data Guard, an Oracle data availability and
protection solution that involves the primary database and one or more standby
databases over an IP network. As transactions occur in the primary database and
redo data is written to the local redo logs, Data Guard automatically does the
following:
◆ Transfers this redo data to the standby sites.
◆ Applies the redo data to the standby databases, synchronizing the standby
databases with the primary database.

Oracle-specific NMDA features 39

Overview of Product Software and Features

RMAN backups of datafiles, archived redo logs, and possibly other files can be
offloaded to a physical standby database, and the backups can be used to recover the
primary or standby database. RMAN and Data Guard documentation provides
information on how to configure and back up a physical standby database, and use
the backups to recover the primary or standby database.
To configure NMDA backups and restores in a Data Guard environment:
1. Follow the instructions in Oracle documentation on how to set up the required
RMAN configurations, for example, to use a Recovery Catalog and the
DB_UNIQUE_NAME parameter.
2. Install and configure the NMDA and NetWorker client software on the primary
database host, and on each physical standby database host involved in the
backups and restores.
3. Configure a Client resource on the NetWorker server for the primary database
host and each physical standby database host involved in the backups and
restores. In the Client resource of the primary database host, add the hostname of
the physical standby host in the Remote Access attribute if you set NSR_CLIENT
to the primary database hostname in step 4 .
4. Create an RMAN script for the primary database and the standby database. Set
the same NSR_CLIENT parameter value in both. The NSR_CLIENT value used
for a backup should be the same as the NSR_CLIENT value used for the restore of
that backup. Setting NSR_CLIENT to the primary database hostname might be
preferable.

Oracle Exadata support

NMDA supports Oracle Exadata in both of the following configurations:
◆ Oracle Database Machine
◆ Exadata Storage Server attached to an external database server
The versions of the operating system and database software supported on database
servers using Exadata storage are subject to the versions supported on traditional
systems (systems not using Exadata storage).
The NMDA and NetWorker client software should be installed and configured on all
the Exadata database servers, similar to traditional systems.
In the case of a remote storage node, the only protocol supported to the storage node
is IP over Infiniband or other networks like Ethernet. (Native Infiniband or any other
protocol is not supported). If there are multiple network (IP) interfaces on the
database server to the storage node, such as one for an Infiniband connection and one
for an Ethernet connection, the network settings and the NetWorker Client resource
should be configured to send the backup data from the database servers to the
storage node over the Infiniband network, as preferred. The configuration details are
available in the NetWorker documentation.

40 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

Restartable backups
Oracle RMAN can back up files that have not been backed up since a specified time.
For example, to continue the backup of an Oracle database that was canceled two
days ago, use the following command:
backup device type sbt database not backed up since time ’sysdate-2’

RMAN compares the given time in this command with the completion time of the
most recent backup of any datafile to determine if it requires backup. The appropriate
Oracle backup and recovery documentation provides more information.

Retention policies
Oracle RMAN provides an Oracle retention policy for backups. An Oracle retention
policy is based on the recovery window or redundancy. It is not based on a defined
time period, such as a year. Oracle considers a backup obsolete when it is no longer
required according to the Oracle retention policy setting. Oracle checks the retention
policy of a backup when the report obsolete... or delete obsolete... command is run.
NMDA supports the Oracle retention policy with some restrictions. The NetWorker
server has its own browse and retention policies to specify how long data is available
for recovery. The NetWorker policies are based on a user-defined time period. As the
Oracle retention policy is independent from that of the NetWorker server, and there is
no mechanism to synchronize these policies, the NetWorker and Oracle policies could
conflict. To prevent conflicts, it is recommended that you do not use both the
NetWorker and Oracle policies by performing either of the following:
◆ If you want to use only the NetWorker server policy, disable the Oracle retention
policy with the following command:
configure retention policy to none

◆ If you want to use only the Oracle retention policy, disable the NetWorker
retention policy by setting the NSR_RETENTION_DISABLED parameter to
TRUE in all the RMAN backup scripts. When this parameter is set to TRUE, the
backups are never expired by the NetWorker server. Run the report obsolete and
delete obsolete commands so that RMAN can delete the backups based on the
Oracle retention policies.

IMPORTANT
If you use the Oracle retention policy, run the crosscheck command on the NMDA
backups before running a report obsolete, or delete obsolete backups of the device
type sbt_tape. This ensures that backups which the NetWorker server considers to
be expired are flagged as expired in the RMAN catalog. As a result, RMAN can
correctly identify which backups are not needed according to the Oracle retention
policy.

For example:
1. Run the following command to synchronize the RMAN Catalog and
NetWorker indexes:
crosscheck backup;

2. Run the following command to delete all obsolete backups defined by the
current Oracle retention policy:
delete obsolete;

Oracle-specific NMDA features 41

Overview of Product Software and Features

Save set bundling

If the NMDA save set bundling is configured, NMDA automatically creates a save set
bundle to group all dependent save sets from the same backup cycle. Save sets are
dependent when two or more save sets are required to restore a database object.
A backup cycle includes the following:
◆ A level 0 incremental backup of the database object.
◆ All subsequent level 1 incremental backups that are dependent on the level 0
backup.
“Full and incremental Oracle backups” on page 37 provides details on NMDA
support of full and incremental Oracle backups.

IMPORTANT
The NMDA software does not support save set bundling for regular manual
backups or PowerSnap snapshot backups. The NMDA software performs save set
bundling for regular scheduled Oracle backups only.

Save set bundling automatically enables the following for Oracle:

◆ Improved staging
Oracle-aware staging causes NMDA Oracle save sets that have a dependency on
each other to be staged together:
• During automatic staging, if the staging criteria determine that a particular
NMDA save set should be staged and the save set is part of a save set bundle,
the NetWorker server stages the entire save set bundle.
• During manual staging with the nsrstage command, if one or more save sets
being staged are from a save set bundle, all the save sets in the bundle are
staged.
◆ Policy uniformity
Policy uniformity is enabled automatically whenever you enable save set
bundling. If you do not want to use save set bundling, you can still enable policy
uniformity separately. “Policy uniformity” on page 44 provides more details.

Note: After a staging operation during which all the save sets in a bundle are staged, the
resulting available space on the staging device might exceed the lower-water mark specified in
the staging policy.

The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides details on how to work with
staging policies and perform automatic and manual staging operations through the
NetWorker server.
“Configure save set bundling for scheduled Oracle backups” on page 107 provides
information on how to configure save set bundling for NMDA scheduled backups.
If an error occurs during save set bundling, the bundling operation fails but the
scheduled backup can finish successfully. Information about the bundling failure is
printed to the savegrp output and to the NMDA debug file.

42 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

NetWorker staging restrictions

When planning the strategy for NMDA save set bundling, consider the following
NetWorker staging restrictions:
◆ The NetWorker server cannot simultaneously stage all the save sets from a save
set bundle if some of the save sets were backed up to separate volumes. The
server simultaneously stages save sets only if they are located on the same staging
volume. Example 3 on page 44 provides more information.
To ensure the proper staging of all the save sets from a save set bundle, do not
split the backup between different staging volumes. If required, split the backup
into different backup cycles, with each cycle going to a separate volume.
◆ NetWorker staging policies must not cause the save sets of an NMDA backup
cycle to be staged before the cycle is complete. For example, if a 1-week NMDA
cycle starts on Sunday, the staging policy must not cause the partially complete
save set bundle to be staged before the final backup of the cycle occurs on
Saturday.
To prevent a staging operation from splitting an NMDA backup cycle, adjust the
NetWorker staging policy accordingly. For example, adjust the policy so that
older save sets are staged before new ones, or adjust the high-water and
low-water marks.
The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides details on how to work with
staging policies and perform automatic and manual staging operations through the
NetWorker server.

Save set bundling processes

The NMDA program nsrdasv automatically places save sets into a save set bundle at
the end of a scheduled backup.

Note: The Operate NetWorker privilege is required to perform save set bundling. “NetWorker
User Group resource” on page 61 provides details on user group privileges.

To perform save set bundling, the nsrdasv program connects to the Oracle database
by attempting to use the login and password from the RMAN script. If a login and
password are not available from the script, the program uses the ORACLE_SID value
from the NMDA configuration file to search the nwora.res file for the
NSR_ORACLE_CONNECT_FILE parameter, and uses the connection strings from
the specified connection file. After connecting to the Oracle database, the nsrdasv
program obtains all the required information about the backups by using the V$
views. “Configure save set bundling for scheduled Oracle backups” on page 107
provides more details on the nwora.res file and the requirements of save set
bundling.
The nsrdasv program creates a save set bundle for each incremental level 0 backup.
The program adds the save sets from subsequent incremental backups to the bundles
of the level 0 backups they are dependent on. Example 1 on page 44 and Example 2
on page 44 illustrate different scenarios for how the save set bundle is formed.
The name that the nsrdasv program assigns to a save set bundle is the save time of
the oldest save set in the bundle.
After a scheduled backup, the NetWorker server stores the save set bundle name and
the list of save sets it contains in the media database. You can view the bundle
information by using the mminfo command, as described in “Save set bundling
information in the media database” on page 44.

Oracle-specific NMDA features 43

Overview of Product Software and Features

Example 1 Save set bundling for a 1-week scheduled backup cycle of a tablespace

A 1-week scheduled backup cycle of a tablespace includes a level 0 backup of the

tablespace on Sunday and a level 1 backup every other day of the week. The save set
bundle for the cycle is created during the Sunday backup. Save sets from each level 1
backup are added into the same bundle. The complete bundle contains the save sets
from the seven daily backups of the tablespace. A new bundle is created for the next
backup cycle during the following week.

Example 2 Save set bundle join

This example illustrates a scenario where NMDA combines existing bundles into a
new save set bundle.
Two save set bundles are created by separate level 0 backups of files A and B. Then a
new backup set is created by a level 1 backup of both files A and B. As the new backup
set is dependent on both of the preceding level 0 backups, NMDA combines all three
backups into the same save set bundle.

Example 3 Splitting a save set bundle across volumes

In this example, a save set bundle is split across multiple volumes. A level 0 backup
of file A is performed to volume A. An incremental backup of file A is then
performed to volume B. Although both backups are recorded as belonging to the
same save set bundle, the save set bundle is split across volumes. During staging,
only the save sets on the same volume can be staged together.

Save set bundling information in the media database

The NMDA software stores information about each save set bundle in the NetWorker
media database.
Query the media database by using the NetWorker command, mminfo, with the
appropriate options:
◆ The mminfo -r command can display the name of the bundle associated with a
save set. For example, the following command displays a list of all save sets and
their bundles:
mminfo -a -r "ssid,ssbundle"

◆ The mminfo -q command can display all the save sets in a specific bundle. For
example, the following command displays all the save sets in the bundle named
12983479182:
mminfo -a -q "ssbundle=12983479182"

The EMC NetWorker Command Reference Guide and the UNIX man pages provide more
information on the mminfo command and its available options.

Policy uniformity
If policy uniformity is enabled, NMDA automatically enforces the uniformity of the
browse and retention policies between all the dependent save sets in a scheduled
Oracle backup cycle (whether or not save set bundling is enabled).
After NMDA performs an incremental Oracle scheduled backup, if the browse and
retention policies of the save sets in the backup are longer than the policies of
preceding dependent save sets in the same backup cycle, NMDA changes the policies
of all save sets in the cycle to match the longest policy of the new incremental save

44 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

sets. The NMDA software modifies the policies recorded in the NetWorker media
database. As a result, backups cannot expire and become recyclable before other
dependent backups from the same backup cycle.

Note: The NMDA software does not support policy uniformity for regular manual backups
and PowerSnap snapshot backups. The NMDA software supports policy uniformity for
regular scheduled backups only.

Policy uniformity does not depend on whether save sets are stored on separate
volumes. For example, if parts of a save set bundle are split onto separate volumes, all
the save sets in the bundle still receive the same browse and retention policies.
“Configure policy uniformity for scheduled Oracle backups” on page 108 provides
information on how to configure policy uniformity for NMDA backups.

Other Oracle features

This section describes additional supported features of the Oracle Server software.
The NMDA software supports the Oracle releases on specific platforms as outlined in
the EMC Information Protection Software Compatibility Guide on Powerlink.
The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release Notes describes the
known NMDA limitations related to specific Oracle releases.
Examples of the Oracle RMAN features that NMDA supports are as follows:
◆ Fast incremental backups that use change tracking files.
◆ Management of backup duration and throttling.
◆ Backups and restores of data that reside on Oracle ASM.
◆ Backup of the flash recovery area.
The Oracle Recovery Manager documentation provides a complete list of the RMAN
features.
When using Oracle RMAN features with NMDA, consider the following:
◆ A flash recovery area stores and manages files related to the recovery of a
particular database. To back up RMAN disk backups, control file autobackups,
and archived redo logs from the flash recovery area to NetWorker volumes:
a. Allocate or configure one or more channels with the sbt_tape device type.
b. Back up the files with one of the following RMAN commands:
backup recovery area
backup recovery files

Note: Whether or not a flash recovery area is enabled, the backup recovery files
command can be used to perform the backup.

For example, the following sequence of RMAN commands can be used to

configure an automatic channel for NMDA and back up the files from the flash
recovery area:
configure default device type to ’sbt_tape’;
configure channel device type ’sbt_tape’ send
’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=server1)’;
backup recovery files;

Oracle-specific NMDA features 45

Overview of Product Software and Features

◆ NMDA supports channel backup failover and backup piece restore failover. If
multiple channels are used for an RMAN backup command and one of the
channels fails, Oracle fails over to another channel to continue the backup job.
For example, if two channels are configured with different NetWorker volume
pools and one of the channels fails over to the other channel during a backup, the
entire backup goes to the volumes in the pool of that remaining channel.
◆ Before using the backup command with the duration...minimize load option,
consider the following:
• The minimize load option might impact the tape streaming because the
transfer rate of data sent by RMAN might be slow with this option, depending
on the duration value.

Note: This is not a concern if you use the NetWorker backup-to-disk feature.

• The minimize load option might cause an NMDA scheduled backup to be

timed out if RMAN does not send data to the NetWorker Module within the
time frame specified in the Inactivity Timeout field of the corresponding
NetWorker Group resource.
◆ Starting with release 10.1, RMAN does not print database connection strings
(user/password@Netservicename) to the session output.

Oracle11g specific features

The following are examples of the Oracle RMAN features that NMDA supports with
Oracle11g and later:
◆ Data Recovery Advisor as described in “Data Recovery Advisor” on page 47
◆ Archival backup through the RMAN backup...keep command as described in
“Archival backup feature” on page 47
◆ Improved archived redo log management through the configure archivelog
deletion policy command
◆ Improved block media recovery with the blockrecover command being replaced
by the recover...block command
◆ Improved integration and block change tracking support in Data Guard
◆ Backup of read-only transportable tablespaces
◆ Oracle Enterprise Manager enhancements with new interfaces for the Data
Recovery Advisor

Oracle11gR2 specific features

The following are examples of the Oracle RMAN features that NMDA supports with
Oracle11gR2 and later:
◆ Enhanced duplicate command that can duplicate a database without connecting
to a target database by using the NMDA backups of the target database
(connections to a catalog and auxiliary database are required)
◆ Tablespace Point-in-Time Recovery (TSPITR) enhancement that recovers a
dropped tablespace and recovers to a point in time before the tablespace is
brought online
◆ Advanced Compression Option

Note: Do not enable both Oracle and NetWorker compression for NMDA Oracle backups.

46 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

◆ Oracle Grid infrastructure for either a stand-alone database or a RAC

◆ Oracle ASM Dynamic Volume Manager (Oracle ADVM), a new feature of Oracle
ASM that provides volume management services and a standard disk device
driver interface to clients
◆ Policy-managed RAC databases
The appropriate Oracle documentation provides more information on the Oracle11g
features.

Data Recovery Advisor

The Oracle Data Recovery Advisor is a new tool in Oracle11g. Integrated with RMAN
and Oracle Enterprise Manager (OEM), the tool enables a database administrator
(DBA) to diagnose and repair database failures.
Before you can use the Data Recovery Advisor to invoke an RMAN restore script that
involves NMDA to repair a database failure, automatic channels must be configured
to specify parameters such as NSR_SERVER and NSR_CLIENT and the restore
parallelism.
To enable the use of Data Recovery Advisor with Oracle11g and NMDA:
◆ If automatic channels have not been configured for NMDA, use the following
commands to ensure the basic automatic channel configuration:
• With Oracle version 11gR1 or earlier:
configure channel device type ’sbt_tape’ parms
’ENV=(NSR_SERVER=NetWorker_server_name,
NSR_CLIENT=NMDA_client_name)’;

• With Oracle version 11gR2 or later:

configure channel device type ’sbt_tape’ parms
’SBT_PARMS=(NSR_SERVER=NetWorker_server_name,
NSR_CLIENT=NMDA_client_name)’;

configure channel device type 'sbt_tape' parallelism

number_of_restore_channels;

◆ If automatic channels are already configured for NMDA, no additional

configuration steps are required.

Archival backup feature

With Oracle11g, the RMAN backup...keep forever command enables the creation of
an archival backup that is exempt from Oracle backup retention policies, but not
automatically exempt from NetWorker retention policies. The archival backup is
all-inclusive because every file required to restore a database is backed up to a single
disk or tape location.
To enable the use of the RMAN backup...keep forever command with NMDA:
1. Configure an Archive Pool resource through the NetWorker server.
2. Specify that the backup data must go to the Archive pool by performing one of
the following:
• Set the pool selection criteria accordingly on the NetWorker server.
• Set the NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL parameter in the RMAN backup script.

Oracle-specific NMDA features 47

Overview of Product Software and Features

3. Set the parameter value NSR_SAVESET_RETENTION=forever in the RMAN

backup script.

Note: Ensure that the NSR_RETENTION_DISABLED parameter is not set in the RMAN
backup script used with NMDA.

The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides more information on how to

configure resources and specify pool selection criteria through the NetWorker server.

Sybase-specific NMDA features

The following sections provide details on product features that are specific to the
Sybase ASE backup and restore operations performed with the NMDA software.

Full and incremental Sybase backups

The NMDA software supports full and incremental backups of Sybase data:
◆ A full Sybase backup sends the dump database command to Sybase, which backs
up the entire database, including both the data and transaction log. If incremental
backups are not allowed for a database, the inactive portion of the transaction log
is truncated.

Note: You can send the Sybase data and logs to separate backup pools during a single
NMDA backup.

◆ An incremental Sybase backup sends the dump transaction command to Sybase,

which backs up the transaction log and truncates the inactive portion of the
transaction log.
An incremental Sybase backup is not allowed under specific conditions. The
following are typical examples of such conditions:
◆ The database and transaction logs are on the same device.
◆ The select into/bulk copy option is selected and the database contains unlogged
data.
◆ The truncate log on checkpoint option is selected.
◆ A full backup has never been performed.
◆ The database is an in-memory or relaxed durability database.
The Sybase documentation provides details on all the conditions where an
incremental backup is not allowed.
When an incremental Sybase backup is not allowed, the backup is promoted to full if
the NSR_PROMOTE_FULL parameter is set to TRUE. After the backup, the inactive
portion of the database log is truncated.

48 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

Password-protected database backups and restores

The NMDA software provides full support for password-protected Sybase database
backups and restores.
If the Sybase data is password-protected at the time of backup, the same password
must be provided to restore the backed-up data. If the password does not match the
one used at the time of backup, then the restore fails and an appropriate error
message is added to the log file and is displayed on the output terminal.
In a client-side backup configuration, specify the password for the backup by using
the NSR_ASE_PASSWORD parameter in the NMDA configuration file, as described
in “NSR_ASE_PASSWORD” on page 320.
In a server-side backup configuration, specify the password for the backup on the
appropriate screen of the configuration wizard. The wizard stores the password in
the NetWorker Lockbox resource.
Specify the password for the restore by using the -r option with the nsrsybrc restore
command:
nsrsybrc -r password

Database consistency check

The NMDA software provides support for performing different types of database
consistency checks in preparation for a Sybase manual backup.
You must use the nsrsybcc command to perform a database consistency check.
“Sybase database consistency check” on page 123 provides details on the procedures
for a Sybase database consistency check.

Database backup and restore verification

The NMDA software provides support for Sybase database backup and restore
verification.
NMDA supports verification at the header or a full verification.
“Verification of Sybase database backups” on page 109 and “Verification of Sybase
database restores” on page 171 provide details on the verification of Sybase backups
and restores.

Exclusion of multiple user-defined temporary databases from backup

The Sybase server supports multiple user-defined temporary databases.
In addition to the system-defined temporary database, tempdb, you can create
user-defined temporary databases. These temporary databases are attached with a
specific user login or a database. Creating temporary databases enhances the
performance of a database where many transactions take place at a time. Also,
creating temporary databases prevents the critical applications from failing when the
system-defined database fails.
The NMDA software excludes both the user-defined temporary databases and
system-defined temporary database during a backup. During the backup, the NMDA
software communicates with the Sybase server to determine whether a database is a
user-defined temporary database (to exclude from the backup) or a normal database.

Sybase-specific NMDA features 49

Overview of Product Software and Features

Sybase in-memory and relaxed durability databases

Sybase introduced two new types of databases in ASE 15.5: in-memory databases and
relaxed durability databases. NMDA performs full backups and restores of these new
types of databases in the same way as backups and restores of the regular type of
database. Incremental backups of these new types of databases are not allowed.
NMDA supports the restore of any supported type of database to any other
supported type of database as described in “Different database type” on page 174.
Sybase documentation provides more details on all the supported types of databases.

NetWorker User for Sybase program

On Windows systems only, the NetWorker User for Sybase graphical user interface
program (nwbms.exe) is installed with the NMDA software.
The NetWorker User for Sybase program provides a graphical interface for
configuring and performing Sybase manual backup and recovery operations.
The following sections provide more information on how to use the NetWorker User
for Sybase program for manual backups and restores:
◆ “Manual backup through NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI” on page 124
◆ “Database recovery with NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI” on page 174

NMDA components
Table 2 on page 50 lists the major software components that are installed on the
NMDA client host during the NMDA installation. Unless specified otherwise, the
files are located in the same directory as the NetWorker client software.

Table 2 NMDA components (page 1 of 2)

Component name Description

libcommonssl.7.6.build#.so Located in a subdirectory under /usr/lib/nsr or /opt/networker/lib on UNIX only. NMDA library that is required for
communication with NetWorker.

nmda_application.cfg Located in the directory /nsr/apps/config (UNIX) or NetWorker_install_path\apps\config (Windows). NMDA configuration
file templates for DB2, Informix, Lotus, Oracle, or Sybase parameters that apply to client-side configurations only.

nsrdaadmin(.exe) Program that performs one of the following types of conversion:

• Conversion of the client-side configuration of a legacy NetWorker module to an NMDA client-side configuration. A
client-side configuration is created manually with NMC, without the backup configuration wizard.
• Conversion of the server-side configuration of a legacy NetWorker module to an NMDA server-side configuration. A
server-side configuration is created with the backup configuration wizard.
• Conversion of an NMDA client-side configuration to an NMDA server-side configuration.

nsrdaprobe(.exe) Program that probes for the number or size of generated logs as a condition that triggers a probe-based backup.

nsrdasv(.exe) Main NMDA program that invokes one of the following:

• A scheduled NMDA backup on a database or application server or client.
• A manual NMDA backup on a Lotus or Sybase server or client.

nsrapplicationra(.exe) Programs that perform operations for the NMDA configuration wizard on a local or remote DB2, Informix, Lotus, Oracle,
or Sybase host.

50 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

Table 2 NMDA components (page 2 of 2)

Component name Description

DB2-specific components

libnsrdb2.xx Located in the directory /usr/lib on UNIX only. NMDA library that interacts with the DB2 backup and restore utilities and
the NetWorker server to perform backup, inquiry, and restore processes for DB2 data.

nsrdb2cat(.exe) Catalog synchronization program that prunes (removes) snapshot entries from the DB2 advanced copy services backup
history as NetWorker removes expired snapshot entries from its index.

nsrdb2rlog(.exe) Restore utility that copies DB2 transaction logs stored on the NetWorker server to a local file system so that the logs may
be used to perform rollforward recovery.

Informix-specific components

libnsrifmx.xx Located in the directory /usr/lib on UNIX only. NMDA libraries that interact with the Informix backup and restore utilities
libxbsa.dll and the NetWorker server to perform backup, inquiry, and restore processes for Informix data.

Lotus-specific components

nsrdoclb.dll On Windows systems only. Library for document-level recovery of Lotus data.

nsrdocrc(.exe) Program for document-level recovery of Lotus data.

nsrlotus_remrecov(.bat) Script that enables NMDA to perform a directed recovery from the NetWorker User for Lotus program on Windows.

nsrnotesrc(.exe) Program for recovery of Lotus database files.

nwbml.dll On Windows systems only. Library and program for the NetWorker User for Lotus.
nwbml.exe

Oracle-specific components

libnsrora.xx Located in the directory /usr/lib on UNIX only. Library (known as Media Management Library in Oracle documentation)
that is loaded by an Oracle backup or restore process.

nsrnmodrpostcmd(.bat) Sample Oracle postcommand script that can be customized to back up specific files at the end of a scheduled Oracle
backup, in preparation for disaster recovery.

nsroraadmin(.exe) Program that is used to create resource settings in the NWORA resource file for an Oracle backup configuration.

nsroraclecat(.exe) Not available on Linux Itanium, Solaris AMD64/EM64T, or Windows Itanium (platforms that do not support PowerSnap
backups). Program that is used to remove RMAN catalog entries during automatic catalog synchronization for
PowerSnap backups of Oracle data.

nsrorainfo(.exe) Program that determines the NetWorker volumes required to restore specified Oracle backup pieces from NMDA
backups.

nsrsbtcn.exe On Windows systems only. The orasbt.dll file is the main NMDA library (known as Media Management Library in Oracle
orasbt.dll documentation) that is loaded by the Oracle backup or restore thread. The orasbt.dll library uses nsrsbtcn.exe to
perform any corresponding NetWorker operations.

Sybase-specific components

libnsrsyb.xx Located in the directory /usr/lib on UNIX only. NMDA library that interacts with the Sybase backup and restore utilities
and the NetWorker server to perform backup, inquiry, and restore processes for Sybase data.

nsrsybcc(.exe) Program for database consistency check of Sybase databases.

nsrsybrc(.exe) Program for recovery of Sybase databases.

nwbms.dll On Windows systems only. Library and program for the NetWorker User for Sybase.
nwbms.exe

NMDA components 51
Overview of Product Software and Features

NMDA backup and restore processes

The following sections describe the processes involved in regular (not snapshot)
NMDA backups and restores.
Chapter 8, “Snapshot Backups and Restores,” provides information on the processes
involved in snapshot backups and restores.

Regular scheduled backup processes

A regular scheduled backup includes the following interactions:
1. At the scheduled backup start time, the main NetWorker server-side service,
nsrd, starts the configured group’s backup by invoking the savegrp program.
2. The savegrp program requests that the NetWorker client-side service, nsrexecd,
run the savefs program, which sends information back to the savegrp program.
3. For each NMDA client in the backup group and each of the client’s save sets, the
savegrp program contacts the nsrexecd service to start the nsrdasv program, and
the following steps occur, depending on the type of database or application
backup:
• For a DB2, Informix, Oracle, or Sybase backup:
a. The nsrdasv program communicates with the appropriate database or
backup server to start a backup session through one of the following:
– DB2 API
– Informix onbar
– Oracle RMAN executable
– Sybase Open Client/Server API
b. Each backup session, created by the database or backup server, loads the
NMDA shared library for the specific database to perform the backup.
• For a Lotus backup:
a. The nsrdasv program invokes another nsrdasv process called the parent
process.
b. The parent nsrdasv process determines the Lotus Domino or Notes files
that require backup and starts the child nsrdasv processes to back up the
files. The number of processes spawned depends on the number of files to
be backed up and the specified parallelism.
4. The NMDA shared library (for DB2, Informix, Oracle, or Sybase) or the child
nsrdasv process (for Lotus) performs the following:
• Contacts the NetWorker server service, nsrd, to obtain the required
authorization.
• Sends the backup data to the NetWorker media service, nsrmmd, to store on
the appropriate backup volumes.
5. The NetWorker online indexes store the tracking information:
• The nsrmmd service records tracking information in the NetWorker media
database by using the nsrmmdbd service.
• The backup session sends tracking information to the NetWorker client file
index by using the nsrindexd service.

52 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Overview of Product Software and Features

6. At the end of a scheduled backup, the savegrp program also automatically backs
up the NetWorker server bootstrap and the corresponding client file indexes. The
bootstrap and client indexes are not automatically backed up at the end of a
manual NMDA backup.

Note: A manual backup includes steps 3b to 5 only.

Figure 1 on page 53 shows how the database or application server, NetWorker server,
and NMDA processes interact during a regular scheduled NMDA backup.

Database or application NetWorker server Storage

server medium
(NetWorker client)
Client file index Media database

Tracking
information

nsrindexd nsrmmdbd
Database or
application-
specific
backup
components

Data

nsrmmd

Interprocess
savefs nsrdasv communication

nsrexecd savegrp nsrd

GEN-001176

Figure 1 Regular scheduled NMDA backup

Regular restore processes

A regular restore includes the following interactions, depending on the type of
database or application restore.

For a DB2, Informix, Oracle, or Sybase restore

1. A user starts the restore by running the proper database or NMDA restore utility
through one of the following:
• DB2 command interface
• Informix onbar command
• Oracle RMAN interface
• NMDA nsrsybrc command

NMDA backup and restore processes 53

Overview of Product Software and Features

2. The restore session loads the NMDA shared library for the proper database,
which performs the following:
a. Translates the object names requested for restore into a format that the
NetWorker server understands.
b. Forwards the restore object names to the NetWorker service, nsrindexd,
which verifies that the objects exist in the client file index.
3. The restore session works with the NetWorker server services to mount the
volumes required for the restore and read the data from the volumes.
4. The restore session passes the data to the database or backup server, which writes
the data to the disk.

For a Lotus restore

1. A user starts the restore by running the NMDA nsrnotesrc command.
2. The nsrnotesrc process performs the following:
a. Queries the NetWorker server to obtain a list of Domino files to recover, based
on options specified by the user.
b. Spawns child nsrnotesrc processes to recover Domino data. The number of
processes spawned depends on the number of Domino files to be recovered
and the specified parallelism.
c. When the child processes finish the recovery successfully, restores the Domino
logs, if requested by the Domino server.
3. Each child nsrnotesrc process performs the following for the subset of files that it
restores:
a. Works with the NetWorker server services to mount the volumes required for
the restore and read the data from the volumes.
b. Writes the data to the disk.

54 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 2
Backup
Configuration

This chapter includes the following major sections:

◆ Backup configuration roadmap .................................................................................. 56
◆ Configuring internationalization (I18N) support..................................................... 57
◆ Verifying the database or application server configuration.................................... 60
◆ Verifying the basic NetWorker resource configurations.......................................... 60
◆ Converting a client-side to server-side configuration ............................................. 64
◆ Configuring a scheduled backup with the wizard................................................... 66
◆ Configuring a scheduled backup without the wizard............................................. 68
◆ Configuring a manual backup .................................................................................... 75
◆ Configuring a deduplication backup with Avamar ................................................. 76
◆ Configuring a deduplication backup with Data Domain ....................................... 80
◆ Configuring a probe-based backup ............................................................................ 83
◆ Configuring a parallel backup .................................................................................... 89
◆ DB2 backup considerations ......................................................................................... 92
◆ Informix backup considerations ................................................................................. 94
◆ Lotus backup considerations....................................................................................... 94
◆ Oracle backup considerations ................................................................................... 101
◆ Sybase backup considerations................................................................................... 109

Backup Configuration 55
Backup Configuration

Backup configuration roadmap

IMPORTANT
Before configuring NMDA backups, determine the files to back up on your system
in preparation for disaster recovery. Chapter 5, “Disaster Recovery,” provides more
details.

This chapter provides the basic information for configuring manual, scheduled
(including probe-based), and deduplication backups. Other chapters provide
additional configuration steps for specific environments and technologies:
◆ Chapter 6, “Cluster Systems” — Includes information on backups and restores of
active-passive clusters and active-active application clusters (for example, DB2
DPF, Informix MACH 11, Oracle RAC, Sybase ASE Cluster Edition)
◆ Chapter 7, “Multiple Installations on a Single Host” — Includes information on
32-bit and 64-bit application coexistence
◆ Chapter 8, “Snapshot Backups and Restores” — Includes information on DB2 and
Oracle snapshot backups and restores
To configure a backup, use the instructions in the following sections that apply to the
particular environment:

Note: Before performing any configuration, backup, or restore operation, ensure that the
NetWorker client service, nsrexecd, has been started on the application host.

1. If you have an internationalization (I18N) environment, configure I18N support

according to “Configuring internationalization (I18N) support” on page 57.
2. Verify that the database or application server is properly configured, according to
“Verifying the database or application server configuration” on page 60.
3. Verify that the basic NetWorker resources are properly configured, according to
“Verifying the basic NetWorker resource configurations” on page 60.
4. If you have upgraded from a legacy NetWorker module to NMDA and want to
use the existing scheduled backup configuration, convert the configuration to the
NMDA configuration by using either the nsrdaadmin command or manual
conversion methods, according to the EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and
Applications Installation Guide.
5. Configure the backup by using the appropriate method:
• “Configuring a scheduled backup with the wizard” on page 66 (server-side
configuration)
• “Configuring a scheduled backup without the wizard” on page 68 (client-side
configuration)
• “Configuring a manual backup” on page 75

Note: A backup configuration created with the wizard is known as a server-side

configuration because specific NMDA configuration parameters are stored in an attribute
in the NetWorker Client resource on the NetWorker server host.
A backup configuration created without the wizard is known as a client-side configuration
because the NMDA configuration parameters are stored in a configuration file on the
client host.
Certain configuration attributes (client, group, device, and other attributes) are always
stored on the NetWorker server, no matter which configuration method is used.

56 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

6. Complete any additional procedures for the specific type of configuration:

• “Configuring a deduplication backup with Avamar” on page 76
• “Configuring a deduplication backup with Data Domain” on page 80
• “Configuring a probe-based backup” on page 83
7. Ensure that any application-specific requirements have been met:
• “DB2 backup considerations” on page 92
• “Informix backup considerations” on page 94
• “Lotus backup considerations” on page 94
• “Oracle backup considerations” on page 101
• “Sybase backup considerations” on page 109

Configuring internationalization (I18N) support

The NMDA documentation refers to internationalization as the capability of the
NMDA software to process non-ASCII data in a non-English locale.
The extent of the NMDA I18N support is dependent on the following:
◆ I18N support that is provided by the operating system on the NMDA client host.
◆ I18N support that is provided by the NetWorker client and server software.
◆ National Language Support (NLS) or globalization support that is provided by
the database or application software.
For example, if NetWorker software does not support non-ASCII data in a specific
NetWorker resource attribute (such as the group name in the Group resource),
NMDA cannot support non-ASCII data in that resource attribute or the
corresponding NMDA configuration parameter. The NetWorker documentation
includes more information on I18N support.
NMDA supports non-ASCII data in the following:
◆ Database or application object names and parameters to the extent supported by
the database or application vendor, for example, database and tablespace names
and datafile paths.
◆ Command line options to the database commands, such as the db2, Informix
onbar, and other commands, to the extent supported by the database vendor.
◆ Command line options to the NMDA commands, such as nsrdaadmin, nsrdasv,
nsrdb2rlog, nsrnotesrc, nsroraadmin, nsrorainfo, nsroraclecat, nsrsybcc, and
nsrsybrc.

Note: When you use the nsrdaadmin command to encrypt a password for a scheduled
backup, the password must contain ASCII characters only; otherwise, the operation fails.

◆ REMOTE_RECOVCMD environment variable that is used for Lotus directed

recovery, as described in “Configure a directed recovery” on page 180.
◆ Values for the NMDA parameters listed in Table 3 on page 58.
Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides details on
the NMDA parameters and configuration file.

Configuring internationalization (I18N) support 57

Backup Configuration

Table 3 NMDA parameters that support non-ASCII values

Database or application Parameters that support non-ASCII values

All databases and applications • NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST

• PRECMD
• POSTCMD

DB2 • NSR_DR_FILE_LIST

Informix • INFORMIXSQLHOSTS (Windows only)

• NSR_DR_FILE_LIST
• ONCONFIG (Windows only)

Lotus • Notes_ExecDirectory
• NSR_BACKUP_PATHS
• NSR_CATALOGFILE
• NSR_EXCLUDE_FILE
• NSR_LOG_DIR
• NSR_LOTUS_DATA_DIR
• NSR_RELOCATION_DEST
• NSR_RESOURCE_DIR
• PATH

Oracle • NSR_ORACLECAT_LOG_FILE
• NSR_RMAN_ARGUMENTS

Sybase • NSR_ASE_PASSWORD
• NSR_BACKUP_PATHS
• NSR_EXCLUDE_FILE

NMDA generates error messages in the nmda_app.messages.raw file in a

language-independent form, readable by the nsr_render_log program only. (The log
file does not contain database or application server errors.)
The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides information on how to use the
nsr_render_log program to read any language-independent file, such as
nmda_app.messages.raw.

Requirements for I18N support

Ensure that all of the following I18N requirements are met:
◆ The NMDA client host includes a supported internationalized version of the
operating system, properly configured to operate in the non-English locale.
◆ The database or application software provides the required National Language
Support (NLS) or globalization support. The database is configured with the
required non-ASCII character set. The appropriate database or application
vendor documentation provides details.
◆ Supported NetWorker software is installed:
• Internationalized NetWorker server software is installed, either on the NMDA
client or on a remote host.
• If the NetWorker server is located on a remote host, internationalized
NetWorker client or storage node software is installed on the NMDA client.

58 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

The EMC Information Protection Software Compatibility Guide on the Powerlink

website provides details on the different languages supported, and the operating
system and NetWorker version requirements for I18N support.
◆ For I18N support during PowerSnap snapshot operations, a supported release of
the PowerSnap Module is installed and configured, as described in the EMC
NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release Notes.

Informix-specific requirements for I18N support

The default locale for Informix IDS is English (en_us).
To enable I18N support for Informix operations in a non-English locale, ensure that
the following parameters are set in the NMDA configuration file for scheduled
backups and as environment variables for manual backups and restores:
◆ DB_LOCALE
◆ DBLANG
◆ SERVER_LOCALE
◆ CLIENT_LOCALE
The appropriate Informix documentation provides more details on these parameters.

Oracle-specific requirements for I18N support

For Oracle backups, NMDA supports non-ASCII data in the following:
◆ The format string of an RMAN backup command (unless the nsrdaadmin
command is used for conversion of a legacy backup configuration on Windows)
◆ The tag string of an RMAN backup command
◆ Usernames in the connection strings to the target database and recovery catalog

Note: Due to Oracle limitations, ASCII text must be used for:

- ORACLE_HOME path
- Net service name of the Oracle target database, recovery catalog, or duplicate database
- The password of the database user with DBA privileges
Oracle does not recommend the use of non-ASCII text in the Oracle database usernames.
Support of non-ASCII values for ORACLE_SID and TNS_ADMIN is dependent on the Oracle
software.

Perform the following for I18N support with Oracle operations:

1. Set the environment variable NLS_LANG to the character set supported by the
operating system and Oracle database, and then restart the Oracle Server.
The Oracle Globalization Support documentation provides details on the
NLS_LANG variable.
For example, to ensure that Oracle properly returns Japanese text in a Japanese
locale, set NLS_LANG as follows:
export NLS_LANG=JAPANESE_JAPAN.JA16EUC
% lsnrctl stop
% lsnrctl start
% sqlplus /nolog
SQL*Plus: Release 10.1.0.2.0 - Production on Thu Apr 26 15:12:03
Copyright (c) 1982, 2004, Oracle. All rights reserved.

Configuring internationalization (I18N) support 59

Backup Configuration

SQL> connect sys/oracle as sysdba;

SQL> shutdown;
SQL> startup;
SQL> quit;

2. For scheduled backups configured without the wizard, set the NLS_LANG
parameter in the NMDA configuration file to the same value as the environment
variable NLS_LANG.
For example, in a Japanese locale, set NLS_LANG in the NMDA configuration file
as follows:
NLS_LANG=JAPANESE_JAPAN.JA16EUC

Note: If you configure the scheduled backup with the configuration wizard, you can set
NLS_LANG on a wizard screen. The wizard autopopulates the NLS_LANG field if
NLS_LANG is set in the NWORA resource file.

Verifying the database or application server configuration

Ensure that the database or application server software is installed and configured,
along with any required target databases, networking software, and other
components, according to the appropriate DB2, Informix, Lotus, Oracle, or Sybase
server documentation.

Verifying the basic NetWorker resource configurations

Verify that the basic NetWorker resources are configured on the NetWorker server,
according to the information in the following sections. These resources are required
for all backup and restore operations.
“Configure the NetWorker resources with NMC” on page 70 provides more
information on the NetWorker resources required for scheduled NMDA backups.
The NetWorker server online help and the EMC NetWorker Administration Guide
provide more details on how to configure the NetWorker resources and attributes.

NetWorker Server resource

After the NetWorker server software is installed, the NetWorker configuration
includes a preconfigured Server resource with attribute settings that influence the
performance and security of backups.
Table 4 on page 61 describes the main NetWorker Server resource attributes. Verify
that the attribute settings in the Server resource are valid for the NMDA backup
environment. Modify the settings as required.

60 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Table 4 NetWorker Server resource attributes

Attribute Description

Name Specifies the hostname of the NetWorker server.

Parallelism Specifies the maximum number of backup save streams that the NetWorker software allows
to arrive concurrently at the server. The NetWorker server edition determines the maximum
parallelism value. When multiple data streams are backed up simultaneously, the efficiency of
the storage devices is increased.

Datazone pass Specifies an optional key or pass phrase, used only if AES encryption is specified for an
phrase NMDA backup. The pass phrase is required to restore encrypted data from the backup.
“NSR_AES_ENCRYPTION” on page 296 provides details.

NetWorker User Group resource

The NetWorker server includes an access control feature that allows NetWorker
administrators to assign users to NetWorker user groups. Each user group has a
specific set of privileges associated with it, as defined in the Privileges attribute of the
User Group resource.
The NetWorker server is installed with a set of preconfigured user groups. Certain
groups are used for administrative purposes, and other groups are for users. You can
create additional user groups, if required.
By default, the NetWorker server assigns the following privileges to a user in the
preconfigured Users group:
◆ Backup Local Data
◆ Monitor NetWorker
◆ Recover Local Data
These default user group configurations are sufficient for most NMDA operations.
Ensure that the required privileges are assigned for the operations, as described in
Table 5 on page 61. The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides information
on user groups and on setting user group privileges.

Note: PowerSnap backups and restores of DB2 or Oracle data require the same privileges as
regular backups and restores, plus the privileges required by the PowerSnap Module. The
NetWorker PowerSnap Module documentation provides more information on the required
privileges.

Table 5 User group privileges for NMDA operations (page 1 of 2)

Operation Operating system user that performs operation Required user group privileges

Manual backup: Database user on the database or application Backup Local Data
• Regular server Monitor NetWorkera
• Deduplication

Scheduled backup: Database user on the database or application Backup Local Data
• Regular server Monitor NetWorkera
• Deduplication
Root user, or a member of the Microsoft Windows Backup Local Data
• Probe-based
Administrators group, on the database or Monitor NetWorker
application server

Verifying the basic NetWorker resource configurations 61

Backup Configuration

Table 5 User group privileges for NMDA operations (page 2 of 2)

Operation Operating system user that performs operation Required user group privileges

Restore: Database user on the database or application Recover Local Data

• Regular server Monitor NetWorkera
• Deduplication

Backup deletion Database user on the database or application Operate NetWorker, and all its prerequisite
server privileges

Configuration of NetWorker resources for NMC user Configure NetWorker, and all its prerequisite
backup or restore privileges

Conversion of scheduled backup configuration Root user, or a member of the Microsoft Windows Configure NetWorker, and all its prerequisite
with nsrdaadmin command Administrators group, on the database or privileges
application server

Oracle-specific operations only:

RMAN crosscheck Oracle user on the Oracle Server Recover Local Data
Monitor NetWorker

Restore of NWORA resource file backup to the Root user, or a member of the Microsoft Windows Recover Local Data
Oracle Server Administrators group, on the Oracle Server Monitor NetWorker

Save set bundling or policy uniformity Root user, or a member of the Microsoft Windows Operate NetWorker, and all its prerequisite
Administrators group, on the Oracle Server privileges
a. Needed for all types of Oracle backups and restores, and for Avamar deduplication backups and restores of other applications.

Oracle-specific user group requirements

To enable NMDA to delete an Oracle RMAN backup from the NetWorker index,
ensure that the Oracle user has the required NetWorker privileges. NMDA attempts
to delete an entry from the NetWorker index in the following cases:
◆ If the RMAN delete command is used.
◆ If a running Oracle backup is canceled.

Note: If the Oracle user is not granted the required NetWorker privileges in these cases, NMDA
fails to remove the backup save set entries from the NetWorker index. However, RMAN might
remove the corresponding entries from the RMAN catalog, which would leave the NetWorker
index and RMAN catalog unsynchronized. To resynchronize the index and catalog, issue the
appropriate NetWorker media management command to manually remove the inconsistent
save set entries from the NetWorker index.

The Oracle user is defined as the following:

◆ On UNIX systems:
• If Net service is used, it is the operating system user that starts the Net service.
• If Net service is not used, it is the operating system user that runs RMAN.
In the case of a scheduled backup, the operating system user is root on UNIX
and system on Windows.
◆ On Windows systems, it is the system user.

62 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

NetWorker Client resource

Before the NMDA software can be used for backups or restores, a NetWorker Client
resource must exist for the NMDA client host.
If the NetWorker server software is installed on the NMDA client host, a basic Client
resource is created automatically for the NMDA client during the NetWorker
installation.
For manual NMDA backups, a basic NetWorker Client resource is required.
For scheduled NMDA backups, a Client resource customized for NMDA is required.
The later sections in this chapter on configuring scheduled backups provide details
on creating the required Client resource.
For both manual and scheduled NMDA backups, set the Parallelism attribute to the
maximum number of data streams that the NMDA client sends in parallel to the
NetWorker server.

NetWorker Device resource

The NetWorker server or storage node uses a supported tape or disk storage device
to write or read data during an NMDA backup or restore.
The NetWorker server configuration must include a Device resource for each
physical storage device to be used for backups and restores. In addition, each storage
device must contain a labeled and mounted volume.
The EMC NetWorker Hardware Compatibility Guide on the Powerlink website provides
a complete list of the storage devices that the NetWorker server supports.

NetWorker Pool and Label Template resources

A pool is a specific collection of backup volumes that the NetWorker server uses to
store, sort, and organize backup data. Each NetWorker volume belongs to either a
preconfigured pool or a user-created pool.
Leave the Save Sets attribute blank in the Pool resource. The NMDA program sets the
Save Sets during each backup session.
To have a scheduled backup automatically use a volume pool, the backup group can
be specified in the Pool resource. The scheduled backup uses that pool unless the
NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL parameter is set. The parameter setting takes
precedence over any pool associated with the scheduled backup group.
With NetWorker server 7.6.1 or later, you can also associate the Client resource with a
specific pool for a scheduled backup. This selected pool takes precedence over a pool
associated with a group or the NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL setting.
Each pool has a specific label template associated with it. The label provides an
automated method to identify the media assigned to a pool. NetWorker software
uses pools of volumes and label templates to track where the data is on each volume.

Firewall support
The NMDA software provides firewall support. The ports that the NMDA software
uses for the firewall depend on the corresponding ports configured for the
NetWorker server.

Verifying the basic NetWorker resource configurations 63

Backup Configuration

To configure the firewall that the NMDA software uses, follow the firewall
configuration instructions in the EMC NetWorker Administration Guide for the
particular NetWorker server platform.

Converting a client-side to server-side configuration

Before you can use the wizard to modify an NMDA scheduled backup configuration
created without the wizard (client-side configuration), you must first convert the
configuration with the nsrdaadmin -W command.
The nsrdaadmin -W command converts the scheduled backup configuration to the
configuration storage framework supported by the wizard (server-side
configuration). The conversion does not create a new Client resource, but modifies an
existing Client resource, such that you can then use the wizard to modify it. After the
conversion, you must use the wizard only to modify the configuration.

Note: To convert the client-side configuration of a legacy NetWorker module to an NMDA

server-side configuration, you must first convert the legacy configuration to an NMDA
client-side configuration by using the nsrdaadmin -M command, as described in the EMC
NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Installation Guide. Then you can use the
following instructions to convert the NMDA client-side to server-side configuration.

The nsrdaadmin command must be started on the NMDA host by an administrative

user, either the root user on UNIX, or a member of the Microsoft Windows
Administrators group. The administrative user must have the Configure NetWorker
user group privilege, as described Table 5 on page 61.
The nsrdaadmin command can convert only the following:
◆ A correct (working) NMDA client-side configuration.
If the configuration to be converted is not correct, then the conversion might fail
or might generate a nonworking wizard configuration.
◆ A configuration where the configuration files or scripts are located on the host
where the nsrdaadmin command runs.
To convert the Client resources for different physical hosts, you must run the
nsrdaadmin program on each physical host, or write a script to automate the
process.

Note: If an existing Oracle RMAN script contains non-ASCII characters on Windows, you
cannot use the nsrdaadmin -W command to convert the NMDA Oracle client-side to
server-side configuration. For this conversion,you must perform either of the following:
- Remove the non-ASCII characters from the RMAN script, if possible.
or
- Create a new configuration with the wizard by using the same configuration options and then
delete the old configuration.

64 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

NetWorker resources modified by the conversion

The configuration conversion updates the NetWorker resources as follows:
◆ In the Client resource:
• Backup Command attribute is changed from:
nsrdasv [-T app] [-c client] -z NMDA_configuration_file

to:
nsrdasv -T app [-c client]

where:
– app is db2, informix, lotus, oracle, or sybase depending on the database or
application.
– client is the client name. This is set if the client is a virtual client on a cluster.
• Backup Config attribute (hidden attribute) is created to contain:
– Information from the NMDA configuration file.
– For Oracle only, information from the RMAN script specified in the Save
Set attribute.
• Backup Type attribute is created to contain the value DB2, Informix, Lotus,
Oracle, or Sybase.
◆ If needed, the NetWorker Lockbox resource is updated with sensitive data from
the NMDA configuration file or Oracle RMAN script, such as the database
username or password. The following entries are also added to the ACL of the
Lockbox resource:
• system@client_hostname (Windows) or root@client_hostname (UNIX)
• Other ACL entries provided by the user during the conversion

Syntax and options of the nsrdaadmin conversion command

The nsrdaadmin command syntax and options for the conversion of an NMDA
client-side to server-side configuration are as follows:
nsrdaadmin -W -s server_name [-c client_name] [-g group_name]
[-N save_set_name] [-Y]

Command options and settings in brackets ([ ]) are optional. Do not include the
brackets when typing the command.
Table 6 on page 65 describes the nsrdaadmin command options. Example 4 on
page 66 provides sample usage of the command.

Table 6 Options of the nsrdaadmin command for configuration conversion (page 1 of 2)

Option Description

-W Mandatory. Specifies the conversion from an NMDA client-side to wizard (server-side) scheduled backup configuration.

-c client_name Optional. Specifies the hostname of the NetWorker client to be converted. The default value is the hostname of the local physical
client. In a cluster, this option should typically be set to a virtual cluster client.

Note: Do not specify a hostname that is different from the name of the host where the nsrdaadmin command is run.

Converting a client-side to server-side configuration 65

Backup Configuration

Table 6 Options of the nsrdaadmin command for configuration conversion (page 2 of 2)

Option Description

-g group_name Optional. Specifies the conversion of only the configurations of the client (either the default or set through the -c option) that is
associated with this group_name.

-N save_set_name Optional. Specifies the conversion of only the configurations of the client (either the default or set through the -c option) that is
associated with this save_set_name.

-s server_name Mandatory. Specifies the hostname of the NetWorker server that backs up the client that is being converted.

-Y Optional. Specifies that the conversion proceeds without prompting for confirmation. After the conversion, you must add the
usernames to the NetWorker Lockbox resource for all the users that will use the wizard to modify the configuration. The EMC
NetWorker Administration Guide provides details on the Lockbox resource.
If the -Y option is not specified, the nsrdaadmin program asks for user confirmation before proceeding with the conversion.

Example 4 Using the nsrdaadmin command for configuration conversion

The following command is run on the NMDA host, hostA, to convert all the Client
resources for hostA to a wizard configuration, where the Client resources are stored
on the NetWorker server host, hostNWS:
nsrdaadmin -W -s hostNWS

Configuring a scheduled backup with the wizard

The NMDA software supports the scheduled backup configuration wizard (also
known as the Client Backup Configuration wizard in NMC) that is integrated with a
supported NMC release.
The backup configuration wizard can perform the following:
◆ Configure a new NetWorker Client resource for an NMDA backup.
◆ Configure a new NetWorker Group resource, or use an existing resource, for the
scheduled backup.
◆ Configure new browse and retention policies, or use existing policies, for the
scheduled backup.

Note: Other NetWorker resources must be configured through NMC (without the wizard),
as described in “Configure the NetWorker resources with NMC” on page 70.

◆ Save a copy of the configuration settings to a specified file on the NMDA host for
reference purposes.
◆ Modify a backup configuration that was created with the NMDA configuration
wizard.
The wizard stores the configuration information (except for sensitive data, such as
passwords) in a hidden attribute named Backup Config in the Client resource. Do not
modify this new attribute manually. If you use the wizard to create a backup
configuration, you must use the wizard to modify the configuration.

Note: The wizard stores sensitive data securely by using NetWorker lockbox services.

The wizard provides options for typical and custom configurations.

66 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

The "typical" workflow enables you to configure a backup with fewer clicks by using
default backup settings. The wizard help provides details on the default settings used
for a typical scheduled backup.
The “custom” option provides a more detailed workflow that enables you to:
◆ Use an existing NMDA configuration file as initial input to the wizard
configuration.
◆ Customize backup options, for example, to configure:
• Number of backup sessions to use
• Specific data objects to back up
• Additional backup parameters
◆ Save a copy of the configuration settings to a specified file for reference purposes.
To use the wizard to modify an NMDA configuration that was not created with the
wizard (client-side configuration), you must first convert that configuration
according to “Converting a client-side to server-side configuration” on page 64.
The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release Notes provide details
on the limitations and NetWorker requirements for the wizard. Descriptive inline text
and online help in the wizard provide details on how to use the wizard.

Requirements for using the backup configuration wizard

Before you use the backup configuration wizard, ensure that all of the following
requirements are met:
◆ The NMC user that starts the wizard (the wizard user) has the Configure
NetWorker privilege and all of its prequisite privileges on the NetWorker server
where the configuration is created.
◆ Communication between the NMC server, NetWorker server, and NMDA client
uses NetWorker nsrauth authentication, which is the default NetWorker setting.
The NetWorker documentation provides any requirements for nsrauth
authentication.
◆ The required NetWorker releases are installed on the NMC server, NetWorker
server, and NMDA client hosts, as described in the EMC NetWorker Module for
Databases and Applications Release Notes.
The wizard may be run on a host with no NetWorker software installed and with no
direct communication with the NMDA client. Administrator privileges or root user
privileges on that system are not required.

Configure a scheduled backup with the wizard

To create or modify a scheduled backup configuration with the wizard:
1. In the NetWorker Management Console (NMC) Enterprise window, select the
NetWorker server name, and double-click the NetWorker application to
launch it.
2. Ensure that the NetWorker Schedule, Device, and Pool resources, which cannot be
configured with the wizard, are configured according to “Configure the
NetWorker resources with NMC” on page 70.
3. In the Configuration window, under the NetWorker server name, click Clients.

Configuring a scheduled backup with the wizard 67

Backup Configuration

4. Start the wizard by the appropriate method:

• To create a new backup configuration, right-click Clients, and select Client
Backup Configuration > New.
• To modify an existing backup configuration that was created with the wizard,
right-click the NMDA client in the right pane, and select Client Backup
Configuration > Modify.
5. On each wizard screen that appears, specify the required options and values for
the backup configuration. Click Next to proceed to the next screen.
Each wizard screen includes an online help button that you can click to access
descriptions of all the fields and options on the screen.
You may click a link in the wizard steps panel to go directly to the screen you
want to modify. The number of steps shown in the steps panel can vary according
to the chosen configuration type.
6. On the last screen titled Review and Accept the Client Configuration, click
Create or Modify to create or modify the configuration, and click Finish to exit
the wizard.

Configuring a scheduled backup without the wizard

As an alternative to configuring a scheduled backup with the wizard (server-side
configuration), you can create and modify a scheduled backup configuration without
the wizard (client-side configuration).
For a client-side configuration, you must store the NMDA configuration information
on the client host.
Client-side configuration involves the following steps:
1. For Oracle backups only, create an RMAN script for the Oracle backups, and set
the required NMDA parameters in the script. “Oracle backup considerations” on
page 101 provides details.
2. Create an NMDA configuration file, and set the required NMDA parameters in
the configuration file. “Configure the NMDA parameters without the wizard” on
page 68 provides details.
3. Set the required NetWorker resources directly in the NMC program. “Configure
the NetWorker resources with NMC” on page 70 provides details.

Note: The pathname of the configuration file in the Backup Command attribute of the
Client resource is the pathname of the configuration file created in step 2.

Configure the NMDA parameters without the wizard

For the client-side configuration of a scheduled NMDA backup, set the required
NMDA parameters in the configuration file. For Oracle backups, only certain NMDA
parameters, such as ORACLE_HOME must be set in the configuration file. The other
parameters should be set in the RMAN script. The configuration file and RMAN
script must be stored on the NMDA client host. Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters
and Configuration File,” provides details on the NMDA configuration file, including
syntax and templates, and all the NMDA common and database-specific parameters.
Ensure that you set the mandatory parameters for the scheduled backup of the
database or application, as shown in Table 7 on page 69.

68 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Note: The parameters NSR_SERVER and NSR_GROUP must not be set for a scheduled NMDA
backup because NMDA automatically passes server and group information received from the
NetWorker server that started the backup to the backup processes. NSR_SERVER can be set for
a manual NMDA backup.

Table 7 Mandatory parameters for scheduled NMDA backups

Database or application Mandatory parameters for scheduled NMDA backups

DB2 • DB2INSTANCE (UNIX only)

• DB2_NODE_NAME
• DB2PATH (Windows only)
• DB2_TBS_LIST (tablespace backup only)
• DB2_USER
• INSTHOME (UNIX only)
• USER_PSWD

Note: Set the encrypted DB2 user password in the USER_PSWD

parameter with the nsrdaadmin -P command as described in
“USER_PSWD” on page 306.

Informix • INFORMIXDIR
• INFORMIXSQLHOSTS (UNIX only)
• ONCONFIG

Lotus • LOTUS_USER (UNIX only)

• Notes_ExecDirectory
• NSR_RESOURCE_DIR (UNIX only)
• PATH

Oracle • ORACLE_HOME
• ORACLE_SID (specific cases only)
• TNS_ADMIN (specific case only)

Sybase • LD_LIBRARY_PATH or LD_LIBRARY_PATH_64 or LIBPATH or

SHLIB_PATH (platform-specific)
• PATH (specific cases only)
• SYBASE
• SYBASE_USER
• USER_PSWD (when Sybase instance has a password)

Note: Set the encrypted Sybase user password in the USER_PSWD

parameter with the nsrdaadmin -P command as described in
“USER_PSWD” on page 322.

Configuring a scheduled backup without the wizard 69

Backup Configuration

Configure the NetWorker resources with NMC

Configure a NetWorker Client resource and other scheduled backup resources on the
NetWorker server by using the NMC program:
1. In the NMC Enterprise window, select the NetWorker server name, and
double-click the NetWorker application to launch it.
2. In the Configuration window, under the NetWorker server name, select the
appropriate backup resources to configure, such as Groups, Schedules, Clients,
and so on. For example:
• To create a new client, right-click Clients and select New.
• To modify an existing NMDA client, double-click the client name to open its
Properties window.
On each of the properties tabs, specify the appropriate options and values for the
backup configuration.
The following sections highlight the resource configuration information that is
specific to NMDA. The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide and NMC online help
provide more details about the NetWorker resources.

Configure the Group resource

Configure the NetWorker Group resource to specify the attributes of the scheduled
NMDA backup group. The Group resource specifies a set of NetWorker Client
resources that all start to back up data at a specified time, once the following are set in
the Group resource:
◆ The Autostart attribute is Enabled.
◆ The Start Time for the backup is specified.
All NetWorker backup groups can be created and modified. All backup groups except
the Default group can be deleted.

IMPORTANT
For a regular scheduled backup, the Snapshot attribute in the Group resource must
be set to False.

To have a regular scheduled backup automatically use a volume pool associated with
the backup group, specify the group name in the Pool resource for the volume pool.
Specify the name of the NetWorker group in the Group attribute of the Client
resource.
The scheduled backup level for the group is determined by the following factors:
◆ Whether the Level attribute is set for the group and to what value
◆ Whether the Force Incremental attribute is set for the group and to what value
The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides more details.

70 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Configure the Schedule resource

Create or select the NetWorker Schedule resource to specify the days of the week
when the scheduled NMDA backup runs.
The NetWorker server provides several preconfigured schedules that can be
modified, but not deleted. If the preconfigured schedules meet the backup
requirements, use the schedules as is. Otherwise, create new schedules to
accommodate your site needs. User-created schedules can be modified and deleted.
Customize the NetWorker Schedule resource for the scheduled backup by selecting
the backup level for each day of the week as shown in Table 8 on page 71.
Specify the name of the NetWorker schedule in the Schedule attribute of the Client
resource.

Table 8 Backup levels specified in NetWorker Schedule resource

Database or application
being backed up Supported backup levels

DB2 • Level full — DB2 full backup of all the database data.
• Level incr — DB2 incremental backup.
• Level 1 to 9 — DB2 delta backup.
• Level skip — NetWorker server skips the backup on that day.
To support the NetWorker backup levels from the Schedule resource:
• Set the DB2_APPLY_NW_LEVELS parameter to TRUE in the NMDA configuration file, as described in
“DB2_APPLY_NW_LEVELS” on page 303.
• Ensure that the TRACKMOD parameter is set to ON with a DB2 command at the operating system command line:
db2 update db cfg for sample using TRACKMOD ON
where sample is the name of the database to be backed up.

Informix • Level full — ON-Bar level 0 backup of all the selected dbspaces of the database instance.
• Level 1 — ON-Bar level 1 backup of the data that has changed since the last level 0 (full) backup.
• Level 2 to 9 — ON-Bar level 2 backup of the data that has changed since the last level 1 backup.
• Level skip — NetWorker server skips the backup on that day.

Lotus • Level full — Full backup of all the data.

Sybase • Level incr — Incremental backup of only data that has changed since the last backup.
• Level skip — NetWorker server skips the backup on that day.

Note: NMDA does not support the NetWorker backup levels 1 to 9 for Lotus or Sybase backups. If you specify these levels,
the backup fails.

Oracle • Level full, incr, or 1 to 9 — NetWorker server runs the backup script on that day. The Oracle backup level is actually
determined by the level that is set in the RMAN backup script only.

Note: It is recommended to always set the backup level to full on the days when you want to run a backup to avoid
unnecessary processing on a NetWorker server that is associated with other level backups.

• Level skip — NetWorker server skips the backup on that day.

Configuring a scheduled backup without the wizard 71

Backup Configuration

Configure the Client resource

To customize the Client resource for a scheduled NMDA backup, specify the
required values for each attribute according to Table 9 on page 72.
For the NMDA applications that support multiple entries in the Save Set attribute of
the Client resource, consider the following:
◆ The backups for the entries are executed in arbitrary order, possibly in parallel.
◆ If the NMDA configuration file also contains a setting for PRECMD or
POSTCMD, the precommand and postcommand files will be as follows:
• Common for all of the backups
• Executed once for each backup
Also, if a scheduled backup is retried, the specified precommand and postcommand
will be executed again for that backup. To include separate preprocessing and
postprocessing for each backup, define a separate Client resource for each backup.

Note: In Table 9 on page 72, the information in the NMC tab column is based on NMC 7.6 SP2
and might change in other NMC releases.

Table 9 NetWorker Client resource attributes (page 1 of 3)

Attribute name NMC tab Attribute setting

Aliases Globals Specify all known aliases for the system where the NMDA software is installed.

Backup Command Apps & Modules Specify the command to be used for the backup:
nsrdasv(.exe) -z configuration_file
where configuration_file is the complete pathname of the configuration file that contains the NMDA
parameter settings for the scheduled backup.
On Windows systems only, if the configuration file pathname includes any spaces, perform one of the
following:
• Change the configuration file pathname so it does not include spaces.
• Use the Windows short pathname format. For example:
nsrdasv(.exe) -z C:\Progra~1\Legato\nsr\apps\config\config.txt
• Use quotes and double backslashes in the pathname. For example:
nsrdasv(.exe) -z “C:\\Program Files\\Legato\\nsr\\apps\\config\\config.txt”

Browse Policy General Specify the length of time that the NetWorker server retains an entry for the backup in the online client file
index. The value of the Browse Policy attribute cannot exceed the value of the Retention Policy attribute.

Note: If the parameter NSR_SAVESET_BROWSE is set as described in Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters

and Configuration File,” its value overrides the Browse Policy attribute setting in the Client resource.

Checkpoint enabled General Select this attribute to enable a checkpoint restart (CPR) backup for Lotus only. This attribute setting is
ignored for other NMDA applications.

Checkpoint granularity General This attribute setting is ignored by all NMDA operations. Setting this parameter has no impact on a Lotus
restartable scheduled backup, described in “Restartable scheduled backups” on page 35.

(Avamar) Apps & Modules Select this attribute to enable a deduplication backup to Avamar.
Deduplication Backup
Note: You cannot select this attribute together with the Data Domain Backup attribute.

(Avamar) Apps & Modules Specify the hostname of the Avamar server that will store the deduplicated backup.
Deduplication Node

72 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Table 9 NetWorker Client resource attributes (page 2 of 3)

Attribute name NMC tab Attribute setting

Data Domain Backup Apps & Modules Optionally select this attribute to ensure that the deduplication backup is always stored on a NetWorker Data
Domain device when the backup pool contains a mixture of Data Domain devices and other types of
devices.

Note: You cannot select this attribute together with the (Avamar) Deduplication Backup attribute.

Group General Specify the NetWorker backup group to use for the scheduled backup. “Configure the Group resource” on
page 70 provides more details on backup groups.

Name General Specify the hostname of the database or application server host to be backed up with NMDA.

Parallelism Globals Specify the maximum number of data streams that the database or application server sends in parallel to the
NetWorker server or storage node during the backup.

Pool Globals Specify the pool to use for a backup. When selected, this attribute overrides the pool associated with the
backup group.

Remote Access Globals Specify the username and fully qualified hostname of a remote system that can access backups of this host,
in the following format:
user=remote_username,host=remote_hostname
Set this attribute in the following cases (otherwise, leave it blank):
• Backup from a cluster
• Backup in an Oracle Data Guard environment
• Recovery to a host other than the one being backed up
On a Solaris system with Solaris zones, the Remote Access attribute must contain the hostname of the zone
in which NMDA operates.

Retention Policy General Specify the minimum length of time that the NetWorker server maintains information about the backup data
in the online media database. The value of the Retention Policy attribute must be greater than or equal to the
value of the Browse Policy attribute.

Note: If the parameter NSR_SAVESET_RETENTION is set as described in Appendix A, “NMDA

Parameters and Configuration File,” its value overrides the Retention Policy attribute setting in the Client
resource.

Save Set General Type of client Save Set attribute setting

DB2 Specify the database and node to be backed up:

DB2:/database_name/node_name

Informix Specify the database instance and (optionally) dbspace to be backed up. Multiple
dbspace names must be separated by a space:
INFORMIX:/instance[/[dbspace1[ dbspace2]]]
To back up the entire instance, specify the following:
INFORMIX:/instance
To back up selected dbspaces, specify the following:
INFORMIX:/instance/dbspace1 dbspace2

Note: The Save Set attribute must contain only a single entry.

Configuring a scheduled backup without the wizard 73

Backup Configuration

Table 9 NetWorker Client resource attributes (page 3 of 3)

Attribute name NMC tab Attribute setting

Save Set General Type of client Save Set attribute setting

Lotus Specify the name for the backup save set:

NOTES:[description]
For example, the following are valid names:
• NOTES:
• NOTES: Monday Full Backup

Note: The Save Set attribute must contain only a single entry.

To specify the actual data to back up, set one of the following parameters in the
NMDA configuration file:
• NSR_BACKUP_LOTUS_DIR — To back up the Domino or Notes data directory.
• NSR_BACKUP_PATHS — To back up one or more specific directories, or files, or
both.
Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides details on the
parameters.

Oracle Specify the complete pathname of each RMAN script to be used for the scheduled
backup:
RMAN:RMAN_script_pathname
Do not include any spaces between the prefix RMAN: and the script name. On
Windows systems, the pathname can include forward slashes, for example,
RMAN:F:/scripts/incr_1_bkup.
If two separate RMAN backup scripts are created in the files
/disk/rman_scripts/archlogbkup and /disk/rman_scripts/fullbkup, specify the following:
RMAN:/disk/rman_scripts/archlogbkup
RMAN:/disk/rman_scripts/fullbkup
Each Oracle installation requires a separate Client resource.

Sybase Specify the Sybase server instance and (optionally) databases to be backed up:
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name[/database_name]
To back up the entire instance set, specify the following:
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name
To back up selected databases, specify each database name on a separate line:
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database_name1
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database_name2

Schedule General For scheduled backups only. Specify the NetWorker backup schedule to use for the scheduled backup.
“Configure the Schedule resource” on page 71 provides more details on backup schedules.

Scheduled Backup General For scheduled backups only. Select the checkbox to enable the resource for scheduled backups.

Storage Nodes Globals Specify the name of each storage node to which the database server can back up data.
The database server backs up to the first active, enabled storage node in the order listed in the attribute. The
default storage node name, nsrserverhost, represents the NetWorker server.

74 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Configuring a manual backup

To configure a manual NMDA backup:
1. Ensure that you have configured the required NetWorker resources as described
in “Verifying the basic NetWorker resource configurations” on page 60.
2. Set the required NMDA parameters by using the proper method:
• For a DB2, Lotus, or Sybase manual backup, set the parameters in the NMDA
configuration file.
• For an Informix manual backup, set the parameters in the environment.
• For an Oracle manual backup, create an RMAN script and set the parameters
in the RMAN backup script by using the send command where possible.
“Oracle backup considerations” on page 101 provides details on when the
send command cannot be used.
Set NSR_SERVER to the hostname of the NetWorker server for the backup if the
server host is different from the NMDA client host.
Set NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL (all NMDA applications) or
NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL (DB2, Informix, Sybase) to ensure that the backup is
stored on the preferred volume. Otherwise, the NetWorker server assigns a
volume according to the media pool selection criteria on the server.
Ensure that you set the mandatory parameters for the manual backup of the
database or application, as shown in Table 10 on page 75.
Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides details on all
the NMDA parameters, including how to set the parameters.

Table 10 Mandatory parameters for manual NMDA backups

Database or application Mandatory parameters for manual NMDA backups

Lotus • Notes_ExecDirectory
• NSR_RESOURCE_DIR (UNIX only)
• PATH (UNIX only)

Oracle • NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL* (for backups that generate backup

copies)

Sybase • NSR_BACKUP_PATHS
• SYBASE
• SYBASE_USER
• USER_PSWD (when Sybase instance has a password)

Note: To set the encrypted Sybase user password in the

USER_PSWD parameter, you must use the nsrdaadmin -P
command, as described in “USER_PSWD” on page 322.

3. Perform any additional configurations required for the specific database or

application backup:
• “DB2 backup considerations” on page 92
• “Informix backup considerations” on page 94
• “Lotus backup considerations” on page 94

Configuring a manual backup 75

Backup Configuration

• “Oracle backup considerations” on page 101

• “Sybase backup considerations” on page 109

Configuring a deduplication backup with Avamar

Before you configure a deduplication backup with Avamar, ensure that all of the
following requirements are met:
◆ The NetWorker client and server releases support NMDA deduplication. The
EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release Notes provides more
details.
◆ The Avamar server (DataGrid) is installed and configured as a NetWorker
deduplication node. The EMC NetWorker Avamar Integration Guide provides more
details.
◆ The NetWorker backup device, which receives only the backup metadata during
the NMDA deduplication backup, is configured as an advanced file type device
(AFTD) as described in the EMC NetWorker Avamar Integration Guide.
◆ The user that will perform deduplication backups or restores has the Monitor
NetWorker user group privilege. “NetWorker User Group resource” on page 61
provides more information on user group privileges.
◆ For Avamar deduplication backups or restores with Sybase on HP-UX Itanium or
Solaris AMD64/EM64T only, the environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH or
LD_LIBRARY_PATH_64 is set:
a. In the shell where the Sybase backup server will be started, as the Sybase user,
set the environment variable required for the particular platform:
– On HP-UX Itanium, set LD_LIBRARY_PATH to include the directory
where the libcommonssl library is located. For example:
$ export
LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$LD_LIBRARY_PATH:/opt/networker/lib/hpux32

– On Solaris AMD64/EM64T, set LD_LIBRARY_PATH_64 to include the

directory where the libcommonssl library is located, /usr/lib/nsr/amd64
by default. For example:
$ export
LD_LIBRARY_PATH_64=$LD_LIBRARY_PATH_64:/usr/lib/nsr/amd64

b. Retart the Sybase backup server.

◆ For these Avamar deduplication backups, the NSR_NWPATH parameter is set:
• Sybase deduplication backup on 64-bit Windows
• Any deduplication backup when 32-bit NMDA is installed on 64-bit Windows

Best practices for an Avamar deduplication backup

Avamar deduplication is most beneficial in a data warehouse environment where the
data does not change frequently. It may also be beneficial for databases where only a
small percentage of data is updated repeatedly, or new data is added to a database
but the old data does not change much.

76 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

During planning and configuration of a deduplication backup, consider that the

following best practices can improve the backup performance:
◆ Do not include a deduplication client in the same Group resource as
non-deduplication clients.
◆ Once a deduplication node (Avamar server) is selected for an initial full backup
of a client, continue to use the same deduplication node for all backups of the
client, to take advantage of the client deduplication information stored on the
node.
◆ Schedule a deduplication backup to avoid the Avamar server read-only periods.
An Avamar server spends periods of time in maintenance mode, where it may be
unavailable for backup or have limited bandwidth.

Note: A deduplication NMDA backup that runs during an Avamar maintenance period
may be suspended until the Avamar server resources become available.

◆ Do not use database or NMDA encryption, checksumming, or compression

because they decrease the data deduplication ratio.
If the NSR_AES_ENCRYPTION, NSR_CHECKSUM, or NSR_COMPRESSION
parameter is set for a deduplication backup, NMDA applies the AES encryption,
checksumming, or compression, respectively, to only the metadata that is stored
on the NetWorker backup media.
◆ Do not use more than 4 to 6 concurrent backup sessions. Setting the backup
parallelism to a high value can cause the deduplication backup to fail.
For DB2 backups, do not use the DB2 PARALLELISM parameter. DB2 parallelism
is different from the NMDA DB2 parallel (multi-session) backups. The DB2
documentation provides details on DB2 parallelism.
◆ Deduplication is not recommended for incremental backups. During an
incremental backup, only the database blocks that have changed (DB2, Informix,
or Oracle) or the transaction logs (Lotus or Sybase) are backed up, which
guarantees a very low rate of duplication. When the overhead of deduplicating
data is added to the overhead of an incremental backup, the result is decreased
performance and insignificant benefits for the amount of data stored.
The application of browse and retention policies and the selection of media pools is
the same for a deduplication backup as for a regular NMDA backup.
Avamar and NetWorker documentation provides more information on their
requirements for deduplication backups.

Oracle-specific considerations for Avamar deduplication

During planning and configuration of an Oracle deduplication backup, consider that
the following additional considerations can improve the backup performance:
◆ To increase the deduplication ratio, do not use RMAN multiplexing for a
deduplication backup. To disable multiplexing, ensure that filesperset is set to 1.
◆ For manual backups and scheduled backups configured without the wizard
(client-side configuration), set the NSR_DEDUP_CACHE_TAG parameter to a
unique value for each allocated channel when multiple channels are used.
“NSR_DEDUP_CACHE_TAG” on page 299 provides details on the parameter.
◆ When the database structure does not change often, associate the backup of
specific tablespaces with a specific channel to ensure that Oracle does not
distribute the data to a different channel when the database structure or size
changes. Group tablespaces that contain similar (duplicated) data and associate

Configuring a deduplication backup with Avamar 77

Backup Configuration

them with the same channel. This practice requires familiarity with the database
data. A tablespace must also be added to the backup script when a new
tablespace is created.
For example, the following RMAN backup script shows how to set the cache tag per
channel and to associate tablespaces with a channel:
run {
allocate channel c1 type 'SBT_TAPE';
send channel c1 'NSR_ENV=(NSR_DEDUP_CACHE_TAG=orcl102_c1)';
allocate channel c2 type 'SBT_TAPE';
send channel c2 'NSR_ENV=(NSR_DEDUP_CACHE_TAG=orcl102_c2)';

send 'NSR_ENV=(NSR_DEDUP_BACKUP=TRUE,
NSR_DEDUP_NODE=avamar.emc.com)';

backup filesperset=1
(tablespace tbs1, tbs5 channel c1)
(tablespace tbs2, tbs3, tbs4 channel c2);

release channel c1;

release channel c2;
}

Configure a scheduled Avamar deduplication backup

To configure a scheduled deduplication backup, use either the configuration wizard
(server-side configuration) or the NMC method without the wizard (client-side
configuration).

Server-side configuration
To use the configuration wizard to configure a scheduled deduplication backup,
follow the instructions in “Configuring a scheduled backup with the wizard” on
page 66.
On the screen to specify deduplication options:
◆ Select the attribute to enable an Avamar deduplication backup.
◆ Select the hostname of the deduplication node (Avamar server) that will store the
deduplicated backup data.

Client-side configuration
To use the NMC method (without the wizard) to configure a scheduled deduplication
backup, follow the instructions in “Configuring a scheduled backup without the
wizard” on page 68.
Apply these additional settings for a deduplication backup:
1. In the NetWorker Client resource for the NMDA client:
• Select the attribute to enable an Avamar deduplication backup.
• Select the hostname of the deduplication node (Avamar server) that will store
the deduplicated backup data.
2. If the nsravtar binary (part of the NetWorker client package) is installed in a
nondefault location, set NSR_NWPATH according to the method in “NMDA
configuration file” on page 294. “NSR_NWPATH” on page 301 provides details
on the parameter.

78 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

3. For an Oracle deduplication backup only, set the NSR_DEDUP_CACHE_TAG

parameter in the RMAN script according to “Oracle-specific considerations for
Avamar deduplication” on page 77.
4. For normal operations, default settings should be used for the cache usage and
chunk size. However, if for some reason nondefault settings are required, the
following parameters may be modified with special care in the NMDA
configuration file or Oracle RMAN script:
• “NSR_DEDUP_CACHE_ENABLED” on page 298
• “NSR_DEDUP_CHUNK_SIZE” on page 299
Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides details on
the NMDA parameters.

Configure a manual Avamar deduplication backup

To configure a manual deduplication backup:
1. In at least one of the NetWorker Client resources for the NMDA client, use
NMC to:
• Select the attribute to enable an Avamar deduplication backup.
• Select the hostname of the deduplication node (Avamar server) that will store
the deduplicated backup data.
2. Set the following parameters in the NMDA configuration file for a DB2, Informix,
Lotus, or Sybase backup, or in the RMAN script for an Oracle backup:
• “NSR_DEDUP_BACKUP” on page 298
• “NSR_DEDUP_NODE” on page 299
The NSR_DEDUP_NODE parameter setting must have exactly the same value
as the De-duplication Node attribute in step 1. For example, when a short or
fully-qualified name is used in the attribute, the same short or fully-qualified
name must be used in the parameter setting.
3. If the nsravtar binary (part of the NetWorker client package) is installed in a
nondefault location, set NSR_NWPATH according to the method in “NMDA
configuration file” on page 294. “NSR_NWPATH” on page 301 provides details
on the parameter.
4. If you are configuring an Oracle manual deduplication backup, review the
“Oracle-specific considerations for Avamar deduplication” on page 77.

Configuring a deduplication backup with Avamar 79

Backup Configuration

Configuring a deduplication backup with Data Domain

This section describes the configuration of deduplication backups that use
NetWorker Data Domain devices only, not AFTD or VTL devices. To configure a Data
Domain backup with AFTD or VTL devices, follow the same configuration steps as
for a regular NMDA backup.
Before you configure a deduplication backup with NetWorker Data Domain devices,
ensure that all of the following requirements are met:
◆ The NetWorker client and server releases support Data Domain devices. The
EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release Notes provides more
details.
◆ The Data Domain system is configured for storage operations with the
NetWorker server according to the instructions in the EMC NetWorker Data
Domain Deduplication Devices Integration Guide.
The NMDA software supports three types of configurations for deduplication
backups to a NetWorker Data Domain device:
1. Deduplication on a remote storage node — This configuration decreases the
amount of network traffic between the storage node and Data Domain system by
sending only the unique blocks over the network. However, it requires all the
data to be sent over the network between the NMDA host and storage node.
2. Deduplication on a dedicated storage node located on the NMDA host — This
configuration eliminates the sending of data over the network between the
NMDA host and storage node.
3. Deduplication directly on the client through NMDA processes — This
configuration has similar performance to the deduplication on a dedicated
storage node, but it eliminates the need for a dedicated storage node on the
NMDA host.

Best practices for a Data Domain backup

Deduplication backups and restores with a Data Domain system are preferable to
those with an Avamar server for large databases with high data change rates. A daily
change rate of more than 5 percent is considered a high change rate.
During planning and configuration of a deduplication backup, keep in mind these
best practices that can improve the backup performance:
◆ Do not use database or NMDA encryption or compression because they decrease
the data deduplication ratio.
◆ Optionally, use client direct access to a NetWorker Data Domain device for
backups and restores to eliminate data transfer between the NMDA client and
NetWorker storage node. However, using this feature requires an additional
24 MB of memory per data stream on the NMDA client and also increases the
NMDA CPU usage.
◆ For Oracle Data Domain backups, you can improve the backup deduplication
ratio by not using RMAN multiplexing. To disable multiplexing, ensure that
filesperset is set to 1 in the RMAN configuration.
Set filesperset=1 when the database performs many insertions of new data or
frequent structural changes. If this is not the case, you can set filesperset to a
larger value to increase the backup throughput.

80 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Data Domain and NetWorker documentation provides more information on their

requirements for deduplication backups.

Configure a Data Domain backup with deduplication on NMDA host

To configure a scheduled or manual Data Domain backup that deduplicates data on
the NMDA host and passes only unique data blocks directly to the NetWorker Data
Domain device:
1. Review the “Best practices for a Data Domain backup” on page 80.
2. Configure the NetWorker Data Domain device and enable the Data Domain
system for NetWorker operations. The EMC NetWorker Data Domain Deduplication
Devices Integration Guide provides details.
3. Ensure that the backup is associated with a pool that contains Data Domain
devices configured in step 2:
• For a scheduled backup, ensure that the required media pool is associated
with the NMDA Group or Client resource by using the NMC program or
configuration wizard. The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide and NMC
online help provide more details on using the NMC program.
• For a manual backup, ensure that the NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL
parameter is set to the required pool. “NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL” on
page 297 provides details on the parameter.
4. Follow the appropriate configuration instructions in Table 11 on page 82, similar
to the instructions used to configure a regular NMDA backup.
5. Optionally, to ensure that only a client direct backup is performed (the backup
will fail if a direct connection between the NMDA host and Data Domain system
is not possible), set the parameter NSR_DIRECT_ACCESS=Yes in one of the
following, as appropriate:
• Scheduled backup (wizard configuration): Advanced option table in the
wizard
• Scheduled backup (client-side configuration): NMDA configuration file (DB2,
Informix, Lotus, Sybase) or Oracle RMAN script
• Manual backup: NMDA configuration file (DB2, Lotus, Sybase), Oracle
RMAN script, environment variable (Informix)
“NSR_DIRECT_ACCESS” on page 300 provides more details on the parameter.

Note: The recommended setting for the NSR_DIRECT_ACCESS parameter is the default
value. By default, NMDA attempts to perform a deduplication locally and send unique
blocks directly to the NetWorker Data Domain device but reverts to the traditional backup
method through the storage node if the client direct backup is not possible.

6. If required, set the PATH parameter to the DD Boost library location:

• If you back up 32-bit Lotus Domino or Notes on a 64-bit Windows operating
system, set the PATH parameter in the configuration file or wizard to the
location of the 32-bit libDDBoost.dll library. For example:
PATH=C:\Program Files\Legato\nsr\bin\ddboost32

Configuring a deduplication backup with Data Domain 81

Backup Configuration

• If you back up Sybase ASE (either 32-bit or 64-bit) on a 64-bit Windows

operating system:
– Set the PATH parameter in the configuration file or wizard to the location
of the 32-bit libDDBoost.dll library. For example:
PATH=C:\Program Files\Legato\nsr\bin\ddboost32
– If you back up 32-bit Sybase ASE, add the same path to the Windows
%PATH% environment variable for the Sybase user and restart the Sybase
server.

Table 11 Configuring a Data Domain backup

For this type of Data Domain Follow these configuration If your pool contains Data Domain and other types of
deduplication backup instructions devices, follow these additional instructions

Scheduled backup configured with the “Configuring a scheduled backup with the Select the Data Domain backup for the type of deduplication on
wizard wizard” on page 66 the wizard page of deduplication options.

Scheduled backup configured without the “Configuring a scheduled backup without Select the attribute to enable a Data Domain backup in the
wizard the wizard” on page 68 Client resource of the NMDA host.

Manual backup “Configuring a manual backup” on Set NSR_DEVICE_INTERFACE=DATA_DOMAIN in the

page 75 NMDA configuration file. “NSR_DEVICE_INTERFACE” on
page 300 provides details.

Configure a Data Domain backup with deduplication on storage node

To configure a scheduled or manual backup to a Data Domain device that
deduplicates data on a storage node:
1. Follow step 1 to step 4 in “Configure a Data Domain backup with deduplication
on NMDA host” on page 81.
2. Set the parameter NSR_DIRECT_ACCESS=No in one of the following, as
appropriate:
• Scheduled backup (wizard configuration): Advanced option table in the
wizard
• Scheduled backup (client-side configuration): NMDA configuration file (DB2,
Informix, Lotus, Sybase) or Oracle RMAN script
• Manual backup: NMDA configuration file (DB2, Lotus, Sybase), Oracle
RMAN script, environment variable (Informix)
“NSR_DIRECT_ACCESS” on page 300 provides more details on the parameter.

Configure an Informix or Sybase backup to different pools

To configure a single Informix or Sybase backup that backs up database data to a
Data Domain device, and transaction logs to a traditional NetWorker device:
1. Follow step 1 to step 4 in “Configure a Data Domain backup with deduplication
on NMDA host” on page 81 with the following condition:
Ensure that the pool selected for a database backup contains only Data Domain
devices. Do not follow the instructions in the third column of Table 11 on page 82.
2. Configure a pool with traditional devices for the logs and set the
NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL parameter to the pool name.

82 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

3. Do not set NSR_DIRECT_ACCESS=Yes or the backup will fail. Ensure that

NSR_DIRECT_ACCESS is set to either the default value or the value No:
• To back up the database data directly from the NMDA host,
NSR_DIRECT_ACCESS must be set to the default value.
• To back up the database data through the storage node,
NSR_DIRECT_ACCESS=No must be set.

Configuring a probe-based backup

Before you configure a probe-based backup, ensure that the required NetWorker
releases are installed, as described in the EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and
Applications Release Notes.
An NMDA probe-based backup starts when both of the following are true:
◆ (Condition 1) The current time is within a specified window of time (the backup
window, defined by the probe start time and probe end time in the
probe-enabled backup group resource).
◆ One of the following conditions is met:
• (Condition 2) A specified amount of time has elapsed since the previous
probe-based backup.
• (Condition 3) One or all of the probes associated with the backup are
successful, depending on the probe success criteria specified in the backup
configuration.
The probe success criteria can be set in the NetWorker Group resource to the
value Any or All.
At specified probe intervals, the NetWorker server performs the following:
1. The server checks for condition 1, to determine if the current time is within the
backup window.
2. If condition 1 is met, then the server checks for condition 2, to determine if a
specified amount of time has elapsed since the last probe-based backup:
• If condition 2 is met, then the server starts the probe-based backup.
• If condition 2 is not met, then the server checks for condition 3, to determine if
one or all of the probes are successful:
– If the probe success criteria is set to Any, and any one of the probes is
successful, then the server starts the probe-based backup.
– If the probe success criteria is set to All, and all of the probes are successful,
then the server starts the probe-based backup.

NMDA probe
The NMDA nsrdaprobe program checks for one of the following conditions,
depending on the particular database or application:
◆ For DB2, Informix, or Oracle, the nsrdaprobe program checks for the number of
logs generated since the last probe-based backup.
◆ For Lotus, the nsrdaprobe program checks for the size of Domino transaction logs
generated since the last backup of the Domino database specified by
LOTUS_NSF_FILE in the NetWorker Probe resource.

Configuring a probe-based backup 83

Backup Configuration

◆ For Sybase, the nsrdaprobe program checks for the number of transaction log
pages generated since the last probe-based backup.

Note: After a point-in-time restore to an earlier time or any other database operation that
causes a log reset, the probe triggers a new backup.

IMPORTANT
(Sybase only) Due to a Sybase limitation, NMDA does not support probe-based
backups with nsrdaprobe of a Sybase database that has the data and log segments
on the same device because it cannot determine the used log pages for such a
configuration.
For example, assume that database SYBDB1 on Sybase server SYBSERVER1 has
data and log segments on the same device. If you configure a probe-based backup
of SYBDB1 only (SYBASE:/SYBSERVER1/SYBDB1), nsrdaprobe always requests
that the backup be run, regardless of the amount of log pages generated.
If you configure a probe-based backup of the whole server
(SYBASE:/SYBSERVER1), nsrdaprobe does not use the log pages for SYBDB1
when calculating the amount of log pages generated for the whole SYBSERVER1.

User-defined probe
If you want to check for a user-defined condition (other than the number or size of
generated logs) that triggers a probe-based backup, create a script or program that
meets the following requirements:
◆ Script or program name starts with nsr or save.
◆ Script or program is located in the same directory as the NetWorker client
binaries on the host where the condition is checked.
◆ Script or program file includes the “execute” permission.
◆ Script or program returns one of the following code values when it finishes
running its probe:
• 0 — Signifies that the backup condition has been met. The backup runs.
• 1 — Signifies that the backup condition has not been met. The backup does not
run.
• Other than 0 or 1 — Signifies that an error occurred during the probe. The
backup does not run.
Example 5 on page 88 shows an NMDA probe-based backup with a user-defined
probe.

Configure a probe-based backup

The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide and NMC online help provide information
on how to configure the attribute settings of the NetWorker resources for
probe-based backups.

84 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

To configure a probe-based NMDA backup:

1. Create a separate NetWorker Probe resource for the nsrdaprobe program and
any other script/program that checks for a user-defined condition.
Set the Probe resource attributes as described in Table 12 on page 85.

IMPORTANT
A separate NetWorker Probe resource must be created for each database that will
be probed by the nsrdaprobe program.

Table 12 NetWorker Probe resource attributes (page 1 of 2)

Attribute Description

Name Specify a name to identify the Probe resource. Each Probe resource must have a unique name, which does not have to be the same as the
probe script or program name.

Probe Specify the name of the probe script or program that checks (“probes”) for the condition that triggers a probe-based backup. Specify
Command nsrdaprobe to use the NMDA probe, or specify the user-created script or program.

Command Required for the nsrdaprobe program only, specify a comma-separated list of parameters with their settings. “Command Options settings
Options for the nsrdaprobe program” on page 87 outlines the possible parameter settings.

Parameter Type of client Description

LOG_THRESHOLD DB2, Informix, Mandatory. Specify the change threshold, which is the minimum number of logs required to
Oracle trigger a new probe-based backup.

Lotus Mandatory. Specify the change threshold, which is the minimum size in KB of Lotus Domino
transaction logs required to trigger a new probe-based backup.
IMPORTANT: For Lotus circular and linear transaction logging, the change threshold value must
be sufficiently smaller than the value specified by “Maximum log space” in the Domino server
“Transactional Logging” configuration. This requirement ensures that a probe-based backup is
triggered before the transaction log size exceeds the maximum log space value and causes
transaction logs to be overwritten.

Sybase Mandatory. Specify the change threshold, which is the minimum number of Sybase transaction
log pages required to trigger a new probe-based backup.

LOTUS_NSF_FILE Lotus Recommended. Specify the full pathname of a Domino database file that is used for transaction
log querying. The specified database file can be any file that is backed up by the associated
scheduled backup.
If this parameter is not set, the default value used is admin4.nsf in the Lotus data directory
(UNIX) or C:\Program Files\IBM\Lotus\Domino\data\admin4.nsf (Windows).

NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL All Optional. Specify the level of debug information generated by the probe and written to the debug
log. “NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL” on page 298 provides more details on debug levels.

NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_ All Optional. Specify the directory location of the NMDA debug logs, including those generated by
DEST the probe. “NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST” on page 300 provides more details.

Configuring a probe-based backup 85

Backup Configuration

Table 12 NetWorker Probe resource attributes (page 2 of 2)

Attribute Description

Command Parameter Type of client Description

Options
NSR_ORACLE_ Oracle Optional. Set if both of the following are true:
CONNECT_FILE • The Client resource is not configured with the wizard.
• The NWORA resource file is not set up with the Oracle home and database connection
information.
Specify the pathname of the RMAN connection file, which contains the connection strings
required to connect to the Oracle database that is to be probed.
“Command Options settings for the nsrdaprobe program” on page 87 provides a sample setting
of this parameter.

ORACLE_SERVICE Oracle Optional. Set if both of the following are true:

• The Client resource is not configured with the wizard.
• The NWORA resource file is set up with the Oracle home and database connection
information through the command nsroraadmin –r add sid=Net_service_name
home=Oracle_home connect=connect_filepath.
“Configuring the NWORA resource file with the nsroraadmin program” on page 270 provides
details on the nsroraadmin command.
Specify the Net service name for the Oracle database that is to be probed. In this case, the
ORACLE_SERVICE setting must be the same as the NSR_ORACLE_SID setting in the
NWORA resource file.
“Command Options settings for the nsrdaprobe program” on page 87 provides a sample setting
of this parameter.

At the end of a successful probe-based backup, the nsrdaprobe program stores

information about the current transaction log and some other database
information in the State attribute of the Probe resource. The State attribute is not
used with user-defined probes. The State attribute is visible only in diagnostic
mode.
2. Configure the NetWorker Group resource for a probe-enabled backup group. Set
the probe-specific attributes in the Group resource, as described in the EMC
NetWorker Administration Guide (the section on creating and scheduling a probe
group).
When probing is enabled through the Group resource attributes, each probe is
run once when the probe interval is reached, which is the time window defined
by the Probe Start Time and Probe End Time attributes. The Group's Start Time
attribute is ignored for probe-based groups.

Note: If a probe-enabled backup group is started manually, probing occurs immediately

(only once, not repeatedly at intervals) and the backup starts only if the probe conditions
are met.

3. Configure the NMDA scheduled backup with or without the wizard, according to
instructions in the appropriate section:
• “Configuring a scheduled backup with the wizard” on page 66
• “Configuring a scheduled backup without the wizard” on page 68

86 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

In addition, in the Client resource:

• For the Probe attribute, specify the name of the Probe resource from step 1.
A Client resource can be associated with only one probe.

Note: The configuration wizard does not display the Probe field. If you configure a
Client resource with the wizard, you must then use NMC to edit the Client resource
and set the Probe attribute.

• For the Group attribute, specify the probe-enabled group from step 2.

Note: A probe-based backup group must include at least one probe-enabled client,
which is a Client resource associated with a probe.

Command Options settings for the nsrdaprobe program

To use the nsrdaprobe program that is provided with the NMDA software, the
Command Options attribute in the Probe resource must include specific parameter
settings, which depend on the particular scenario:
◆ The LOG_THRESHOLD parameter is always mandatory.
◆ The NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL and NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST parameters are used
for debugging purposes only. Set NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST only if you do not
have enough space for the logs in the default location. For example:
LOG_THRESHOLD=10, NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL=9, NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST=/tmp

◆ For a Lotus backup only, the LOTUS_NSF_FILE parameter is recommended.

◆ For an Oracle backup only, three possible scenarios dictate the required settings in
the Command Options attribute:
a. The Client resource has been configured with the wizard.
In this case, the Command Options attribute must include the
LOG_THRESHOLD parameter. For example:
LOG_THRESHOLD=10

b. The Client resource has been configured without the wizard (client-side
configuration) and the NWORA resource file has not been set up with the
Oracle home and database connection information.
In this case, the Command Options attribute must include the parameters
LOG_THRESHOLD and NSR_ORACLE_CONNECT_FILE. For example:
LOG_THRESHOLD=10, NSR_ORACLE_CONNECT_FILE=/RMAN/rmanpw

c. The Client resource has been configured without the wizard and the NWORA
resource file is set up to retrieve Oracle home and database connection
information.
The Command Options attribute must include the parameters
LOG_THRESHOLD and ORACLE_SERVICE, where ORACLE_SERVICE is
set to the same Net service name as NSR_ORACLE_SID in the NWORA file.
For example:
LOG_THRESHOLD=10, ORACLE_SERVICE=proddb.world

The NWORA resource file must be set up through the command nsroraadmin
–r add sid=Net_service_name home=Oracle_home connect=connect_filepath.

Configuring a probe-based backup 87

Backup Configuration

“Configuring the NWORA resource file with the nsroraadmin program” on

page 270 provides details on the nsroraadmin command.

Example 5 Multiple probes for a probe-based backup

A probe-based backup may be configured with multiple probes. Depending on the

Probe Success Criteria setting in the Group resource, a backup starts when the
conditions for any or all of the probes are met.
In the following Oracle-specific example, a probe-based backup is triggered when
both of the following conditions are true:
◆ At least 25 Oracle log files are generated on an NMDA client named dbhost.
◆ More than two tape drives are idle in a jukebox, attached to a NetWorker storage
node named jukeboxhost. The jukebox is used to save the data for the
probe-based backup.
The probe runs every hour between 6 PM and 2 AM or until the above conditions are
met, whichever occurs first.
Both the NMDA client and storage node are Solaris machines.
The nsrdaprobe program is installed with the NMDA software in /usr/sbin on the
NMDA client. The nsrdaprobe program checks for the number of Oracle log files
generated on the NMDA client.
A script named nsrjukeboxprobe is created with “execute” permissions and stored in
the /usr/sbin directory on the storage node. The script checks for the number of idle
tape drives in the jukebox, and returns either of two values:
◆ 0 — Signifies that more than two tape drives are idle in the jukebox.
◆ 1 — Signifies that two or fewer tape drives are idle in the jukebox.
To configure this probe-based backup:
1. Create a Probe resource for the nsrdaprobe program with the following attribute
settings:
• Name: NMDA Oracle probe
• Probe Command: nsrdaprobe
• Command Options: LOG_THRESHOLD=25
2. Create a Probe resource for the user-defined probe with the following attribute
settings:
• Name: Jukebox probe
• Probe Command: nsrjukeboxprobe
3. Create a Group resource with the required attribute settings for the
probe-enabled backup group, including the following:
• Name: probe_group
• Probe Interval: 60
• Probe Start Time: 18:00
• Probe End Time: 2:00
• Probe Based Group: Enabled

Note: This is a checkbox in NMC.

• Probe Success Criteria: All

88 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

4. Configure an NMDA scheduled backup through the wizard. The Client resource
includes the following attribute settings:
• Name: dbhost
• Backup Command: nsrdasv -T oracle
• Group: probe_group
• Probe: NMDA Oracle probe
• Save Set: RMAN:/orcl102_FULL
5. Create a Schedule resource named SkipAll, and set the level to skip for each day
in the schedule. This enables a jukebox probe to run on the storage node without
backing up the storage node host:
• Name: SkipAll
• Period: Either Week or Month
• Calendar: Skip

Note: The Skip level is selected for every day in the period.

6. Create a “dummy” Client resource without the wizard for the storage node host,
with the following attribute settings:
• Name: jukeboxhost
• Backup Command: (blank)
• Group: probe_group
• Probe: Jukebox probe
• Save Set: SKIP

Note: A keyword is required in this attribute.

• Schedule: SkipAll

Configuring a parallel backup

The NMDA software supports backups that are performed with multiple parallel
sessions (also known as multiple streams, multiple channels, or multinode). This
technology extracts multiple streams of data in parallel from a database, and writes
them in parallel to one or more storage devices. This method can significantly
enhance performance when a large amount of data is backed up or restored.
A parallel backup may lead to data multiplexing. Multiplexing is the NetWorker
ability to write multiple backup streams simultaneously to the same storage device.
NetWorker multiplexes backup streams when all the following conditions are true:
◆ The NetWorker device type is not AFTD or Data Domain.
◆ The number of parallel backup sessions is greater than the number of devices
available for backup.
◆ The target session value is not set to 1 for the device.
The use of NetWorker multiplexing can improve backup performance, but it can
adversely affect restore performance for Informix, Lotus, and Oracle.

Configuring a parallel backup 89

Backup Configuration

IMPORTANT
NetWorker multiplexing must be disabled for DB2 and Sybase backups.
Otherwise, the restore will become suspended or fail.

NetWorker multiplexing can be disabled by setting the number of backup sessions

equal to the number of available storage devices, and setting the target session value
to 1 for those devices.
Parallel backups to AFTD or Data Domain devices are not multiplexed. However, the
use of multiple concurrent streams to the same device can impact the overall
throughput and deduplication ratio. It is recommended to minimize the number of
sessions to any device that involves deduplication by setting the target session
attribute value of the device to 1. The EMC NetWorker Data Domain Deduplication
Devices Integration Guide provides details.
To configure an NMDA parallel backup, as either a manual or scheduled backup:
1. Determine the number of available devices and the target and maximum sessions
per device for the backup.
2. On the NetWorker server:
a. Set the server parallelism in the NetWorker Server resource and the client
parallelism in the NetWorker Client resource to a value greater than the
number of sessions to be used for NMDA backups. “NetWorker Server
resource” on page 60 and “Configure the Client resource” on page 72 provide
details on the parallelism setting.
b. If required, create a Device resource for each device according to “NetWorker
Device resource” on page 63.
c. For DB2 and Sybase backups, disable NetWorker multiplexing.
3. Use the instructions in the appropriate section to specify the number of sessions
(parallelism) to be used for a backup:

Note: The backup parallelism should not be greater than the total number of device
sessions available for the backup through the media pool configuration, as determined in
step 1. Otherwise, the backup will become suspended because it is waiting for an available
device to be mounted for the proper pool, or the backup will fail if not enough devices are
available.

• “Configure a DB2 parallel backup” on page 91

• “Configure an Informix parallel backup” on page 91
• “Configure a Lotus parallel backup” on page 91
• “Configure an Oracle parallel backup” on page 91
• “Configure a Sybase parallel (multistripe) backup” on page 92

90 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Configure a DB2 parallel backup

Specify the backup to use the number of sessions equal to the number of available
backup devices:
◆ For a scheduled backup that is configured with the configuration wizard, specify
the number of DB2 backup sessions on the corresponding wizard page.
◆ For a scheduled backup that uses an NMDA configuration file, set the number of
sessions in the DB2_SESSIONS parameter.
◆ For a manual backup, specify the number of sessions with the open sessions
option of the db2 command on the operating system command line, for example:
db2 backup db sample load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.xx open # sessions
options @/pathname/nmda_db2.cfg

where:
• sample is the name of the DB2 database.
• xx is the platform-specific extension.
• # is the number of sessions.
• pathname/nmda_db2.cfg is the complete pathname of the NMDA
configuration file for the DB2 backup.

Configure an Informix parallel backup

For both manual and scheduled backups, set the Informix parameter
BAR_MAX_BACKUP in the $ONCONFIG file.
The Informix IDS documentation on the IBM website provides more details on the
$ONCONFIG file and parameter settings.

Configure a Lotus parallel backup

Specify that the backup will use the number of sessions equal to the number of
available backup devices:
◆ For a scheduled backup that is configured with the configuration wizard, specify
the number of Lotus backup sessions on the corresponding wizard page.
◆ For a manual backup or scheduled backup that uses an NMDA configuration file,
set the number of sessions in the NSR_PARALLELISM parameter.

Configure an Oracle parallel backup

For a scheduled backup that is configured with the configuration wizard, specify the
number of Oracle backup sessions (channels) on the corresponding wizard page.
For a scheduled backup that uses an NMDA configuration file, and for a manual
backup, allocate multiple RMAN channels. The number of channels determines the
backup parallelism.

Configuring a parallel backup 91

Backup Configuration

Oracle does not recommend the use of NetWorker multiplexing with RMAN
multiplexing. “Configuring a parallel backup” on page 89 describes how to disable
NetWorker multiplexing.
To guarantee that NetWorker multiplexing is not used no matter what the storage
device settings are on the server, you can set the NSR_NO_MULTIPLEX parameter,
as described in “NSR_NO_MULTIPLEX” on page 317.
If you want to use NetWorker multiplexing in addition to RMAN multiplexing, run
the set parallelmediarestore off command during the Oracle restore, to avoid
restore performance degradation. For example:
set parallelmediarestore off;
run {
allocate channel c1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
restore database;
release channel c1;
}

Configure a Sybase parallel (multistripe) backup

NMDA does not support multistripe backups for the backup of transaction logs
(incremental backups). If the multistripe backup option is used for incremental
backups, the NMDA software automatically converts the backup to a non-multistripe
(single-stripe) incremental backup.
Specify the backup to use the number of multistripe sessions:
◆ For a scheduled backup that is configured with the configuration wizard, specify
the number of sessions on the corresponding wizard page.
◆ For a manual backup or scheduled backup that uses an NMDA configuration file,
set the number of sessions in the NSR_PARALLELISM parameter.

DB2 backup considerations

The following section describes additional requirements for configuring DB2
backups.

Considerations for automated deletion of DB2 recovery objects

If you set the DB2 database configuration parameter AUTO_DEL_REC_OBJ=ON to
configure the DB2 database manager to automatically prune the database history and
to delete the corresponding backup images, load copy images, and log files, the DB2
system might perform this maintenance operation as part of the backup operation,
for example, after a successful full backup.
To ensure the successful deletion of the requested objects from NetWorker, ensure
that the DB2 user that runs the backup is granted the Operate NetWorker privilege on
the NetWorker server used for the backup.
You can also prune the history file and delete the backups manually. “Delete DB2
backups” on page 134 provides more details.

92 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Configure DB2 automatic transaction log backups

After you have configured the automatic backup of DB2 transaction logs, the log
backups are triggered based on DB2 database policy settings. In this case, the NMDA
software has no control of when the logs are backed up, how often, and so on. To
ensure the success of the log backups, ensure that a device is always available for the
backups.
To have NMDA automatically back up the DB2 transaction logs when they
become full:
1. Create an NMDA configuration file for backing up the transaction logs only. For
example, this configuration file could be named nmda_db2_tlogs.cfg.
Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” describes the syntax
and parameters that must be used in the configuration file:
• The NSR_SERVER parameter is required. Set this parameter to the hostname
of the NetWorker server that will back up the logs.
• If the configuration file is for a cluster environment, add the NSR_CLIENT
parameter, which is typically set to the virtual cluster hostname.
The following is a simple example of the configuration file contents for
transaction log backups:
NSR_SERVER=TURBO
NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL=DB2INST1_Logs

2. Configure the database with the command and options appropriate for the client
operating system:
• On UNIX systems:
$ db2 update db cfg for sample using logarchmeth1
VENDOR:/usr/lib/libnsrdb2.xx logarchopt1
@pathname/nmda_db2_tlogs.cfg

• On Windows systems:
$ db2 update db cfg for sample using logarchmeth1
VENDOR:NetWorker_install_dir\nsr\bin\libnsrdb2.dll logarchopt1
@pathname\nmda_db2_tlogs.cfg

where:
– sample is the name of the database to be backed up.
– xx is the platform-specific extension:
– o (AIX)
– sl (HP PA-RISC)
– so (Linux, Solaris, HP Itanium)
– pathname/nmda_db2_tlogs.cfg is the complete pathname of the
configuration file (relative pathnames are not supported).
– NetWorker_install_dir is the path on Windows systems where the
NetWorker software is installed.
3. Once the steps 1 to 2 are completed, manually perform a full backup of the
database, as described in “Perform a DB2 manual backup” on page 120.

IMPORTANT
An initial full backup of the database is required.

DB2 backup considerations 93

Backup Configuration

Informix backup considerations

The following section describes additional requirements for configuring Informix
backups.

Configure Informix automatic (continuous) logical log backups

To have NMDA automatically back up the IDS logical logs when they become full,
modify the Informix automatic log backup script, log_full.sh (UNIX) or log_full.bat
(Windows), on the IDS host to include the following lines:
◆ On UNIX systems:
NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL=NetWorker_pool_name
NSR_SERVER = NetWorker_server_name
export NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL
export NSR_SERVER

◆ On Windows systems:
set NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL=NetWorker_pool_name
set NSR_SERVER = NetWorker_server_name

The Informix ALARMPROGRAM configuration option can be used to start the

backups on demand when the logical logs fill.
After a log file is successfully backed up, ON-Bar closes the file, frees the space used
by the file, and opens a new file for transaction logging.
Logical log backups are always performed as level full (ON-Bar level 0) backups.

IMPORTANT
Informix recommends dedicating a backup device for continuous log backups.
This ensures that a device on the backup server is always available to receive
logical log data.

Lotus backup considerations

The following sections describe additional requirements for configuring Lotus
backups.

Ensure the environment settings for Lotus operations

For Lotus manual backups with a Domino server on Solaris or Linux only, ensure that
the environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH is set to the complete pathname of
the Lotus directory that contains the library files libnotes.so and libndgts.so. The
variable must be set in the same shell in which you perform the operation.

Considerations for Lotus database or directory link backups

By default, the NMDA software follows Lotus directory and database links when it
forms the file list for a Lotus backup. NMDA backs up both the Lotus link files and
the data files or directories that the link files point to.

94 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

To prevent NMDA from following the directory and database links, ensure that the
following parameter is set through the wizard or in the NMDA configuration file:
NSR_FOLLOW_LINKS = FALSE

If a database link, link.nsf, or directory link, link.dir, has a bad reference (either the
destination database or directory does not exist or cannot be opened properly),
NMDA cannot determine whether the file is a link or an actual database or directory.
In this case, the link is not backed up because NMDA does not know whether to back
it up as a database, directory, or regular operating system file. The backup fails unless
the parameter NSR_SKIPDBERRORS is set to TRUE in the NMDA configuration file.

Considerations for Lotus transaction log backups

“Full and incremental Lotus backups” on page 34 describes the conditions for the
backup of Lotus transaction logs.
During an incremental backup, archived transaction logs are always backed up. By
default, each successfully backed-up log is also marked reusable to enable the
Domino server to free space in the log repository. You can set the
NSR_RETAIN_NUM_LOGS parameter or the corresponding wizard option to back
up a specified number of logs without marking them reusable. The recovery process
can be faster when you retain a set of the logs on the Domino system because the logs
do not need to be restored from NetWorker. Example 6 on page 95 shows how the
NSR_RETAIN_NUM_LOGS setting can affect log backups.
During a full backup, transaction logs are not backed up by default. You can set the
NSR_BACKUP_LOGS_MODE parameter or the corresponding wizard option to
either back up the archived transaction logs and mark them reusable, or just mark the
logs reusable without backing them up. You can use the NSR_RETAIN_NUM_LOGS
parameter together with NSR_BACKUP_LOGS_MODE for full backups.
You can set the NSR_MAX_TXN_LOGS parameter or corresponding wizard option
to specify the number of logs to be stored per save set.
“Lotus-specific NMDA parameters” on page 307 provides details on the parameters.

Example 6 Using NSR_RETAIN_NUM_LOGS to control reusable logs

If you set NSR_RETAIN_NUM_LOGS = 5 and there are 20 archived transaction logs

to be backed up, NMDA performs the following:
1. Backs up the first 15 logs and marks them reusable.
2. Backs up the last 5 logs without marking them reusable.
During a subsequent backup, after an additional 11 logs have been generated,
NMDA performs the following:
1. Recognizes that the first (oldest) 5 logs have already been backed up, and does not
back them up again but marks them reusable.
2. Backs up 6 of the new logs and marks them reusable.
3. Backs up the last 5 logs without marking them reusable.

Lotus backup considerations 95

Backup Configuration

Comfort span
NMDA supports the NSR_COMFORT_SPAN parameter for incremental backups
only when the Domino server is enabled for transaction logging in archive mode. The
parameter specifies the acceptable amount of logs in kilobytes that can be applied to a
database during the recovery. If that amount is exceeded at backup time, NMDA
backs up the database file as a full backup in addition to backing up the logs. A full
backup reduces future recovery time. Fewer transaction logs are required to recover
the logged database.

Note: When the Domino server is enabled for transaction logging in archive mode, the default
NMDA behavior during an incremental backup is to back up the transaction logs only.

For example, the NMDA configuration contains the following parameter settings for
a Lotus incremental database backup with the comfort span option:
NSR_BACKUP_LEVEL = incr
NSR_COMFORT_SPAN = 196608

If NMDA determines that more than 196608 KB of logs need to be applied to recover
the specified database, NMDA backs up the database in addition to backing up the
logs.

Partitioned Domino server backups

For backups of partitioned Domino servers, you must configure the backup for each
partition separately. The configuration is the same as for the backup of a regular
Domino server except that the NSR_LOTUS_DATA_DIR parameter must specify
which partitioned Domino server to back up. For manual backups and scheduled
backups configured without the wizard, set NSR_LOTUS_DATA_DIR in the
configuration file. The NSR_LOTUS_DATA_DIR setting is mandatory in the
configuration wizard.

Note: The NSR_LOTUS_DATA_DIR parameter does not specify the data to be backed up. To
specify the backup data, set NSR_BACKUP_LOTUS_DIR or NSR_BACKUP_PATHS in the
configuration file, or set the equivalents in the NetWorker User for Lotus GUI or the
configuration wizard (select the directories or files to be backed up).

For a scheduled backup configured without the wizard, in the Save Set attribute of the
Client resource, specify a descriptive name for the backup save set to be stored on the
media. The Save Set value must start with the NOTES: prefix. For example, you could
specify the following for the Save Set attribute:
◆ When you back up the entire data directory for the partition:
NOTES:partition1_/disk2/notesdata1

◆ When you back up a database named db.nsf for the partition:

NOTES:partition1_/disk2/notesdata1/db.nsf

96 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Lotus DAOS backups

You can use the nsrdaadmin -W command to convert an NMDA client-side DAOS
configuration to the NMDA server-side (wizard) DAOS configuration. “Converting a
client-side to server-side configuration” on page 64 provides details on using the
conversion command.

Note: After the configuration conversion, the DAOS backups will run successfully. However,
when you use the wizard for the first time to modify the DAOS configuration, you must enter
the path for DAOS base directory on the wizard page Specify the Lotus Domino/Notes
Information.

In an integrated DAOS backup, Domino data is backed up first and then the DAOS
repository or part of it is backed up second during the same backup session. In a
stand-alone DAOS backup, only the DAOS files are backed up without the Domino
database files. An integrated DAOS backup is highly recommended by IBM and
preferred over a stand-alone backup.
To configure an integrated backup of Domino database files and DAOS (NLO files):
1. Review the best practices for DAOS backups as described in “Best practices for
Lotus DAOS backups” on page 97.
2. Follow the configuration steps as described in “Configure an integrated Lotus
DAOS backup” on page 98.

Best practices for Lotus DAOS backups

Review the IBM documentation for details on the required DAOS configuration and
backup practices.
The following list provides specific best practices for reference purposes:
◆ The DAOS deferred deletion interval should be set to a period longer than the
backup cycle, which is the time period between full backups.

Note: The Domino server deletes an attachment in a DAOS directory only when the last
database referencing it is deleted and after a user-defined delay time called the deferred
deletion interval.

◆ The NLO files should not be pruned from the DAOS repository before they have
been backed up. This ensures that the NLO files will be recoverable.
◆ The daos.cfg and daoscat.nsf files (stored in the Lotus data directory) should not
be included in Lotus DAOS backups.
The IBM documentation provides complete details on the requirements and
recommendations for DAOS setup procedures.

Note: A DAOS backup also backs up transaction logs if its backup level is incremental or the
NSR_BACKUP_LOGS_MODE parameter is set for a full backup.

Lotus backup considerations 97

Backup Configuration

Configure a stand-alone Lotus DAOS backup

If you want to back up only DAOS files without backing up Domino database files
(DAOS stand-alone backup), then follow the steps for configuring a regular Lotus
backup, and specify the following parameter settings in the LOTUS{} section of the
configuration file:
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS=DAOS_directory
NSR_BACKUP_ALL_EXTENSIONS=TRUE

Note: The NMDA wizard does not support the configuration of the stand-alone DAOS backup.
If you want to use the NetWorker User for Lotus GUI for the backup, you must not set the
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS parameter. Instead, select the DAOS directory through the GUI.

Configure an integrated Lotus DAOS backup

This section provides information on how to configure a manual or scheduled
integrated backup, where the Domino data is backed up first and the DAOS repository
or part of it is backed up second during the same backup session.

Note:
- The DAOS backup runs only if the Domino data backup succeeds.
- The NetWorker User for Lotus GUI does not support an integrated backup. If you want to use
the GUI, you must run a stand-alone database backup first, followed by a stand-alone DAOS
backup.

Configure an integrated backup by using one of these methods:

◆ “Wizard method (server-side configuration)” on page 98
◆ “Nonwizard method (client-side configuration)” on page 99

Wizard method (server-side configuration)

To configure a scheduled integrated backup with the configuration wizard:

1. On the wizard page Specify the Lotus Domino/Notes Information, select
Perform DAOS backup and specify the root path of the DAOS directory in
DAOS base directory.

Note: Set the DAOS base directory field even if you will back up just a subset of the DAOS
repository.

2. On the page Select the Backup Objects, select at least one Lotus Domino data file
to be backed up.
3. On each wizard page that appears, specify the options and values required to
configure the Domino server backup first, followed by the DAOS backup
configuration. Note the following recommendations:
• On the page Specify the Database and File Options, if the DAOS directory is
in the Domino data path to be backed up, add the DAOS directory to the
exclude path list so the DAOS directory is excluded from the Domino data
backup.
• On the page Select the Domino Attachment Object Service (DAOS)
Additional Parameters, you might want to set the NSR_SAVESET_BROWSE
and NSR_SAVESET_RETENTION parameters, to keep the DAOS backups for
a longer period of time than the corresponding Domino data backup.

98 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Nonwizard method (client-side configuration)

To configure a manual or scheduled integrated backup without the configuration

wizard, set the required parameters in a single configuration file:
1. Set the parameters required for the Domino data backup in the LOTUS{} section
of the configuration file. For example, the following parameter in the LOTUS{}
section specifies the backup of the Lotus data directory:
NSR_BACKUP_LOTUS_DIR=TRUE

The LOTUS{} section must include either NSR_BACKUP_LOTUS_DIR or

NSR_BACKUP_PATHS, but not both, to specify at least one Domino data file for
the backup.
2. If the DAOS directory is in the Domino data path to be backed up, add the DAOS
directory to the exclude list in the NSR_EXCLUDE_LIST parameter in the
LOTUS{} section so that the DAOS directory is excluded from the Domino data
backup.
3. Set the following mandatory parameters in the LOTUS_DAOS{} section of the
configuration file:
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS=DAOS_base_dirpath_or_list_of_subdirectory_paths
NSR_BACKUP_ALL_EXTENSIONS=TRUE

The parameter settings in the LOTUS_DAOS{} section apply only to the DAOS
backup, not to the Domino data backup.

Note: If you wish to back up the daos.cfg file in the Lotus data directory and the parameter
settings in the LOTUS{} section do not include the backup of the file, you must add the
filepath to the NSR_BACKUP_PATHS setting in the LOTUS_DAOS{} section.

IMPORTANT
In the configuration file, the LOTUS_DAOS{} section must be located after the
LOTUS{} section, to ensure that the DAOS files are backed up after the Domino
database files.

The LOTUS{} and LOTUS_DAOS{} sections can include different parameter settings
that specify different backups levels and so on for the Domino data and DAOS
backups.
The DAOS backup inherits most of the parameters set in the LOTUS{} section. If the
same parameter is required for both backups (for example, Notes_ExecDirectory),
then it is sufficient to set it in the LOTUS{} section only. For the DAOS backup, a
parameter setting in the LOTUS_DAOS{} section overrides the setting of the same
parameter in the LOTUS{} section.
The following parameters are not inherited from the LOTUS{} section, and apply only
to the section in which they are specified:
◆ NSR_BACKUP_PATHS
◆ NSR_EXCLUDE_FILE
◆ NSR_EXCLUDE_LIST
The following parameters do not apply to DAOS backups:
◆ NSR_BACKUP_LOTUS_DIR
◆ NSR_COMFORT_SPAN

Lotus backup considerations 99

Backup Configuration

◆ NSR_FOLLOW_LINKS
◆ NSR_SKIPDBERRORS
◆ PRECMD
The catalog file is updated and the post-command is run after the DAOS backup ends.
As a result, if NSR_CATALOGFILE and POSTCMD are set to different values in the
LOTUS_DAOS{} section and in the LOTUS{} section, then the values from the
LOTUS_DAOS{} section are used.
You might want to set the following parameter values in the LOTUS_DAOS{} section,
to different values than in the LOTUS{} section:
◆ NSR_BACKUP_LEVEL=incr, in case the databases are backed up as full.
◆ NSR_SAVESET_BROWSE and NSR_SAVESET_RETENTION, to keep the DAOS
backups for a longer period of time.
◆ NSR_SAVESET_NAME, to specify a different name for DAOS save sets that
differentiates them from Domino data save sets. For example, set
NSR_SAVESET_NAME=NOTES_DAOS.
If NSR_SAVESET_NAME is not set, the DAOS backup save set has the same
name as the Domino data save set from the same integrated backup, such as
NOTES_number. A save set with the same name appears twice in the scheduled
backup details displayed in the NMC interface.
Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides details on the
NMDA configuration file and Lotus-specific parameters.

Lotus restartable scheduled backups

You can configure a Lotus restartable scheduled backup either through the wizard or
the nonwizard method.
For either method, use the NMC program to optionally set the Client Retries attribute
in the Group resource to a value greater than zero. This enables the automatic restart
of a failed backup. Otherwise, you will need to restart the backup manually through
the group restart option.
To configure a restartable scheduled backup with the wizard, follow the instructions
in “Configuring a scheduled backup with the wizard” on page 66 and select the
Checkpoint Enabled checkbox on the proper wizard page.
To configure a restartable scheduled backup without the wizard, follow the
instructions in “Configuring a scheduled backup without the wizard” on page 68 and
select the Checkpoint Enabled checkbox in the NMC Client resource.

Note: The NMDA software ignores the Checkpoint Granularity attribute during a checkpoint
restartable backup. Changing the attribute setting has no impact on the NMDA Lotus backup.

“Lotus restartable backup information in NetWorker indexes” on page 133 describes

the information about Lotus restartable backups that the NetWorker server maintains
in the NetWorker indexes.

100 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Oracle backup considerations

The following sections describe additional requirements for configuring Oracle
backups. Certain NMDA parameters that are required for an Oracle scheduled
backup (for example, ORACLE_HOME) must be set in the configuration file, and all
the other NMDA parameters (for example, NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL) must be
set in the RMAN script, as described in “Oracle-specific NMDA parameters” on
page 315.
RMAN backup scripts can be stored as flat ASCII files. Alternatively, if a Recovery
Catalog is used, backup scripts can be stored in the Recovery Catalog database. The
appropriate Oracle backup and recovery documentation provides information on
storing the backup scripts in the Recovery Catalog database.
If automatic channel allocation and persistent settings are used, the backup
command can be run as a stand-alone command. “Configure automatic channel
allocation” on page 104 provides more details.
To perform a backup to NetWorker by using NMDA, set the type option in the
allocate channel command to SBT or SBT_TAPE.
In the RMAN backup script in Example 7 on page 101, the format string
FULL_%d_%U specifies the name of each backup piece. This name can be anything,
provided that each backup piece has a unique name on the NetWorker server.
Substitution variables, such as %d and %U, can be used to guarantee unique names:
◆ %d specifies the name of the database.
◆ %U specifies a unique Oracle system-generated filename.
A format string such as FULL or FULL_%d will not generate unique names.
Similarly, the format string FULL_%U will not generate unique names for two
databases that are being backed up to the same NetWorker server.

IMPORTANT
If a backup piece name is not unique, the Oracle backup fails.

RMAN scripts for manual backups

For Oracle manual backups, all the parameters must be set in the RMAN backup
script. The use of the send command is recommended for setting any parameter in
the RMAN script if the backup copies feature is not used. “The send command” on
page 324 and “Backup copies” on page 39 provide more details.
Example 7 on page 101 provides a sample RMAN script for a manual backup.

Example 7 RMAN script for a manual backup

The following RMAN script is for a manual backup of an entire Oracle database to
the volume pool MondayFulls of the (remote) NetWorker server mars.emc.com:
run {
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT’;
allocate channel t2 type ’SBT’;

send ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=mars.emc.com,
NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=MondayFulls)’;

Oracle backup considerations 101

Backup Configuration

backup full filesperset 4 format ’FULL_%d_%U’ (database);

release channel t1;

release channel t2;
}

During an Oracle manual backup, the prefix RMAN: automatically precedes the
backup piece name in the NetWorker media database. For example, if the backup
piece name specified in the RMAN script is accounts_data_file, the manual backup
records the save set name as RMAN:accounts_data_file in the media database. The
mminfo command displays the save set name in this form.
The following sources provide more information:
◆ The appropriate Oracle backup and recovery documentation provides
information on how to write RMAN scripts.
◆ The Oracle Enterprise Manager documentation provides information on how to
use the Oracle Enterprise Manager Backup Wizard to generate RMAN scripts.
◆ Appendix B, “Oracle RMAN Commands,” provides important information on
RMAN commands.
◆ “Verifying the backup information in the NetWorker indexes” on page 131
describes the information stored for a backup in the NetWorker indexes.

RMAN scripts for scheduled backups

When a scheduled backup is configured without the wizard (client-side
configuration), certain NMDA parameters (for example, ORACLE_HOME) that are
required for scheduled backups must be set in the configuration file, as described in
“Oracle-specific NMDA parameters” on page 315. For all the other parameters that
must be set in the RMAN backup script, it is recommended to use the send command
if not using automatic channels. “The send command” on page 324 provides more
details.
“Common NMDA parameters” on page 296 and “Oracle-specific NMDA
parameters” on page 315 include lists of the common and Oracle-specific NMDA
parameters, respectively.

IMPORTANT
For scheduled backups, do not include send as part of the allocate channel
command. The send command must be separate.

For example, NMDA does not support the following for scheduled backups:
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’ send
’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=mars.emc.com)’;

The following is the correct form of the commands:

allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
send channel t1 ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=mars.emc.com)’;

“Configure automatic channel allocation” on page 104 provides information on

automatic channel allocation.
Example 8 on page 103 provides a sample RMAN script for a scheduled backup.

102 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Example 8 RMAN script for a scheduled backup

The following RMAN script is for a scheduled backup of an entire Oracle database to
the volume pool MondayFulls. The Recovery Catalog is used in this case:
connect target target_user/target_passwd@target_Netservicename;
connect rcvcat rcvcat_user/rcvcat_passwd@rcvcat_Netservicename;
run {
set command id to ’xxx’;
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
allocate channel t2 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
send ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=MondayFulls)’;
backup full filesperset 4 format ’FULL_%d_%U’ (database);
release channel t1;
release channel t2;
}

If automatic channel allocation and persistent settings are used, a scheduled RMAN
backup script must still be created and contain the following commands:
◆ connect target
◆ connect rcvcat (if using a Recovery Catalog)
◆ backup
The command connect target target_user/target_passwd@target_Netservicename is
mandatory in each RMAN script for a scheduled backup if Oracle operating system
authentication (ORACLE_USER) is not used. This command establishes the proper
connection to the target database.
Specify the correct values in the connect target command:
◆ target_user is the user with SYSDBA privileges for the target database.
◆ target_passwd is the password of the target_user (for connecting as SYSDBA),
specified in the target database’s orapwd file.
◆ target_Netservicename is the Net service name of the target database. This name is
mandatory in the connect target command.
A password file must be used for the target database. The appropriate Oracle
documentation provides more information.

Note: Since each scheduled backup RMAN script requires a connect target command, each
Oracle instance requires a separate scheduled backup RMAN script, unless Oracle operating
system authentication (ORACLE_USER) is used.

The command connect rcvcat rcvcat_user/rcvcat_passwd@rcvcat_Netservicename is

mandatory if the Recovery Catalog is used for the scheduled Oracle backup. This
command establishes the proper connection to the Recovery Catalog database.
Specify the correct values in the connect rcvcat command:
◆ rcvcat_user is the owner of the Recovery Catalog database.
◆ rcvcat_passwd is the password of the rcvcat_user.
◆ rcvcat_Netservicename is the Net service name of the Recovery Catalog database.
To enable the scheduled backup to be canceled, the scheduled Oracle backup script
must include set command id to ‘xxx’ (where xxx can be any string of characters
enclosed in single quotes). “Cancel a scheduled backup” on page 117 provides more
information on how to cancel a scheduled backup.

Oracle backup considerations 103

Backup Configuration

The remainder of the scheduled backup script in Example 8 on page 103, starting
with the first allocate channel command, is similar to the manual backup script in
Example 7 on page 101 except that the NSR_SERVER parameter setting is not
included.

IMPORTANT
Do not set the parameters NSR_SERVER or NSR_GROUP in a scheduled RMAN
backup script. NMDA sets these two parameters to the values specified in the
Client resource for the scheduled Oracle backup, and these values cannot be
overridden.

Each scheduled backup RMAN script must be stored as a text file. The database
administrator should give minimal permissions to the scheduled backup RMAN
script file. This way, unauthorized users cannot see the sensitive user IDs and
passwords of the target and Recovery Catalog databases.
If a single Oracle instance has multiple RMAN scripts associated with it (for example,
to perform tablespace-level or file-level, full or incremental backups, and so on), the
database administrator might choose to place the two common connect commands in
a single file and invoke those two connect commands in all RMAN scripts by using
the @ command.

Test RMAN scripts for scheduled backups

When you create an RMAN script, test the script before using it for scheduled
backups.
To test the RMAN script, type the following command:
rman cmdfile ’script_name’ send
’”NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=NetWorker_server_name,
NSR_GROUP=group_name)”’

where:
◆ script_name is the RMAN script file pathname.
◆ NetWorker_server_name is the name of the server that starts the backup.
◆ group_name is the name of the scheduled backup group as specified in the Client
resource.

Configure automatic channel allocation

IMPORTANT
Manual and automatic channels are mutually exclusive and cannot be mixed in an
RMAN session.

The format of an automatic channel name of the device type for NMDA backups
and restores is ORA_SBT_n or ORA_SBT_TAPE_n, where n is the channel
number. Do not use this name format for manual channel allocation for NMDA.
Otherwise, RMAN reports an error.

With automatic channel allocation, specification of the send command before the
backup or restore command causes the following error:

RMAN-06422: no channels found for SEND command

104 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

You must use the configure channel...parms... command to set the NMDA
parameters for automatic channels for an NMDA backup. Do not use the send
command or option to set the NMDA parameters for automatic channels if you plan
to use scheduled backups.
The following tables lists all the NMDA parameters and their requirements for Oracle
operations:
◆ Common NMDA parameters: Table 32 on page 296
◆ Oracle-specific NMDA parameters: Table 36 on page 316

Example 9 Using the configure channel command with parms option for automatic channels

An NMDA parameter is set to the same value for all automatic channels by typing the
following configure channel command:
◆ With Oracle version 11gR1 or earlier:
configure channel device type ’sbt_tape’ parms
’ENV=(NSR_CLIENT=mars)’

◆ With Oracle version 11gR2 or later:

configure channel device type ’sbt_tape’ parms
’SBT_PARMS=(NSR_CLIENT=mars)’

This command sets the NSR_CLIENT parameter to the value mars for all the
automatic channels.

Example 10 Specifying parameter values per automatic channel

Specific NMDA parameter values can be set for different channels (for example, a
separate setting of parameter NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL for each channel) by
typing the configure channel n device type...parms... command, where n represents
a channel number.
A NetWorker data volume pool is specified for the second automatic channel by
typing the following configure channel command:
◆ With Oracle version 11gR1 or earlier:
configure channel 2 device type ’sbt_tape’ parms
’ENV=(NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=Oracle2)’

◆ With Oracle version 11gR2 or later:

configure channel 2 device type ’sbt_tape’ parms
’SBT_PARMS=(NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=Oracle2)’

Oracle backup copies

Due to Oracle limitations, the backup copies feature is supported with manual
backups only. For Oracle backup copies, set the NMDA parameters with the parms
option, not with the send command or option.

Oracle backup considerations 105

Backup Configuration

To create multiple copies of manual backups (up to four copies):

1. Use one of the following RMAN commands:
• The configure...backup copies for device type sbt_tape to... command
specifies persistent settings for duplexing backups through NMDA.
For example, specify persistent settings for duplex copies of datafiles and
archived redo logs (respectively) in NMDA backups with the following types
of configure commands:
configure datafile backup copies for device type ’sbt_tape’ to 2
configure archivelog backup copies for device type ’sbt_tape’ to 2

• The backup command with the copies option applies to objects within the
backup command. The backup...copies setting takes precedence over the
persistent settings in the configure...backup copies command.
• The set backup copies command applies to all backup objects in the same run
job.
2. Define a separate NetWorker pool for each copy and set the following parameters
accordingly with the parms option:
• NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL (if copies is set to 1)
• NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL1 (if copies is set to 2)
• NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL2 (if copies is set to 3)
• NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL3 (if copies is set to 4)
Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides details on
these parameters.

Example 11 Using the set backup copies command in the RMAN script

The following RMAN script uses the set backup copies command to generate the
backup copies. The parameters are set with the parms option, as required:

Note: With Oracle version 11gR2 or later, use parms ‘SBT_PARMS=(...)’ instead of
parms ‘ENV=(...)’. “Precedence rules” on page 328 provides details.

run {
set backup copies 4;

allocate channel ch1 parms ’ENV=(NSR_SERVER=server_name,

NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=nmda1, NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL1=nmda2,
NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL2=nmda3, NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL3=nmda4)’;

backup format '%d_%U'

tag tag_name
(tablespace 'SYSTEM' );

release channel ch1;

}

106 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Example 12 Using automatic channels for backup copies

The following configure commands are used to configure RMAN automatic

channels. The configure commands could also be included in the RMAN script. The
configure...backup copies command generates the backup copies. The parameters
are set with the parms option, as required:

Note: With Oracle version 11gR2 or later, use parms ‘SBT_PARMS=(...)’ instead of
parms ‘ENV=(...)’. “Precedence rules” on page 328 provides details.

configure default device type to ’sbt_tape’;

configure datafile backup copies for device type ’sbt_tape’ to 4;
configure channel device type ’sbt_tape’ parms
’ENV=(NSR_SERVER=server_name, NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=nmda1,
NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL1=nmda2, NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL2=nmda3,
NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL3=nmda4)’;

The RMAN script invoked for the manual backup is as follows:

connect target sys/oracle@test;
run {
backup format '%d_%U'
tag tag_name
(tablespace 'SYSTEM');
}

Configure save set bundling for scheduled Oracle backups

To enable save set bundling for scheduled Oracle backups:
◆ If using the configuration wizard:
• Set NSR_BUNDLING to TRUE in the Advanced Environment Options table
on the corresponding wizard page.
• Ensure that the user group privileges for the root or administrative user on the
NMDA client include the Operate NetWorker privileges. The corresponding
User Group resource is configured on the NetWorker server, as described in
“NetWorker User Group resource” on page 61.
◆ If using the nonwizard configuration method:
1. Set the NSR_BUNDLING parameter by typing the following command:
nsroraadmin -r add NSR_BUNDLING enabled

By default, the NSR_BUNDLING parameter value is disabled.

“Configuring the NWORA resource file with the nsroraadmin program” on
page 270 provides details on the nsroraadmin command. The command sets
the parameter value in the NWORA resource file, which is described in
“NWORA resource file” on page 265.
2. Ensure that NMDA scheduled backups are configured properly according to
the “Backup configuration roadmap” on page 56.
3. Ensure that the user group privileges for the root or administrative user on the
NMDA client include the Operate NetWorker privileges. The corresponding
User Group resource is configured on the NetWorker server, as described in
“NetWorker User Group resource” on page 61.

Oracle backup considerations 107

Backup Configuration

4. If the proper username and password are not located in the RMAN script (for
example, the connection strings are included as a command file in the RMAN
script, such as @connection_file), ensure the following:
– The ORACLE_SID parameter is set in the NMDA configuration file, as
described in “Oracle-specific NMDA parameters” on page 315.
– An NWORA SID resource with the NSR_ORACLE_CONNECT_FILE
parameter setting is created in the NWORA resource file (nwora.res) for
the ORACLE_SID, as described in “NWORA SID resources” on page 268.
NMDA cannot retrieve the connection strings from the RMAN script when the
connection strings are included as a command file in the script. In this case,
NMDA must retrieve the connection strings from the connection file specified
by the parameter in the NWORA resource file.
5. In a RAC system, ensure that all channels are allocated on the same NMDA
client node where the backup is initiated. Save set bundling does not support
load balancing across different RAC nodes.
To disable save set bundling, set the NSR_BUNDLING parameter value to disabled by
typing the following command:
nsroraadmin -r update NSR_BUNDLING disabled

Configure policy uniformity for scheduled Oracle backups

If save set bundling is enabled, as described in “Configure save set bundling for
scheduled Oracle backups” on page 107, policy uniformity is enabled automatically.
If you are not using save set bundling, to enable policy uniformity for scheduled
Oracle backups:
◆ If using the configuration wizard, set NSR_INCR_EXPIRATION to TRUE in the
Advanced Environment Options table on the corresponding wizard page.
◆ If using the nonwizard configuration method:
• Set the NSR_INCR_EXPIRATION parameter value to enabled by typing the
following command:
nsroraadmin -r add NSR_INCR_EXPIRATION enabled

By default, the NSR_INCR_EXPIRATION parameter is disabled.

“Configuring the NWORA resource file with the nsroraadmin program” on
page 270 provides details on the nsroraadmin command. The command sets
the parameter value in the NWORA resource file, which is described in
“NWORA resource file” on page 265.
• Complete step 2 to step 4 under “Configure save set bundling for scheduled
Oracle backups” on page 107.
• In a RAC system, ensure that all channels are allocated on the same NMDA
client node where the backup is initiated. Policy uniformity does not support
load balancing across different RAC nodes.
To disable policy uniformity, set the NSR_INCR_EXPIRATION parameter value to
disabled by typing the following command:
nsroraadmin -r update NSR_INCR_EXPIRATION disabled

108 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Sybase backup considerations

The following sections describe additional requirements for configuring Sybase
backups.

Note: The NMDA software does not support probe-based backups with nsrdaprobe of a
Sybase database that has the data and log segments on the same device. “NMDA probe” on
page 83 provides details.

Set up Sybase roles and permissions

The Sybase administrator is the person who is responsible for Sybase backup and
recovery. The NMDA software relies on the Sybase administrator’s ability to dump
and load databases when performing Sybase backup and recovery operations. The
administrator must have the appropriate Sybase roles and permissions.
Table 13 on page 109 lists the Sybase roles and permissions that NMDA requires for
performing the Sybase administrative actions.

Table 13 Sybase roles and permissions

Role or permission Action NMDA command

SA_role or create database privileges Create a database Not applicable

SA_role, DBO (database ownership), or OPER_role Backup and restore databases nsrdasv
nsrsybrc

SA_role, DBO Run a database consistency check nsrsybcc

When the NMDA parameter USE_CONSISTENCY_CHECK is set to TRUE for a

scheduled backup, the backup must be run by SA_role or DBO to ensure that the
nsrsybcc command succeeds. “USE_CONSISTENCY_CHECK” on page 322 provides
more information on the parameter.
The NMDA software requires that the Sybase user, for example, Sybase OPER_role,
be a member of the database to check whether the database and log are on separate
segments. If the Sybase administrator is not a member of the database, then the
backup fails. However, this limitation does not apply to recovering the Sybase
database.

Verification of Sybase database backups

The NMDA software provides support for verification of Sybase database backups.
NMDA supports header verification and full verification.
Set the NSR_ASE_VERIFY parameter either with the wizard or in the NMDA
configuration file to specify the backup verification level. Set the parameter to one of
the following values:
◆ header — Specifies to verify the page header information only.
◆ full — Specifies to verify both the header information and rows structure (full
verification of the backup).

Sybase backup considerations 109

Backup Configuration

For example, the following NSR_ASE_VERIFY setting specifies to perform a full

verification of the backup:
NSR_ASE_VERIFY=full

If you do not specify a verification value, then no verification is carried out and a
message is added to the log file.

Volume pools for incremental Sybase backups

An NMDA Sybase backup, either full or incremental, stores the backed-up data in
one save set and creates a separate save set for the backup metadata. For example, an
NMDA Sybase backup of the database SYBASE:/SERVER/sybdb produces two save
sets:
◆ SYBASE:/SERVER/sybdb — Contains the metadata for the backup.
◆ SYBASE:/SERVER/sybdb.1 — Contains the actual data for the backup.
During an incremental Sybase backup, NMDA backs up only the transaction log of
each database. You can send the backup of logs to a special NetWorker log volume
pool by setting the NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL parameter, as described in
“NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL” on page 321.
However, the metadata from an incremental Sybase backup is backed up to a regular
(not log) volume pool, for example, as specified by NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL. In
the preceding example, the incremental backup of sybdb is stored as follows:
◆ SYBASE:/SERVER/sybdb — Stored in the pool defined by
NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL.
◆ SYBASE:/SERVER/sybdb.1 — Stored in the pool defined by
NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL.

Sybase transaction log backups

For manual and scheduled NMDA Sybase backups, the Sybase transaction log is
backed up during an incremental backup.
NMDA supports the setting of the NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT parameter to deal with
the transaction log in an emergency situation only, such as a lack of free log space or a
corrupted media database.

IMPORTANT
Use the NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT parameter with care because it can prevent you
from restoring your ASE server or specific databases.

Table 14 on page 111 describes the full backup behavior for the different
NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT settings when the database and transaction log are on the
same or separate devices.
Table 15 on page 111 describes the incremental backup behavior for different
NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT settings when the database and transaction log are on
separate devices.

Note: The NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT parameter is not supported for incremental backups when
the database and transaction log are on the same device.

110 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

The Sybase documentation provides more details on when and how to use the
“no_log”, “no_truncate”, and “truncate_only” options.

Table 14 Full backups with NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT

NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT
parameter setting Database and log on separate devices Database and log on the same device

For non-read-only databases:

“no_log” 1. Truncates the transaction log without 1. Displays an error message stating
logging the transaction. that the setting is invalid and the
2. Backs up the database. “no_log” operation is ignored.
2. Backs up the database.
3. Truncates the transaction log.

“no_truncate” 1. Backs up the transaction log. Backs up the database.

2. Backs up the database.

“truncate_only” 1. Truncates the transaction log. 1. Truncates the transaction log.

2. Backs up the database. 2. Backs up the database.

(No setting) Backs up the database. 1. Backs up the database.

2. Truncates the transaction log.

For read-only databases:

“no_log” 1. Truncates the transaction log without 1. Displays an error message stating
logging the transaction. that the setting is invalid and the
2. Backs up the database. “no_log” operation is ignored.
2. Backs up the database.

“no_truncate” 1. Backs up the transaction log. Backs up the database.

2. Backs up the database.

“truncate_only” Displays an error message stating that Displays an error message stating that
the setting is invalid for read only the setting is invalid for read only
databases. databases.

(No setting) Backs up the database. Backs up the database.

Table 15 Incremental backups with NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT (page 1 of 2)

NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT
parameter setting Database and log on separate devices

For non-read-only databases:

“no_log” 1. Displays an error message stating that the setting is not supported with
incremental backups, and that a full backup must be performed instead.
2. Backs up the transaction logs.

“no_truncate” Backs up the transaction logs.

“truncate_only” 1. Displays an error message stating that the setting is not supported with
incremental backups, and that a full backup must be performed instead.
2. Backs up the transaction logs.

(No setting) Backs up the transaction logs.

Sybase backup considerations 111

Backup Configuration

Table 15 Incremental backups with NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT (page 2 of 2)

NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT
parameter setting Database and log on separate devices

For read-only databases:

“no_log” 1. Displays an error message stating that the setting is not supported with
incremental backups, and that a full backup must be performed instead.
2. Backs up the transaction logs.

“no_truncate” Backs up the transaction logs.

“truncate_only” Displays an error message stating that the setting is invalid for read only databases.

(No setting) Backs up the transaction logs.

Configure a Sybase threshold procedure

Sybase provides the functionality to register a threshold procedure to free up the log
space for a database by performing the dump of the log when the threshold is
reached. If there is not enough log space, the transactions will be either terminated or
suspended.
NMDA provides support for the threshold procedure through the threshold.sql file,
as described in “Sample threshold procedure” on page 113.
A threshold procedure provides the following features:
◆ When the threshold of a Sybase database is reached, the NMDA software backs
up the transaction log with the dump command.
◆ If a backup (dump) of the transaction log is not allowed, then the NMDA software
performs a full database backup and truncates the transaction log.

IMPORTANT
If the threshold procedure is used for transaction log backups, set the following as
environment variables beforehand:
- NSR_CLIENT
- NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL
- NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL
- NSR_SERVER
For UNIX or Linux, as the Sybase user, set the environment variables in the shell
that launches the Sybase Backup Server.
For Windows, as the Sybase user, set the environment variables as Windows
system environment variables, then reboot the system and start the Sybase Backup
Server.
Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides more details
on these parameters.

If the NMDA software cannot perform a full database dump, then perform either of
the following:
◆ Add space to the transaction log.
◆ Terminate processes that were suspended when the threshold was crossed.
The Sybase documentation provides detailed information on thresholds.

112 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Configuration

Threshold procedure versus probe-based backup

The NMDA threshold procedure is designed to free the log space for the Sybase
database.
The NMDA probe-based backup is used to back up a server (all databases) or an
individual database, based on the number of transaction log pages generated. The
main purpose of a probe-based backup is not to free the log space, but to determine if
there has been enough database “activity” to start a backup.
“Configuring a probe-based backup” on page 83 provides details on NMDA
probe-based backups.

Sample threshold procedure

Use the sample threshold procedure described in this section to implement
transaction log backups to free the log space. Edit the sample threshold procedure to
suit the environment.
Table 16 on page 113 lists the default location for the sample threshold procedure.

Table 16 Threshold procedure location

Platform Location

AIX /usr/bin/threshold.sql

HP-UX /opt/networker/bin/threshold.sql

Solaris /usr/sbin/threshold.sql

Linux /usr/sbin/threshold.sql

Install the sample threshold procedure in a database

To use the sample threshold procedure:
1. Run the isql command with threshold.sql as an input file:
isql -Usa -P password -S Sybase_server -D database_name
-i threshold.sql

where:
• password is the password of the Sybase SA account.
• Sybase_server is the name of the Sybase server.
• database_name is the name of the Sybase database.
2. Start an isql session and verify that the threshold procedure is in place:
isql -Usa -P password -S Sybase_server -D database_name
1> sp_help
2> go

The procedure sp_thresholdaction must appear when the sp_help command is run.
If it does not appear, then verify that the database used is the correct one.
The Sybase documentation provides instructions about how to use the
sp_addthreshold command to perform the following:
◆ Add the NMDA threshold procedure to the Sybase server.
◆ Manage free space with thresholds.

Sybase backup considerations 113

Backup Configuration

Set LD_PRELOAD for Sybase backups on HP-UX

For Sybase backups on HP-UX only, ensure the required setting of the LD_PRELOAD
environment variable:
1. In the shell where the Sybase backup server will be started, as the Sybase user, set
the variable for the particular platform:
• On HP-UX PA-RISC, set LD_PRELOAD to either of the following:
– The complete pathname of the libnsrsyb.sl library. For example:
$ export LD_PRELOAD=$SYBASE/$SYBASE_ASE/lib/libnsrsyb.sl

– The complete pathname of the libpthread.sl library. For example:

$ export LD_PRELOAD=/usr/lib/libpthread.sl

• On HP-UX Itanium, set LD_PRELOAD to the following:

LD_PRELOAD=$SYBASE/$SYBASE_ASE/lib/libnsrsyb.so

Note: For ASE 15.0.x, use $SYBASE/$SYBASE_ASE/lib/libnsrsyb32.so in the

preceding command.

2. Start the Sybase backup server for the NMDA backup in the same shell where the
LD_PRELOAD variable was set in step 1.

114 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 3

Backup Procedures

This chapter includes the following major sections:

◆ Performing a scheduled NMDA backup .................................................................. 116
◆ Performing a manual NMDA backup....................................................................... 119
◆ Verifying the backup information in the NetWorker indexes .............................. 131
◆ Backup catalog synchronization and backup deletion .......................................... 134

Note: This chapter does not describe how to perform cluster, DB2 DPF, Informix MACH 11,
Oracle RAC, Sybase ASE Cluster Edition, or snapshot backups. These are described separately
in other chapters.

Backup Procedures 115

Backup Procedures

Performing a scheduled NMDA backup

A scheduled NMDA backup is initiated by the NetWorker server through the
savegrp program.
To prepare for a scheduled NMDA backup:
1. Ensure that the required backup configurations are in place, as described in
“Backup configuration roadmap” on page 56.
2. Run a test scheduled backup according to “Test a scheduled backup” on
page 116.
3. Review the steps for canceling a scheduled backup in “Cancel a scheduled
backup” on page 117.

IMPORTANT
At the end of a successful Oracle scheduled backup only, NMDA automatically
backs up the NWORA resource file if it exists, as described in “NWORA resource
file backup” on page 257.

“Monitor a scheduled backup” on page 118 provides information on how to monitor

the status of scheduled backups.
“Verifying the backup information in the NetWorker indexes” on page 131 describes
the backup information stored in the NetWorker indexes.

Test a scheduled backup

After the scheduled NMDA backup is configured, test the scheduled backup
manually by using the NMC program.
To test the scheduled backup:
1. In your web browser, go to the URL http://NMC_server_name:9000, and log in to
the NMC console server.
The default NMC connection port is 9000. If you configured a different port, then
change the number accordingly.
2. In the Enterprise window, select the appropriate NetWorker server host, and
start the administrative GUI.
3. In the Monitoring window, select the correct group name for the backup.
4. Start the scheduled backup for the specified group, for example, by right-clicking
the group name and selecting Start from the drop-down menu.
The NetWorker server immediately backs up the clients in the backup group.
The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide and NMC online help provide information
on how to use the NMC interface to perform these steps.

116 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Procedures

Cancel a scheduled backup

To cancel a scheduled NMDA backup in progress:
1. Start the NMC program.
2. Select the backup group in the Monitoring window.
3. Right-click the group to stop, and select Stop.

Note: If a backup is canceled before completion, some of the backed-up data might be
recoverable.
To restart a failed scheduled backup, follow the instructions in “Restart a failed scheduled
backup” on page 118.

Considerations for canceling an Oracle scheduled backup

To keep the NetWorker index and RMAN catalog synchronized, ensure that the
Oracle user has the required NetWorker privileges for removing NetWorker index
entries before canceling an Oracle scheduled backup. “NetWorker User Group
resource” on page 61 provides more information.
To cancel an Oracle scheduled backup in progress when the Stop button does not
work, the running rman process must be interrupted on the Oracle Server host:
1. In the NMC program, click Stop to prevent NMDA from retrying the backup.
2. For each allocated channel, perform the following:
a. View the RMAN message log file to determine the Oracle session ID for the
channel. The log filename is specified with the NSR_RMAN_ARGUMENTS
parameter, set either through the Advanced Environment Options field in the
wizard, or through the NMDA configuration file in a nonwizard
configuration.
For example, the following sample line from an RMAN message log shows
that channel ch1 has the Oracle session ID 15:
channel ch1: sid=15 devtype=SBT_TAPE

b. Run the following select command in the Oracle svrmgrl or sqlplus program
to determine the serial number:
select serial# from v$session where sid=session_id;

where session_id is the Oracle session ID from the RMAN message log in step a
.
c. Run the following alter system command in the Oracle svrmgrl or sqlplus
program to terminate the channel:
alter system kill session ‘session_id, serial#’;

where:
– session_id is the Oracle session ID from step a .
– serial# is the serial number from step b .

Performing a scheduled NMDA backup 117

Backup Procedures

Cancel a nonresponding Oracle backup

The following are the steps for canceling a nonresponding Oracle backup. However,
if these steps do not work, contact Oracle for assistance.

Note: When using these steps, NMDA does not attempt to remove the backup save set entries
from the NetWorker index. As a result, the NetWorker index and RMAN catalog might
become unsynchronized.

To cancel a nonresponding Oracle backup on UNIX:

1. Include the set command id to ‘xxx’ command in the RMAN backup script that is
used for the Oracle backup. Otherwise, the query in the next step will fail.
Example 8 on page 103 provides a sample script with the command.
2. Run the following query in the Oracle svrmgrl or sqlplus program to determine
the Oracle process ID that corresponds to each RMAN channel:
select spid, client_info from v$process p, v$session s where
p.addr=s.paddr and client_info like ‘%id=%‘;

3. Type the following kill command to cancel the backup process:

kill -9 pid

where pid is the appropriate backup process ID.

To cancel a nonresponding Oracle backup on Windows, stop the nsrsbtcn.exe
process in Task Manager.

Restart a failed scheduled backup

To enable a scheduled backup to be automatically restarted after a failure, set the
Client Retry attribute in the Group resource in the NMC GUI. For a checkpoint restart
(CPR) backup, if the restart occurs within the group restart window (specified in the
Restart Window attribute), the backup is restarted from the point of failure. For a
non-CPR backup or a CPR backup restarted outside the restart window, the backup
is restarted from the beginning.
To manually start a canceled or failed backup from the beginning, right-click the
group to start in the NMC GUI, and select Start.
To manually restart a CPR backup from the point of failure, right-click the group to
start in the NMC GUI, and select Restart.

Monitor a scheduled backup

Scheduled backups can be monitored the same way as manual backups in NMC.
“Monitor a manual backup” on page 130 provides more information.

Note: Depending on the NMC release, the names and locations of the tabs and windows might
be different in the NMC program. The NetWorker documentation provides more details.

In addition, messages appear in the appropriate Group Details window in the NMC
program during and after the scheduled backup. In the NMC Monitor tab of the
NetWorker Administration window, right-click the group name and select Details to
display the Group Details window.

118 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Procedures

The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides details on viewing information

about scheduled backups in the NMC program.
In addition to monitoring a database backup from NMC, you can use the database
activity log, if supported, to monitor the backup from the database server. The
database log files include information about the success of the backup and any error
or warning conditions. The database server documentation provides more details
about the database log files.

Performing a manual NMDA backup

Review Chapter 5, “Disaster Recovery,” to ensure that all the required files are
backed up. A manual NMDA backup might not back up certain files.

IMPORTANT
The NetWorker server bootstrap and client indexes are not automatically backed
up at the end of a manual backup, as they are for a scheduled backup. After
running a manual backup, perform a backup of the NetWorker server bootstrap
and client indexes to prepare for disaster recovery of the NetWorker server
according to instructions in the EMC NetWorker Administration Guide.

After configuring a manual NMDA backup as described in Chapter 2, you can

perform the manual backup by using the proper procedure, as shown in Table 17 on
page 119.

Table 17 Supported procedures for a manual NMDA backup

Database or application Supported procedures for manual backup

DB2 • db2 backup command

• DB2 Control Center (GUI)

Informix • onbar backup command

Lotus • nsrdasv backup command

• NetWorker User for Lotus GUI (Windows only)

Oracle • rman command to run an RMAN backup script

• Oracle Enterprise Manager

Sybase • nsrdasv backup command

• NetWorker User for Sybase GUI (Windows only)

Before you perform a manual NMDA backup, review the procedures for canceling
the manual backup in “Cancel a manual backup” on page 129.
The following sections provide details on the manual backup procedures:
◆ “Perform a DB2 manual backup” on page 120
◆ “Perform an Informix manual backup” on page 121
◆ “Perform a Lotus manual backup” on page 121
◆ “Perform an Oracle manual backup” on page 122
◆ “Perform a Sybase manual backup” on page 122

Performing a manual NMDA backup 119

Backup Procedures

Perform a DB2 manual backup

Perform a DB2 manual backup through either of the following methods:
◆ “DB2 manual backup through the db2 backup command” on page 120
◆ “DB2 manual backup through DB2 Control Center” on page 120

DB2 manual backup through the db2 backup command

Perform a DB2 manual backup by using the db2 backup command with the
appropriate options at the operating system command line on the DB2 client host.
The following is an example of a db2 backup command:
◆ On UNIX systems:
$ db2 backup db sample load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.xx options
@pathname/nmda_db2.cfg

◆ On Windows systems:
$ db2 backup db sample load
NetWorker_install_dir\nsr\bin\libnsrdb2.dll options
@pathname\nmda_db2.cfg

where:
• sample is the name of the database to be backed up.
• xx is the platform-specific extension:
– o (AIX)
– sl (HP-UX)
– so (Linux, Solaris, HP-UX IA64)
• pathname/nmda_db2.cfg is the complete pathname of the NMDA
configuration file that contains the parameter settings for the DB2 manual
backup.
• NetWorker_install_dir is the path on Windows systems where the NetWorker
software is installed.
The DB2 documentation provides details on the db2 backup command.

DB2 manual backup through DB2 Control Center

Perform a DB2 manual backup by invoking the DB2 Control Center GUI as the DB2
user to run the DB2 backup utility.
Pay attention to the following when you use the DB2 Control Center GUI:
◆ The NMDA configuration file must contain the parameter settings for the backup.
◆ Specify the configuration file in DB2 Control Center:
1. Right-click the database to be backed up.
2. Select Configure Parameters.
3. Set VENDOROPT to the value @configuration_file_pathname. For example:
@d:\db2.cfg

◆ Specify the DLL in DB2 Control Center:

1. Right-click the database to be backed up.
2. Select Backup.

120 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Procedures

3. In the wizard, select Vendor DLL for the Media Type.

Note: For a Windows client, after selecting the DLL path, enter quotes around the path
or use a short filename (8.3 format). Otherwise, an error is displayed, similar to the
following:
SQL0104N An unexpected token
"Files\Legato\nsr\bin\libnsrdb2.dll" was found following "<identifier>".
Expected tokens may include: "INCLUDE".

The DB2 documentation included with the DB2 server software provides details on
the use of DB2 Control Center for backups.

Perform an Informix manual backup

Perform an Informix manual backup of dbspaces, blobspaces, or logical log files by
typing the appropriate onbar backup command at the command line as the Informix
user. For example:
onbar -b -L 0 dbspace01
onbar -l -c

These commands perform the following:

◆ Level 0 (NetWorker level full) backup of the dbspace named dbspace01
◆ Closure of the currently active logical log
◆ Backup of the logical logs, not including the newly activated log
The Informix Backup and Restore Guide included with the Informix server software
provides details on the ON-Bar backup utility.

Perform a Lotus manual backup

Perform a Lotus manual backup through either of the following methods:
◆ “Lotus manual backup through the nsrdasv command” on page 121
◆ “Manual backup through NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI” on page 124

Lotus manual backup through the nsrdasv command

Ensure that either the NSR_BACKUP_PATHS or NSR_BACKUP_LOTUS_DIR
parameter is set in the NMDA configuration file to specify the Lotus directories or
files to be backed up. Do not set both parameters at the same time. The following
descriptions provide more details:
◆ “NSR_BACKUP_LOTUS_DIR” on page 308
◆ “NSR_BACKUP_PATHS” on page 309
Setting NSR_NOTES_INI_PATH is also recommended for a Lotus backup.
Perform a Lotus manual backup by typing the appropriate nsrdasv backup
command at the command line, as the Lotus operating system user on the Domino or
Notes host being backed up:
nsrdasv(.exe) -z config_filepath

where config_filepath is the complete pathname of the NMDA configuration file that
contains the parameter settings for the Lotus manual backup.

Performing a manual NMDA backup 121

Backup Procedures

Perform an Oracle manual backup

Perform an Oracle manual backup through either of the following methods:
◆ “Oracle manual backup through the RMAN command line interface” on page 122
◆ “Oracle manual backup through Oracle Enterprise Manager” on page 122

Oracle manual backup through the RMAN command line interface

Perform an Oracle manual backup by invoking the command line RMAN utility to
run the RMAN backup script on the Oracle Server host.
If the RMAN script for a manual backup from Example 7 on page 101 is stored in the
file /disk1/scripts/full_backup.txt on a UNIX Oracle Server, and the Net service has
been configured to connect to the databases payroll and rcvcatdb, then the manual
Oracle backup can be started with the following command:
rman target sys/oracle@payroll rcvcat rman/rman@rcvcatdb cmdfile
\’/disk1/scripts/full_backup.txt\’

The appropriate Oracle backup and recovery documentation provides more

information on the rman(.exe) command line options.

Oracle manual backup through Oracle Enterprise Manager

The NMDA software considers a backup scheduled through Oracle Enterprise
Manager to be a manual backup.
Perform an Oracle manual backup by invoking the Oracle Enterprise Manager
Backup Management Tools to run the RMAN backup script. The Backup
Management Tools include a graphical user interface to RMAN for generating the
required RMAN commands and performing backup and restore operations.

IMPORTANT
After the completion of an NMDA backup or restore, the Oracle Enterprise
Manager job queue history displays the status of the job as “failed”, even if the
backup or restore completed successfully. This is due to a known problem with
Oracle Enterprise Manager. View the job output to confirm that the backup or
restore completed successfully.

The Oracle documentation provides more information on using the Oracle Enterprise
Manager.

Perform a Sybase manual backup

To prepare for the Sybase manual backup, run a database consistency check
according to “Sybase database consistency check” on page 123.
Perform the Sybase manual backup through either of the following methods:
◆ “Sybase manual backup through the nsrdasv command” on page 124
◆ “Manual backup through NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI” on page 124

122 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Procedures

IMPORTANT
To back up Sybase data with NMDA, use the information in the following
sections. Do not manually invoke the Sybase dump command. When you use
NMDA to perform a Sybase backup, the nsrdasv command invokes the Sybase
dump command.

Sybase database consistency check

Before you start a Sybase manual backup, perform a database consistency check by
typing the appropriate nsrsybcc command at the command line as the Sybase user:
nsrsybcc -U user_ID -P password [-o dbcc_option]
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name[/database_name]

where:
◆ user_ID is the username of the Sybase user account.
◆ password is the password of the Sybase user account.
◆ dbcc_option is the option that specifies the type of database consistency check, as
described in Table 18 on page 123.
◆ ASE_server_name is the Sybase server name.
◆ database_name is the name of the database on the Sybase server.

Note: If you specify the Sybase server name only, SYBASE:/ASE_server_name, with the
nsrsybcc command (without specifying a database name), the command performs a consistency
check of every database on the Sybase server.

If you do not include the -o option to specify the type of consistency check, then the
nsrsybcc command performs the following:
◆ The dbcc checkstorage check when the dbccdb database is set up.
◆ The dbcc checkcatalog, dbcc checkalloc, and dbcc checkdb checks when the
dbccdb database is not set up.

Table 18 Consistency check options of the nsrsybcc command

-o option of narsybcc command Database consistency check performed by nsrsybcc command

-o ckdb dbcc checkdb

-o ckal dbcc checkalloc

-o ckcat dbcc checkcatalog

-o ckdbnoidx dbcc checkdb (skip_ncindex)

-o ckstor dbcc checkstorage

Note: Ensure that the dbccdb database is set up.

The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Command Reference Guide
provides details on the nsrsybcc command syntax and options.
The Sybase documentation provides more details on performing a database
consistency check.

Performing a manual NMDA backup 123

Backup Procedures

Sybase manual backup through the nsrdasv command

Ensure that the NSR_BACKUP_PATHS parameter is set in the NMDA configuration
file to specify the Sybase server instance or Sybase databases to be backed up.
“NSR_BACKUP_PATHS” on page 320 provides more details.
Perform a Sybase manual backup by typing the appropriate nsrdasv backup
command at the command line, as the Sybase operating system user:
nsrdasv(.exe) -z config_filepath

where config_filepath is the complete pathname of the NMDA configuration file that
contains the parameter settings for the Sybase manual backup.

Manual backup through NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI

On Windows systems only, the NetWorker User for Lotus (nwbml.exe) and
NetWorker User for Sybase (nwbms.exe) each provide a graphical interface for
configuring and performing backup and recovery operations of Lotus
Domino/Notes and Sybase databases, respectively.

Note: The NetWorker User for Lotus and NetWorker User for Sybase support the backup of
local databases only.

To perform a manual backup of Lotus or Sybase databases with the NetWorker User
for Lotus or Sybase program, respectively:
1. Start the graphical interface by selecting NetWorker User for Lotus or
NetWorker User for Sybase from Start > Programs > EMC NetWorker.
If you want to connect to a different NetWorker server, follow the instructions in
“Connecting to a different NetWorker server” on page 128.
2. In the main window, select Backup from the Operation menu or click the Backup
button or press Alt+B. The Backup window appears, as shown in Figure 2 on
page 125. Table 19 on page 125 describes the Backup window toolbar buttons.
3. In the NetWorker User for Sybase only, if the Sybase Server Login dialog box
appears (the first time you display the Backup window):
a. Type the required values in the Sybase Server Login dialog box:
– In the Server name text box, type the Sybase server name.
– In the User ID text box, type the user ID for the backup.
– In the Password text box, type the password for the user ID, if a password
is required.
b. Click OK.

124 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Procedures

Figure 2 NetWorker User for Sybase Backup window

Table 19 Toolbar buttons on the Backup window

Button Operation Description

Mark Marks the selected (highlighted) files for backup.

Unmark Clears the selected (marked) files.

Backup Options Displays a dialog box with Lotus or Sybase specific backup
options.

Start Starts the backup of marked files.

4. To view a list of files or databases available for backup, select an entry in the left
pane, either a Lotus directory or Sybase server. The contents of the Lotus
directory or Sybase server appear in the right pane.
5. Specify the files or databases to back up by using one of the following methods:
• Select the entries, and click the Mark toolbar button.
• Select the checkbox (add a check mark) beside each entry.
To unmark the entries, use one of the following methods:
• Select the marked entries, and click the Unmark toolbar button.
• Clear the checkboxes (remove the check marks) beside the entries.

Performing a manual NMDA backup 125

Backup Procedures

6. From the Options menu, select Backup Options, and set the specific backup
options according to the appropriate instructions:
• “Lotus backup options” on page 126
• “Sybase backup options” on page 127
7. Start the backup by clicking the Start toolbar button.
The Backup Status window opens and displays information about the backup
operations performed.

Lotus backup options

After selecting Backup Options from the Options menu, the Backup Options dialog
box opens, as shown in Figure 3 on page 126.

Figure 3 NetWorker User for Lotus Backup Options dialog box

To specify the location of the NMDA configuration file, type the complete pathname
of the configuration file in the Configuration File text box, and click OK. “NMDA
configuration file” on page 294 provides more information on the NMDA
configuration file for Lotus backups.

Note: Do not set the NSR_BACKUP_PATHS or NSR_BACKUP_LOTUS_DIR parameter in the

configuration file. Use the GUI instead to select the objects to back up.

To enable incremental backups, set NSR_BACKUP_LEVEL=incr in the NMDA

configuration file.
To compress or encrypt the backup data before it is moved over the network or
written to a storage device, perform either of the following:
◆ Set NSR_COMPRESSION=TRUE or NSR_AES_ENCRYPTION=TRUE in the
NMDA configuration file. This setting is preferable to using the Backup Options
dialog box because you do not need to reenter the setting every time you run the
GUI.
◆ Select the checkbox for Compression or AES Encryption in the Backup Options
dialog box.

Note: Parameters specified in the Backup Options dialog box take precedence over the
corresponding parameters specified in the NMDA configuration file.

126 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Procedures

Sybase backup options

After selecting Backup Options from the Options menu, the Backup Options dialog
box opens, as shown in Figure 4 on page 127.

Figure 4 NetWorker User for Sybase Backup Options dialog box

Select the appropriate options in the Backup Options dialog box, and then click OK:
◆ Full backup — Specifies that NMDA backs up the selected databases and their
transaction logs, and then truncates the transaction logs.
◆ Incremental backup — Specifies that NMDA backs up the transaction logs of the
selected databases, and then truncates the transaction logs.
◆ Compress — Specifies that NMDA compresses the backup data.
◆ Use Dump Options — Specifies that NMDA applies the selected truncation
option for the transaction logs. You must select one of the following truncation
options:
• TRUNCATE_ONLY dump before backup — NMDA truncates all committed
transactions in the transaction logs before backup, and then backs up both the
databases and transaction logs.
• NO_TRUNCATE dump before backup — NMDA keeps the transaction logs
from being truncated during the backup.
• NO_LOG dump before backup — NMDA truncates the transaction logs
before backup, and then backs up only the databases.

Performing a manual NMDA backup 127

Backup Procedures

Note: Truncation of a log before backup creates a gap in the log so that previous log
backups cannot be used to roll forward past the log truncation point.

◆ Use striped dump — Specifies that NMDA enables striping during the backup.
Specify the appropriate value for Stripe count.
◆ Use Pools — Specifies that NMDA uses the given volume pools for database and
log backups. You must specify the pool names as follows:
• Data pool — Pool to use for full (database) backups.
• Log pool — Pool to use for incremental (transaction log) backups.

Connecting to a different NetWorker server

To connect the NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI to a different NetWorker
server to back up files, use one of the following methods:
◆ If the GUI program is not already running, use the appropriate command to start
the program and connect to the specified server:
• To start the NetWorker User for Lotus:
nwbml -s NetWorker_server

• To start the NetWorker User for Sybase:

nwbms -s NetWorker_server

where NetWorker_server is the hostname of the NetWorker server to back up

the files.
◆ If the GUI program is already running:
a. In the GUI program, select Select NetWorker Server from the Operation
menu.
The Change Server dialog box opens.
b. In the Change Server dialog box:
1. If required, click Update List to refresh the list of NetWorker servers.
2. Either select the server from the list or type the name of the server.
3. To specify that the server be used as the default NetWorker server by the
GUI program, select Save as Default Server.
4. Click OK.
◆ To change the default NetWorker server that the program uses to back up files:
a. Right-click the NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase program icon, and select
Properties from the menu.
b. In the Properties window, add the following in the Target text box on the
Shortcut tab, and then click OK:
-s NetWorker_server

where NetWorker_server is the hostname of the NetWorker server to back up

the files, as shown in Figure 5 on page 129.

128 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Procedures

Figure 5 NetWorker User for Lotus Properties window

Cancel a manual backup

To cancel a manual backup that was started through a command line interface,
perform either of the following:
◆ Press Ctrl+C.
or
◆ Press the equivalent “attention” key combination on the system.
To cancel a backup started through a database GUI such as Oracle Enterprise
Manager, follow the instructions in the database documentation.
To cancel a Lotus or Sybase manual backup from the NetWorker User for Lotus or
NetWorker User for Sybase program (respectively) on Windows only, select End
Backup from the File menu.

Note: If the backup is canceled before completion, some of the backed-up data may be
recoverable. Restart the canceled backup process from the beginning, and ensure that the
backup successfully completes without interruption.

Performing a manual NMDA backup 129

Backup Procedures

Considerations for canceling an Oracle manual backup

To keep the NetWorker index and RMAN catalog synchronized, ensure that the
Oracle user has the required NetWorker privileges for removing NetWorker index
entries before you cancel an Oracle manual backup. “NetWorker User Group
resource” on page 61 provides more information.
If the method of canceling the Oracle backup through the command line described in
“Cancel a manual backup” on page 129 is not successful, use the alter system kill
command described under “Cancel a scheduled backup” on page 117.
To cancel a nonresponding Oracle manual backup, follow the instructions in “Cancel
a nonresponding Oracle backup” on page 118.

Monitor a manual backup

At the command line or GUI where you start a manual NMDA backup, operational
messages are displayed about the status of the backup.
To monitor the status of the manual backup, you can also use the NMC program,
which provides a centralized view of all the NetWorker server backup and restore
activity. The backup status information for running backups is displayed on the
Sessions tab of the Monitoring window. Figure 6 on page 130 shows an example.
The NMC Monitoring window also displays alerts and log messages, and operations
related to devices and jukeboxes. The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides
more information on viewing these types of messages with the NMC program.

Figure 6 Backup messages in Sessions tab of Monitoring window

130 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Procedures

Verifying the backup information in the NetWorker indexes

The NetWorker server maintains information about each backup in its online
indexes. “NetWorker indexes and policies used for restores” on page 140 provides
more information about the online indexes.
To review information about scheduled and manual NMDA backups in the
NetWorker online indexes, use the following commands:
◆ To query the client file index, use the nsrinfo command. For example:
nsrinfo -n NMDA_application -s NetWorker_server_hostname
NMDA_client_hostname

where NMDA_application is db2, informix, notes, oracle, or sybase.

◆ To query the media database, use the mminfo command. For example:
mminfo -v -s NetWorker_server_hostname -c NMDA_client_hostname

The EMC NetWorker Command Reference Guide and the UNIX man pages provide more
information on these NetWorker commands.
The following examples show the command output for an Oracle backup with
NMDA, where the backup object (backup piece) is named t1ld0g32_1_1:
# nsrinfo -n oracle -s nw-server ca-oracle

t1ld0g32_1_1, date=1273166244 Thu May 06 13:17:24 2010

# mminfo -v -s nw-server -c ca-oracle

volume client date time size

Oracle.001 ca-oracle 05/06/10 13:17:24 5633 KB

ssid fl lvl name

4108515830 cb full RMAN:t1ld0g32_1_1

Cross-check the client file index and media database by using the backup save time
through the -t option of the nsrinfo and mminfo commands. For example:
mminfo -s nw-server -c ca-oracle -t 1273166244
nsrinfo -s nw-server -n oracle -t ’05/06/10 13:17:24’ ca-oracle

The NMC interface also provides queries and reports about the backup information.
The NetWorker documentation provides more details.

Avamar deduplication backup information in NetWorker indexes

The following examples show the index query results from the nsrinfo and mminfo
commands for information about deduplication backups with Avamar:
◆ The following nsrinfo query shows the information that is stored in the client file
index for an NMDA deduplication backup of Lotus data:
nsrinfo -n notes -vV win3e10-nml80

XBSA file
'NOTES:/C:/Program Files/IBM/Lotus/Domino/data/events4.nsf',
size=404, off=404, app=notes(17), date=1236960727 3/13/2009
11:12:07 AM, copyID = 1236960727.1236960729

Verifying the backup information in the NetWorker indexes 131

Backup Procedures

In this case, the size of the backup file, bolded in this nsrinfo output, is the size of
the metadata (hash information) that is stored on the NetWorker backup media
for the deduplication backup.
◆ To query the media database, use the mminfo command with the following
options:
• -q dedupe option — Displays only the save sets created through Avamar
deduplication.
• -S option — Lists the extended options for each save set in the save set
completion report.
The following mminfo query example shows the information stored in the media
database for a single save set of Lotus data deduplicated to an Avamar server:
ssid=3585770967 savetime=3/13/2009 11:12:06 AM (1236960726)
win3e10-nml80:NOTES: level=full sflags=vF size=1608 files=4
insert=3/13/2009 create=3/13/2009 complete=3/13/2009
browse=4/13/2009 11:59:59 PM retent=3/13/2010 11:59:59 PM
clientid=292ecd0b-00000004-49b194cd-49b194cb-00020c00-729b1c29
*Client path: /NetWorker/win3e10-nw75/win3e10-nml80;
*Data set size: 71041152;
*De-Dup session id: 158;
*De-Dup snapup time: 2009-03-13;
*De-duplication: Yes;
*De-duplication host: bu-doppelganger.lss.emc.com;
*Domain: /NetWorker/win3e10-nw75;
*New data on De-Dup Node: 10483991.00;
*New files: 4;
*Size on De-Dup Node: 71041152.00;
group: nml80;
Clone #1: cloneid=1236960727 time=3/13/2009 11:12:07 AM
retent=3/13/2010 flags=F frag@ 0 volid=3602548168
file/rec=3585770967/0 rn=0 last=3/13/2009

The save file size reported by mminfo, bolded in this sample output, is the size of
the NetWorker save set stored on the backup media that contains the metadata
only for the deduplication backup.
The extended attributes reported by mminfo provide information on the total
data protected by NetWorker and stored on the Avamar server, and the new data
passed to the Avamar server during the deduplication backup.
When a deduplication backup is deleted (for example, by a user or the NetWorker
server), the backup information is deleted immediately from the NetWorker indexes,
and a request is queued for deletion of the backup from the Avamar server. The
NetWorker documentation provides more information on deletion of deduplication
backups.
After a deduplication save set passes its retention time and its data chunks are
deleted from the Avamar server, the save set may no longer be recoverable even with
the scanner program.

Data Domain backup information in NetWorker indexes

The NetWorker client index information for a Data Domain deduplication backup is
the same as for a regular backup.
The following mminfo query enables you to list only the backups to a NetWorker
Data Domain device:
mminfo -S -q DataDomain

132 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Procedures

The -S option provides the Data Domain specific information about a save set, such
as the Data Domain clone ID and Data Domain statistics.
The following is an example of query information for a single save set of a DB2
backup to a Data Domain device:
ssid=2253717478 savetime=08/24/2011 09:42:55 AM (1314193375)
bu-pluto:DB2:/SMS1/NODE0000
level=full sflags=vF size=52099434476 files=1 insert=08/24/2011
create=08/24/2011 complete=08/24/2011 browse=09/24/2011 11:59:59 PM
retent=08/24/2012 11:59:59 PM
clientid=7d32da8e-00000004-4e42944b-4e42944a-01565000-d2648f56
*ss data domain backup cloneid: 1314193376, 1314193377;
*ss data domain dedup statistics: \
"v1:1314193376:52271619528:52218920124:41558381793",
"v1:1314193377:52271619528:52218920124:41558381793";
group: db2_pluto_dfa;
Clone #1: cloneid=1314193376 time=08/24/2011 09:42:56 AM
retent=08/24/2012 flags=F
frag@ 0 volid=2337602992 file/rec=0/0 rn=0 last=08/24/2011
Clone #2: cloneid=1314193377 time=08/24/2011 09:42:57 AM
retent=08/24/2012 flags=F
frag@ 0 volid=2354380207 file/rec=0/0 rn=0 last=08/24/2011

Lotus restartable backup information in NetWorker indexes

You can use the NMC Console or the mminfo command to query information about
Lotus restartable backups in the NetWorker indexes. The EMC NetWorker
Administration Guide provides details on how to query information about partial save
sets.
Figure 7 on page 133 provides an example of Lotus restartable backup information in
the NMC Console.

Figure 7 Lotus restartable backup information in NMC Console

The following mminfo query provides an example of Lotus restartable backup

information stored in the media database. The checkpoint-enabled save sets are
identified by the k flag, checkpoint ID, and sequence number. If the checkpoint
restart backup fails, the partial save sets that have the k flag are not removed from the
client file index or media database and can be used for restore:

Verifying the backup information in the NetWorker indexes 133

Backup Procedures

mminfo -q "checkpoint_id=1305581124" -r "client, name, ssid(11), checkpoint_id, checkpoint_seq,

nsavetime, sumflags(3)"

client name ssid chkpt_id chkpt_seq save time fl

win3e-scott-2 NOTES:_txnlogs_1 131176284 1305581124 3 1305581403 cbk
win3e-scott-2 NOTES:_browselist 147953496 1305581124 3 1305581397 cb
win3e-scott-2 NOTES:_1 164730680 1305581124 3 1305581368 cbk
win3e-scott-2 NOTES: 181507874 1305581124 3 1305581345 cbk
win3e-scott-2 NOTES:_1 198284969 1305581124 2 1305581226 cak
win3e-scott-2 NOTES: 215062185 1305581124 2 1305581225 cak
win3e-scott-2 NOTES:_1 231839305 1305581124 1 1305581128 cak
win3e-scott-2 NOTES: 248616517 1305581124 1 1305581124 cak

Backup catalog synchronization and backup deletion

The lifecycle of an NMDA backup is managed through the NetWorker policies. In
normal circumstances, these policies will match any policies stored in the respective
backup application catalogs. However, it is possible that the NetWorker index entries
can become out of sync with entries in an application catalog. It is a good practice to
keep the NetWorker indexes synchronized with the backup application catalogs.
For example, sometimes you might delete a backup manually. Whether a backup
expires in NetWorker or a backup is deleted, you might need to keep the backup
catalogs synchronized between NetWorker and DB2, Informix, or Oracle. In addition,
certain databases can have their own retention policies that should ideally be
synchronized with NetWorker.

Note: Ensure that the owner of the application server process running on the NMDA host that
deletes the backup entries has the Operate NetWorker privilege.

A DB2, Informix, or Oracle database has its own backup catalog. You must use the
database-specific interface or instructions to delete a DB2, Informix, or Oracle backup
from both the database backup catalog and the NetWorker indexes, to keep the
backup catalogs synchronized.
Lotus and Sybase do not maintain their own backup catalogs. Therefore, you can
delete a Lotus or Sybase backup from the NetWorker indexes only by using the
nsrmm command. The EMC NetWorker documentation and man pages provide
more details on this process.
“Delete DB2 backups” on page 134 provides details on how to delete DB2 backups
from the DB2 server and NetWorker server.
“Delete Informix backups” on page 136 provides details on how to delete Informix
backups from the IDS server and NetWorker server.
“Crosscheck and delete Oracle backups” on page 136 provides details on how to
crosscheck and delete Oracle backups from the Oracle server and NetWorker server.

Delete DB2 backups

DB2 backup entries for databases or tablespaces may be deleted from both the DB2
server and NetWorker server with the db2 prune command. Deleting backup entries
might be necessary if the NetWorker index and DB2 recovery history files become
excessively large and the retention period is high.

Note: The db2 prune command is not supported for deleting snapshot backups. “Deletion of
DB2 snapshots” on page 248 provides details.

134 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Procedures

To delete DB2 backup entries on both the DB2 server and NetWorker server:
1. Set the DB2 database configuration VENDOROPT parameter to the pathname of
the NMDA configuration file (nmda_db2.cfg) for the DB2 database or tablespace
whose backups are to be deleted. For example:
db2 update db cfg for sample using vendoropt
@/db/pathname/nmda_db2.cfg

where:
• sample is the name of the database or tablespace whose backups are to be
deleted.
• pathname/nmda_db2.cfg is the complete pathname of the NMDA
configuration file that contains the parameter settings for the DB2 backup.
2. Enable the automatic deletion of physical backup images and log files when the
db2 prune command is used by using the following command:
db2 update db cfg for sample using AUTO_DEL_REC_OBJ ON

where sample is the name of the database whose backups are to be deleted.

Note: Without this step, the db2 prune command removes entries only in the DB2 history
file and does not remove the associated database backups and log files.

3. Remove unwanted backup entries with the db2 prune command. For example:
$ db2 connect to sample
$ db2 prune history timestamp and delete
$ db2 terminate

where:
• sample is the name of the database whose backups are to be deleted.
• timestamp (in format yyyymmddhhmmss, with minimum yyyy) specifies deletion
of entries that are less than or equal to the timestamp value.

Note: The prune command does not remove the most recent full backup entry regardless
of the timestamp value, unless with force option is included after the timestamp.

4. Inspect the DB2 history file and the NetWorker index to verify that the backup
objects have been removed:

Note: The NetWorker indexes may not update immediately.

• On the DB2 server, use the following command:

$ db2 list history backup all for sample

• On the NetWorker server, use any one of the following commands:

nsrinfo -v -s NetWorker_server -n db2 -X all NetWorker_server
nsrinfo -n db2 NetWorker_server
mminfo -c NetWorker_server

where NetWorker_server is the hostname of the NetWorker server that contains

the index with the backup entries.

Backup catalog synchronization and backup deletion 135

Backup Procedures

The DB2 documentation provides more information on the db2 prune command and
configuration parameters that can be set to help maintain the backup history,
particularly REC_HIS_RETENTN and NUM_DB_BACKUPS.

Delete Informix backups

Informix backup entries for dbspaces may be deleted from both the IDS server and
NetWorker server with the appropriate command. Deleting backup entries might be
necessary if the NetWorker index and Informix recovery history files become
excessively large and the retention period is high.
Depending on the command options used, the Informix onsmsync utility removes
the following items from the sysutils database and the emergency boot file:
◆ Backups that the NetWorker server has expired.
◆ Old backups based on the age of backup.
◆ Old backups based on the number of times they were backed up.

Note: To successfully delete the NetWorker index entries corresponding to the Informix
backup entries, ensure that the user who runs the onsmsync utility has the Operate NetWorker
privilege.

Crosscheck and delete Oracle backups

For all NetWorker client file index entries that are not browsable, running the
change...crosscheck or crosscheck command causes the status of the corresponding
Oracle backup pieces to change to expired in the RMAN catalog.
In the RMAN catalog, an expired status for an Oracle backup piece indicates that the
backup piece does not exist in the NetWorker indexes.
It is recommended that you run the crosscheck command regularly to keep the
RMAN catalog and NetWorker indexes synchronized. If they are not synchronized,
you might have issues at backup time, or at restore time as Oracle might try to use a
backup that does not exist on NetWorker. “Backup and restore optimization” on
page 38 provides more details.
Use the crosscheck and delete expired backup commands to delete the backups that
are expired or manually deleted on the NetWorker server.
If you are using an Oracle retention policy as described in “Retention policies” on
page 41 instead of a NetWorker retention policy, use the report obsolete and delete
obselete commands to delete backups expired by the Oracle retention policy.
Otherwise, the backups stay on the NetWorker side indefinitely.
Use the delete command with other options to delete an NMDA backup manually if
required. To use the delete command, you must have the required NetWorker
privileges as described in “NetWorker User Group resource” on page 61. The Oracle
backup and recovery documentation provides more details on the delete command.
When a backup is deleted from the NetWorker side by the relabeling of a tape or
device, you must run the RMAN crossheck command to synchronize the NetWorker
client file index and media database with the Oracle Recovery Catalog.

136 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Backup Procedures

Note: For backup deletions, if the NetWorker client binaries are located in a nondefault
directory on the Oracle Server host and the NWORA resource file was not created, you may
need to set the NSR_NWPATH parameter in the NWORA resource file or in the RMAN script.
“NSR_NWPATH” on page 301 provides more information.

Backup catalog synchronization and backup deletion 137

Backup Procedures

138 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 4
Data Restore and
Recovery

This chapter includes the following major sections:

◆ About data restore and recovery............................................................................... 140
◆ Roadmap for NMDA data restore ............................................................................ 141
◆ Cancel a data restore or recovery.............................................................................. 143
◆ DB2 data restore and recovery .................................................................................. 143
◆ Informix data restore and recovery .......................................................................... 149
◆ Lotus data restore and recovery................................................................................ 152
◆ Oracle data restore and recovery .............................................................................. 161
◆ Sybase data restore and recovery.............................................................................. 170
◆ Database recovery with NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI .................... 174

Data Restore and Recovery 139

Data Restore and Recovery

About data restore and recovery

Unlike the NetWorker software, which uses the term recover for all backup retrieval
activities, the NMDA software distinguishes between the restore and recovery of a
database:
◆ Restore means to retrieve individual datafiles from backup and store the files on
disk.
◆ Recover means to apply the transaction, redo, or logical logs to bring a database to
a specific point in time and make the database consistent. When the logs are not
available, the data can be restored only to the time of the backup. Database
vendors use specific terminology to identify the application of logs:
• DB2 — rollforward
• Informix — logical restore
• Lotus, Oracle, Sybase — recovery
Only the following data can be restored through the NMDA software:
◆ Data that has been backed up according to the instructions in Chapter 3, “Backup
Procedures.”
◆ Data that has been backed up with a legacy NetWorker module that NMDA
supports.
The NetWorker server interface or recover program cannot be used to restore data
that was backed up with the NMDA software. Unlike traditional file system restores
that can be initiated by any client, server, or user that has the required privileges,
NMDA recoveries can be performed only by using specific recovery procedures for
the database or application. Table 20 on page 142 provides details.
To prepare for data restore and recovery, review the information in the following:
◆ “NetWorker indexes and policies used for restores” on page 140
◆ “Roadmap for NMDA data restore” on page 141

NetWorker indexes and policies used for restores

During an NMDA backup, the NetWorker server adds an entry for each backup
object, such as a Lotus datafile or Oracle backup piece, in the online client file index
and records information about each save set in the media database. NMDA queries
the entries during a restore.
The client file index entry is maintained until the browse policy specified for the
client’s save set expires. The media database entry is maintained until the retention
policy specified for the client’s save set expires.
The browse and retention policy values are set in the following:
◆ NetWorker Client resource for scheduled backups.
◆ NSR_SAVESET_BROWSE and NSR_SAVESET_RETENTION parameters for
manual backups. If these parameters are not set, the NetWorker server assigns
the browse and retention policies to a manual backup according to settings in the
NetWorker Client resources.
The lifecycle of a backup save set, during which the backup data may be recovered, is
defined by the browse and retention policy settings.

140 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

When the browse policy expires, the entry is immediately removed from the client
file index. When the retention policies for all the save sets on a backup volume expire,
the volume becomes recyclable and eligible for automatic relabeling by the
NetWorker server. However, the save set entries remain in the media database until
the volume is actually relabeled. When the volume is relabeled, the data on it
becomes inaccessible and can no longer be restored.
NMDA uses both the client file index and media database entries to restore the
backed-up data. If any one of them is missing, the restore fails. To prevent such a
failure:
◆ Set the browse policy to a period long enough to retain the client index entries for
restoring the data.
◆ Set the retention policy to a period that is equal to or longer than the browse
policy period.
After a browse policy expires or the NetWorker indexes are lost, the NetWorker
scanner program can be used to rebuild the indexes.
To ensure successful restore and recovery, you should keep the backup catalogs
synchronized between NetWorker and DB2, Informix, or Oracle, as described in
“Backup catalog synchronization and backup deletion” on page 134.

Note: For Oracle backups, index entries regenerated by using scanner might cause the
NetWorker indexes to become unsynchronized with the Oracle RMAN catalog and lead to
problems. To avoid problems, ensure that the Oracle backup pieces have unique names, as
described in “Oracle backup considerations” on page 101.

The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides more information on how the
NetWorker server uses browse and retention policies to manage backup data and
track the location and status of the data on backup volumes.

Roadmap for NMDA data restore

Before starting an NMDA data restore, ensure that the required configurations and
volumes are in place:
◆ The database or application system is properly configured for recovery according
to the appropriate vendor documentation.
◆ The NetWorker server and client services are running on the required hosts.
◆ The volume required for the restore is online and available. It is also
recommended that the volume is mounted in a configured backup device.

Note: Set the restore parallelism to the number of available devices.

◆ (Optional) To restore the data to a different host (destination host) than the host
that was backed up (source client):
a. Ensure that the NMDA software is installed and configured on the new
destination host.
b. On the NetWorker server that contains the backup to be restored:
– Ensure that a Client resource exists for the destination host. It may contain
these attribute settings:
– Save Set: All
– Group: (blank)

Roadmap for NMDA data restore 141

Data Restore and Recovery

– Ensure that the Remote Access attribute in the Client resource of the source
client contains the following value:
user=db_or_app_user,host=destination_host
c. Perform the restore and recovery steps on the destination host.
◆ The NMDA parameters required for the restore are set according to Appendix A,
“NMDA Parameters and Configuration File”:
• For DB2 and Lotus restores, the parameters must be set in the NMDA
configuration file.
• For Informix restores, the parameters must be set in the environment.
• For Oracle restores, the parameters must be set in the RMAN script.
• For Sybase restores, the parameters must be set as the nsrsybrc command
options, if possible. If a parameter cannot be set as a nsrsybrc command
option, then it should be set in the environment.
These parameters are mandatory for specific restores:
• NSR_CLIENT — For a redirected restore to a new destination host, set to the
hostname of the backed-up (source) client.
• NSR_ENCRYPTION_PHRASES — Set if both of the following are true:
– The data being restored was backed up with AES encryption
(NSR_AES_ENCRYPTION=TRUE).
– The encryption phrase on the NetWorker server has changed since the data
was backed up.

Note: By default, if NSR_ENCRYPTION_PHRASES is not set, NMDA obtains the

encryption phrase from the NetWorker server for decrypting an AES-encrypted
backup during the restore.

• NSR_NWPATH — Set for an Avamar deduplication restore if the NetWorker

client is installed in a nondefault location.
• NSR_SERVER — Set to the hostname of the NetWorker server that contains
the backup to be restored if the server is not located on the NMDA host.
After meeting the requirements for an NMDA data restore, you can perform the
restore by using one of the procedures in Table 20 on page 142.

Table 20 Supported procedures for NMDA data restore (page 1 of 2)

Database or application Supported procedures for data restore

DB2 • db2 restore command

• DB2 Control Center (GUI)

Informix • onbar restore command

Lotus Database and DAOS file-level restore:

• nsrnotesrc command
• NetWorker User for Lotus GUI (Windows only)
Document-level recovery:
• nsrdocrc command
• Notes client GUI (Windows only)

142 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

Table 20 Supported procedures for NMDA data restore (page 2 of 2)

Database or application Supported procedures for data restore

Oracle • rman command to run an RMAN restore script

• Oracle Enterprise Manager

Sybase • nsrdsybrc restore command

• NetWorker User for Sybase GUI (Windows only)

Before running an NMDA data restore, review the procedures for canceling the
restore in “Cancel a data restore or recovery” on page 143.
The following sections provide details on specific restore procedures:
◆ “DB2 data restore and recovery” on page 143
◆ “Informix data restore and recovery” on page 149
◆ “Lotus data restore and recovery” on page 152
◆ “Oracle data restore and recovery” on page 161
◆ “Sybase data restore and recovery” on page 170

Cancel a data restore or recovery

IMPORTANT
Using any procedure other than the following to cancel a recovery in progress can
corrupt the database being recovered. If you cancel a recovery, rerun it to ensure
that the database files are successfully recovered.

To cancel a restore or recovery that was started through the command line, press
Ctrl + C.
To cancel a restore and recovery from the NetWorker User for Lotus or NetWorker
User for Sybase program, select End Recover from the File menu.

Note: This method does not cancel a directed recovery of a Lotus Windows client, where the
performing client is different than the destination client. As workaround in this case, terminate
the nsrlotus_remrecov process through the Task Manager on the remote Windows client.

DB2 data restore and recovery

The following sections provide information and examples specific to DB2 data restore
and recovery:
◆ “Determine how many restore devices and sessions to use” on page 144
◆ “Restore DB2 data” on page 145
◆ “Recover DB2 data” on page 147

Cancel a data restore or recovery 143

Data Restore and Recovery

Determine how many restore devices and sessions to use

If multiple devices and multiple sessions were used to perform a DB2 backup, use the
same number of devices and sessions for the DB2 restore operation.
“Configuring a parallel backup” on page 89 provides details on multiple sessions.

IMPORTANT
Restore with only one session per device because restoring with multiple sessions
per device can severely affect recovery performance.

To determine the number of sessions that were used for the DB2 backup, use the
nsrinfo command:
# nsrinfo -s NetWorker_server -n db2 -X all DB2_client | grep
database_name

For example:
# nsrinfo -s bu-llet -n db2 -X All bu-gingersnap | grep SAMPLE

version=1, DB2, objectname=/SAMPLE/NODE0000

/DB_BACKUP.20100621171932.3, createtime=Mon Jun 21 17:19:34 2010,
copytype=BSACopyType_BACKUP, copyId=1277155174.1277155175,
restoreOrder=1277155174.1, objectsize=0.0, resourcetype=database,
BSAObjectType_DATABASE, BSAObjectStatus_ACTIVE,
description=NMDA_v11:DB2_v970:FULL_BACKUP:SAMPLE:TNE,
objectinfo=db2inst1:3

version=1, DB2, objectname=/SAMPLE/NODE0000

/DB_BACKUP.20100621171932.2, createtime=Mon Jun 21 17:19:33 2010,
copytype=BSACopyType_BACKUP, copyId=1277155173.1277155174,
restoreOrder=1277155173.1, objectsize=0.0, resourcetype=database,
BSAObjectType_DATABASE, BSAObjectStatus_ACTIVE,
description=NMDA_v11:DB2_v970:FULL_BACKUP:SAMPLE:TNE,
objectinfo=db2inst1:3

version=1, DB2, objectname=/SAMPLE/NODE0000

/DB_BACKUP.20100621171932.1, createtime=Mon Jun 21 17:19:32 2010,
copytype=BSACopyType_BACKUP, copyId=1277155172.1277155173,
restoreOrder=1277155172.1, objectsize=0.0, resourcetype=database,
BSAObjectType_DATABASE, BSAObjectStatus_ACTIVE,
description=NMDA_v11:DB2_v970:FULL_BACKUP:SAMPLE:TEQ,
objectinfo=db2inst1:3

3 objects found

The objectinfo value shows the number of sessions. For example:

objectinfo=db2inst1:3

where:
◆ db2inst1 is the name of the database instance that was backed up.
◆ 3 is the number of sessions that were used for the backup.
A restore operation for this example would use three sessions and three devices with
one session per device.

144 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

Restore DB2 data

This section provides information on how to restore DB2 data:
◆ To the same or a different database name under the same instance.
◆ To the same or a different database name under a different instance.
To restore DB2 data to either the same or a different DB2 server host:
1. (Optional) If restoring the most recent backup of the database or tablespace, then
skip this step. Otherwise, if recovering the data to a particular point in time, note
the timestamp of the backup to restore.
If the timestamp of the backup is unknown, then find it through a query of all
backups with the following command:
$ db2 list history backup all for sample

where sample is the name of the database to be restored.

2. (Optional) If multiple sessions were used for the backup, note the number of
sessions used. This value will be specified as the open sessions value in the db2
restore command. “Determine how many restore devices and sessions to use” on
page 144 provides details.
3. Complete the DB2 data restore according to the appropriate instructions:
• “DB2 restore to the same instance” on page 145
• “DB2 restore to a different instance” on page 146

DB2 restore to the same instance

Run the db2 restore command appropriate for the operating system. For example:
◆ On UNIX systems:
$ db2 restore db sample load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.xx open n sessions
options @pathname/nmda_db2.cfg taken at yyyymmddtttt into sample2

◆ On Windows systems:
$ db2 restore db sample load
NetWorker_install_dir\nsr\bin\libnsrdb2.dll open n sessions
options @pathname\nmda_db2.cfg taken at yyyymmddtttt into sample2

where:
• sample is the name of the database to be restored.
• xx is the platform-specific extension:
– o (AIX)
– sl (HP-UX)
– so (Linux, Solaris, HP-UX IA64)

• n is the number of restore sessions, if multiple sessions were used for the
backup. This may be a value from 1 to the number determined in step 2 on
page 145.

Note: Use only one restore device per restore session.

• pathname\nmda_db2.cfg is the complete pathname of the NMDA

configuration file.

DB2 data restore and recovery 145

Data Restore and Recovery

• yyyymmddtttt is the timestamp of the backup to restore, as noted in step 1 on

page 145.
The taken at parameter should be skipped if restoring only the most recent
backup of a database or tablespace.
• sample2 is the new name of the database, if restoring to a different database
name.
The into parameter should be skipped if restoring the database to its original
database name.
• NetWorker_install_dir is the path on Windows systems where the NetWorker
software is installed.
The DB2 documentation provides more details on the db2 restore command.

DB2 restore to a different instance

To complete the DB2 restore to a different instance:
1. Generate a redirection script from the instance (source client) that backed up the
database. Use the appropriate command for the operating system. For example:
• On UNIX systems:
$ db2 restore db sample load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.xx options
@pathname/nmda_db2.cfg redirect generate script
pathname/my_redirect.ddl

• On Windows systems:
$ db2 restore db sample load
NetWorker_install_dir\nsr\bin\libnsrdb2.dll options
@pathname\nmda_db2.cfg redirect generate script
pathname\my_redirect.ddl

where:
– pathname/my_redirect.ddl is the complete pathname of the generated
redirect script.
– The other command line options are the same as described in “DB2 restore
to the same instance” on page 145.

Note: Ensure that the new instance has read and write permission to the script.

The DB2 documentation provides more details on the db2 restore command.

146 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

2. Grant the new instance (for example, db2inst2) permission to restore the database:
a. Start the NMC program, and open the NetWorker Client resource for the
original host that was backed up.
b. In the Application Information attribute, set the following:
DB2_R=sample:db2inst1:db2inst2:

where:
– sample is the database name.
– db2inst1 and db2inst2 are the names of the instances permitted to restore the
database, in this example the old (db2inst1) and new (db2inst2) instances.
Note: Separate each instance with a colon (:) and insert a colon after the last
instance.
The Configure NetWorker privilege is required to modify the Application
Information attribute.
3. Edit the generated script, and define the following parameters:
• OPTIONS (required) — Complete pathname of the NMDA configuration file.
• ON (required) — Complete pathname of the new database instance.
• INTO — New database name, if redirecting the recovery to a new name.
• TAKEN AT — Timestamp of the backup to recover, yyyymmddtttt, if restoring
the data to a particular point in time, as noted in step 1 on page 145.
• OPEN SESSIONS — Number of restore sessions, if multiple sessions were
used for the backup, as determined in step 2 on page 145. Use only one restore
device per restore session.
For example:
OPTIONS ‘@/bigspace/home/db2inst2/nmda_db2.cfg’
ON ‘/bigspace/home/db2inst2’
INTO sample2

Note: If DMS tablespaces were created with the backup, you may need to set the SET
TABLESPACE CONTAINERS parameter to the appropriate value.

The DB2 documentation provides more details.

4. On the DB2 server host, under the redirected different instance where the data is to
be restored, run the redirection script:
$ db2 -tvf my_redirect.ddl

where my_redirect.ddl is the name of the generated redirection script.

The DB2 documentation provides more details on data recovery to a different
database instance.

Recover DB2 data

After the DB2 data has been restored according to the preceding sections, apply the
DB2 transaction logs to recover the database to either the current time or a specific
point in time by using the db2 rollforward command. Use the db2 recover command
to restore and rollforward the logs in a single operation.

DB2 data restore and recovery 147

Data Restore and Recovery

The DB2 documentation provides more details on the db2 rollfoward command.

Note: To use rollforward recovery, the NMDA software must have backed up DB2 transaction
logs. “DB2 transaction log backups” on page 32 provides details.

Rollforward method
The conventional DB2 method of rollforward recovery of a restored database applies
the transaction logs that are stored on the backup media.
To apply all transactions to the end of the logs, use the following command:
$ db2 “rollforward db sample to end of logs and complete”

where sample is the database name.

To apply all transactions to a specific point in time, use the following command:
$ db2 “rollforward db sample to yyyy-mm-dd.hh.mm.ss using local time”

Fetched logs method

The “fetched logs” method of rollforward recovery of a database offers convenience
and speed. It uses a local copy of the DB2 transaction logs, which is retrieved or
“fetched” from the NetWorker server. This method facilitates the selection of specific
logs to apply to the recovery, and can be faster than the conventional method of using
transaction logs stored on the backup media, especially tape media.
Run the nsrdb2rlog command to retrieve or “fetch” a copy of the DB2 transaction
logs from the NetWorker server to a local file system.

Note: To list the logs on the NetWorker server, use the nsrinfo command.

For example, to retrieve all the transaction logs for a database, to the end of its logs,
use the following command:
$ nsrdb2rlog -s server -a sample -d destination_dir

where:
◆ server is the name of the host on which the database resides.
◆ sample is the name of the database that the logs belong to.
◆ destination_dir is the directory where the log files are to be recovered.
The NMDA nsrdb2rlog man page and the EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and
Applications Command Reference Guide provide more details on this command.
Complete the recovery by updating the database with the retrieved transaction logs.
The following are examples of how to apply the transaction logs.
To apply all transactions to the end of the logs, use the following command:
$ db2 rollforward db sample to end of logs and complete overflow log
path (c:\log_path)

148 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

To apply all the transactions to a specific point in time, use the following command:
$ db2 rollforward db sample to yyyy-mm-dd.hh.mm.ss using local time
overflow log path (c:\log_path)

where, in both of these examples:

◆ c:\log_path is the complete pathname of the retrieved transaction log file stored
locally on the DB2 host.
◆ yyyy-mm-dd.hh.mm.ss is the date and time format.

db2 recover method

The db2 recover command combines the functions of the db2 restore and db2
rollforward commands. With this command, a backed-up database or tablespace
may be restored complete with the transaction logs applied to a specified point in
time:
1. Set the DB2 database configuration VENDOROPT parameter to the pathname of
the NMDA configuration file (nmda_db2.cfg) for the database to be recovered.
For example:
db2 update db cfg for sample using vendoropt
@/db/pathname/nmda_db2.cfg

where:
• sample is the name of the database or tablespace to be recovered.
• pathname/nmda_db2.cfg is the complete pathname of the NMDA
configuration file (relative pathnames are not supported).
2. Use the db2 recover command and appropriate options to recover the database or
tablespace to the end of the logs or to a specific point in time. The following are
examples:
• To apply all transactions to the end of the logs, use the following command:
$ db2 recover db sample to end of logs

• To apply transactions to a specific point in time, use the following command:

$ db2 recover db sample to yyyy-mm-dd.hh.mm.ss using local time

where the command line options are the same as described in “DB2 restore to
the same instance” on page 145.

Note: The db2 recover command does not support the load or options syntax that is
available with db2 backup and db2 restore commands. Instead, the db2 recover command
uses information in the DB2 history file to determine what file to load during the recovery
and uses the VENDOROPT variable to pass the options file. If the database has been
dropped, use the db2 restore and db2 rollforward commands to perform disaster
recovery. The db2 recover command is not supported for dropped databases.

Informix data restore and recovery

The following sections provide information and examples specific to Informix data
restore and recovery:
◆ “Informix restore modes” on page 150
◆ “Restore Informix data” on page 151

Informix data restore and recovery 149

Data Restore and Recovery

“Informix imported restore” on page 187 provides details on restoring the data from
one Informix server instance to the same instance on a different host (destination
host).

Informix restore modes

You can perform an Informix restore with the database server in one of three modes:
cold, warm, or mixed. Each of these restore types consists of specific physical and
logical restores with the onbar command:
◆ Cold restore mode — Restores both critical and noncritical data when the
database server is offline. A cold restore performs the following:
1. A backup of the logs that have yet to be backed up.
2. A physical and logical restore of the critical dbspaces.
3. A physical and logical restore of the noncritical dbspaces.
After a cold restore completes, the database server is left in quiescent mode.

Note: A cold restore of selected dbspaces succeeds only if the critical dbspaces are
included on the restore command line. Critical dbspaces are defined as the root dbspace
and any dbspace that contains either physical or logical logs.

◆ Warm restore mode — Restores noncritical data while the database server is
online or quiescent. A warm restore performs the following:
1. A backup of the logs that have yet to be backed up.
2. One or more physical restores.
3. A closing and backup of the current logical log.
4. A logical log restore.
◆ Mixed restore mode — Enables the quick recovery of critical dbspaces, plus any
data to which users require immediate access. A mixed restore performs the
following:
1. A cold restore of the critical dbspaces, with the database server in offline
mode.
2. A warm restore of noncritical dbspaces, with the database server in online or
quiescent mode.
After the database server is returned to quiescent mode, perform a warm restore
of the other dbobjects.
The Informix documentation provides details on the different restore modes.

Note: The onbar cold, warm, mixed, and point-in-time restore modes require properly enabled
versions of the NetWorker and NMDA software to enable the backup of the outstanding logs.

The ON-Bar utility maintains a history of backup and restore operations in the
sysutils database, and stores an extra copy of the backup history in the emergency
boot file. ON-Bar uses the sysutils database in a warm restore when only a portion of
the data is lost. ON-Bar uses the emergency boot file in a cold restore when the
sysutils database cannot be accessed.
The Informix onsmsync utility is used to regenerate the emergency boot file and
expire old backups.

150 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

Restore Informix data

You can perform an Informix restore of database server instances or database objects
by running the onbar command at the command line as the informix user to run the
ON-Bar utility.
Use the appropriate settings and onbar command to perform the following types of
restores:
◆ Physical restore — Replaces lost or corrupted Informix dbobjects from the
NetWorker backup media. You can perform this type of restore as a
whole-system or selected-dbspace restore.
For example:
1. Set the following environment variables in the shell or command window:
NSR_SERVER=mars
INFORMIXDIR=C:\Progra~1\IBM\Informix
ONCONFIG=ONCONFIG.ifxm1

Note: On UNIX only, you must also set the INFORMIXSQLHOSTS variable.

2. Run the following onbar command:

onbar -r -p [dbspace_name]

◆ Logical Restore — Recovers the server transactions made since the last dbobject
backup, followed by a rolling forward of the logical log files backed up for the
dbobjects. If different backup sessions are involved, the log rolls forward
transactions made since the backup time recorded for each dbobject restored.
For example:
1. Set the following environment variables in the shell or command window:
NSR_SERVER=mars
INFORMIXDIR=C:\Progra~1\IBM\Informix
ONCONFIG=ONCONFIG.ifxm1

Note: On UNIX only, you must also set the INFORMIXSQLHOSTS variable.

2. Run the following onbar command:

onbar -r -l

◆ Combined Restore — Enables you to issue a single command to perform a

physical restore, immediately followed by a logical restore.
For example:
1. Set the following environment variables in the shell or command window:
NSR_SERVER=mars
INFORMIXDIR=C:\Progra~1\IBM\Informix
ONCONFIG=ONCONFIG.ifxm1

Note: On UNIX only, you must also set the INFORMIXSQLHOSTS variable.

2. Run the following onbar command:

onbar -r [dbspace_name]

Informix data restore and recovery 151

Data Restore and Recovery

◆ Point-in-time restore — Involves performing a whole-system physical restore of

the database server data from a whole-system backup to a specified time instead
of the default, which is the time of the last database server backup.
For example:
1. Set the following environment variables in the shell or command window:
NSR_SERVER=mars
INFORMIXDIR=C:\Progra~1\IBM\Informix
ONCONFIG=ONCONFIG.ifxm1

Note: On UNIX only, you must also set the INFORMIXSQLHOSTS variable.

2. Run the following onbar command:

onbar -r -t “2010-06-24 00:00” -w -p

The Informix documentation included with the Informix server software provides
details on the use of the onbar command and options.

Lotus data restore and recovery

Before starting a Lotus data recovery, ensure that the following Lotus-specific
requirements are met:
◆ For restore and recovery operations with a Domino server on Linux or Solaris, the
required environment settings are in place, according to “Ensure the
environment settings for Lotus operations” on page 94.
◆ You cannot perform in-place recovery of a logged database when the original
database is still present. In this case, perform one of the following:
• Delete the original database.
• Direct the recovery to a new directory with the NSR_RELOCATION_DEST
parameter, and change (zap) the database instance ID (DBIID) with the
NSR_DBIID parameter in the NMDA configuration file.

IMPORTANT
After you change the DBIID of a recovered database, you cannot recover any
subsequent changes to the database until the next full backup is performed.
Perform a full backup after changing the DBIID of a recovered database. If an
incremental backup is the next backup performed on a database after a DBIID
change, NMDA automatically performs a full backup of the database instead.

◆ Lotus transactional logging is set properly on the Domino server for the required
type of recovery operation:
• If Lotus archived logging is enabled, a database or document can be recovered
to any point in time, provided a specified backup and the transaction logs for
that time period are available.
“Setting the NSR_RECOVER_TIME parameter” on page 314 provides details
on how to determine the recovery point in time.
• If Lotus archived logging is disabled, a database or document can be restored
to the time of a specific backup only.

152 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

If some transaction logs are missing on the system and they need to be restored
from the NetWorker system, you can set the TRANSLOG_RECOVER_PATH
parameter in the notes.ini file to the full pathname of the alternative log location.
Setting this parameter improves the restore performance by preventing the logs
that will be restored from interfering with the logs that are generated by Domino
operations. The IBM documentation provides details on setting the parameter.

IMPORTANT
When recovering a logged database to a different Domino server than the one it
was backed up from, you cannot apply the transaction logs because the logs are not
available in the new destination.
If you recover a logged database to a new destination host, either perform disaster
recovery first to restore the transaction logs to the new destination or do one of the
following:
- In the NetWorker User for Lotus GUI, select “Do not apply Transaction Logs” in
the Recover Options dialog box.
- In the configuration file, set NSR_APPLY_LOGS=FALSE.

Perform the Lotus data recovery by using the appropriate methods:

◆ “Database restore and recovery through the nsrnotesrc command” on page 153
◆ “Database recovery with NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI” on page 174
◆ “Document-level recovery through the nsrdocrc command” on page 157
◆ “Document-level recovery through the Notes client GUI” on page 159
“Recovery of partitioned Domino servers” on page 156 provides details on the
recovery of partitioned Domino servers.
“Lotus DAOS recovery considerations” on page 156 provides details on Lotus DAOS
restore through the nsrnotesrc command and NetWorker User for Lotus GUI.

Database restore and recovery through the nsrnotesrc command

You can restore and recover Lotus database and DAOS files through the nsrnotesrc
command.
On UNIX or Linux, you must run the nsrnotesrc command as the Lotus user that
starts the Domino server. Do not run the command as the root user.
You must specify the Lotus database files or directories to be restored by setting the
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS or NSR_RECOV_LIST_FILE parameter (not both) in the
NMDA configuration file.

Note: Filepaths are case-sensitive for all platforms, including Windows. The filepaths must
match the case of the entries in the NetWorker client index. If you are uncertain about the case
of filepaths, use the nsrinfo command to verify the backup entries in the NetWorker client file
index.

Ensure that all the parameters required for the recovery are set in the configuration
file according to Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File.”

Lotus data restore and recovery 153

Data Restore and Recovery

To perform the Lotus database recovery, run the nsrnotesrc command from the
command line:
nsrnotesrc(.exe) -z config_filepath

where config_filepath is the complete pathname of the NMDA configuration file that
contains the parameter settings for the recovery.
If the nsrnotesrc command prompts with a message that an existing file has the same
name as a file being recovered, reply with the value n, N, y, Y, r, or R, as described in
“NSR_RECOV_INTERACT” on page 312.
The following examples describe parameters to set in the NMDA configuration file
for different types of Lotus database recoveries. After the parameters are set, the
nsrnotesrc -z command is run to perform the recovery.

Example 13 Recovery of a database to a specific point in time

By default, the NMDA software restores the most recent Lotus backup available. If
archived transaction logging is enabled and the required transaction logs are on the
Domino system or can be restored from a backup, NMDA requests that Domino
apply the logs up to the current time.
The NSR_RECOVER_TIME parameter enables you to recover the database to a point
in time before the current time. If transaction logs are available, NMDA recovers the
database to the time set by the parameter. Otherwise, NMDA restores the database to
the last backup before or equal to the time set by the parameter. The parameter value
is the time in nsr_getdate format. For example:
NSR_RECOVER_TIME = "Wed June 23 2010 14:23"

“Setting the NSR_RECOVER_TIME parameter” on page 314 provides details on how

to determine the recovery point in time.

Example 14 Recovery of specific Lotus data files or directories

Use the NSR_BACKUP_PATHS parameter to specify a list of files and directories to

recover. When you specify a directory, NMDA recovers all the files in that directory
and its subdirectories that were backed up. You can mix data files and directories in a
single list. For example:
◆ On UNIX systems:
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = /lotusdata/account.nsf, /lotusdata/mail/

◆ On Windows systems:
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = C:\Lotus\Domino\data\account.nsf,
C:\Lotus\Domino\data\mail\

Example 15 Recovery of all Lotus database files

The following parameter setting in the NMDA configuration file specifies the
recovery of all the Lotus database files backed up from the given NetWorker client:
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = NOTES:

IMPORTANT
Use the NOTES: option with caution because the NMDA software attempts to
restore the data for all partitions of a partitioned Domino server, or for all Domino
installations when there are multiple Domino installations on the client.

154 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

Example 16 Relocated data restore

By default, NMDA restores data files to the same location that they were backed up
from. Set the NSR_RELOCATION_DEST parameter to specify a different destination
directory. For example:
NSR_RELOCATION_DEST = /newdata/

When multiple files are relocated with NSR_RELOCATION_DEST, the relative

directory structure of the files is preserved. For example, if the files
/olddata/mail1/file1.nsf and /olddata/mail2/file2.nsf are being restored to the new
location /newdata, the files are restored to /newdata/mail1/file1.nsf and
/newdata/mail2/file2.nsf.

Note: If logged databases are recovered, the NSR_DBIID parameter should be set to change the
DBIID of the recovered files. NSR_DBIID is described in Example 19 on page 156.

IMPORTANT
During a restore to a different directory, the nsrnotesrc command does not prompt
when an existing file has the same name as the file being recovered. Instead, the
existing file is overwritten.

Example 17 Restore of a logged database without applying transaction logs

By default, NMDA restores and recovers a logged Domino database to the current
time or to a time set through the NSR_RECOVERY_TIME parameter. Set the
NSR_APPLY_LOGS parameter to FALSE if you want to restore a logged database
only without applying the transaction logs:
NSR_APPLY_LOGS = FALSE

Example 18 Relocation of a linked database during Lotus recovery

By default, when the nsrnotesrc command recovers a Lotus link file, the database or
directory that the link points to is also recovered to the location that it was backed up
from.
If the NSR_RELOCATION_DEST parameter is set in the NMDA configuration file,
the database file that a link points to is recovered to the specified relocation directory.
For example, the link file /space1/notes/data/link.nsf points to the database file
/space2/notes/data.nsf. Both the link file and the database are backed up.
NSR_RELOCATION_DEST is set to /space3/new.
The link file and database file are relocated during the recovery to these locations:
◆ Recovered link file: /space3/new/space1/notes/data/link.nsf
◆ Recovered database file (pointed to by the link file):
/space3/new/space2/notes/data.nsf

Lotus data restore and recovery 155

Data Restore and Recovery

Example 19 Recovery of a database with a change of DBIID

The following parameter settings in the NMDA configuration file specify the restore
of the logged database named budget2010.nsf to a new directory
C:\Lotus\Domino\Data\tmpdir, which requires a change of the DBIID and
point-in-time recovery of the database to Wed June 23 2010 14:23:
LOTUS {
Notes_ExecDirectory = C:\Lotus\Domino\Data
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = C:\Lotus\Domino\Data\budget2010.nsf
NSR_DBIID = 1
NSR_RELOCATION_DEST = C:\Lotus\Domino\Data\tmpdir
NSR_RECOVER_TIME = “Wed June 23 2010 14:23”
}

Since the DBIID of the database changes after the recovery, remember to back up the
new database if you plan to use it.
“Setting the NSR_RECOVER_TIME parameter” on page 314 provides details on how
to determine the recovery point in time.

Recovery of partitioned Domino servers

To enable recovery of partitioned Domino servers, set the required parameters in the
NMDA configuration file:
1. Set the PATH parameter to include the directory of the partitioned Domino
server to be recovered that contains the notes.ini file.
2. Ensure that the PATH parameter from step 1 does not include the data directories
of any other partitioned Domino servers.
3. When recovering all the Lotus data for a partitioned Domino server, use the
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS parameter to specify each top-level directory that
contains the data for the partition to be recovered. For example:
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = NOTES:M:\Lotus\p1data

Note: Do not specify just NOTES: for the NSR_BACKUP_PATHS parameter because
NMDA then attempts to recover all the Lotus data for all the Domino servers on the host.

Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides details on the

NMDA configuration file.

Lotus DAOS recovery considerations

“Lotus DAOS backups” on page 97 provides information on backups of Lotus DAOS
(NLO) files.

Note: Any parameter settings in the LOTUS_DAOS{} section of the NMDA configuration file
are ignored during restore operations.

To restore Domino databases and the corresponding missing NLO files:

1. Restore the Domino databases first by using a regular NMDA Lotus restore,
either through the nsrnotesrc –z pathname_to_nmda_lotus.cfg command or
through the NetWorker User for Lotus program.

156 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

2. Run the Domino tell command to determine the missing NLO files for the
databases that were just restored. For example:
tell daosmgr listnlo -o output_file MISSING database.nsf

3. Create a new configuration file for the DAOS recovery or modify the existing
nmda_lotus.cfg file used in step 1 . When restoring through the nsrnotesrc
command, specify either one of the following parameters in the LOTUS{} section
of the NMDA configuration file:
NSR_RECOV_LIST_FILE = full_path_to_output_file_from_tell_command

or
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS =
list_of_NLO_files_from_tell_command_separated_by_commas

The following provide details on these parameters:

• “NSR_BACKUP_PATHS” on page 309
• “NSR_RECOV_LIST_FILE” on page 312
If you use the NetWorker User for Lotus program to restore the missing DAOS
files, do not set either of these parameters in the configuration file.
4. Perform the second restore to restore the missing NLO files, either through the
nsrnotesrc –z pathname_to_nmda_lotus.cfg command or through the NetWorker
User for Lotus program.
5. After restoring the DAOS directory or NLO files, resynchronize the DAOS
repository, for example, by running the following command:
tell daosmgr resync [force]

This command also updates or re-creates the daos.cfg and daoscat.nsf files in the
Lotus data directory.
The IBM documentation provides details on restoring and resynchronizing the
DAOS repository.
If you want to restore the DAOS directory or specific NLO files only, perform only the
preceding step 3 .
If you know the missing DAOS files or directories ahead of time, you can skip the
preceding step 2 and restore the DAOS files or directories at the same time as the
database files through one of the following methods:
◆ Use the nsrnotesrc command with the NSR_BACKUP_PATHS parameter set to a
list of the database and DAOS files or directories.
◆ Use the NetWorker User for Lotus program and select the required files or
directories for restore in the program.

Document-level recovery through the nsrdocrc command

You can recover deleted Notes documents (not modified Notes documents or design
documents) in a local database through the nsrdocrc command. This document-level
recovery allows recovery to any point in time if the following applies:
◆ The database is in archived log mode.
◆ Backups of the database and transaction logs are available.

Lotus data restore and recovery 157

Data Restore and Recovery

Note: The nsrdocrc command operates on a single database file only. To restore documents
from multiple databases, you must run the nsrdocrc command multiple times.

To recover deleted documents from a database file, perform the following steps as the
Lotus user:
1. Ensure that the NMDA configuration file contains the required parameter
settings. For example:
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = database_to_be_restored
NSR_NOTES_INI_PATH = notes.ini_file_location
NSR_RECOVER_TIME = point_in_time_for_database_recovery
NSR_RELOCATION_DEST = directory_path_for_database_restore
NSR_SERVER = NetWorker_server_name

Note: If NSR_RELOCATION_DEST is not set, the database is restored to /nsr/apps/tmp

(UNIX) or NetWorker_install_path\apps\tmp (Windows).

Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides details on

parameters in the NMDA configuration file.
“Setting the NSR_RECOVER_TIME parameter” on page 314 provides details on
setting the NSR_RECOVER_TIME parameter.
2. To prevent the Domino server from deleting the directory that contains the
temporary database file when it deletes the database, perform one of the
following:
• Set the following parameter in the Lotus Domino notes.ini file:
DISABLE_DIR_DEL_IF_EMPTY=1

The IBM documentation provides details on this parameter.

or
• Create a dummy file in the NSR_RELOCATION_DEST directory.
3. On an AIX (64-bit), Linux, or Solaris client, set the required environment variable
for the library locations:
• On a 64-bit AIX client, set the environment variable LIBPATH to the complete
pathname of the Lotus directory that contains the library files libxmlproc_r.a,
libndgts_r.a , and libnotes_r.a.
For example, set LIBPATH to the pathname of the Lotus directory:
export LIBPATH=/opt/ibm/lotus/notes/latest/ibmpow

• On a Linux or Solaris client, set the environment variable

LD_LIBRARY_PATH to the complete pathname of the Lotus directory that
contains the library files libxmlproc.so, libndgts.so, and libnotes.so.
For example, set LD_LIBRARY_PATH to the pathname of the Lotus directory:
export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/opt/lotus/notes/latest/sunspa

4. Type the nsrdocrc command at the command line:

nsrdocrc(.exe) -z config_filepath

where config_filepath is the complete pathname of the NMDA configuration file.

The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Command Reference
Guide provides details on the nsrdocrc command.

158 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

Example 20 on page 159 provides an example of document-level recovery with the

nsrdocrc command.
“Document-level recovery of database links” on page 161 provides details on
recovering documents from a linked database.

Example 20 Recovering deleted documents for a logged database

To recover deleted documents in the database F:\Lotus\Domino\data\account.nsf

residing on client host saturn that was backed up on June 15 to the NetWorker server
mars:
1. Enter the nsrinfo command to obtain the backup time of the directory that
contains account.nsf:
nsrinfo.exe -s mars -n notes saturn | grep "Jun 15"

NOTES:/F:/Lotus/Domino/data/, date=984492446 Tue Jun 15 08:07:26

2010 ...
NOTES:/F:/Lotus/Domino/data/account.nsf, date=984492440 Tue Jun
15 08:07:20 2010

2. Ensure that the NMDA configuration file contains the following parameter
settings, including the backup time of the F:\Lotus\Domino\data directory:
LOTUS {
Notes_ExecDirectory = F:\Lotus\Domino
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = F:\Lotus\Domino\data\account.nsf
NSR_NOTES_INI_PATH = F:\Lotus\Domino\notes.ini
NSR_RECOVER_TIME = 984492446
NSR_RELOCATION_DEST = D:\tempdir
NSR_SERVER = mars
}

3. To perform the document recovery, type the nsrdocrc command:

nsrdocrc.exe -z config_filepath

Note: Recovering deleted documents from one large database to another large database can
take considerable time.

Document-level recovery through the Notes client GUI

On Windows systems only, you can use the Lotus Notes client GUI to recover deleted
or modified Notes documents (not design documents) in either of the following:
◆ A local Notes or Domino database
◆ A remote Domino database
Document-level recovery through the Notes client GUI allows recovery only up to
the time of the selected backup.
The document-level recovery feature must be added to the Lotus Notes client, as
described in the EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Installation
Guide.
The database with the documents to be recovered can be physically located on either
the local computer or a remote Domino server, but the database must be accessible
through the Notes client.

Lotus data restore and recovery 159

Data Restore and Recovery

Document-level recovery of deleted or modified documents

IMPORTANT
Before you restore a modified document, you should back up the current database
to save the latest changes in the document. Otherwise, all unsaved changes in the
document will be lost during the restore.

To recover deleted or modified documents from a database file:

1. If recovering documents in a remote Domino database, ensure the following:
• The user who runs the Notes client program on the local host is:
– Listed in the Remote Access attribute in the NetWorker Client resource of
the remote Domino server.
– Granted administrative privileges on the remote Domino server.
• A NetWorker Client resource is configured on the same NetWorker server for
the host where Notes client program runs.
2. To prevent the Domino server from deleting the directory that contains the
temporary database file when it deletes the database, perform one of the
following:
• Set the following parameter in the Lotus Domino notes.ini file:
DISABLE_DIR_DEL_IF_EMPTY=1

The IBM documentation provides details on this parameter.

or
• Create a dummy file in the NSR_RELOCATION_DEST directory.
3. Start the Lotus Notes client GUI.
4. Open the database that contains the documents to recover.
5. Select the documents to recover.

Note: Skip this step if you are recovering deleted documents.

6. From the Actions menu, select either NMDA Lotus - Restore Selected
Documents or NMDA Lotus - Restore Deleted Documents.
The NetWorker Module dialog box opens. For a successful recovery, each field in
the dialog box except Encryption Phrase must contain a valid value, as required.
7. In the NetWorker Module dialog box, perform the following:
a. In the Database text box, type the complete pathname of the database that
contains the documents to recover.
“Document-level recovery of database links” on page 161 provides details on
recovering documents from a linked database.
b. In the Temporary Directory for Restore text box, type a temporary directory
on the local host, where the database backup is to be restored.
c. In the NetWorker Server text box, type the hostname of NetWorker server
that contains the backup to restore.

160 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

d. In the NetWorker Client text box, type the name of the NetWorker client file
index that contains information about the backup to be restored.

Note: If the database is located on a remote host, the default name listed in the
NetWorker Client text box might not be correct. This can result in a restore failure.

e. In the Show Backups in Last text box, type the number of past days (since the
current date) for which to display backup information on the specified
database. For example, the value 5 causes backups from the past five days to
be displayed.
f. Click Refresh to display a list of the database backups under List of Backups.
g. In the List of Backups display, select a database backup to be restored.
h. In the Encryption Phrase text box, type the encryption phrase that was used to
back up the database if the datazone pass phrase on the NetWorker server
changed since the backup.

Note: Encryption keys typed in the text box are cached in memory and continue to be
used for recoveries until the Notes client program is exited and restarted.

8. To start the recovery process, click Restore.

9. When the recovery is complete, press F9 to refresh the Lotus Notes screen and
display the recovered files.

Document-level recovery of database links

To perform a document-level recovery of a linked database, specify the complete
pathname of the link file that points to the database, by doing one of the following:
◆ Type the link filepath in the Database field of the Lotus Notes client, as described
in “Document-level recovery of deleted or modified documents” on page 160.
◆ Specify the link filepath with the NSR_BACKUP_PATHS parameter in the
NMDA configuration file, as described in “NSR_BACKUP_PATHS” on page 309,
for a nsrdocrc restore.

Note: Document-level recovery of directory links is not supported.

If the directory link file C:\Domino\data\link.dir points to the directory

D:\Lotus\dir that contains a database db22.nsf, perform a document-level recovery
of the database by specifying the complete pathname of the database
D:\Lotus\dir\db22.nsf (not the directory link).

Oracle data restore and recovery

The following sections provide information and examples specific to Oracle data
restore and recovery:
◆ “Determine volumes for restore” on page 162
◆ “Prevent degradation of restore performance with Oracle 10.2 or later” on
page 165
◆ “RMAN scripts for restore and recovery” on page 165
◆ “Recovery configuration wizard (Oracle only)” on page 166

Oracle data restore and recovery 161

Data Restore and Recovery

Perform the Oracle data restore and recovery by using the appropriate methods:
◆ “Restore through the RMAN command line interface” on page 169
◆ “Restore through Oracle Enterprise Manager” on page 169

Note: Use of the Oracle Enterprise Manager Backup Management Tools is not supported
with the recovery configuration wizard.

Complete the Oracle data recovery, if required, according to “Recover Oracle data”
on page 170.

Determine volumes for restore

With Oracle 10gR2 and later, you can use the restore...preview command to identify
backups that RMAN needs for a restore operation. The output of restore...preview
indicates which media (NetWorker volumes) are required for the restore and if any of
those NetWorker volumes are remote. A volume is considered to be remote if it
requires operator intervention to become accessible to NetWorker.
If a required backup is on a remote volume, do one of the following:
◆ Use the change...unavailable command to prevent RMAN from selecting the
required remote backups, and attempt the restore...preview operation again to
see if RMAN selects another remote backup. When RMAN does not select any
remote backups, you can perform the restore operation.
◆ Use the restore...preview command with the recall option. The restore...preview
recall operation automatically requests the retrieval of the remote volumes by
generating a media notification on the NetWorker server. If a backup piece
required for the restore spans multiple volumes, a media notification is generated
for each volume sequentially.

Note: Due to an Oracle limitation, Oracle does not show remote volumes on Windows.

The volumes listed in the output of restore...preview are the ones used at the backup
time. Due to an Oracle limitation, if the volume that NetWorker intended to use for
the restore at the time of the preview is different from the one used at the backup time
(for example, due to NetWorker staging), the restore...preview operation still lists the
volume name used at the backup time.

Example 21 Using restore...preview to determine volumes for restore

The following RMAN script is used to identify backups that RMAN needs for
restoring datafiles 1 and 2. The NetWorker server name is server1:
run {
allocate channel t1 type SBT send 'ENV=(NSR_SERVER=server1)';
restore datafile 1, 2 preview;
}

162 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

The following output of the restore...preview command shows that the backup of
datafile 1 is on the volume DBMIData.808 and the backup of datafile 2 is on the
volume DBMIData.802. This output also shows that the volume DBMIData.808 is
currently remote:
List of Backup Sets
===================
BS Key Type LV Size Device Type Elapsed Time Completion Time
------- ---- -- ---------- ----------- ------------ ---------------
96 Full 127.00M SBT_TAPE 00:00:05 17-MAY-10
BP Key: 99 Status: AVAILABLE Compressed: NO Tag:
TAG20100517T144317
Handle: 06ldtl86_1_1 Media: DBMIData.808
List of Datafiles in backup set 96
File LV Type Ckp SCN Ckp Time Name
---- -- ---- ---------- --------- ----
1 Full 225701 17-MAY-10 /space/oradata/tartst/Sys1.ora

BS Key Type LV Size Device Type Elapsed Time Completion Time

------- ---- -- ---------- ----------- ------------ ---------------
109 Full 46.25M SBT_TAPE 00:00:03 17-MAY-10
BP Key: 111 Status: AVAILABLE Compressed: NO Tag:
TAG20100517T144415
Handle: 08ldtla0_1_1 Media: DBMIData.802
List of Datafiles in backup set 109
File LV Type Ckp SCN Ckp Time Name
---- -- ---- ---------- --------- ----
2 Full 225811 17-MAY-10 /space/oradata/tartst/utbs1.ora

List of remote backup files

===========================
Handle: 06ldtl86_1_1 Media: DBMIData.808

If you have a list of Oracle backup piece names to be restored, you can instead use the
nsrorainfo command to identify the NetWorker volumes required for the restore of
those backup pieces.
The nsrorainfo command displays the following volume information for the restore
of each backup piece:
◆ The name and location of the volume.
◆ The save time of the backup piece.
The nsrorainfo command does not display the status of a volume required for the
restore. The command cannot recall the remote volumes.
The nsrorainfo command syntax and options are as follows:
nsrorainfo[.exe] [-c NetWorker_client_name] [-s NetWorker_server_name]
[-f filename] [backup_piece_name1 [backup_piece_name2 ...]]

where:
◆ NetWorker_client_name is the hostname of the NetWorker client whose index
contains information on the Oracle backup pieces. By default, the client is the
local host.
◆ NetWorker_server_name is the hostname of the NetWorker server to query for the
volumes. By default, the server is the local host.

Oracle data restore and recovery 163

Data Restore and Recovery

◆ filename is the name of a text file that contains a list of one or more backup piece
names for restore:
• The file must contain each backup piece name on a separate line.
• The file cannot contain spaces or comments (for example, comment lines
preceded with the # symbol).
◆ backup_piece_name1 and backup_piece_name2 are backup piece names for restore.
Command options in brackets ([ ]) are optional. Do not include the brackets when
typing the command.
To use the nsrorainfo command, specify the names of the backup pieces by either or
both of the following:
◆ List the backup piece names as options of the command.
◆ List the backup piece names in a text file, and specify the name of the file with the
-f option of the command.
The listed volumes are the most accessible ones, which the NetWorker server intends
to use for the restore at the time that the command is typed. For example, the
command lists the clones of volumes if the original volumes are not accessible.
If any listed volumes are removed from the NetWorker devices or deleted after the
nsrorainfo command is typed, the server can perform the restore by using different
volumes that are accessible.
Example 22 on page 164 and Example 23 on page 165 show how to use the nsrorainfo
command and the type of output produced by the command.
The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Command Reference Guide
provides more details on the nsrorainfo command.

Example 22 Sample nsrorainfo commands for Oracle restores

Each of the following nsrorainfo commands displays a list of the volumes required to
restore the specified backup pieces:
◆ The following command searches in the NetWorker index of the client mars on
the server server1 for information on the volumes that contain the backup pieces
backupc_1 and backupc_2:
nsrorainfo -c mars -s server1 backupc_1 backupc_2

◆ The following command searches in the NetWorker index of the local host for
information on the volumes that contain the backup pieces listed in the file
backup2.txt. Both the NetWorker client and server are assumed to be the local
host:
nsrorainfo -f backup2.txt

◆ The following command searches in the NetWorker index of the client mars for
information on the volumes that contain both:
• The backup piece backupc_3.
• The backup pieces listed in the file backup3.txt.
The NetWorker server is assumed to be the local host:
nsrorainfo -c mars backupc_3 -f backup3.txt

164 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

Example 23 Volume information displayed by the nsrorainfo command

The following nsrorainfo command searches in the NetWorker index of the local host
on the server mars for information on the volumes that contain the backup pieces
backup1 and backup2:
nsrorainfo -s mars backup1 backup2

The nsrorainfo command displays the following type of information:

backup1:
mars.003 at /space/nw_volume1 (save time 1098886937)
mars.004 at /space/nw_volume2 (save time 1098883454)

backup2:
mars.005 at /dev/rmt/0cbn (save time 1098883452)

According to this command display:

◆ Volumes mars.003 and mars.004 are required to restore the backup piece
backup1.
◆ Volume mars.005 is required to restore the backup piece backup2.

Prevent degradation of restore performance with Oracle 10.2 or later

Due to an Oracle limitation, degradation of NMDA restore performance might occur
with Oracle 10.2 or later if NetWorker multiplexing is used with NMDA for Oracle
backups.
If NetWorker multiplexing is enabled for NMDA Oracle backups, you can prevent
the restore performance degradation by including the set parallelmediarestore off
command in the RMAN restore script that is used for the Oracle restore.
For example, the following RMAN restore script contains the required Oracle
command to disable the multiplexing during the Oracle restore:
set parallelmediarestore off;
run {
allocate channel c1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
restore database;
release channel c1;
}

RMAN scripts for restore and recovery

An appropriate RMAN script is required to perform the preferred type of Oracle
restore operation on the Oracle Server host. You can create the RMAN script either
manually or by using the recovery configuration wizard. “Recovery configuration
wizard (Oracle only)” on page 166 provides details on the wizard.
RMAN restore scripts can be stored as text files. Alternatively, if a Recovery Catalog
is used, restore scripts can be stored in the Recovery Catalog database. The Oracle
backup and recovery documentation provides more information on storing the
restore scripts in the Recovery Catalog database.
All the parameters must be set in the RMAN restore script. The use of the send
command is recommended. “The send command” on page 324 provides more
information. “Common NMDA parameters” on page 296 and “Oracle-specific
NMDA parameters” on page 315 describe the common and Oracle-specific
parameters, respectively.

Oracle data restore and recovery 165

Data Restore and Recovery

Example 24 RMAN script for a tablespace restore

The following RMAN script performs a restore of an Oracle tablespace by using the
NetWorker server mars.emc.com. The Oracle data is restored to the NetWorker client
server1.emc.com. This RMAN script also includes the recovery step, which is
explained in “Recover Oracle data” on page 170:
run {
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
allocate channel t2 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
send ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=mars.emc.com,
NSR_CLIENT=server1.emc.com)’;
sql ’alter tablespace users offline immediate’;
restore tablespace users;
recover tablespace users;
sql ’alter tablespace users online’;
release channel t1;
release channel t2;
}

“RMAN scripts for manual backups” on page 101 provides more information on
setting the NMDA parameters in an RMAN script.

Example 25 RMAN script for a restore from a specified pool

By default, NMDA and NetWorker use configuration settings and information in the
media database to determine the backup volume to use for an NMDA restore.
Optionally, you can use the NSR_RECOVER_POOL parameter in the RMAN restore
script to restore data from a specific volume pool if there are multiple copies (clones)
of the backup on different volume pools. “NSR_RECOVER_POOL” on page 301
provides more information.
The following RMAN script performs a nonproxy restore of the database from the
specified volume pool named OracleClonePool2, where the pool contains a clone of
the original backup volume:
shutdown immediate;
startup mount;
run {
allocate channel c1 type 'SBT_TAPE';
send channel c1 ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=backup01,
NSR_RECOVER_POOL=OracleClonePool2)’;
restore database;
release channel c1;
}

Recovery configuration wizard (Oracle only)

The NMDA software supports a recovery configuration wizard that is integrated
with the NetWorker Management Console (NMC). The recovery configuration
wizard can be used to configure a restore and recovery of Oracle data only, which was
backed up by NMDA.
You can run the recovery configuration wizard from the NetWorker Console
Administration window, which you can start on any supported host by using a web
browser session and by specifying the Console server URL.
The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release Notes provides
details on the NetWorker requirements for the support of the configuration wizards.

166 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

To configure a restore with the wizard:

1. Review “Features of the recovery configuration wizard” on page 167.
2. Meet the “Requirements for using the recovery configuration wizard” on
page 168.
3. Follow the steps in “Configure an Oracle restore with the wizard” on page 168.

Features of the recovery configuration wizard

The recovery configuration wizard can create an RMAN script for the following types
of restore and recovery:
◆ Current time restore and recovery of a whole or partial Oracle database, where a
partial database is a set of tablespaces or datafiles.
The wizard can configure a tablespace restore as long as the control file contains
information about the tablespace.
◆ Point-in-time restore and recovery of a whole Oracle database.
◆ Restore of individual archived redo logs.
◆ Restore and recovery of Oracle data to a different database through the creation
of a duplicate database on either the local host or a remote host, by using backups
of the original target database.
The database duplication script created by the wizard uses the RMAN duplicate
command to create a duplicate database while the original database is retained.
The duplicate database can either be an identical copy of the original database or
contain only a subset of the original tablespaces. For example, the duplicate
database can be created to run independently on a remote host, for the purpose of
practicing restore and recovery operations while the production database
remains in operation on the local host:
• If the duplicate database is to be created on the same host as the original
database, the RMAN script is also generated on the local host. In this case, the
wizard requests names for the duplicate database, datafiles, and redo logs that
differ from those of the original database.
• If the duplicate database is to be created on a remote host, the RMAN script is
generated on either the local or remote host, as specified in the wizard. In this
case, the wizard requests a name for the duplicate database that differs from
that of the original database. The datafile and redo log names can be the same
as for the original database.
The recovery configuration wizard can only create a new RMAN script for restore
and recovery. The wizard cannot modify an existing RMAN script. You must use a
text editor to modify an RMAN script that was created by the wizard.
“Oracle data restore and recovery” on page 161 provides more information about
RMAN scripts for restore and recovery.
The recovery configuration wizard does not support the following:
◆ Cluster or Oracle RAC systems
◆ Proxy backups
◆ RMAN automatic channels

Oracle data restore and recovery 167

Data Restore and Recovery

The following sources provide more information on the configuration wizard:

◆ Descriptive inline text in the wizard
◆ Online help in the wizard
◆ EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release Notes

Requirements for using the recovery configuration wizard

Before you use the recovery configuration wizard, ensure that all of the following
requirements are met:
◆ The NMC user that starts the wizard (the wizard user) has the Remote Access
NetWorker privileges on the NetWorker server where the NMDA client
configuration is stored.
◆ Communication between the NMC server, NetWorker server, and NMDA client
uses NetWorker nsrauth authentication. The NetWorker documentation
provides any requirements for nsrauth authentication.
◆ The required NetWorker releases are installed on the NMC server, NetWorker
server, and NMDA client hosts as described in the EMC NetWorker Module for
Databases and Applications Release Notes.
◆ The NetWorker Client resource for the NMDA client was created through one of
the following:
• Backup configuration wizard in NMDA
• Conversion of a legacy NetWorker module configuration with the
nsrdaadmin command
• Client-side configuration method (without the wizard), where the value of the
Save Set attribute of the Client resource has the RMAN: prefix
◆ Prior to creation of a database duplication script, the AUXILIARY instance exists
on the local or remote host, and is accessible through Oracle Net. The Oracle
Database Backup and Recovery Advanced User’s Guide provides details on how to
create an AUXILIARY instance.

Configure an Oracle restore with the wizard

To create an RMAN restore script with the recovery configuration wizard:
1. Start the NetWorker Management Console software.
2. Open the Administration window:
a. In the Console window, click Enterprise.
b. In the left pane, select a NetWorker server in the Enterprise list.
c. In the right pane, select the application.
d. From the Enterprise menu, click Launch Application.
The Administration window is launched as a separate application.
3. In the Administration window, click Configuration.
4. In the Configuration window, click Clients.
5. To start the wizard, right-click the NMDA client in the right pane, and select
Recover.

168 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

6. On each wizard screen that appears, specify the required values for the RMAN
script configuration.
Each wizard screen includes an online help button that you can click to access
descriptions of all the fields and options on the screen:
• On all but the last screen, click Next to proceed.
• On the last screen, Review and Accept the Script Creation, click Create to
create the RMAN restore script.

IMPORTANT
If you create an RMAN script with the wizard to perform a tablespace restore when
the database is not open, do not select the options to place the tablespace in offline
mode before the restore and in online mode after the recovery. Oracle requires the
database to be open to alter the availability of a tablespace.

Restore through the RMAN command line interface

You can start an Oracle data restore through the RMAN command line interface on
the Oracle Server host.
If the RMAN restore script on page 166 is stored in the file /disk1/scripts/restore.txt
and the Net service has been configured to connect to the databases payroll and
rcvcatdb, start the Oracle restore with the following command:
rman target internal/oracle@payroll rcvcat rman/rman@rcvcatdb cmdfile
\’/disk1/scripts/restore.txt\’

On Windows systems, the command to run the RMAN script is rman.exe. The
appropriate Oracle backup and recovery documentation provides more information
on the rman or rman.exe commands.

Restore through Oracle Enterprise Manager

Note: Use of the Oracle Enterprise Manager Backup Management Tools is not supported with
the recovery configuration wizard.

The Oracle Enterprise Manager Backup Management Tools include a graphical user
interface to RMAN. You can use this interface instead of the RMAN command line
interface to do the following:
◆ Generate the required RMAN commands.
◆ Perform backup and restore operations.

IMPORTANT
After the completion of an NMDA backup or restore, the Oracle Enterprise
Manager job queue history may display the status of the job as “failed”, even if the
backup or restore completed successfully. This is due to a known problem with
Oracle Enterprise Manager. View the job output to confirm that the backup or
restore completed successfully.

The Oracle documentation provides more information on using the Oracle Enterprise
Manager Backup Management Tools.

Oracle data restore and recovery 169

Data Restore and Recovery

Recover Oracle data

After restoring the NMDA backups of the Oracle data by using the RMAN utility,
complete the data recovery, if required.
To recover the Oracle data, use the appropriate Oracle commands to apply the
archived redo logs and online redo logs. There are two ways to use the Oracle
recovery commands:
◆ Include the Oracle commands in the RMAN restore script. A sample RMAN
script is provided on page 166. With this method, RMAN automatically restores
archived redo logs that are required for the recovery but do not exist on the
Oracle server host.
◆ After the RMAN restore script has completed successfully, use the Oracle
command line (for example, SQL* Plus) or graphical interfaces to run the
recovery.
The appropriate Oracle backup and recovery documentation provides more
information on Oracle data recovery procedures.

Sybase data restore and recovery

Before starting a Sybase data restore, ensure that the following Sybase-specific
requirements are met:
◆ The Sybase server and Sybase Backup Server are running.
◆ The target database exists to which data will be recovered. The database is at least
as large as the size of the database backup.

Note: To create a new database for recovery, use the for load option.

◆ The target database to which data will be recovered is not currently in use. The
database is taken offline during the recovery.
“Verification of Sybase database restores” on page 171 provides details on how to
enable the verification of database restores.
Perform the Sybase data restore and recovery by using the appropriate methods:
◆ “Restore through the nsrsybrc command” on page 171
◆ “Database recovery with NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI” on page 174

Note: If data was backed up as a multistripe backup, the multistripe restore is automatically
enabled and uses the same session number as the multistripe backup.

IMPORTANT
To restore Sybase data with NMDA, use the information in the following sections.
Do not manually invoke the Sybase load command. When you use NMDA to
perform a Sybase restore, the nsrsybrc command invokes the Sybase load
command.

170 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

Verification of Sybase database restores

The NMDA software provides support for verification of Sybase database restores.
NMDA supports header verification and full verification.
Use the -V option with the nsrsybrc restore command to specify the restore
verification level:
nsrsybrc -V [header | full | verifyonly]

where:
◆ header — Specifies to verify the page header information only.
◆ full — Specifies to verify both the header information and rows structure (full
verification of the backup).
◆ verifyonly — Specifies to verify minimal header information without restoring
the database.
If you do not specify a verification value, then no verification is carried out and a
message is added to the log file.

Restore through the nsrsybrc command

Perform a Sybase restore of the whole Sybase server or individual databases by
running the appropriate nsrsybrc command from the command line, as the operating
system user that was used to launch the Sybase Backup Server.

IMPORTANT
In the nsrsybrc command, the Sybase server and database names are case-sensitive,
and the names must be in the same case as recorded in the corresponding backup
entries in the NetWorker indexes.

By default, the nsrsybrc command restores the most recent database backup and rolls
transactions forward by recovering the transaction logs. After the restore operation
completes, the database is brought back online.
The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Command Reference Guide
provides details on the nsrsybrc command.
After the recovery operation completes, perform the following:
1. Check the database to ensure that the data has been recovered.
2. Run a database consistency check according to “Sybase database consistency
check” on page 123.
3. Run a full backup of the database.
Example 26 on page 172 restores the Sybase server and single or multiple databases.
Example 27 on page 172 describes a point-in-time restore.
The following sections describe the other supported types of Sybase data restores:
◆ “Redirected restore of Sybase data” on page 173
◆ “Restore of Sybase data to a different host” on page 174

Sybase data restore and recovery 171

Data Restore and Recovery

Example 26 Restores of single or multiple Sybase databases

◆ This command restores a single Sybase database:

nsrsybrc -U user_ID -P password -s NetWorker_server_name
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database_name

where:
• user_ID is the username of the Sybase user account.
• password is the password of the Sybase user account.
• NetWorker_server_name is the hostname of the NetWorker server.
• ASE_server_name is the Sybase server name.
• database_name is the name of the database on the Sybase server.
◆ This command restores multiple Sybase databases:
nsrsybrc -U user_ID -P password -s NetWorker_server_name
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database1_name
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database2_name
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database3_name

◆ This command restores all the databases on the Sybase server, except the master
database:
nsrsybrc -U user_ID -P password -s NetWorker_server_name
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name

Example 27 Point-in-time recovery of Sybase data

A point-in-time recovery recovers the Sybase data to a specific time in the past,
without restoring the entire transaction log. The nsrsybrc command uses the time
specified with the -t option to restore data to a specific point in time. It loads the most
recent full backup before the designated time, and then applies transaction log
backups up to the designated time.
The following command performs a point-in-time recovery:
nsrsybrc -U user_ID -P password -s NetWorker_server_name
-t “MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS” SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database_name

where MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS indicates the month, day, year, hour, minute and
seconds to recover data to. The ASE_server_name and database_name must be in the
same case as recorded in the backup entries in the NetWorker indexes.

Note: As the NetWorker server and client can be in different time zones, set the -t option to a
value of the local time on the Sybase server. After a successful point-in-time recovery, the
database is brought online.

IMPORTANT
After performing a point-in-time recovery, the Sybase server restarts the database
log sequence. Performing an incremental backup before a full backup causes
future recovery operations to fail. Perform a full backup after a point-in-time
recovery.

172 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

Redirected restore of Sybase data

A redirected restore loads the backup of an old database to a new database.
The NMDA software supports the following types of redirected restores of Sybase
data:
◆ “Same Sybase server but a different database name” on page 173
◆ “Different Sybase server but the same database name” on page 173
◆ “Different Sybase server and a different database name” on page 174
◆ “Different database type” on page 174
Same Sybase server but a different database name

To restore data to the same Sybase server but to a different database name:
1. Ensure that the new database has been created with the proper device allocations.
2. Type the following command as the Sybase user:
nsrsybrc -U user_ID -P password -s NetWorker_server_name
-d SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/new_database_name
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/old_database_name

where:
• user_ID is the username of the Sybase user account.
• password is the password of the Sybase user account.
• NetWorker_server_name is the hostname of the NetWorker server.
• ASE_server_name is the Sybase server name.
• new_database_name is the name of the database on the Sybase server to which
the data is restored.
• old_database_name is the name of the database on the Sybase server that was
backed up.

Different Sybase server but the same database name

To restore data to a different Sybase server but to the same database name:
1. Ensure that the new database has been created with the proper device allocations.
2. Type the following command as the Sybase user:
nsrsybrc -U user_ID -P password -s NetWorker_server_name
-d SYBASE:/new_Sybase_server_name/database_name
SYBASE:/old_Sybase_server_name/database_name

where:
• new_Sybase_server is the name of the Sybase server to which the data is
restored.
• old_Sybase_server is the name of the Sybase server from which the data was
backed up.

Note: The username and password are for the new Sybase server.

Sybase data restore and recovery 173

Data Restore and Recovery

Different Sybase server and a different database name

To restore data to a different Sybase server and to a different database name:

1. Ensure that the new database has been created with the same device allocations
as the original database.
2. Type the following command as the Sybase user:
nsrsybrc -U user_ID -P password -s NetWorker_server_name
-d SYBASE:/new_Sybase_server_name/new_database_name
SYBASE:/old_Sybase_server_name/old_database_name

where:
• new_database_name is the name of the new database on the new Sybase server.
• old_database_name is the name of the old database on the old Sybase server.

Note: The username and password are for the new Sybase server.

Different database type

Starting with Sybase ASE 15.5, NMDA supports the restore of any supported type of
database to any other supported type of database. For example, you can restore a
regular database to an in-memory database, or restore a relaxed durability database
to an in-memory database.
The restore instructions are the same as in the preceding sections for a redirected
restore.

Restore of Sybase data to a different host

To restore Sybase data to a new destination host, follow the instructions in “Roadmap
for NMDA data restore” on page 141 to set up the NMDA software and then use the
-c option with the nsrsybrc command to specify the NetWorker client where the
backup was originally performed. For example:
nsrsybrc -U user_ID -P password -s NetWorker_server_name
-c original_client_name SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database_name

Note: Although the -d option indicates the destination for recovery, it is not used in this case
because the destination server name and database name are the same as the original
NetWorker client.

When recovering to a new destination host, you can also relocate the data to a new
Sybase server or database. For example, the following command should be run on the
destination host to relocate the data to a new Sybase server:
nsrsybrc -U user_ID -P password -s NetWorker_server_name -c
original_client_name -d
SYBASE:/new_Sybase_server_name/database_name
SYBASE:/old_Sybase_server_name/database_name

Database recovery with NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI

On Windows systems only, the NetWorker User for Lotus (nwbml.exe) and
NetWorker User for Sybase (nwbms.exe) each provide a graphical interface for
recovering Lotus Domino/Notes and Sybase database files, respectively.

174 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

You must run the Sybase GUI on the host where the data will be restored (destination
host).
It is recommended that you run the Lotus GUI on the destination host where the data
will be restored. “Directed recovery through the NetWorker User for Lotus” on
page 179 provides details.
To perform a recovery of Lotus or Sybase database files with the NetWorker User for
Lotus or Sybase program, respectively:
1. Start the graphical interface by selecting NetWorker User for Lotus or
NetWorker User for Sybase from Start > Programs > EMC NetWorker.
If you want to connect to a different NetWorker server, follow the instructions in
“Connecting to a different NetWorker server” on page 128.
2. In the main window, select Recover from the Operation menu or press Alt+R.
The Recover window appears as shown in Figure 8 on page 175. Table 21 on
page 176 describes the Recover window toolbar buttons.
3. In the NetWorker User for Sybase only, if the Recover Sybase Server dialog box
appears (the first time you open the Recover window):
a. Type the required values in the Recover Sybase Server dialog box:
– In the Server name text box, type the name of the backed-up Sybase server.
– In the Host name text box, type the operating system hostname of the
backed-up Sybase server.
b. Click OK.

Note: For restores, the Sybase server and database names that you enter in the GUI are
case-sensitive, and the names must be in the same case as recorded in the corresponding
backup entries in the NetWorker indexes.

Figure 8 NetWorker User for Lotus Recover window

Database recovery with NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI 175
Data Restore and Recovery

Table 21 Toolbar buttons on the Recover window

Button Operation Description

Mark Marks the selected (highlighted) files for recovery.

Unmark Clears the selected (marked) files.

Required Volumes Lists the backup volumes that need to be mounted to

recover the marked files.

Change Browse Time Specifies a date and time for recovery of the marked
files. The hour and minutes entries are based on a
12-hour clock.

View Versions For Lotus only, displays the backup history of the
currently selected database. Versions are sorted
according to backup time, with the most recent backup at
the top of the list.

Recover Options Displays a dialog box with Lotus or Sybase specific

restore and recovery options.

Start Starts the recovery of marked files.

4. To view a list of files or databases available for restore, select an entry in the left
pane, either a Lotus directory or Sybase server. The contents of the Lotus
directory or Sybase server appear in the right pane.

Note: When a Lotus file does not exist on the computer (it was deleted since the backup),
the corresponding icon might appear incorrectly as a folder icon in the Recover window,
instead of as an "unidentified file" icon or the expected icon for the given type of file. This
incorrect icon display does not affect the success of the recovery.

5. For Lotus restores only, to view the available versions of backed-up data:
a. In the Recover window, select the database file or directory to recover.
b. From the View menu, select Versions. The Versions window opens and
displays the backup history of the currently selected object. Versions are
sorted according to backup time with the most recent backup at the top of the
list.
6. By default, the GUI shows the latest available backup. To view previous backups
and recover to a previous point in time, change the browse time:
a. In the Recover window, select Change Browse Time from the View menu.
The Change Browse Time dialog box opens.
b. Set a new date by selecting a day from the calendar.
c. Click Previous Month or Next Month to change from the current month.
d. In the Time text box, type a time to browse, where:
– The hour and minutes values are based on a 12-hour clock.
– The value AM represents A.M.
– The value PM represents P.M.

176 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

Note: The browse time cannot be earlier than the time of the first backup because the client
file index does not have entries before that time. To verify the browse and retention
policies, check the Client resources for the client or server by using the NetWorker
administration program.

7. Specify the files or databases to recover by using one of the following methods:
• Select the entries, and click the Mark toolbar button.
• Select the checkbox (add a check mark) beside each entry.
To unmark the entries, use one of the following methods:
• Select the marked entries, and click the Unmark toolbar button.
• Clear the checkboxes (remove the check marks) beside the entries.
8. From the Options menu, select Recover Options, and set the specific options for
the recovery according to the appropriate instructions:
• “Lotus recover options” on page 177
• “Sybase recover options” on page 178
9. Ensure that the backup volumes are set for the recovery:
a. In the Recover window, ensure that the required entries are selected for
recovery.
b. From the View menu, select Required Volumes. The Required Volumes
window opens with the backup volumes listed.
c. Load and mount the required volumes, as appropriate.
10. Start the recovery by clicking the Start toolbar button.
The Recover Status window opens and displays information about the recovery
operations performed.

Lotus recover options

After selecting Recover Options from the Options menu, the Recover Options dialog
box opens, as shown in Figure 9 on page 177.

Figure 9 NetWorker User for Lotus Recover Options dialog box

Database recovery with NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI 177
Data Restore and Recovery

Type the complete pathname of the NMDA configuration file in the Configuration
File text box. Set specific parameters in the NMDA configuration file so that you do
not have to re-enter them every time you run the recovery. When using the GUI, do
not set the parameter NSR_BACKUP_PATHS in the configuration file. Instead, select
the files and directories to be restored from the GUI.

IMPORTANT
For Lotus data recovery, the NMDA configuration file must be located on the
destination client where the database files are to be restored.

Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides information on

these parameters.
The parameter Notes_ExecDirectory is the only Lotus restore parameter that is
mandatory in the NMDA configuration file.
If required, complete other appropriate fields in the Recover Options dialog box. The
fields correspond to specific parameter values in the NMDA configuration file, as
described in Table 22 on page 178. “Database restore and recovery through the
nsrnotesrc command” on page 153 includes examples with details on the parameters.

Note: All the values set in the Recover Options dialog box overwrite the corresponding
parameter values set in the NMDA configuration file.

After you have completed the required fields in the dialog box, click OK.

Table 22 Configuration file parameters corresponding to Recover Options fields

Field in Recover Options dialog box Corresponding parameter in configuration file

Relocate recovered data to another location NSR_RELOCATION_DEST= relocation_directory

Zap Database ID NSR_DBIID = 1

Zap Database and Replica ID NSR_DBIID = 2

Do not apply Transaction Logs NSR_APPLY_LOGS = FALSE

Sybase recover options

After selecting Recover Options from the Options menu, the Recover to Sybase
Server dialog box opens, as shown in Figure 10 on page 179.
Specify the required values in the Server name and Database name text boxes for the
restore, and click OK.

Note: The Sybase server and database names are case-sensitive and must be entered in the
same case as recorded in the backup entries in the NetWorker indexes.
If you leave the Server name or Database name text box blank, NMDA uses the same Sybase
server name or database name as existed at the backup time.

178 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

Figure 10 NetWorker User for Sybase Recover Options dialog box

To relocate the recovered data to a new Sybase server or a new database, ensure that
any new database is created with the proper device allocation for the new database:
◆ To restore data to the same Sybase server but to a different database name:
a. In the Server name text box, optionally type the old Sybase server name.
b. In the Database name text box, type the new database name.
◆ To restore data to a different Sybase server but to the same database name:
a. In the Server name text box, type the new Sybase server name.
b. In the Database name text box, optionally type the old database name.
◆ To restore data to a different Sybase server and to a different database name:
a. In the Server name text box, type the new Sybase server name.
b. In the Database name text box, type the new database name.

Directed recovery through the NetWorker User for Lotus

A directed recovery enables you to use the NetWorker User for Lotus program on
one host to initiate the recovery of Lotus database files from a different host or to a
different host.
In the sections that follow, these terms refer to the client computers involved in a
directed recovery:
◆ Source client — The NetWorker client file index host that contains the backup
entries to be restored.
◆ Destination client — The host to which the Lotus database files will be recovered.
◆ Performing client — The host where you initiate the directed recovery by using
the NetWorker User for Lotus program.

Database recovery with NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI 179
Data Restore and Recovery

Configure a directed recovery

◆ When the performing client or destination client is different than the source client:
1. On the NetWorker server that has the backup to be restored, create a
NetWorker Client resource for the performing client or destination client, if
one does not yet exist.
2. In the Remote Access attribute of the Client resource for the source client, add
one of the following lines for the valid username and hostname of the
performing client or destination client:
user=username, host=performing_client_hostname
user=username, host=destination_client_hostname

◆ When the performing client is different than the destination client:

1. Edit the nsrlotus_remrecov script on the destination client. The comments in
the script file provide details on editing the script.

Note: The script file is installed in the NMDA installation directory. On Windows
systems, the script file is named nsrlotus_remrecov.bat. On UNIX systems, the script
file is named nsrlotus_remrecov. Do not move the script from the installation directory,
but you can rename the script as long as the name starts with nsr or save.

2. On the performing client, set the REMOTE_RECOVCMD environment

variable to the filename of the nsrlotus_remrecov script that you modified on
the destination client. If this variable is not set, the NetWorker User for Lotus
program uses nsrlotus_remrecov, by default.

Note: Set REMOTE_RECOVCMD in the environment of the performing client, not in

the NMDA configuration file, and include any filename extension (for example, .bat),
as required. For example:
REMOTE_RECOVCMD=nsr_remrecov.bat
The script name must not be in quotes. On Windows systems, the script name must not
contain any spaces.

3. In the /nsr/res/servers file on a destination client only, specify the hostname

of the performing client.
4. On a Linux or UNIX destination client, perform one of the following:
– Set the required environment variables, for example,
LD_LIBRARY_PATH.
– Create symbolic links in the /usr/lib directory to the required Lotus
Domino libraries, for example, libnotes.so, libntdgs.so, and libxmlproc.so,
depending on the Domino version.

Perform a directed recovery

To perform a directed recovery:
1. On the performing client, start the NetWorker User for Lotus program.
2. From the Operation menu, select Directed Recover. The Source Client window
opens.
3. In the Source Client window, select the source client to recover from, and click
OK. The Destination Client window opens.
4. In the Destination Client window, select the client to recover to.
5. In the Recover window, select the files to recover.

180 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Data Restore and Recovery

6. If required, set the recover options. To do this, select Recover Options from the
Options menu.

IMPORTANT
When the performing client is different than the UNIX or Linux destination client,
the total length of all pathnames marked for recovery must not exceed the limit of
10 KB. Otherwise, the directed recovery fails.
When the performing client is different than the Windows destination client, if
you select to restore any Lotus file that contains a space in its pathname, the
directed recovery fails.

7. Start the recovery by clicking the Start toolbar button.

Database recovery with NetWorker User for Lotus or Sybase GUI 181
Data Restore and Recovery

182 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 5

Disaster Recovery

This chapter includes the following major sections:

◆ Preparing for disaster recovery ................................................................................. 184
◆ DB2 disaster recovery ................................................................................................. 185
◆ Informix disaster recovery ......................................................................................... 186
◆ Lotus disaster recovery .............................................................................................. 189
◆ Oracle disaster recovery ............................................................................................. 193
◆ Sybase disaster recovery ............................................................................................ 197

Note: This chapter describes how to recover from a disaster. It should be used in conjunction
with Chapter 4, “Data Restore and Recovery” and the EMC NetWorker Disaster Recovery Guide.

Disaster Recovery 183

Disaster Recovery

Preparing for disaster recovery

For the purpose of this guide, a disaster is any loss of data where the computing
environment required to restore that data is not available. Ordinary data recovery
procedures are not sufficient to recover the computing environment and its data to
normal day-to-day operations.
A disaster can result from any of the following but is not limited to these situations:
◆ Computer viruses that corrupt the computing system
◆ Hardware and software failures
◆ Infrastructure interruptions, inconsistencies, or loss of services, such as
communications or network connections, which result in damage to the
computing environment
To develop a plan for recovering from a disaster on the computer system, determine
the required frequency of backups. Consider that backup frequency is a trade-off
between the time spent backing up data, and the time spent later recovering the data
after a crash.
To prepare a database or application server environment for disaster recovery,
implement a backup strategy that includes regular backups of the following:
◆ Database files
◆ Transaction logs
◆ Any other control and configuration files required for the database or application
server operations
The following sections in this chapter provide details on the database or
application specific files.
◆ NetWorker server bootstrap and index records (media database, resource
database, and server index that reside on the NetWorker server)
The NetWorker bootstrap records are required for NetWorker server disaster
recovery. The EMC NetWorker Disaster Recovery Guide provides more details.
The NetWorker bootstrap and index records are automatically backed up after
each scheduled NMDA backup. If you run only manual NMDA backups,
perform regular backups of the NetWorker server bootstrap and client file
indexes according to instructions in the EMC NetWorker Administration Guide.
Depending on the type of disaster, you might need to perform any of the following:

Note: In cluster environments (both active-passive and active-active), these operations must be
performed on all the required cluster hosts.

◆ Reinstall the operating system.

◆ Reinstall the database or application software.
◆ Configure the database server or instance.
◆ Reinstall the NetWorker client and NMDA software. Reinstall additional
software if it is used for the NMDA backups, such as PowerSnap Module or
Replication Manager software.
The proper operating system or database vendor documentation provides details on
the operating system and database or application procedures.

184 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Disaster Recovery

The EMC NetWorker Installation Guide provides details on reinstalling the NetWorker
client software.
The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Installation Guide provides
details on reinstalling the NMDA software.
When performing a disaster recovery to a new destination host, perform all the
operations described in the following sections on the new host. In addition, to enable
the restore of backups done on the original host to the new host, set the Remote
Access attribute in the NetWorker Client resource of the original (source) host (in
NMC or the NetWorker server) to the following value:
database_username@destination_hostname

When performing a restore to a remote destination host, you might not want to
transfer data over a slow network. You could use the NetWorker storage node feature
to improve restore performance. After physically transferring backup media (for
example, tapes) containing the backup to the remote location, install the storage node
on the remote computer and configure the NetWorker server to use the remote
device of the storage node. The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides
information on storage nodes.

IMPORTANT
After disaster recovery is complete, you should perform a full backup of the
environment.

DB2 disaster recovery

To prepare a DB2 server environment for disaster recovery, perform scheduled
backups of the DB2 server instances and transaction logs with the
NSR_DR_BACKUP_INFO parameter set to TRUE. When this parameter is set to
TRUE, the NMDA nsrdasv command performs the following operations after the
database is backed up:
1. Executes the following DB2 commands to generate the system config file:
db2 get admin cfg
db2 get dbm cfg
db2 get db cfg for DATABASE_NAME
db2 get instance
db2 list db directory
db2level
db2set -all

2. Executes the following commands to generate the registry file:

• On UNIX:
db2greg -dump

• On Windows:
regedit /e db2_registry_config_timestamp.txt
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\IBM\

DB2 disaster recovery 185

Disaster Recovery

3. Stores the command output from the preceding steps in temporary files such
db2_system_config_1257779556.txt and db2_registry_config_1257779580.txt in
the following directory:
• On UNIX: /nsr/apps/tmp
• On Windows: NetWorker_install_path\apps\tmp
4. Backs up the temporary file from step 3 by using the NetWorker save interface.
In addition, you can set the NSR_DR_FILE_LIST parameter for scheduled backups to
specify a file that contains a list of extra files to be backed up by using the NetWorker
save interface. “NSR_DR_FILE_LIST” on page 305 provides details.
After a manual backup, you can manually back up the critical DB2 files through the
NetWorker file system backup interface, save. The EMC NetWorker Administration
Guide provides more details.
During a disaster recovery, you can use the NetWorker recover interface to restore
the backed-up files. For example:
recover -s NetWorker_server_name temporary_file

The DB2 backup and recovery documentation provides information on how to

recover a DB2 database. “DB2 data restore and recovery” on page 143 provides
details and procedures.

Note: You must use the db2 restore and db2 rollforward commands to perform disaster
recovery. The db2 recover command is not supported for disaster recovery.

Informix disaster recovery

To prepare an Informix server environment for disaster recovery, set the
NSR_DR_BACKUP_INFO parameter to TRUE and perform regular scheduled
backups of the Informix server instances and logical logs. The parameter setting
ensures that the following critical information is backed up during the scheduled
backup:
◆ Informix ONCONFIG file
◆ ixbar file
◆ onconfig boot file
◆ sqlhosts file (UNIX only)
◆ sm_versions file
◆ Copy of Windows registry information stored under
"HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Informix" (Windows only)
“NSR_DR_BACKUP_INFO” on page 307 provides details.
In addition, you can set the NSR_DR_FILE_LIST parameter for scheduled backups to
specify a file that contains a list of extra files to be backed up, instead of the preceding
default list. NSR_DR_BACKUP_INFO must also be set to TRUE to enable the
NSR_DR_FILE_LIST parameter setting. “NSR_DR_FILE_LIST” on page 307 provides
details.
The files created with the NSR_DR_BACKUP_INFO and NSR_DR_FILE_LIST
parameter settings are backed up through the NetWorker save interface and must be
restored through the NetWorker recover interface.

186 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Disaster Recovery

After a manual backup, you can manually back up these critical Informix files
through the NetWorker file system backup interface, save. The EMC NetWorker
Administration Guide provides more details.

Informix imported restore

You can use the Informix imported restore feature to transfer all the data from one
Informix server instance to the same instance on a new destination host. You can
perform imported restores by using either whole system (serial) or storage-space
(parallel) backups. You also need to have a backup of the disaster recovery files listed
under “Informix disaster recovery” on page 186.
To perform the imported restore:
1. Follow the instructions in “Preparing for disaster recovery” on page 184 to install
the software, configure the database on the destination host, and set the Remote
Access attribute in the Client resource on the NetWorker server, as required.

Note: Create the data spaces in the same path location as on the source server.

2. On Windows systems, use regedit to copy the sqlhosts information from the
source computer to the destination computer. Use the following registry entry:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/Informix/SQLHOSTS/...

3. If the source INFORMIXDIR does not match the destination INFORMIXDIR, you
must create a symbolic link to recover the bootstrap from the source computer.
For example, if INFORMIXDIR on the source computer was /usr2/informix and
INFORMIXDIR on the destination computer is /usr/local/informix, create the
/usr2 directory on the destination computer and the symbolic link as follows:
• On UNIX systems:
mkdir /usr2
ln -s /usr/local/informix /usr2/informix

• On Windows systems:
Create a shortcut from the source INFORMIXDIR to the destination
INFORMIXDIR. The operating system documentation provides details on
creating a shortcut.

IMPORTANT
To perform an imported restore, you must use the same database server number on
the destination computer that was used on the source computer. You can change
the database server name in an imported restore.

4. Shut down the destination database server before doing a restore. For an IDS
Dynamic Server, type the following:
onmode -ky

5. Set the required environment variables. For example:

NSR_CLIENT = source_machine_hostname
NSR_SERVER = backup_server

Informix disaster recovery 187

Disaster Recovery

6. Restore the following Informix critical files:

• For the Informix server:
– $INFORMIXDIR/etc/oncfg_original_dbserver_name.server_number
– ixbar.server_number
– oncfg_source_dbserver_name.server_number
– ixbar.server_number
– $ONCONFIG
– sqlhosts (UNIX only)
On Windows, use regedit to copy the sqlhosts information from the source
computer to the destination computer. Use the following registry entry:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/Informix/SQLHOSTS/...

• For all coserver numbers, copy the oncfg files:

– oncfg_source_dbserver_name.server_number.coserver_number
– sqlhosts
– xcfg_source_computer.server_number
For example, use NetWorker to recover the emergency boot file and configuration
file for the Informix server instance with $INFORMIXDIR set to the same value as
at backup time. With the recover command, you must use the -c option to specify
the original NetWorker client hostname:
recover -a -s source_NetWorker_client_hostname\
$INFORMIXDIR/etc/sqlhosts \
$INFORMIXDIR/etc/onconfig.std \
$INFORMIXDIR/etc/ixbar.server_number \
$INFORMIXDIR/oncfg_server_name.server_number

7. Rename the $INFORMIXDIR/etc/oncfg_original_dbserver_name.server_number file

and replace the source server name with the destination server name. For
example:
$INFORMIXDIR/etc/oncfg_ol_destination_dbserver_name.server_number

8. Update the sqlhosts file and include the proper shared memory and network
settings for the destination Informix server.
9. Update the ONCONFIG file and replace the source server name with the
destination server name. For example:
DBSERVERNAME ol_destination_dbserver_name

10. Perform a full system restore with the following onbar command:
onbar -r

11. Update the sqlhosts file and replace the source hostname with the destination
hostname.

188 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Disaster Recovery

Recovery from an Informix server disk crash

To restore a damaged primary disk that contains critical Informix server dbobjects
and NetWorker client binaries, perform an Informix cold restore as follows:
1. Follow the instructions in “Preparing for disaster recovery” on page 184 to install
the software, configure the database on the destination host, and perform other
configurations as required.
2. Use NetWorker to recover the emergency boot file and configuration file for the
Informix server instance.

Note: $INFORMIXDIR should have the same value as it had at backup time.

3. If the physical media that contains the logical logs must be replaced before
beginning the restore, manually salvage the current logical log file with the
following onbar command:
onbar -b -l -s

4. Restore data from the most recent backup with the following onbar command:
onbar -r

Once the restore completes, the Informix server is left in quiescent mode.
The Informix server documentation provides more information on using the onbar
command to restore data from NetWorker backup media.

Lotus disaster recovery

To prepare a Lotus server environment for disaster recovery, perform regular
scheduled backups of the Lotus data directory (unless you need to protect only
certain subdirectories in the data directory), the notes.ini file, and transaction logs.

Note: Transaction logs are backed up only if Domino transaction logging is enabled and set to
archive mode.

By default, the NMDA software backs up only specific types of files, as described in
“Files backed up during Lotus backups” on page 34. If required, enable the backup of
all types of files by setting the parameter NSR_BACKUP_ALL_EXTENSIONS=TRUE,
or explicitly list files with nondefault extensions in the NSR_BACKUP_PATHS
parameter when NSR_BACKUP_ALL_EXTENSIONS is not set.
“NSR_BACKUP_ALL_EXTENSIONS” on page 308 provides details.
Perform Lotus disaster recovery according to the instructions in the appropriate
section:
◆ “Recovery of a nonlogged Lotus environment” on page 190
◆ “Recovery of a logged Lotus environment” on page 191

IMPORTANT
The NetWorker User for Lotus GUI must not be used for disaster recovery.

Lotus disaster recovery 189

Disaster Recovery

Recovery of a nonlogged Lotus environment

To recover a Domino environment that is not in archived log mode:

Note: For a partitioned Domino server, repeat these steps for each partition.

1. Follow the instructions in “Preparing for disaster recovery” on page 184 to install
the software and perform other configurations as required.

Note: Reinstall the Lotus Notes client or Domino server software in the same location as
before, but do not configure it.

2. When you recover a partitioned Domino server, ensure that the PATH parameter
in the NMDA configuration file lists the Domino data directory of the partition to
be recovered before the data directory of any other Domino server partition.
Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides details on
the NMDA configuration file.
3. Recover the notes.ini file by using the nsrnotesrc command with the parameter
setting NSR_NO_NOTES_INIT = TRUE in the NMDA configuration file.
For example, to recover the notes.ini file on a Windows system:
a. Ensure that the NMDA configuration file contains the following parameter
settings:
NSR_SERVER = NetWorker_server_name
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = C:\Lotus\Domino\notes.ini
NSR_NO_NOTES_INIT = TRUE

NSR_BACKUP_PATHS specifies the case-sensitive path of the notes.ini file as

recorded in the NetWorker indexes.
b. Type the nsrnotesrc command to perform the recovery:
nsrnotesrc -z config_filepath

c. When prompted whether to overwrite the current notes.ini file, type y.

Note: To prevent the prompting, you can set the parameter NSR_RECOV_INTERACT
= Y in the configuration file.

4. Recover all the databases by using the proper NSR_BACKUP_PATHS setting:

• For a nonpartitioned Domino server or Notes client:
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = Lotus_top_data_directory

• For a partitioned Domino server:

NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = Lotus_partition_top_data_directory

You must recover the databases to a new location by using the nsrnotesrc
command with the parameter setting NSR_RELOCATION_DEST =
destination_path in the NMDA configuration file.
5. After the disaster recovery process is complete, perform a full backup of the
Domino server to prevent any future loss of data.

190 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Disaster Recovery

Recovery of a logged Lotus environment

To recover database backups up to the last committed transaction in the archived
transaction logs, the following requirements must be met:
◆ The Domino server or the partition to be recovered must have had Lotus
transactional logging enabled and set to Archive style.
◆ A backup of an up-to-date notes.ini file is available for the Domino server.
◆ A set of recoverable database backup files is available.
◆ The archived log extents (transaction log files) are backed up and available from
the time of the last full backup.
To recover a Domino environment that is in archived log mode:

Note: For a partitioned Domino server, repeat these steps for each partition.

1. Follow the instructions in “Preparing for disaster recovery” on page 184 to install
the software and perform other configurations as required.

Note: Reinstall the Domino server software in the same location as before, but do not
configure it.

2. When you recover a partitioned Domino server, ensure that the PATH parameter
in the NMDA configuration file lists the Domino data directory of the partition to
be recovered before the data directory of any other Domino server partition.
Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides details on
the NMDA configuration file.
3. Recover the Domino notes.ini file by using the nsrnotesrc command with the
parameter setting NSR_NO_NOTES_INIT = TRUE in the NMDA configuration
file.
For example, to recover the notes.ini file on a Windows system:
a. Ensure that the NMDA configuration file contains the following parameter
settings:
NSR_SERVER = NetWorker_server_name
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = C:\Lotus\Domino\notes.ini
NSR_NO_NOTES_INIT = TRUE

b. Type the nsrnotesrc command to perform the recovery:

nsrnotesrc -z config_filepath

c. When prompted whether to overwrite the current notes.ini file, type y.

Note: To prevent the prompting, you can set the parameter NSR_RECOV_INTERACT
= Y in the configuration file.

4. Check the Domino notes.ini file to determine the original log directory for the
server, as specified by the TRANSLOG_Path setting. Ensure that this directory
exists and it contains no old files.

Lotus disaster recovery 191

Disaster Recovery

5. Recover the last archived log extent that was backed up since the most recent
full backup. Recover the log file to a temporary directory by using the nsrnotesrc
command with the following restore parameters set in the NMDA configuration
file:
NSR_NO_NOTES_INIT = TRUE
NSR_NUMBER_LOGS = 1
NSR_RELOCATION_DEST = temporary_directory_path

Note: For a partitioned Domino server, also set NSR_LOG_DIR for the recovery of log
files. Set the parameter to the original log directory pathname of the partition being
recovered.

For example, to recover the archived log file to the temporary directory
D:\temp\Lotus directory on Windows:
a. Ensure that the NMDA configuration file contains these parameter settings:
NSR_NO_NOTES_INIT = TRUE
NSR_NUMBER_LOGS = 1
NSR_RELOCATION_DEST = D:\temp\Lotus

b. Type the nsrnotesrc command to perform the recovery:

nsrnotesrc -z config_filepath

6. Copy the recovered log files from the temporary directory to the original log
directory for the server, as specified by the TRANSLOG_Path setting.
7. Enable the creation of the control file by setting the following parameter in the
Domino notes.ini file:
TRANSLOG_Recreate_Logctrl=1

8. Recover all the databases into a temporary directory by using the proper
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS setting:
• For a nonpartitioned Domino server or Notes client:
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = Lotus_top_data_directory

• For a partitioned Domino server:

NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = Lotus_partition_top_data_directory

• For a Domino server with DAOS files:

If the backup includes DAOS files and the DAOS directory is located outside
of the Lotus data directory, add the DAOS directory to
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS (separated by a comma):
– For a nonpartitioned Domino server:
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = Lotus_top_data_directory,
Lotus_top_DAOS_directory

– For a partitioned Domino server:

NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = Lotus_partition_top_data_directory,
Lotus_partition_top_DAOS_directory

You must recover the databases to a new location by using the nsrnotesrc
command with the parameter setting NSR_RELOCATION_DEST =
destination_path in the NMDA configuration file.

192 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Disaster Recovery

9. After the databases (or DAOS files) are recovered, copy them to the Lotus data (or
DAOS) directory of the Domino server or a specific partition.
10. For a nonpartitioned Domino server on a Windows system, copy the recovered
notes.ini file to its original directory. By default, the notes.ini file is not located in
the data directory.
11. Start the Domino server.
12. After the disaster recovery process is complete, perform a full backup of the
Domino server to prevent any future loss of data.

Oracle disaster recovery

To prepare an Oracle server for disaster recovery, back up the following minimum
list of files:
◆ Oracle database (all the datafiles)
◆ Archived redo logs
◆ Control file
◆ Initialization parameter files, including one or both of the following:
• PFILE (user-managed parameter file)
• SPFILE (server-managed parameter file)
◆ Network files, including listener.ora, sqlnet.ora, tnsnames.ora
◆ Text file that contains the Oracle DBID
◆ Password file, in the following location by default:
• On UNIX, $ORACLE_HOME/dbs/orapw$ORACLE_SID
• On Windows, %ORACLE_HOME%\database\PWD%ORACLE_SID%.ora
◆ Registry files:
• On UNIX, oratab is typically in /var/opt/oracle or /etc
• On Windows, My Computer\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Oracle
◆ Recovery Catalog, if applicable
◆ RMAN scripts, if applicable
The Oracle documentation provides an exhaustive list of the files (other than the
Oracle database) that should be backed up.
Follow these guidelines to facilitate disaster recovery:
◆ Institute mirrored control files.
Refer to Oracle documentation for recommendations on whether to institute
mirrored online redo logs.
◆ Back up the archived redo logs frequently between database backups.
◆ Back up the Recovery Catalog after every target database backup.
To back up the required files in preparation for disaster recovery:
1. Record the Oracle DBID in a text file and back up the file. “Create the DBID text
file” on page 194 provides details.
2. Use a postcommand script to back up files that Oracle RMAN does not back up.
“Set up a postcommand script for backup of Oracle-related files” on page 194
provides details.

Oracle disaster recovery 193

Disaster Recovery

3. Use an RMAN backup with NMDA to back up the Oracle database and related
files. “Set up RMAN backups of the database and related files” on page 196
provides details.
4. Use an RMAN backup to back up the Recovery Catalog. “Set up RMAN backups
of Recovery Catalog” on page 196 provides details.
Perform an Oracle disaster recovery according to “Perform an Oracle disaster
recovery” on page 196.

Create the DBID text file

The Oracle DBID is an internal Oracle ID that helps Oracle find the autobackup of the
SPFILE, if the Recovery Catalog is not accessible.
Before the Oracle DBID can be backed up, you must manually record the DBID in a
text file. The simplest way to find the DBID of an Oracle database is to connect to the
database through RMAN once the database has been mounted.
After you have recorded the DBID in a text file, you can store the text file containing
the DBID in any directory where you have the proper operating system permissions.
You can use a postcommand script to back up the DBID text file, as described in “Set
up a postcommand script for backup of Oracle-related files” on page 194.

Set up a postcommand script for backup of Oracle-related files

You can use a postcommand script to back up the files that Oracle RMAN does not
back up, such as the following files:
◆ Initialization parameter file PFILE (user-managed parameter file)
◆ Network files, including listener.ora, sqlnet.ora, tnsnames.ora
◆ Text file that contains the Oracle DBID, as described in “Create the DBID text file”
on page 194
◆ Password file
◆ Registry
◆ RMAN scripts, if applicable
You can either create a postcommand script from scratch or modify the
postcommand script that is provided with the NMDA software.
On UNIX systems, you can use any name for the postcommand script. On Windows
systems, the script name must end in .bat.
In a scheduled NMDA RMAN backup, include the postcommand script by one of the
following methods:
◆ If you configure the scheduled backup with the NMDA wizard, specify the
postcommand script in the wizard.
◆ If you configure the scheduled backup without the NMDA wizard, set the
POSTCMD parameter in the NMDA configuration file.
“Sample Oracle postcommand script” on page 195 provides details on the
postcommand script that is provided with the NMDA software.
After a manual backup, you can manually back up these files through the NetWorker
file system backup program, save. The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides
more details.

194 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Disaster Recovery

Sample Oracle postcommand script

The NMDA installation provides a sample postcommand script that is specific to
UNIX or Windows, depending on the platform where NMDA is installed. The
sample script is installed in the bin subdirectory under the NetWorker software
directory, for example, under /usr/sbin.
You must customize the settings in the sample postcommand script for the specific
environment. At a minimum, you must set the ORACLE_HOME and ORACLE_SID
parameters in the script. If these two parameters are not set, the postcommand script
fails at runtime.
During a scheduled NMDA backup, the nsrdasv process passes the options
-s server_name -g group_name to the postcommand script if the script name begins
with nsrnmodr. This ensures that the additional files are backed up to the same
devices and have the same browse and retention policies as the Oracle data files
backed up through RMAN.
If your script name does not begin with the nsrnmodr prefix, you must provide the
options -s server_name -g group_name to the postcommand script.
Example 28 on page 195 shows the sample postcommand script that is installed with
the NMDA software.

Example 28 Sample postcommand script on UNIX

##!/bin/ksh
#
ORACLE_HOME=
ORACLE_SID=
GRP=no
SRV=no
complete=0
shift
shift
while [ "$#" -gt "0" ]
do
if [ "$1" = "-g" ]; then
GRP=$2
if [ "$SRV" != "no" ]; then
complete=1
fi
elif [ "$1" = "-s" ]; then
SRV=$2
if [ "$GRP" != "no" ]; then
complete=1
fi
fi
shift
done

if [ $complete -eq 1 ]; then

save -s $SRV -g $GRP $ORACLE_HOME/network/admin
save -s $SRV -g $GRP $ORACLE_HOME/dbs/orapw$ORACLE_SID
save -s $SRV -g $GRP /var/opt/oracle/oratab
save -s $SRV -g $GRP $ORACLE_HOME/dbid.txt
fi

Oracle disaster recovery 195

Disaster Recovery

Set up RMAN backups of the database and related files

Set up an RMAN backup with NMDA to back up the following files:
◆ Oracle database (all the datafiles)
◆ Archived redo logs
◆ Control file
◆ Initialization parameter file SPFILE (server-managed parameter file)
Follow the instructions in the preceding chapters of this guide to properly configure
and run the RMAN backup with NMDA.
For example, to include the control file and SPFILE in the backup, you can add the
following commands to the RMAN backup script:
◆ backup current control file
◆ backup spfile
The RMAN documentation provides details on RMAN commands and scripts.
If you want to back up PFILE (user-managed parameter file) or other files that Oracle
RMAN does not back up, you can use a postcommand script. “Set up a postcommand
script for backup of Oracle-related files” on page 194 provides details on setting up
the postcommand script.

Set up RMAN backups of Recovery Catalog

Set up an RMAN backup of the Recovery Catalog by using the same method as for
the target database backup, as described in “Set up RMAN backups of the database
and related files” on page 196.
Oracle documentation provides more information on setting up and running
Recovery Catalog backups.

Perform an Oracle disaster recovery

To perform an Oracle disaster recovery:
1. Follow the instructions in “Preparing for disaster recovery” on page 184 to install
the software, configure the database on the destination host, and set the Remote
Access attribute in the Client resource on the NetWorker server, as required.
2. To recover Oracle files that were backed up through a postcommand script, use
either the NetWorker User GUI or the recover command.
For example, a typical recover command is as follows:
recover –s NetWorker_server –c client_name_of_original_host
–d /var/opt/oracle –a /var/opt/oracle/oratab

Note: On a Windows system, you may need to reinsert the oracle.reg file into the registry
after recovering it, for example, with the following command:
regedit /S C:\temp\oracle.reg
The Oracle documentation provides more details.

3. To perform the remainder of the disaster recovery, follow the instructions in the
Oracle Database Backup and Recovery User’s Guide. In the RMAN script, set the
NSR_CLIENT parameter to the name of the original host.

196 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Disaster Recovery

Sybase disaster recovery

To prepare a Sybase server environment for disaster recovery, perform regular
scheduled backups of Sybase server instances, databases, and transaction logs.
Perform the following additional tasks to prepare for disaster recovery:
◆ Keep up-to-date printouts of the Sybase system tables.
◆ Keep up-to-date printouts of the scripts for disk init and create databases.
◆ Do not store user databases or any databases other than master, tempdb, model,
and sybsystemdb on the master device.
◆ Back up the master database after performing actions such as initializing database
devices, creating or altering databases, or adding a new server login.
The appropriate Sybase documentation provides more details.
To recover the Sybase server after a disaster:
1. Use the printout of database device allocations to re-create the databases. The
Sybase documentation provides details on the information that should be tracked
for disaster recovery.
2. Recover the Sybase system databases and user databases. The Sybase
documentation provides details.
3. Use the nsrsybrc command to recover the Sybase data. “Sybase data restore and
recovery” on page 170 provides details.

Recover the master database

The master database may be lost or corrupted in the event of disaster. The master
database controls the operation of the Sybase server and stores information about all
user databases and their associated database devices. Sybase documentation
provides details on how to recover the master database in different scenarios.
The following provides an example of a procedure that can be used to recover the
master database on Sybase ASE version 15.0 and later under the following conditions:
◆ The master device is completely lost.
◆ A valid dump exists and has a default sort order.
◆ All other devices are undamaged and do not require inspection.

IMPORTANT
If the master database is recovered to a different Sybase server, all the device
allocations are copied to the new Sybase server. Therefore, if the master database is
recovered to another Sybase server on the same computer as the original, they both
attempt to use the same database files. To prevent this issue, follow Sybase
documentation to recover the master database to a different Sybase server.

To recover the master database:

1. Rebuild the lost master device by using the dataserver command.
2. Start the Sybase server in single-user mode. This mode is also called
master-recover mode.
3. Ensure that the Sybase server has the correct name for the Sybase Backup Server
in the sysservers table.

Sybase disaster recovery 197

Disaster Recovery

4. Use the following nsrsybrc command to recover the master database from the
backup:
nsrsybrc -U user_ID -P password -s NetWorker_server_name
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/master

where:
• user_ID is the username for the Sybase user account.
• password is the password for the Sybase user account.
• NetWorker_server_name is the hostname of the NetWorker server.
• ASE_server_name is the name of the Sybase server.

Note: In the nsrsybrc command, the ASE_server_name is case-sensitive and must be in the
same case as recorded in the backup entries in the NetWorker indexes.

The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Command Reference
Guide provides details on the nsrsybrc command.
After the master database is loaded, the Sybase server performs postprocessing
checks and validations and then shuts down.
5. Restart the Sybase server.
6. If required, recover the model and other databases that were on the master
device.
7. Log in as Systems Administrator and inspect the databases on the Sybase server
to ensure that all of the databases are present.

Recover user databases after database device failure

The following provides an example of a procedure to recover Sybase user databases
after the database device, not the log device, fails. Sybase documentation provides
details on how to recover user databases.
To recover a database after the database device fails:
1. Perform an incremental backup of each database on the failed device to back up
the transaction logs:
nsrdasv -z config_filepath

where config_filepath is the pathname of the NMDA configuration file. The

configuration file must contain the following parameter settings:
NSR_BACKUP_LEVEL=incr
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS=SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database_name
NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT=”no_truncate”
NSR_SERVER=NetWorker_server_name
SYBASE_USER=Sybase_username
USER_PSWD=encrypted_password

Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides details on

the NMDA parameters.

198 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Disaster Recovery

2. Examine the space usage of each database on the failed device. For example, on
the isql command line, type the following commands:
select segmap, size from sysusages where dbid =
db_id("database_name")

sp_helpdb database_name

where database_name is the name of the database on the failed device.

3. After the information for all databases on the failed device has been obtained,
drop each database by using the drop database command.
If the system reports errors because the database is damaged, use the dropdb
option with the dbcc dbrepair command. On the isql command line, type the
following command:
dbcc dbrepair (database_name, dropdb)

where database_name is the name of a database on the failed device.

4. Drop the failed device by using the sp_dropdevice system procedure.
5. Initialize the new devices by using the disk init command.
6. Re-create each database, one at a time, by using the create database command.
7. Recover each damaged database from the most recent database backup. For
example:
nsrsybrc -U user_ID -P password -s NetWorker_server_name
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database_name

where:
• user_ID is the user name for the Sybase user account.
• password is the password for the Sybase user account.
• NetWorker_server_name is the hostname of the NetWorker server.
• ASE_server_name is the name of the Sybase server.
• database_name is the name of a database on the Sybase server.

Note: In the nsrsybrc command, ASE_server_name and database_name are case-sensitive

and must be in the same case as recorded in the backup entries in the NetWorker indexes.

The nsrsybrc command recovers the last full database backup of the specific
database, and applies all of the associated transaction log backups in the order
that they were created. The database is automatically brought online after the
recovery operation.
The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Command Reference
Guide provides details on the nsrsybrc command.

Sybase disaster recovery 199

Disaster Recovery

200 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 6

Cluster Systems

This chapter includes the following major sections:

◆ Active-passive clusters ............................................................................................... 202
◆ Active-active application clusters (overview)......................................................... 210
◆ DB2 DPF systems ........................................................................................................ 212
◆ Informix MACH 11 systems ...................................................................................... 218
◆ Oracle RAC systems ................................................................................................... 221
◆ Sybase ASE Cluster Edition systems........................................................................ 226

Cluster Systems 201

Cluster Systems

Active-passive clusters
An active-passive cluster is a group of linked virtual or physical hosts with shared
storage, called cluster nodes, which work together and represent themselves as a
single host called a virtual cluster host. In an active-passive cluster, some nodes are
active and others are stand-by, waiting to take over the processing when an active
node fails. A user can connect to the cluster by using a virtual cluster name or IP
address, regardless of which nodes are active. Active-passive clusters are usually
implemented for high availability solutions or to improve computer performance.
The following figures show examples of supported active-passive cluster
configurations:

Note: Each database node in the figures corresponds to one of the following:
- DB2 node
- Informix server
- Lotus Domino server or partition
- Oracle instance
- Sybase server

◆ Figure 11 on page 202 — Single database node with failover capability

◆ Figure 12 on page 203 — Multiple database nodes with failover capability
◆ Figure 13 on page 203 — Multiple database nodes with mutual failover capability

Note: Two active-passive clusters configured as shown in Figure 13 on page 203 might be
referred to as active-active clusters in some cluster or application documentation, for example,
with a Lotus Domino partition server in a cluster. However, the NMDA documentation refers
to them as active-passive clusters.

The EMC Information Protection Software Compatibility Guide provides details on all the
supported cluster environments.

Storage disk

A B

A fails over to B
Database node 0 Database node 0
(ACTIVE) (PASSIVE)
GEN-001079

Figure 11 Single database node with failover capability

202 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Cluster Systems

Storage disk

A B

A (node0, node1) fails over to B

Database node 0 Database node 0
(ACTIVE) (PASSIVE)
Database node 1 Database node 1
(ACTIVE) (PASSIVE)
GEN-001080

Figure 12 Multiple database nodes with failover capability

Storage disk

A B

A (node 0) fails over to B

Database node 0 Database node 0
(ACTIVE) (PASSIVE)
B (node1) fails over to A
Database node 1 Database node 1
(PASSIVE) (ACTIVE)
GEN-001081

Figure 13 Multiple database nodes with mutual failover capability

Backup failover
When a node failure occurs during a manual backup, a DBA must restart the backup
after cluster recovery.
When a node failure occurs during a scheduled backup, the NetWorker server restarts
the backup (from the beginning or from the point of failure if the backup is
configured for checkpoint restart) if the Client Retries attribute in the NetWorker
Group resource is set to a value greater than zero. The restarted backup is executed
on the node that takes control of the cluster service.

Active-passive clusters 203

Cluster Systems

Cluster configuration requirements

Before configuring backups in a cluster system, ensure the following:
◆ The database is properly set up in the cluster according to the appropriate
database server documentation.
◆ The NetWorker and NMDA software is properly installed on each node of the
cluster that will participate in the backup or restore. The EMC NetWorker Module
for Databases and Applications Installation Guide provides details.
DB2-specific cluster requirements

In DB2 version 9.1.x cluster environments, the same database cannot be backed up at
the same time from multiple cluster nodes, but the backups must be done in
sequence. When the backup runs, the next host in the cluster group displays the
following message:
The database is still in use

Lotus-specific cluster requirements

If you specify NSR_CLIENT in the configuration file when you use the NetWorker
User for Lotus program to perform a manual backup on a cluster, the index is saved
by using the NSR_CLIENT name.
“Lotus data restore and recovery” on page 152 includes details on how to configure
and run a directed recovery.

Sybase-specific cluster requirements

On UNIX or Linux systems, create the required symbolic link to the Sybase library:
◆ If the Sybase ASE binaries are installed on the shared disk, ensure that the
symbolic link to the Sybase library is created on the shared disk.
◆ If the Sybase ASE binaries are installed on each node in the cluster, ensure that
the symbolic link to the Sybase library is created on each node where the NMDA
software is installed and backups will be performed.
The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Installation Guide describes
how to create the symbolic link to the Sybase library.

NSR_CLIENT setting for cluster systems

During an NMDA backup, the NetWorker server creates entries about the backed-up
data in the online client file index. During an NMDA restore, the data is retrieved by
first searching this client file index.
The NSR_CLIENT parameter provides the following information to the NetWorker
server:
◆ During a backup, the name of the NetWorker client whose index file should be
used to record the backup information.
◆ During a restore, the name of the NetWorker client whose index file should be
used to search for the data to be restored.
If NSR_CLIENT is not set, NMDA uses the name of the local host (not the virtual
cluster host) for the operations during cluster backups and restores.

204 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Cluster Systems

The value of NSR_CLIENT (either the default value or an explicitly defined value)
used for a backup should be the same as the value of NSR_CLIENT used for the
restore of that backup.
Set the NSR_CLIENT parameter to the virtual cluster hostname in a cluster
environment to enable the restore of backup data no matter which cluster node was
used during the backup.

Note: For parallel backups or restores, set NSR_CLIENT to the same value for all sessions.

NSR_PHYSICAL_HOST_LICENSE setting for cluster systems

By default, the NMDA software is licensed per virtual host and you require a license
for each virtual cluster hostname that is backed up. This default behavior cannot be
changed when you back up to NetWorker server 7.6 or earlier.
When you back up to NetWorker server 7.6 SP1, set the parameter
NSR_PHYSICAL_HOST_LICENSE=TRUE to enforce that NMDA is licensed per
cluster node, not per virtual cluster hostname.
“NSR_PHYSICAL_HOST_LICENSE” on page 301 provides details on the parameter.

Convert a client-side to server-side configuration in a cluster

To convert a client-side backup configuration that uses an NMDA configuration file
to the wizard (server-side) configuration in a cluster, follow the instructions for
“Converting a client-side to server-side configuration” on page 64. You can run the
nsrdaadmin conversion utility from any of the cluster nodes configured for backup.
During the conversion, if nsrdaadmin prompts for the names of users to add to the
Lockbox resource, specify the names of operating system users on each cluster node
that will be used for the backup.

Note: If you do not grant the Lockbox ACL rights during the conversion, you can add users
later by using NMC to edit the Lockbox resource for the virtual cluster host.

The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release Notes provide
information on the conversion limitations.

Configure a scheduled backup in a cluster

To configure a scheduled NMDA backup in a cluster:
1. Ensure that the cluster configuration requirements are met, as described in
“Cluster configuration requirements” on page 204.
2. Configure the scheduled backup for the cluster by using one of these methods:
• “Wizard method (server-side configuration)” on page 206
• “Nonwizard method (client-side configuration)” on page 207

Active-passive clusters 205

Cluster Systems

Wizard method (server-side configuration)

Follow the procedure for “Configuring a scheduled backup with the wizard” on
page 66 to create the configuration with the configuration wizard. Keep in mind the
following cluster-specific requirements:

Note: To enable configuration with the wizard, configure the NetWorker client software to be
highly available. The EMC NetWorker Cluster Installation Guide provides details.

1. On the Specify the Client Name page, type the name of the virtual host for the
cluster.
2. On the page where advanced configuration parameters are set, ensure the
following:
• The NSR_CLIENT parameter is set to the virtual cluster hostname.
“NSR_CLIENT setting for cluster systems” on page 204 provides details.
• The NSR_PHYSICAL_HOST_LICENSE parameter is set to specify the correct
NMDA licensing, if required. “NSR_PHYSICAL_HOST_LICENSE setting for
cluster systems” on page 205 provides details.
3. On the Select the NetWorker Client Properties page, add
database_username@cluster_node to the Remote Access field for each cluster node
that can perform backups or restores.

Note: Do not use the following syntax in the Remote Access field:
user=database_username,host=cluster_node

On Windows clusters only, add SYSTEM@cluster_node to the Remote Access field

for each cluster node that participates in backups and restores.
For Sybase scheduled backups on UNIX only, add root@cluster_node to the
Remote Access field for each cluster node that participates in backups and
restores.
Using these settings, the wizard performs the following:
◆ Creates a NetWorker Client resource for the virtual cluster host with the NMDA
settings for scheduled backups and the following additional settings:
• The Backup Command attribute contains -c cluster_virtual_hostname.
• The Remote Access attribute contains the user entries described in step 3 .
◆ Creates a generic NetWorker Client resource for each cluster node, if it does not
already exist.
◆ If the configuration contains sensitive information such as passwords, stores the
information in the Lockbox resource and grants access (ACL rights) to the
Lockbox resource to the users on the virtual cluster host and cluster node,
described in step 3 .

Note: If additional users require ACL rights to the Lockbox, you can add them to the
Lockbox resource directly in NMC.

206 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Cluster Systems

Nonwizard method (client-side configuration)

Follow the procedure for “Configuring a scheduled backup without the wizard” on
page 68 to create the configuration for the cluster without the configuration wizard.
Keep in mind the following cluster-specific requirements:
1. Create a generic (“dummy”) Client resource for each cluster node that will run
backups and restores, if a Client resource does not yet exist for a given host.
The following is an example of the attribute settings in a dummy Client resource:
• Scheduled Backup: (clear)

Note: Do not select the checkbox for Scheduled Backup, so that the dummy client is not
included in the scheduled backup.

• Backup Command: (blank)

• Group: (blank)
• Save Set: SKIP
• Schedule: SkipAll
2. Create the NMDA configuration file in one of the following locations:
• On the virtual host’s shared disk.
• In the same location on the local disk of each physical node.
A copy of the configuration file must exist in the same location on each
physical node.
3. Create an NMDA-specific Client resource on the NetWorker server for each
virtual cluster host that will run backups and restores, according to “Configure
the Client resource” on page 72:
• The Save Set attribute must be set to the required value as described in Table 9
on page 72.
• The Remote Access attribute must contain the name of each cluster node that
can store and retrieve the backups.
The Remote Access attribute must include the following for each cluster node:
user=database_username,host=cluster_node

On Windows clusters only:

user=SYSTEM,host=cluster_node

For Sybase scheduled backups on UNIX only:

user=root_username,host=cluster_node

• The Backup Command attribute contains the following value:

nsrdasv -z configuration_file_path

where configuration_file_path is the pathname of the NMDA configuration file

created in step 2 .

Active-passive clusters 207

Cluster Systems

For example, if physical hosts clus_phys1 and clus_phys2 form a Windows cluster
that contains a DB2 database, the configuration of the Client resource for the
virtual cluster host contains the following attributes:
Backup Command: nsrdasv -z pathname/nmda_db2.cfg
Group: db2group
Remote Access: user=dbinst,host=physical_node_1
user=dbinst,host=physical_node_2
user=SYSTEM,host=clus_phys1
user=SYSTEM,host=clus_phys2
Save Set: DB2:/SAMPLE/NODE0001
4. On the NMDA client, set the NSR_CLIENT parameter to the virtual cluster
hostname in the NMDA configuration file (for non-Oracle backups) or in the
RMAN script (for Oracle backups), which is specified in the Backup Command
attribute of the virtual Client resource. “NSR_CLIENT setting for cluster systems”
on page 204 provides details.
5. On the NMDA client, set the NSR_PHYSICAL_HOST_LICENSE parameter to
specify the correct NMDA licensing, if required, in the NMDA configuration file
(for non-Oracle backups) or in the RMAN script (for Oracle backups), which is
specified in the Backup Command attribute of the virtual Client resource.
“NSR_PHYSICAL_HOST_LICENSE setting for cluster systems” on page 205
provides details.

Configure a manual backup in a cluster

To configure a manual NMDA backup in a cluster, follow the same instructions as
used to configure a scheduled backup without the wizard.
“Nonwizard method (client-side configuration)” on page 207 provides details.
The only difference is that you may configure a generic NetWorker Client resource
for the virtual cluster host instead of the NMDA-specific one.
In addition, ensure that you set the NSR_SERVER=NetWorker_server_hostname
parameter when you back up to a remote NetWorker server.

Configure an Avamar deduplication backup in a cluster

To configure an NMDA deduplication backup with Avamar in a cluster, follow these
procedures:
◆ “Configure a scheduled backup in a cluster” on page 205 or “Configure a manual
backup in a cluster” on page 208
◆ “Configure a scheduled Avamar deduplication backup” on page 78 or
“Configure a manual Avamar deduplication backup” on page 79 for the virtual
cluster host

208 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Cluster Systems

Ensure that there is at least one NetWorker Client resource enabled for deduplication
backups:
◆ For a scheduled deduplication backup, enable deduplication for the Client
resource that is part of the NetWorker group for the backup.

Note: The Client resource can be for a virtual cluster host (recommended) or physical
node.

◆ For both scheduled and manual deduplication backups, enable deduplication for
the Client resource of the host that is set in the NSR_CLIENT parameter in the
NMDA wizard or configuration file.

Configure a Data Domain deduplication backup in a cluster

To configure a Data Domain deduplication backup in a cluster, follow these
procedures:
◆ “Configure a scheduled backup in a cluster” on page 205 or “Configure a manual
backup in a cluster” on page 208
◆ “Configure a Data Domain backup with deduplication on NMDA host” on
page 81 or “Configure a Data Domain backup with deduplication on storage
node” on page 82 for the virtual cluster host

Configure a probe-based backup in a cluster

To configure a probe-based NMDA backup in a cluster:
◆ Configure a scheduled backup in the cluster according to “Configure a scheduled
backup in a cluster” on page 205.
◆ Configure the probe-based backup according to “Configuring a probe-based
backup” on page 83. Associate the Probe resource with the Client resource for the
virtual cluster host.

Setting up nodes to back up to a local storage node

Typically, the NetWorker server backs up the data in a cluster to the first storage
node listed in the Storage Nodes attribute of the Client resource for the host set in the
NSR_CLIENT parameter, usually the virtual cluster host. You can configure a virtual
cluster client to direct its backups to the storage node located on the cluster node on
which the backup runs (local storage node).
To set up the cluster nodes to back up to a local storage node:
1. Ensure that the NetWorker storage node software is installed on each node to be
used for the NMDA backup and a Storage Node resource is created on the
NetWorker server for each of the storage nodes.
2. Create a NetWorker Device resource for the device on each node to be used for
the NMDA backup. Label and mount a NetWorker volume for each device.
3. Ensure that Groups and the selection criteria (such as Clients) of the media pool
used for the devices match the settings in the NMDA backup configuration.

Active-passive clusters 209

Cluster Systems

4. In the NetWorker Client resource that is configured for the virtual cluster client
according to “Configure a scheduled backup in a cluster” on page 205, set the
Storage Nodes attribute (on the Globals tab in NMC) to the following values in
this order:
curphyhost
nsrserverhost

Example 29 on page 224 shows how to set up three Oracle RAC nodes as storage
nodes for NMDA backups.

Configure a recovery in a cluster

For recovery in a cluster, ensure that the following configurations are in place:
◆ In the Client resource of the virtual cluster host, the Remote Access attribute is set
as described in “Roadmap for NMDA data restore” on page 141.
◆ The NSR_CLIENT parameter is set to the same hostname that was set in
NSR_CLIENT during the backup, usually the virtual cluster hostname.
“NSR_CLIENT setting for cluster systems” on page 204 provides details.
To run a restore and recovery, use the procedures described in Chapter 4, “Data
Restore and Recovery.”

Active-active application clusters (overview)

An active-active application cluster is a group of linked virtual or physical hosts with
shared storage called cluster nodes, which can access the database data from multiple
nodes concurrently.

Note: DB2 DPF systems do not adhere to the preceding definition of an active-active
application cluster because each DB2 partition has its own set of computing resources such as
CPU and storage. However, for the purposes of this guide and NMDA licensing, DB2 DPF is
treated as an active-active application cluster.

NMDA supports the following active-active application cluster software:

◆ DB2 DPF
◆ Informix MACH 11
◆ Oracle RAC
◆ Sybase ASE Cluster Edition

Note: A Lotus partitioned Domino server configured in a cluster similar to the one shown in
Figure 13 on page 203 might be referred to as an active-active cluster in Lotus Domino
documentation, but it is not an active-active application cluster. Therefore, the NMDA
documentation refers to it as an active-passive cluster.

This section provides information that is common to all the supported types of
active-active application clusters.
The EMC Information Protection Software Compatibility Guide provides details on all the
supported cluster environments.

210 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Cluster Systems

These later sections provide details on specific types of active-active application

clusters:
◆ “DB2 DPF systems” on page 212
◆ “Informix MACH 11 systems” on page 218
◆ “Oracle RAC systems” on page 221
◆ “Sybase ASE Cluster Edition systems” on page 226

Active-active cluster configuration requirements

Before configuring backup or recovery in an active-active application cluster system,
ensure the following on the nodes that will participate in the backup or recovery:
◆ The cluster is properly set up according to the appropriate database server
documentation.
◆ The NetWorker and NMDA software is properly installed on each node of the
cluster that will participate in a backup or restore. The EMC NetWorker Module for
Databases and Applications Installation Guide provides details.
Select one node from the active-active cluster as the node that will have the backup
data stored under its client name. To ensure that each node participating in the
backups stores the data under the same client name, set the NSR_CLIENT parameter
to the same value for each node. This also facilitates recovery because you do not need
to remember which node backed up what data.
Configure backups and restores in the active-active cluster according to the
corresponding instructions for an active-passive cluster:
◆ “Nonwizard method (client-side configuration)” on page 207

Note: You cannot use the NMDA wizard to configure a scheduled backup in an
active-active cluster.

◆ “Configure a manual backup in a cluster” on page 208

◆ “Configure an Avamar deduplication backup in a cluster” on page 208
◆ “Configure a Data Domain deduplication backup in a cluster” on page 209
◆ “Configure a probe-based backup in a cluster” on page 209
◆ “Configure a recovery in a cluster” on page 210
During the active-active application cluster configuration:
◆ Configure the node that stores the indexes in the same way as the virtual cluster
client in an active-passive cluster.
◆ Configure the other active-active nodes in the same way as the cluster nodes in an
active-passive cluster.

Restarting a backup after a system failure

If an active-active application cluster supports a virtual IP and is configured with a
virtual IP, then you will have the same backup failover capabilities as an
active-passive cluster, as described in “Backup failover” on page 203.

Active-active application clusters (overview) 211

Cluster Systems

Otherwise, an active-active application cluster does not have the same backup
failover capabilities as an active-passive cluster. If a system failure occurs on the node
used to initiate an NMDA scheduled backup, the backup might fail. In this case,
manual intervention is required to configure and restart the backup on a different
node that is available:
1. On the available node, ensure that the following software is installed:
• NetWorker client
• NetWorker storage node (optional)
• NMDA
2. Configure a new NMDA-specific Client resource for the available node.
3. Replace the original Client resource with the new Client resource from step 2 for
the NMDA backup.

DB2 DPF systems

The DB2 Database Partitioning Feature (DPF) offers an environment where a single
database that is divided by logical nodes may reside on multiple partitions, either on
the same host or on multiple hosts. A partitioned database can manage high volumes
of data and provides benefits such as increased performance and high availability.
The following figures show examples of the supported DPF configurations:
◆ Figure 14 on page 212 — Database nodes reside in partitions on a single physical
host
◆ Figure 15 on page 213 — Multiple DPF nodes reside in partitions on separate
hosts

Database instance

Host 1
Database partition Database partition

Logical node 0 Shared memory or Logical node 1

fast interconnect

GEN-001303

Figure 14 Single DPF host with shared memory

212 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Cluster Systems

Database instance

Host 1 Host 2

Database partitions Database partitions

Interconnect
Nodes 0, 3 Nodes 1, 2

GEN-001084

Figure 15 Two DPF hosts with multiple nodes

Backup and restore configuration in a DPF environment

Note: DPF backups with DB2 version 9.5 or later must be configured differently than DPF
backups with previous versions of DB2.

To configure database backups with NMDA in an DB2 DPF system, follow the
instructions in “Active-active cluster configuration requirements” on page 211.
The following are additional DB2 DPF-specific considerations:
◆ For all DB2 DPF backups, the total number of target sessions for the backup pool
must be equal to or greater than the number of database partitions.
◆ To configure and run a manual DPF backup for the supported DB2 versions,
follow the instructions in “Manual backup configuration in a DPF environment”
on page 214.
◆ To configure a scheduled DPF backup, follow the appropriate instructions:
• “Scheduled backup configuration in DB2 9.1.x DPF environment” on page 215
• “Scheduled backup configuration in DB2 9.5 or later DPF environment” on
page 216
◆ To restore a DPF backup, follow the instructions in “Restoring a DPF backup” on
page 218.
◆ For a probe-based backup with DB2 9.5 or later, configure a DPF backup as usual.
Complete the probe-based backup configuration according to “Configuring a
probe-based backup” on page 83. Associate the Probe resource with the Client
resource configured for the scheduled backup.

Note: In a DPF environment for DB2 9.5 and later versions:

- The LOG_THRESHOLD parameter setting in the Probe resource must specify the total
number of logs generated by all the DPF nodes since the last probe-based backup.
- The scheduled backup must be configured to run on the catalog partition.

DB2 DPF systems 213

Cluster Systems

Manual backup configuration in a DPF environment

DPF backups with NMDA must use an NMDA configuration file, which resides on
the DB2 server host. The following configuration example applies to all DB2 DPF
environments (versions 9.1.x and 9.5).
Configure a manual backup of a DPF database that resides on two hosts (host1 and
host2), as follows:
1. Ensure that the DPF database partitions are properly configured according to the
appropriate DB2 documentation.
2. Create an NMDA configuration file (for example, nmda_db2.cfg) in the database
instance directory, so that it is accessible to both hosts. The following parameters
must be set:
• NSR_SERVER — Hostname of the NetWorker server.
• NSR_CLIENT — Name of the host with the database catalog node partition
(NODE0000).

Note: Setting NSR_CLIENT enables NetWorker to store backups from all the nodes under
the same index, as described in “Active-active cluster configuration requirements” on
page 211.

3. Use the NMC program (Configuration > Clients) to create a basic NetWorker
Client resource for both host1 and host2.
In each Client resource, set the Remote Access attribute to:
user=database_username,host=other_node_hostname

Running a manual DPF backup for DB2 9.1.x versions

Run a manual DPF backup for supported DB2 9.1.x versions with the following
command:
db2_all “db2 backup db sample load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.xx options
@pathname/nmda_db2.cfg”

where:
◆ sample is the name of the database to be backed up.
◆ xx is the platform-specific extension.
◆ pathname/nmda_db2.cfg is the full pathname of the NMDA configuration file.

Running a manual DPF backup for DB2 9.5 and later versions
Supported DB2 9.5 and later versions enable a manual DPF backup of either all
partitions or specific partitions.
To run a manual DPF backup of all partitions:
db2 backup db sample on all dbpartitionnums load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.xx
options @pathname/nmda_db2.cfg

where:
◆ sample is the name of the database to be backed up.
◆ xx is the platform-specific extension.
◆ pathname/nmda_db2.cfg is the full pathname of the NMDA configuration file.

214 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Cluster Systems

To run a manual DPF backup of specific partitions:

db2 backup db sample on dbpartitionnums (1,3...) load
/usr/lib/libnsrdb2.xx options @pathname/nmda_db2.cfg

where:
◆ 1, 3... are numerical values of each partition to back up (for example, 1 and 3 ).
◆ Other options are the same as in the preceding command.

Scheduled backup configuration in DB2 9.1.x DPF environment

DB2 9.1.x DPF scheduled backups with NMDA must use an NMDA configuration
file, which must reside on the host with the database catalog node partition
(NODE0000):
◆ For a single DPF host with shared memory as shown in Figure 14 on page 212,
configure only one NetWorker Client resource, one Group resource, and one
NMDA configuration file.
◆ For multiple DPF hosts as shown in Figure 15 on page 213, configure a separate
NetWorker Client resource and NMDA configuration file for each partition (host).
The partition with NODE0000 (the catalog node) must have its own Group
resource and must be backed up first. All other clients must be members of the
same Group resource, but the Group resource should be different than the Group
resource for NODE0000.
Configure a scheduled backup of a DB2 9.1.x DPF database that resides on two host
DB2 servers (for example, host1 and host2 as shown in Figure 15 on page 213), as
follows:
1. Ensure that the DPF database partitions are properly configured according to the
appropriate DB2 documentation.
2. Create an NMDA configuration file (for example, nmda_db2.cfg) in the database
instance directory. The configuration file should contain the following values:
• NSR_SERVER — Hostname of the NetWorker server.
• NSR_CLIENT — Name of the client with the DPF catalog node partition
(NODE0000).
• INSTHOME — Pathname of the DB2 instance home directory.
• DB2_NODE_NAME — Name of the DB2 instance.
• DB2_USER — Name of the DB2 user.
• DB2_OPTIONS — Either DB2BACKUP_ONLINE or DB2BACKUP_OFFLINE.

Note: If the DPF partitions are configured as a cluster, DPF backups may be performed
offline only and the DB2_OPTIONS parameter must be set to DB2BACKUP_OFFLINE.

3. Encrypt a DB2 user password with the nsrdaadmin -P command. “USER_PSWD”

on page 306 provides details.
4. Use the NMC program to create two NetWorker Group resources, one of which is
scheduled to start a backup before the other.
For example, create the groups dpf_group1 and dpf_group2, where dpf_group1
starts before dpf_group2.

DB2 DPF systems 215

Cluster Systems

5. Use the NMC program to create a NetWorker Client resource for the database
host (host1) that has the DPF catalog node partition (NODE0000). For example,
the attributes are set as follows:
Name: host1
Save Set: DB2:/sample/NODE0000
Group: dpf_group1
Backup Command: nsrdasv -z pathname/nmda_db2.cfg
Remote Access: user=database_username, host=host2

Note: The group for the DPF catalog node partition (NODE0000) must be scheduled to run
before the other partitions.

6. Use the NMC program to create a second NetWorker Client resource for the
database host (host1) to back up the second node (NODE0003) located on this
host. Ensure that this Client resource is assigned to a different group than the
previous one. For example, the attributes are set as follows:
Name: host1
Save Set: DB2:/sample/NODE0003
Group: dpf_group2
Backup Command: nsrdasv -z pathname/nmda_db2.cfg
Remote Access: user=database_username, host=host2
7. Use the NMC program to create a NetWorker Client resource for the other
database host (host2), which does not have the database catalog node partition.
For example, the attributes are set as follows:
Name: host2
Save Set: DB2:/sample/NODE0001 DB2:/sample/NODE0002
Group: dpf_group2
Backup Command: nsrdasv -z pathname/nmda_db2.cfg
Remote Access: user=database_username, host=host1
8. If the DPF partitions are configured as a cluster, set the NetWorker device
parallelism to 1.

Scheduled backup configuration in DB2 9.5 or later DPF environment

With a DB2 9.5 or later version, the parameter DB2_PARTITION_LIST enables
multiple partitions to be backed up at the same time.
DPF scheduled backups must use an NMDA configuration file (for example,
nmda_db2.cfg), which resides on the host with the DPF catalog node partition.
For all the supported DPF configurations shown in Figure 14 on page 212 and
Figure 15 on page 213, configure only one NetWorker Client resource, one Group
resource, and one NMDA configuration file.

216 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Cluster Systems

Configure a scheduled backup of a DB2 9.5 or later DPF database that resides on two
host DB2 servers (for example, host1 and host2), as follows:
1. Ensure that the DPF database partitions are properly configured according to the
appropriate DB2 documentation.
2. Create an NMDA configuration file (for example, nmda_db2.cfg) in the database
instance directory. The configuration file should contain the following values:
• NSR_SERVER — Hostname of the NetWorker server.
• NSR_CLIENT — Name of the client with the database catalog node partition
(NODE0000).
• INSTHOME — Pathname of the DB2 instance home directory.
• DB2_NODE_NAME — Name of the DB2 instance.
• DB2_USER — Name of the DB2 user.
• DB2_OPTIONS — Either DB2BACKUP_ONLINE or DB2BACKUP_OFFLINE.

Note: If the DPF partitions are configured as a cluster, DPF backups may be performed
offline only and the DB2_OPTIONS parameter must be set to DB2BACKUP_OFFLINE.

• DB2_PARTITION_LIST is set as follows:

– To back up all the DPF partitions, specify the value all:
DB2_PARTITION_LIST=all
– To back up specific DPF partitions only, specify the partitions in a
comma-separated list, for example:
DB2_PARTITION_LIST=0,1,3
3. Encrypt a DB2 user password with the nsrdaadmin -P command. “USER_PSWD”
on page 306 provides details.
4. Only one Group resource is required. Use the NMC program to create a Group
resource, for example, dpf_group1.
5. Use the NMC program to create a NetWorker Client resource for the database
host (host1) that has the DPF catalog node partition (NODE0000). For example,
the attributes are set as follows:
Name: host1
Save Set: DB2:/sample/NODE0000
Group: dpf_group1
Backup Command: nsrdasv -z pathname/nmda_db2.cfg
Remote Access: user=database_username, host=host2
6. Use the NMC program to create a basic NetWorker Client resource for the other
database host (host2) if one does not already exist. For example, the attributes are
set as follows:
Name: host2
Save Set: DB2: SKIP
Group: (blank)
Backup Command: (blank)
7. If the DPF partitions are configured as a cluster, set the NetWorker device
parallelism to 1.

DB2 DPF systems 217

Cluster Systems

When the scheduled backup runs, the partitions specified in the parameter
DB2_PARTITION_LIST are backed up.

Restoring a DPF backup

To restore a DPF backup, restore the DPF catalog node partition first, then all the
other partitions of the database. These instructions apply to all configurations
(versions 9.1.x and 9.5).
On one of the database partitions, use the commands for each specified database
partition, as shown in the following example:
db2_all “<<+0< db2 restore database sample load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.xx
options @pathname/nmda_db2.cfg replace existing”
db2_all “<<+1< db2 restore database sample load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.xx
options @pathname/nmda_db2.cfg replace existing”
db2_all “<<+2< db2 restore database sample load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.xx
options @pathname/nmda_db2.cfg replace existing”
db2_all “<<+3< db2 restore database sample load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.xx
options @pathname/nmda_db2.cfg replace existing”

where:
◆ 0, 1, 2, or 3 is the database partition.
◆ sample is the name of the database to be restored.
◆ xx is the platform-specific extension.
◆ pathname/nmda_db2.cfg is the full pathname of the NMDA configuration file

Note: A restore with the db2_all command should always include replace existing or without
prompting to prevent the operation hanging while waiting for a prompt. DB2 does not support
user prompts for this type of operation.

Informix MACH 11 systems

Multi-instance Active Cluster for High-availability (MACH 11) is the Informix
Dynamic Server (IDS) high-availability system, which provides increased failover
capabilities, flexibility, and scalability in an Informix environment.
A MACH 11 cluster includes the following database servers:
◆ The primary server, which receives updates.
◆ One or more secondary servers, each of which is a mirror image of the primary
server and is in perpetual recovery mode that applies logical-log records from the
primary server.
One of the secondary servers can be configured through the Informix Connection
Manager to take over the primary server role if the primary server becomes
unavailable.

IMPORTANT
The NMDA operations do not support failover from primary to secondary MACH
11 servers. “Restarting a backup after a system failure” on page 211 provides
details.

218 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Cluster Systems

MACH 11 supports the following features:

◆ Continuous Log Restore (CLR) — CLR provides a way to create a hot backup of
a primary Informix server. To accomplish the hot backup, secondary server is
placed in rollforward mode and logical logs from the primary server are
constantly applied through special ontape or onbar recovery modes.

Note: In the event of a failure of the primary server, the secondary server could be
out-of-date by at least one log.

◆ High Availability Data Replication (HDR) — HDR enables the replication of a

complete database instance including logs from the primary to a hot standby
secondary instance (the HDR instance).
When the primary server is up and running, the HDR secondary server runs in
read-only mode and is typically used to offload reporting and complex SQL
queries from the primary server. In the event of a catastrophic failure, the HDR
secondary can be automatically promoted to primary server and can take over the
work of the failed primary server.
◆ Remote Standalone Secondary Servers (RSS) — RSS servers are similar to HDR
servers. With RSS, the primary server does not wait for responses from the
secondary server before committing database transactions.
In a common RSS scenario, remote backup servers run in locations geographically
distant from the primary because RSS is not sensitive to network latency. RSS
instances run in read-only mode and are used to offload database reporting. In
case of a primary instance failure, the standby instance cannot directly take over
the work of the primary. It must be first promoted from an HDR secondary
instance, then it can be promoted to a primary instance. The IBM Informix
documentation provides more details.
◆ Shared Disk Secondary Servers (SDS) — SDS servers do not maintain a copy of
the primary server, but rather share disks with the primary server, typically
through some form of disk mirroring configuration.
Similar to the other types of secondary servers, an SDS server runs in a read-only
mode and is typically used for offloading database processing. An SDS server can
be directly promoted to a primary server, unlike an RSS server. Because an SDS
server is so close to the primary server (shares the same disk), it is often the best
type of server to initially fail over to if the primary server encounters a problem.

Backup and Restore with Continuous Log Restore

You can access CLR functionality with NMDA through manual onbar backups.
Consider the following requirements before using CLR with NMDA:
◆ CLR requires manual intervention to perform log restores. You must run the
onbar –r –l –C command manually on the secondary server to restore the logs.
◆ Logs do not need to be restored individually to the secondary server. You can
restore the logs in bulk by running the onbar –r –l command.
◆ CLR with NMDA does not support probe-based backups or other scheduled
backups (through either client-side or server-side configurations).

Informix MACH 11 systems 219

Cluster Systems

To use CLR with NMDA:

1. Configure IDS to work with NMDA according to the instructions in the EMC
NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Installation Guide for both the
primary server and secondary server.
2. On the primary system, perform a level 0 backup with the onbar -b -L 0
command. Before starting the backup, ensure that the required NMDA Informix
parameters are set in the environment according to “Configuring a manual
backup” on page 75.
3. On the secondary system, perform an imported restore, but only perform a
physical restore with the onbar -r -p command. After the physical restore
completes on the secondary system, the database server waits in fast recovery
mode to restore the logical logs.
4. On the primary system, back up the logical logs with the onbar -b -l command.
5. On the secondary system, ensure that NSR_CLIENT is set to the hostname of the
primary server, and restore the logical logs with the onbar -r -l -C command.
6. Repeat step 4 and step 5 for all the logical logs that are available to back up and
restore. The Informix alarmprogram script, configured through the Informix
ALARMPROGRAM parameter, can be used to automate the log backups.
7. On the secondary system, run the following commands to finish restoring the
logical logs and quiesce the server:
• If logical logs are available to restore, run the onbar -r -l command.
• After all the available logical logs are restored, run the onbar -r -l -X command
only in the event of a failover.

Backups of primary and HDR or RSS or SDS servers

IDS does not support the backup of any secondary servers of a MACH 11 cluster. On
the primary server of a MACH 11 cluster, NMDA supports the following features:
◆ Manual onbar backups through the onbar –b command
◆ Manual log backups through the onbar –b –l command
◆ Scheduled backups through a client-side configuration
◆ Backup configuration and modification through the wizard
◆ Configuration of probe-based backups

Note: Although you can use the Informix wizard to configure the backup of a secondary
server, the resulting scheduled backup of the secondary server would fail. The Informix
BAR_ACT log would show an error code of 151 and would contain the following error
message:
DR: This command is not valid on a secondary server.

Restores of primary and HDR or RSS or SDS servers

You can use an onbar restore with MACH 11 in the following two cases:
◆ New secondary server setup
◆ Restore of a cluster

220 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Cluster Systems

Set up the restore of an HDR or RSS secondary server the same way as an Informix
imported restore. “Informix imported restore” on page 187 and IDS documentation
provide more details.
Set up the restore of a primary server by using the same method as for a typical
NMDA restore. Perform additional steps to ensure that the secondary servers are
properly updated during the restore as described in the IDS documentation.

Oracle RAC systems

An Oracle Real Application Cluster (RAC) is an active-active application cluster
environment for parallelism and high availability. A node in an Oracle RAC system is
a physical or virtual host with a hostname such as host1.emc.com. An Oracle instance
is a memory structure and a group of Oracle Server processes running on a node.
An Oracle database (for example, named databs1) comprises a set of datafiles, which
are used by the Oracle instances and can be shared between the nodes. All instances
share the same datafiles and control file. Each instance must have its own set of redo
log files and its own archived redo logs.
A RAC system enables multiple Oracle instances across multiples nodes to access the
same Oracle database at the same time. Oracle RAC is based on a cluster software
infrastructure that provides concurrent access to the same storage and the same set of
datafiles from all nodes in the cluster. All the database files reside on shared disks.

Backup and restore configuration in a RAC environment

To configure database backups with NMDA in an Oracle RAC system, follow the
instructions in “Active-active cluster configuration requirements” on page 211.
The following are additional Oracle RAC-specific considerations:
◆ Configure the Oracle Net services to allow connect-time (SQL Net) failover.
“Connect-time failover” on page 222 provides guidelines. The appropriate Oracle
documentation provides more information.
◆ To set up a local storage node for each RAC node involved in a backup, follow the
instructions in “Setting up nodes to back up to a local storage node” on page 209.
◆ Ensure that the configuration is set up for parallel backups and restores. “Parallel
RAC backups and restores” on page 223 provides more details.
◆ Create the appropriate RMAN scripts for the preferred types of Oracle backups
and restores on the RAC system. “Creating RMAN backup and restore scripts”
on page 223 provides more details.
◆ Review the additional issues with Oracle recovery operations in “Archived redo
logs” on page 225.
◆ For a probe-based backup, configure a RAC backup as usual. Complete the
probe-based backup configuration according to “Configuring a probe-based
backup” on page 83. Associate the Probe resource with the Client resource
configured for the scheduled backup.

Oracle RAC systems 221

Cluster Systems

Note: In a RAC environment:

- The LOG_THRESHOLD parameter setting in the Probe resource must specify the total
number of logs generated by all the RAC nodes in a cluster since the last probe-based
backup.
- One node should be selected as the backup node and used to perform all the probe-based
backups in the RAC. If this node is lost, a new backup node should be set up to use the
same Probe resource as used by the old backup node.

Connect-time failover
Neither Oracle RMAN nor NMDA supports Transparent Application Failover (TAF).
As a result, if a failure occurs during an Oracle backup, the backup is not
automatically restarted from the point of failure on another node. Only connect-time
failover is supported.
When multiple listeners support a single service, a connect-time failover reroutes the
connection request to another listener if the first listener is either down or cannot
connect. To enable the connect-time failover in RAC, there must be a listener on each
node, and each instance must use the same Net service name. Ensure that
GLOBAL_DBNAME does not appear in the SID_LIST_LISTENER parameter of the
listener.ora file since it disables the failover.
When using the local Net service naming method, the client’s tnsnames.ora file
should include the following parameters:
o11pA.emc.com =
(DESCRIPTION =
(ADDRESS_LIST =
(FAILOVER = ON)
(ADDRESS = (PROTOCOL = tcp) (HOST = nodeA)
(PORT = 1521))
(ADDRESS = (PROTOCOL = tcp) (HOST = nodeB)
(PORT = 1521))
)
(CONNECT DATA =
(SERVICE_NAME = proddb)
)
)

◆ Set the FAILOVER parameter to ON. The default value is ON for an

ADDRESS_LIST, and OFF when ADDRESS_LIST is not specified.
◆ Include the ADDRESS_LIST parameter:
• If multiple addresses are specified, but the ADDRESS_LIST parameter is
omitted, the Oracle Net service reads the addresses sequentially and attempts
to connect to the last one only.
• If the ADDRESS_LIST parameter is specified, the addresses are tried in the
order they appear in the list.
◆ In the CONNECT_DATA section, use SERVICE_NAME instead of the system
identifer (SID). SERVICE_NAME should be different from SID.
When a node or listener to which a client tries to connect is not available, the next
listener on the list is contacted. When the instance is down but the listener is running,
the failover occurs only if the instance is configured to dynamically register with the
listener.

222 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Cluster Systems

Dynamic instance registration

During dynamic instance registration, the database registers itself with the Oracle
listener on startup and unregisters itself on shutdown.
To perform dynamic instance registration:
◆ Set the INSTANCE_NAME and SERVICE_NAME parameters in the initialization
file (initoracle_sid.ora). There can be several services for a single instance.
◆ If the listener does not listen on the default port (1521), set the LOCAL_LISTENER
parameter in the initialization file.
◆ The SID_LIST_LISTENER parameter in listener.ora must not include SID_DESC
for the RAC instances.
◆ It is not necessary to have the listener.ora file when the listener listens on the
default port.
When the instance is down, the listener does not know how to connect to it. As a
result, the listener tries the next connect option specified in the ADDRESS_LIST in the
tnsnames.ora file.

Note: Some applications such as Oracle Enterprise Manager still require static database
registration with a listener.

Static instance registration

With static registration, the information about the instance is manually configured in
the listener.ora file through SID_DES in the SID_LIST_LISTENER parameter. The
listener contains continuous information about the instance even if the instance is
down. As a result, when the instance is down, the listener still tries to connect to it
rather than try the next connect option specified in the tnsnames.ora file.

Parallel RAC backups and restores

The NMDA software enables Oracle backups on either a single node or several nodes
of the Oracle RAC system.
A parallel Oracle backup uses Oracle instances that run in parallel on multiple RAC
nodes. In the RMAN backup script created for running a parallel Oracle backup,
allocate multiple channels for the backup and specify that each channel run on a
specific node. The parameter NSR_CLIENT must be set to the same value for each
channel. “NSR_CLIENT setting for cluster systems” on page 204 provides more
information on setting the parameter.
The NMDA software enables restores of the Oracle data to any physical node in the
RAC, regardless of which RAC node originally performed the backup.

Creating RMAN backup and restore scripts

A single RMAN backup script can be used to run a parallel Oracle backup with
NMDA on a RAC system. In the RMAN script, allocate multiple channels for the
backup and specify that each channel run on a specific node.

Note: NMDA does not support multiple RMAN restores that are running at the same time.

To run an Oracle restore on a RAC system, none of the nodes can be open. Only the
node that is running the RMAN restore script needs to be mounted.

Oracle RAC systems 223

Cluster Systems

Example 29 on page 224 describes a sample Oracle RAC configuration, including the
required RMAN backup and restore scripts.

Example 29 Setting up an Oracle RAC configuration

A RAC system contains three nodes (hosts) named nodeA, nodeB, and nodeC. Each
node has a Linux operating system, and an attached tape drive to be used for NMDA
backups. NetWorker storage node software is installed on each node.
In the NMC interface, a Storage Node resource is created for each node by
right-clicking Storage Nodes in the Devices pane and selecting New.
After the Storage Node resources are created, a Device resource is created for each
tape drive. As the tape devices are attached to storage nodes, the device names must
have the format rd=host_name:device_name. For example:
◆ Tape device /dev/rmt/tape0 is attached to node A. In the Device resource, the
device name is rd=nodeA:/dev/rmt/tape0.
◆ Tape device /dev/rmt/tape3 is attached to node B. In the Device resource, the
device name is rd=nodeB:/dev/rmt/tape3.
◆ Tape device /dev/rmt/tape1 is attached to node C. In the Device resource, the
device name is rd=nodeC:/dev/rmt/tape1.
In the tape device on each node, a volume is labeled and mounted. All of the volumes
are assigned to the Default pool in this example.
Node A is selected to store the index entries for the NMDA backups and initiate the
backups. The choice of node A is arbitrary. Node B or node C could be chosen
instead. In all the RMAN backup and restores scripts, NSR_CLIENT must be set to
nodeA.
In the NetWorker Client resource for node A:
◆ The Remote Access attribute is set to the hostnames of nodes B and C:
user=database_username, host=nodeB
user=database_username, host=nodeC

◆ The Storage Nodes attribute is set to:

curphyhost
nsrserverhost

◆ The remaining attributes are set, as required. For example:

• The Backup Command attribute is set to the command used for the backup:
nsrdasv(.exe) -z configuration_filepath

where configuration_filepath is the complete pathname of the configuration file

that contains the NMDA parameter settings for the backup.
• The Group attribute is set to the backup group name.
• The Save Set attribute is set to the RMAN script pathname.
Table 9 on page 72 provides more details on the Client resource attributes.

224 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Cluster Systems

The following RMAN script uses all three nodes to perform the backup. Each node
backs up data to its local tape drive. The backup information from all three nodes is
stored in the NetWorker client file index of nodeA:
connect target sys/oracle@connect_identifier;
run {
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’
connect ’sys/oracle@Net_service_name_of_instance_A’;
allocate channel t2 type ’SBT_TAPE’
connect ’sys/oracle@Net_service_name_of_instance_B’;
allocate channel t3 type ’SBT_TAPE’
connect ’sys/oracle@Net_service_name_of_instance_C’;

send ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_CLIENT=nodeA)’;
backup database;
release channel t1;
release channel t2;
release channel t3;
}

To enable restores, NSR_CLIENT must be set to nodeA. The NetWorker server then
obtains the backup information from the client file index of nodeA. To restore the
backup data to a different node such as nodeB, add the nodeB hostname to the
Remote Access attribute in the NetWorker Client resource of nodeA.
For example, the following RMAN script restores the database. The script can be run
on any host:
connect target sys/oracle@connect_identifier;
run {
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
allocate channel t2 type ’SBT_TAPE’;

send ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=NetWorker_server, NSR_CLIENT=nodeA)’;

restore database;

release channel t1;

release channel t2;
}

Archived redo logs

Each node in a RAC system maintains a separate set of redo logs. Redo logs that
become full are archived on the local node. As a result, the archived redo logs are
divided among the nodes of the system.
To enable RMAN to back up and recover a RAC system, make all the archived redo
log files accessible by all nodes participating in the backup or recovery. The
appropriate Oracle RAC documentation provides information on how to share the
archived redo logs.
The following sections provide sample scripts to back up and restore all the archived
redo log files in a RAC system:
◆ “Backing up all archived logs from each node” on page 226
◆ “Restoring all archived logs from each node” on page 226

Note: The archived logs should use the same NSR_CLIENT setting that is used to back up the
database.

Oracle RAC systems 225

Cluster Systems

Backing up all archived logs from each node

All the archived log files in a RAC system can be backed up from a single node, such
as a node named ops1.emc.com by using the following type of RMAN script:
run {
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’
connect ’user_name/user_passwd@connect_string_of_ops1’;
allocate channel t2 type ’SBT_TAPE’
connect ’user_name/user_passwd@connect_string_of_ops2’;

send ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_CLIENT=ops1.emc.com)’;
backup filesperset 10
(archivelog all delete input format ’al_%s_%p’);

release channel t1;

release channel t2;
}

Restoring all archived logs from each node

All the archived log files in a RAC system can be restored from a single node, such as
a node named ops1.emc.com by using the following type of RMAN script:
run {
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’
connect ’user_name/user_passwd@connect_string_of_ops1’;
allocate channel t2 type ’SBT_TAPE’
connect ’user_name/user_passwd@connect_string_of_ops2’;

send ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=mars.emc.com, NSR_CLIENT=ops1.emc.com)’;

restore (archive log all);

release t1;
release t2;
}

Sybase ASE Cluster Edition systems

An ASE Cluster Edition system is an active-active application cluster that consists of
multiple ASE servers across multiple nodes that connect to a shared set of disks and
run as a shared-disk cluster, including multiple physical hosts.
In an ASE Cluster Edition system:
◆ Each machine is known as a node.
◆ Each ASE server is an instance.
◆ Each node contains one instance.
◆ All the nodes must be on a storage area network (SAN).
The connected instances that form the cluster together manage a set of databases that
reside on shared disks. All the databases are accessible from each instance. The
multiple instances that make up the cluster appear to clients as a single system.
Clients connect logically to the shared-disk cluster while remaining connected
physically to individual instances. If one instance fails in the cluster, clients connected
to that instance can fail over to any of the remaining active instances.
The database devices in the cluster (except for private devices used by local user
temporary databases) must be raw devices, not block devices. The quorum device
that includes configuration information for the cluster and is shared by all the
instances must be on a raw partition that is accessible to all the nodes of the cluster.

226 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Cluster Systems

The ASE Cluster Edition documentation provides details on setting up the required
devices and configuring the nodes and instances of an ASE Cluster Edition system.
NMDA supports two types of Sybase backup server configurations:
◆ Single backup server configuration
◆ Multiple backup server configuration
In a single backup server configuration, the ASE cluster contains only one backup
server at any time. The backup server may be moved from one node to another node
by the cluster administration, but only one node at a time contains a running backup
server.
In a multiple backup server configuration, the ASE cluster contains two or more
backup servers, running simultaneously on separate nodes. Any of the backup
servers can perform the backup or restore of the databases.
A Sybase ASE Cluster Edition system supports two types of multiple backup server
configurations:
◆ Dedicated — Each instance in the cluster is assigned a specific backup server.
◆ Round-robin — An instance is not assigned a specific backup server, but the
cluster assigns the least busy backup server from a group according to
availability.

IMPORTANT
NMDA supports only the dedicated type of multiple backup server configuration,
not the round-robin type.

The ASE Cluster Edition documentation provides details on Sybase backup servers in
an ASE cluster.

Backup and restore configuration for ASE Cluster Edition

You must run the nsrdasv and nsrsybrc commands on the same node as the Sybase
backup server. You can run the nsrsybcc command on any node in the cluster.
Select one node in the cluster to use for all backups. If the backup node goes down,
you can switch to a different node in the cluster for the backups. “Restarting a backup
after a system failure” on page 211 describes how to restart a backup on a different
node after a failure. However, from that point on, you should use the new node as the
backup node. Do not constantly switch backup servers.

IMPORTANT
The NMDA operations do not support failover on ASE cluster databases.

You must select one node to store all the backups for the whole ASE Cluster Edition,
which is specified by the NSR_CLIENT parameter as described in “NSR_CLIENT
setting for cluster systems” on page 204. All the backups of the ASE cluster are
recorded in the client file index of the node. Use the same NSR_CLIENT value even if
the original node that performed the backup failed and a new node was configured to
run the backups.
Ensure that you meet the configuration requirements in “Active-active cluster
configuration requirements” on page 211.

Sybase ASE Cluster Edition systems 227

Cluster Systems

For a probe-based backup, configure a scheduled backup for ASE Cluster Edition as
usual. Complete the probe-based backup configuration according to “Configuring a
probe-based backup” on page 83. Associate the Probe resource with the Client
resource configured for the scheduled backup.

Backup of temporary databases

An ASE Cluster Edition system supports the following types of temporary databases:
◆ Local system
◆ Local user
◆ Global user
◆ Global system
The NMDA software skips the backup of all these types of temporary databases in an
ASE Cluster Edition system, just as it skips the backup of tempdb and user-created
temp databases on nonclustered Sybase installations.

Restoring an ASE Cluster Edition backup

To restore backups, use the nsrsybrc -c option to specify the NetWorker client
hostname of the node that was used to store the NetWorker indexes for the backup.
The value for the -c option should be same as the NSR_CLIENT parameter used
during a backup.
Use the nsrsybrc -d option to specify a redirected restore. For example:
nsrsybrc -U user_ID -P password -s NetWorker_server_name
–c index_node_name -d
SYBASE:/backup_server_node_Sybase_instance_name/database_name
SYBASE:/index_node_Sybase_instance_name/database_name

Note: In the nsrsybrc command, the instance names and database names are case-sensitive and
must be in the same case as recorded in the backup entries in the NetWorker indexes.

Backup and recovery of the quorum device

The NMDA software does not provide backups of the quorum device.
You must back up the quorum device by using the Sybase qrmutil utility. The
qrmutil utility creates a backup of the quorum device as a file on the file system. The
Sybase ASE Cluster Edition documentation provides details on the utility.
You can then use the NetWorker save binary to back up the quorum backup file.

Note: It is the responsibility of the backup administrator to create the quorum device backup
file and to protect that backup file with the NetWorker save binary.

To recover the quorum backup file, you must use the NetWorker recover binary. The
recover binary restores the quorum backup file as a file on the file system. You must
then load the quorum backup file into the database by using the appropriate Sybase
ASE Cluster Edition utility.

228 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Cluster Systems

Recovery of the master database on clusters

The instructions for recovering the master database on Sybase clusters differ from the
instructions for recovering the master database on Sybase single node installations.
You must contact Sybase Technical Support to obtain the instructions.
Disregard Sybase instructions that recommend the use of the load command for
recovering database backups. You must use the nsrsybrc command to recover the
Sybase master database, not the load command. Use the nsrsybrc command for the
recovery after starting the instance in single-user mode, which is also known as
master-recover mode.

Sybase ASE Cluster Edition systems 229

Cluster Systems

230 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 7
Multiple Installations
on a Single Host

This chapter includes the following major sections:

◆ Multiple database or application installations........................................................ 232
◆ Multiple databases or applications with the same bitness.................................... 232
◆ Multiple databases or applications with 32-bit and 64-bit coexistence............... 232

Multiple Installations on a Single Host 231

Multiple Installations on a Single Host

Multiple database or application installations

The NMDA software supports multiple database or application installations on the
NMDA host, including the same or different database or application types that have
the same or different bitness. For example:
◆ 32-bit Lotus Domino and 32-bit Sybase ASE servers on 32-bit or 64-bit AIX system
◆ 32-bit Lotus Domino and 64-bit DB2 servers on a 64-bit Sun SPARC system
◆ 32-bit Informix IDS and 64-bit IDS servers on a 64-bit HP PA-RISC system
◆ 32-bit Informix and 64-bit Oracle servers on a 64-bit Windows system
The documentation for the database or application that you are using provides
details on the versions of 32-bit and 64-bit database or application software that can
coexist on the same system.

Multiple databases or applications with the same bitness

To operate the NMDA software in an environment that contains multiple databases
or applications with the same bitness on a single NMDA host:
1. Install the NMDA software according to the instructions in the EMC NetWorker
Module for Databases and Applications Installation Guide.
2. Configure and perform a backup or recovery according to the instructions in this
guide for each database or application. Ensure that the following requirements
are met:
• The required backup or restore parameters are set to the correct values for the
specific database or application server only.
Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides details
on the NMDA parameters.
• The backup or recovery is run by the same user that operates the database or
application server that is being backed up or recovered.

Multiple databases or applications with 32-bit and 64-bit coexistence

The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Installation Guide provides
details on the NMDA installation for 32-bit and 64-bit database or application
coexistence on 64-bit systems.

Note: In a 32-bit and 64-bit coexistence environment, you cannot use the wizard to configure a
32-bit application. You can only use the wizard to configure a 64-bit application.

On a 64-bit system, if NMDA is installed to enable the coexistence of 32-bit and 64-bit
NMDA databases or applications, ensure that you use the correct command or
library name in specific commands and attributes as shown in Table 23 on page 233.

232 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Multiple Installations on a Single Host

Table 23 Command/library names for 32-bit and 64-bit coexistence

Name to use for 64-bit Name to use for 32-bit Location where command or library Section with details on the command or library
database or application database or application name is used name

For all databases and applications:

nsrdaprobe(.exe) nsrdaprobe32(.exe) In Probe Command attribute of the Probe “Configuring a probe-based backup” on page 83
resource, required for a probe-based
backup

nsrdasv(.exe) nsrdasv32(.exe) In Backup Command attribute of the “Configure the Client resource” on page 72
Client resource, required for a scheduled
backup

For DB2 on 64-bit Windows only:

libnsrdb2.dll libnsrdb232.dll In db2_all command • “Running a manual DPF backup for DB2 9.1.x
versions” on page 214
• “Restoring a DPF backup” on page 218

In db2 backup command • “Perform a DB2 manual backup” on page 120

• “Running a manual DPF backup for DB2 9.5 and
later versions” on page 214

In db2 restore command • “DB2 restore to the same instance” on page 145
• “DB2 restore to a different instance” on page 146

In db2 update db cfg command “Configure DB2 automatic transaction log backups”
on page 93

In DB2_VENDOR_LIB_PATH parameter “DB2_VENDOR_LIB_PATH” on page 305

setting for scheduled backups

For Lotus only:

nsrdasv(.exe) nsrdasv32(.exe) In Lotus manual backup command “Lotus manual backup through the nsrdasv
command” on page 121

nsrdocrc(.exe) nsrdocrc32(.exe) In Lotus document-level recovery “Document-level recovery through the nsrdocrc
command command” on page 157

nsrnotesrc(.exe) nsrnotesrc32(.exe) In Lotus database recovery command “Database restore and recovery through the
nsrnotesrc command” on page 153

In nsrlotus_remrecov(.bat) script for “Directed recovery through the NetWorker User for
Lotus directed recovery Lotus” on page 179

For Sybase only:

nsrdasv(.exe) nsrdasv32(.exe) In Sybase manual backup command “Sybase manual backup through the nsrdasv
command” on page 124

nsrsybcc(.exe) nsrsybcc32(.exe) In Sybase command for database “Sybase database consistency check” on page 123
consistency check

nsrsybrc(.exe) nsrsybrc32(.exe) In Sybase restore command “Restore through the nsrsybrc command” on
page 171

Multiple databases or applications with 32-bit and 64-bit coexistence 233

Multiple Installations on a Single Host

234 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 8
Snapshot Backups
and Restores

This chapter includes the following major sections:

◆ PowerSnap snapshot operations............................................................................... 236
◆ Configuring a PowerSnap backup............................................................................ 241
◆ Configuring a PowerSnap restore and recovery .................................................... 245
◆ PowerSnap parameters............................................................................................... 245
◆ DB2 considerations for PowerSnap operations ...................................................... 247
◆ Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations .................................................. 249
◆ Replication Manager snapshot operations with Oracle ASM .............................. 279

Snapshot Backups and Restores 235

Snapshot Backups and Restores

PowerSnap snapshot operations

PowerSnap snapshot backups and restores provide continuous snapshot-based
protection and availability of data on specific types of primary storage. The NMDA
software supports PowerSnap snapshot backups and restores of DB2 and Oracle data
with the following requirements:
◆ The PowerSnap snapshot backups create point-in-time (PIT) copies (snapshots) of
the data that resides on primary storage devices, such as EMC Symmetrix, EMC
CLARiiON, and others supported by the PowerSnap Modules that work with the
NMDA software.
The EMC Information Protection Software Compatibility Guide on the Powerlink
website provides a complete list of supported PowerSnap Modules.
◆ The PowerSnap snapshot operations use the particular PowerSnap Module
software designed for the primary storage.
PowerSnap Modules support scheduled backups only. Manual (client-initiated)
backups are not supported. The PowerSnap documentation provides details.
The following sections provide information on platform and software requirements
and the supported types of PowerSnap snapshot backups and restores:
◆ “Required software for PowerSnap snapshot operations” on page 236
◆ “Types of PowerSnap backups” on page 237
◆ “Types of PowerSnap restores” on page 239
◆ “PowerSnap backup processes” on page 239
The following sections provide details on how to configure and perform PowerSnap
operations:
◆ “Configuring a PowerSnap backup” on page 241
◆ “DB2 considerations for PowerSnap operations” on page 247
◆ “Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations” on page 249

Required software for PowerSnap snapshot operations

Table 24 on page 236 lists the software requirements for a typical network
environment that uses the NMDA software for PowerSnap snapshot operations.

Table 24 Typical configuration for PowerSnap snapshot operations with NMDA

Computer or device Required software or configuration

Database server host DB2 or Oracle server, NetWorker client, NMDA, PowerSnap Module

Proxy client host (data mover) NetWorker client, NetWorker storage node (optional), PowerSnap Module

Storage array Storage array supported by PowerSnap, for example, Symmetrix,

CLARiiON, or Celerra (NAS devices)

NetWorker server host NetWorker server, NetWorker storage node, NetWorker client

Figure 16 on page 237 shows the software components used in the NMDA
environment for PowerSnap backups and restores.

236 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

NetWorker NetWorker
server storage node Storage

LAN

Database server host

Database server Proxy client
NetWorker client SAN NetWorker client
NMDA PowerSnap Module
PowerSnap Module

Storage array
(Symmetrix,
CLARiiON,
or Celerra)

S4

S5 S3

Primary storage
LUNs/volumes
S1 S2

Snapshots

GEN-001089

Figure 16 Software used in the NMDA environment for PowerSnap backups and restores

Types of PowerSnap backups

The NMDA software with the appropriate PowerSnap Module supports the types of
snapshot backups described in Table 25 on page 237.

Table 25 Supported PowerSnap backup types

Backup type Snapshot retention Location of stored data

“Instant backup (snapshot)” on page 238 Permanent Snapshot only

“Immediate live backup” on page 238 Temporary Secondary storage only

“Deferred live backup” on page 238 Permanent Both snapshot and secondary storage

The PowerSnap backup type is configured by the Snapshot Policy attribute in the
NetWorker Group resource as described in “Configure the NetWorker Group
resource” on page 242.

PowerSnap snapshot operations 237

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Instant backup (snapshot)

An instant backup creates a point-in-time copy (snapshot) of the data on the primary
storage system. Instant backups can be scheduled to occur many times in a single day
with little impact to the database server or network.
A snapshot policy must be configured to control the lifecycle of the snapshot. The
policy specifies the frequency of instant backups and how long snapshots are
retained before being recycled.

IMPORTANT
Instant backups protect against logical failures only. To protect against physical
failures such as disk array failures, the snapshot must be backed up to secondary
storage.

Live backup (snapshot rollover)

A live backup creates a point-in-time copy (snapshot) of the data on the primary
storage system, and then backs up the snapshot through the proxy client (data
mover) to secondary (traditional) storage, such as tape or disk.
NMDA supports two types of live backup:
◆ Immediate live backup
◆ Deferred live backup

Immediate live backup

An immediate live backup (also known as a serverless snapshot backup or

snapshot-based backup) is a process where a temporary snapshot is created and
immediately backed up by the PowerSnap Module to secondary storage. The snapshot
is then automatically deleted from the primary storage and is not available to NMDA
for performing instant restores or rollbacks.

Deferred live backup

A deferred live backup is a process where an existing snapshot, previously created

during an instant backup, is backed up by the PowerSnap Module to secondary
storage. The snapshot is retained on the primary storage and is available to NMDA for
performing instant restores or rollbacks for a period specified by snapshot policies.

Note: A deferred live backup runs automatically as part of a scheduled backup as specified by
the Backup Snapshots attribute of the Snapshot Policy resource.

A proxy client host that is separate from the database server host can be used to move
the snapshot to the secondary storage. Using a proxy client reduces the impact on the
database server. The proxy client can be a NetWorker storage node to improve the
backup performance by eliminating the transfer of data over the network.

238 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Types of PowerSnap restores

The NMDA software, with the appropriate PowerSnap Module, supports the types of
snapshot restores described in Table 26 on page 239.

Table 26 Supported PowerSnap restore types

Restore type Data retrieved from

“Instant restore” on page 239 Mounted snapshot

“Rollback restore” on page 239 Unmounted snapshot, entirely restored to source location

“Restore from secondary storage” on page 239 Secondary storage

The restore type is specified in the RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER parameter setting as

described in “Configuring a PowerSnap restore and recovery” on page 245.

Instant restore
During an instant restore, the saved data is retrieved from a mounted snapshot that
was created through an instant backup. This type of restores requires a minimal
amount of time.

Rollback restore
A rollback restores an entire snapshot back to its source location on the database
server by using the hardware capabilities. A rollback is a destructive restore because
it overwrites the entire contents of a snapshot unit, such as a volume or disk. Use the
NetWorker PowerSnap Module documentation to determine if a rollback is
supported on a specific type of hardware.

Note: A rollback restore does not support relocation of the database to a different host because
it requires the data to be reverse synchronized between the snapshot and its original source.

Restore from secondary storage

A restore from secondary storage restores a snapshot that was backed up to the
storage through a live backup. This type of restore may be redirected to a different
host.
The PowerSnap Module supports two types of restore from secondary storage:
conventional and file-logical image restore (FLIR). The PowerSnap Module
documentation provides more details.

Note: The restore of snapshot data from the secondary storage requires the use of PowerSnap
software.

PowerSnap backup processes

Note: A PowerSnap backup can be started only by automatic or manual invocation of the
NetWorker scheduled backup group. For example, an Oracle PowerSnap backup cannot be
scheduled through Oracle Enterprise Manager or started from Oracle RMAN. The PowerSnap
Module documentation provides details on how to manually invoke a scheduled backup.

PowerSnap snapshot operations 239

Snapshot Backups and Restores

In general terms, a PowerSnap snapshot backup involves the following processes:

1. At the time of a scheduled snapshot backup, the NetWorker server starts the
NMDA nsrdasv process, which invokes the DB2 or Oracle RMAN backup.
2. The DB2 or Oracle backup process loads the NMDA libnsrdb2.xx or libnsrora.xx
library, respectively. Each library communicates with the PowerSnap Module.
3. On the database server host, the PowerSnap Module uses a storage
platform-specific application programming interface (API) to take a point-in-time
(PIT) snapshot of the database data on the primary storage, which then becomes
available to the proxy client (data mover).
4. If a live backup is performed, the PowerSnap Module on the proxy client moves
the snapshot data on the primary storage to the NetWorker server or storage
node, which stores the data on secondary storage, such as tape or disk. If
required, the PowerSnap Module deletes the snapshot from the primary storage.
5. At the end of the snapshot backup, the NetWorker server updates the online
client and media indexes with information about the backup.
Figure 17 on page 240 illustrates the data flow of PowerSnap backups and restores in
in the NMDA environment.

Database PowerSnap NetWorker

server host data mover host server

NetWorker
client
Control

Database
server

NetWorker
NMDA
client

NetWorker
PowerSnap PowerSnap server
Module Module
Data

Storage
Database Point-in-time copy medium
datafiles of datafiles

Primary storage
GEN-000868

Figure 17 PowerSnap live backup and restore data flow

240 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Configuring a PowerSnap backup

Note: PowerSnap backups cannot be configured through the wizard.

To configure a PowerSnap backup:

1. Ensure that both the NMDA and required PowerSnap Module software are
installed on the database host and the required PowerSnap software is installed
on the data mover host according to the instructions in the following:
• EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Installation Guide
• NetWorker PowerSnap Module documentation
2. Review “Types of PowerSnap backups” on page 237 to determine which type of
snapshot backup to perform.
3. Ensure that the basic database server and NetWorker configurations are
performed according to the “Backup configuration roadmap” on page 56.
The required NetWorker Server, Client, Device, and other resources must be
configured. For live backups, a Device resource must be configured for each
secondary storage device, such as a tape drive, to be used for the backups. The
devices must be mounted prior to the backups.
4. If required, configure internationalization (I18N) support according to
“Configure internationalization (I18N) support” on page 242.
5. Configure the required NetWorker resources for the PowerSnap backup:
• “Configure the NetWorker Pool resources” on page 242
• “Configure the NetWorker Snapshot Policy resource” on page 242
• “Configure the NetWorker Group resource” on page 242
• “Configure the NetWorker Client resource” on page 243
6. Set the required PowerSnap parameters according to “PowerSnap parameters”
on page 245.
If the nsrsnapck binary is not in the default installation location, set the
NSR_NWPATH parameter. On Linux, the default installation location is
/usr/sbin. “NSR_NWPATH” on page 301 provides more details.
7. Perform the DB2-specific or Oracle-specific configuration procedures according
to the appropriate section:
• “DB2 considerations for PowerSnap operations” on page 247
• “Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations” on page 249
8. If required, complete the configuration for an Avamar deduplication PowerSnap
backup according to “Configure an Avamar deduplication PowerSnap backup”
on page 244.
Test the PowerSnap backup configuration according to “Test a PowerSnap backup”
on page 244.

Configuring a PowerSnap backup 241

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Configure internationalization (I18N) support

In a non-English environment, NMDA supports internationalization (I18N) of
PowerSnap backups and restores with a PowerSnap Module. To configure I18N
support for PowerSnap backups, follow the instructions in “Configuring
internationalization (I18N) support” on page 57.
As an additional Oracle-specific requirement, enable PowerSnap catalog
synchronization by using the nsroraadmin command to set the
NSR_ORACLE_NLS_LANG parameter to the same value as the environment
variable NLS_LANG. “Oracle-specific requirements for I18N support” on page 59
provides more details on the NLS_LANG variable.
For example, in a Japanese locale, set the parameter as follows:
nsroraadmin -r add NSR_ORACLE_NLS_LANG JAPANESE_JAPAN.JA16EUC

“Configuring the NWORA resource file with the nsroraadmin program” on page 270
provides details on the nsroraadmin command. The command sets the parameter
value in the NWORA resource file, which is described in “NWORA resource file” on
page 265.

Configure the NetWorker Pool resources

A separate pool must be configured to support PowerSnap backups. The PowerSnap
Module stores the metadata from the point-in-time copy (snapshot) in this pool. The
pool is configured by using the same method as for a regular NMDA backup.
However, the specified backup device should be a file or advanced file type.

Note: Specify the pool name in the Snapshot Pool attribute of the NetWorker Group resource,
as described in “Configure the NetWorker Group resource” on page 242.

The NetWorker PowerSnap Module documentation provides more information on

configuring this extra pool.

Configure the NetWorker Snapshot Policy resource

A special NetWorker snapshot policy is required to perform PowerSnap backups. You
can either specify a preconfigured policy or create a new snapshot policy.
Configure a NetWorker Snapshot Policy resource by using the instructions in the
NetWorker PowerSnap Module documentation.

Configure the NetWorker Group resource

For PowerSnap backups, configure a NetWorker Group resource by using the
instructions in the NetWorker PowerSnap Module documentation.
Ensure that the NetWorker Group resource to which the database server host belongs
is configured with proper snapshot attribute settings. Table 27 on page 243 provides
a sample.

242 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Table 27 Sample NetWorker Group resource attributes for a snapshot backup

Attribute Setting

Snapshot True.

Snapshot Policy Serverless live backup. Daily or other customized policies may be set later.

Snapshot Pool A Pool resource dedicated to the storage of snapshot metadata is recommended.
File-type volume devices are strongly recommended over tape.

Start Time Must be set in relation to the Number of Snapshots attribute for the snapshot policy:
(Interval x Number of Snapshots) must be less than or equal to (24:00 h - Start Time).

Interval Must be set in relation to the Number of Snapshots attribute for the snapshot policy.

Configure the NetWorker Client resource

Ensure that the NetWorker Client resource for the database server host is configured
according to “Configure the Client resource” on page 72.
The following Client resource requirements for the database server host apply to the
PowerSnap backups:
◆ The Browse Policy attribute in the Client resource applies only to the NetWorker
client file index entries for backups residing on secondary storage (live backups).
◆ The Retention Policy attribute in the Client resource applies only to the
NetWorker media database entries for live backups.
◆ The lifecycle of a point-in-time copy (snapshot) is governed by the snapshot
policy specified in the Group resource to which the given client belongs.
◆ For the Group attribute, specify the name of the NetWorker Group resource
created for the PowerSnap backups. “Configure the NetWorker Group resource”
on page 242 provides more information.
◆ For the Backup Command attribute, type the following:
nsrdasv(.exe) -z configuration_filepath

where configuration_filepath is the complete pathname of the NMDA configuration

file that contains the NMDA parameter settings for the PowerSnap backup.
◆ For PowerSnap backups that use a proxy client host, the Remote Access attribute
must include the proxy client hostname.
◆ For DB2 backups, use the Application Information attribute in the Client resource
to set the PowerSnap parameters for the appropriate primary storage system as
described in “PowerSnap parameters” on page 245.
Create a NetWorker Client resource for the data mover host according to the
PowerSnap documentation.

Configuring a PowerSnap backup 243

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Configure an Avamar deduplication PowerSnap backup

The following restrictions apply to deduplication PowerSnap backups with Avamar:
◆ NMDA supports deduplication PowerSnap backups of only the data that is rolled
over to secondary storage, not of the data in instant (PIT) backups.
◆ NMDA does not support deduplication PowerSnap backups of raw devices or
volumes.
◆ If NSR_PS_SAVE_PARALLELISM is set to a value greater than 4, then the
PowerSnap Module automatically reduces the parameter setting to 4 during the
deduplication PowerSnap backup.
To configure a deduplication PowerSnap backup:
1. Perform the required PowerSnap backup configurations according to
“Configuring a PowerSnap backup” on page 241.
2. Perform the required deduplication backup configurations according to
“Configure a scheduled Avamar deduplication backup” on page 78 by using the
NMC method for a client-side configuration (without the wizard).

Note: The proxy client (data mover) host does not need to be enabled for deduplication.

The following sources provide details on any additional requirements and limitations
of deduplication PowerSnap backups and restores:
◆ EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release Notes
◆ EMC NetWorker PowerSnap Module documentation
(Refer to the PowerSnap Module version for the primary storage system.)

Test a PowerSnap backup

IMPORTANT
An NMDA PowerSnap backup can be started only by automatic or manual
invocation of the scheduled NetWorker backup group.

To verify the scheduled backup setup, follow the instructions for regular backups in
“Test a scheduled backup” on page 116.
To determine if the Oracle RMAN script for an Oracle PowerSnap backup contains
any errors, log the RMAN output into a file by setting the parameter
NSR_RMAN_ARGUMENTS in the NMDA configuration file used for the backup.

Cancel a PowerSnap backup

Cancel a PowerSnap backup by using the same methods as for regular backups.
“Cancel a scheduled backup” on page 117 provides more details.

244 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Configuring a PowerSnap restore and recovery

To configure a PowerSnap restore, set the required parameters for the restore by
using the proper method:
◆ For a DB2 PowerSnap restore, set the parameters in the NMDA configuration file
as described in “NMDA configuration file” on page 294.
◆ For an Oracle PowerSnap restore, set the parameters as described in “PowerSnap
parameter settings” on page 253.
Set the following parameters for a PowerSnap restore:
◆ NSR_DATA_MOVER — Hostname of the proxy host used for the backup.
◆ NSR_SERVER — Hostname of the NetWorker server.
◆ RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER — One or more of the following values, with each
value delimited from the others by a colon(:):
• pit — Specifies an instant restore.
• conventional — Specifies a snapshot restore from secondary storage media.
• flir — Specifies a file-logical image restore from secondary storage media.
• rollback — Specifies a rollback restore from a point-in-time snapshot copy.
The default value of RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER is pit:conventional.
If you specify multiple values for RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER, each type of restore
is attempted, in the order specified, until a restore operation is successful.

IMPORTANT
For the RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER parameter, NMDA does not support the
force_rollback option, which is supported by PowerSnap Modules. If the option is
specified, the restore fails, even if other valid restore options are also specified.

“Types of PowerSnap restores” on page 239 describes the supported restore

types.
The PowerSnap Module documentation for the appropriate primary storage system
provides details on the parameters used to restore snapshots.

PowerSnap parameters
Table 28 on page 246 provides a basic list of supported PowerSnap parameters. The
list is not exhaustive. The NetWorker PowerSnap Module documentation provides a
complete list of PowerSnap parameters.
Set the required PowerSnap parameters by using the proper method:
◆ For DB2 PowerSnap operations, set the parameters in the Application
Information attribute in the NetWorker Client resource for a backup and in the
NMDA configuration file for a restore.
◆ For Oracle PowerSnap operations, set the parameters as described in “PowerSnap
parameter settings” on page 253.

Configuring a PowerSnap restore and recovery 245

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Table 28 PowerSnap parameters

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_DATA_MOVER Mandatory for a PowerSnap backup or restore • None (default).

that uses a proxy client host. Specifies the • The valid hostname of the proxy client host.
hostname of the proxy client host.

NSR_MAX_STREAMS Optional. Specifies the maximum number of • 16 (default).

restore streams. • An integer value.

NSR_PS_SAVE_PARALLELISM Optional. Specifies the number of concurrent save • 16 (default).

streams on the proxy client host. • An integer value less than or equal to the
Parallelism attribute value in the NetWorker Client
resource.

NSR_SNAPSHOT_POSTCMD Optional for Oracle PowerSnap backups only. • None (default).

Specifies a script to be run immediately after the • Full pathname of the script to be run immedately
snapshot is complete but before the backup is after the snapshot is complete but before the
sent to NetWorker devices, if applicable. backup is sent to NetWorker devices.
If the script pathname is incorrect or the user does not
Note: This parameter can be set through the have execute permissions, the backup fails before
send command, parms options, or in a starting and generates an error.
user-defined configuration file specified through If the script pathname is correct but the script execution
the NSR_PROXY_PFILE parameter. fails, the backup does not fail.

The script output is directed to the file

$NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST/nmda_oracle_proxy.
messages.

RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER Optional. Specifies the type of PowerSnap restore • pit:conventional (default).

to be performed. • One or more of the following values, each value
delimited from the others by a colon(:):
Note: If multiple values are specified, each type of - pit — Specifies an instant restore.
restore is attempted (in the order specified) until a
- conventional — Specifies a PowerSnap restore
restore operation is successful. from secondary storage media.
- flir — Specifies a file-logical image restore from
secondary storage media.
- rollback — Specifies a rollback restore from a
point-in-time copy.
“Configuring a PowerSnap restore and recovery” on
page 245 provides more information.

Example 30 PowerSnap parameter settings for different types of primary storage

The PowerSnap Module documentation for the given type of primary storage
provides details on the PowerSnap parameters shown in the following examples:
◆ Celerra:
NSR_DATA_MOVER=datamover.emc.com
NSR_SNAP_NAS_CEL_CS_HOST=controlstn
NAS_SNAP_SUBTYPE=CEL_SNAPSURE
NSR_SNAP_TYPE=nas
NSR_SNAP_NAS_CLIENT=11.222.333.44

246 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

◆ CLARiiON:
NSR_DATA_MOVER=datamover.emc.com
NSR_SNAP_TYPE=emcclar
EMCCLAR_SNAP_SUBTYPE=CoW
FRAME_IP=10.5.167.17:10.5.167.18

◆ Symmetrix:
NSR_DATA_MOVER=datamover.emc.com
NSR_SNAP_TYPE=symm_dmx

DB2 considerations for PowerSnap operations

For PowerSnap snapshot operations with DB2 data, the IBM DB2 version 9.5 or later
software provides a feature called Advanced Copy Services (ACS) that enables
snapshots of DB2 data. The NMDA software works with ACS, PowerSnap Module,
and NetWorker software to back up snapshots of DB2 data.

IMPORTANT
Snapshots are not produced if any data or log file related to the snapshot resides on
a different device than the snapshotable device.
NMDA supports only the snapshot backup and restore of DB2 databases.
Snapshots are supported only for scheduled full backups of databases. NMDA
does not support snapshot backup and restore of selected DB2 tablespaces, logs,
and files.

Restoring a DB2 PowerSnap backup

To restore a PowerSnap backup of a DB2 database, use the following procedure and
referenced documentation:
1. Configure the DB2 PowerSnap restore according to “Configuring a PowerSnap
restore and recovery” on page 245.
The DB2 Data Recovery and High Availability Guide provides more details.
2. To restore a database, run the db2 restore command. For example, on Linux:
db2 restore db SAMPLE use snapshot library /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.so
options @pathname/nmda_db2.cfg logtarget include force

where pathname/nmda_db2.cfg is the full pathname of the NMDA configuration

file.
DB2 documentation on the db2 restore command syntax provides more details.

Managing and deleting DB2 PowerSnap backups

DB2 includes a binary named db2acsutil that is used to:
◆ List the valid DB2 snapshot backups on the primary storage
◆ Delete DB2 snapshot backups and release the associated resources
The IBM DB2 documentation provides details on the db2acsutil utility.
NMDA also supports the synchronous removal (“pruning”) of snapshot entries from
the DB2 history file through the nsrdb2cat binary.

DB2 considerations for PowerSnap operations 247

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Query of DB2 snapshots

Query of DB2 snapshots with the db2acsutil command produces a list of valid
snapshots retained in the repository.

Note: Monitoring of the status of snapshots made with NMDA is not supported.

The following are example snapshot queries on AIX:

db2acsutil load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.o options @pathname/nmda_db2.cfg
query older than 10 days snapshot db SAMPLE

db2acsutil load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.o options @pathname/nmda_db2.cfg

query snapshot instance db2inst1

db2acsutil load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.o options @pathname/nmda_db2.cfg

query snapshot taken at 20100612121212

db2acsutil load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.o options @pathname/nmda_db2.cfg

query snapshot dbpartitionnum 0

db2acsutil load /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.o options @pathname/nmda_db2.cfg

query older than 5 days ago instance db2inst1

where pathname/nmda_db2.cfg is the full pathname of the NMDA configuration file.

Deletion of DB2 snapshots

Deletion of DB2 snapshots created with NMDA supports only the taken at
yyyymmddhhmmss option of the db2ascutil command. Snapshot entries are deleted
from both the DB2 backup history and the NetWorker server indexes.

Note: If the nsrsnapck binary, required for deletion operations, is not in the default installation
location, set the NSR_NWPATH parameter in the NMDA configuration file. On Linux, the
default installation location is /usr/sbin. Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration
File,” provides details on the NMDA configuration file.

The following is an example snapshot deletion on AIX:

db2acsutil LOAD /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.o options @pathname/nmda_db2.cfg
delete snapshot older than 10 days db SAMPLE taken at 20100612121212

where pathname/nmda_db2.cfg is the full pathname of the NMDA configuration file.

The DB2 documentation provides more details.

Pruning of DB2 snapshots

Through the nsrdb2cat binary, NMDA supports the synchronous removal
(“pruning”) of snapshot entries from the DB2 history file when the entries expire and
are removed from the NetWorker indexes.
To enable the synchronous pruning, ensure that the following parameters are
properly set in the NMDA DB2 resource file (/nsr/apps/res/nmdb2.res):
◆ DB2PATH
◆ NSR_DB2CAT_MODE
The NMDA DB2 resource file is used only to enable the pruning function of DB2
snapshot backups. A template file, /nsr/apps/res/nmdb2.res, is installed during the
NMDA installation. You must modify the file to enable the pruning.

248 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Table 29 on page 249 provides details on parameters that can be set in the DB2
resource file.
The DB2 resource file uses the same syntax rules as the NMDA configuration file.
“Syntax rules for the NMDA configuration file” on page 295 provides details.

Table 29 DB2 resource file parameters

DB2 resource file parameter Definition Default and valid values

DB2PATH Mandatory only if • Undefined (default)

NSR_DB2CAT_MODE is enabled. • Set to the location of the DB2
Specifies the location of the DB2 binary directory.
binary directory.
Use for DB2 history pruning with
snapshot backups only.

NSR_DB2CAT_MODE Optional. Specifies whether to • Disabled (default) = Snapshot

synchronously remove entries in the without catalog synchronization.
DB2 history catalog file when • Enabled = Snapshot with catalog
corresponding entries are removed synchronization (DB2 history
from the NetWorker indexes. pruning).
Use for snapshot backups created
with DB2 Advanced Copy Service.

NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL Optional. Appendix A, “NMDA • 0 (default) = Debug messages are

Parameters and Configuration File,” not generated.
provides details. • 1 to 9 = Debug messages are
written to the debug log file (name
has .log extension). The level of
detail in the debug messages
increases with the debug level.

NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE Optional. Specifies whether expired • FALSE (default) = Remove expired

NetWorker index entries should be NetWorker index entries only if
removed if corresponding backup they are successfully removed
entries are not successfully removed from the DB2 history.
from the DB2 history. • TRUE = Remove all expired
NetWorker index entries, even if
they are not successfully removed
from the DB2 history.

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations

The following sections provide details on how to configure and perform Oracle
PowerSnap operations.

Note: Certain Oracle RMAN features, such as checking for corrupt blocks, are not applicable to
PowerSnap snapshot operations.

NMDA supports proxy backups and restores of archived redo logs.

Oracle does not support proxy backups of datafiles or archived redo logs that reside
on Oracle Automated Storage. Oracle Automated Storage is also known by the term
Oracle Automated Storage Management (ASM). “Replication Manager snapshot
operations with Oracle ASM” on page 279 provides details on how to use EMC
Replication Manager with NMDA to perform snapshot backups and restores of
Oracle ASM data.

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 249

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Perform the Oracle-specific configuration procedures according to the following

sections:
◆ “Configuring the required Oracle settings” on page 250
◆ “Configuring the NWORA resource file” on page 251
◆ “Creating RMAN scripts for Oracle PowerSnap backups” on page 251
Review the following information on performing Oracle PowerSnap backups and
restores:
◆ “Checking configuration consistency” on page 255
◆ “Performing Oracle PowerSnap backups” on page 256
◆ “Oracle PowerSnap backup information in NetWorker indexes” on page 258
◆ “Restoring an Oracle PowerSnap backup” on page 260
“PowerSnap backups and restores on cluster systems” on page 276 provides
information on Oracle PowerSnap operations in a cluster environment.

Configuring the required Oracle settings

For Oracle PowerSnap backups, do not locate the database control files and online
redo log files on the same volume (snapshot unit) as the datafiles that will be backed
up through PowerSnap backups.
If the Oracle database is expected to have a lot of read or write activity, or an error,
such as “skgfdisp: async read/write failed” appears, specify the following values in
the Registry and Initialization Parameter file:
◆ In the Registry, specify the following parameters under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\ORACLE:
• ORA_oracle_sid_WORKINGSETMAX
• ORA_oracle_sid_WORKINGSETMIN
Possible values to set for these parameters are as follows:
• ORA_oracle_sid_WORKINGSETMAX = 1600
• ORA_oracle_sid_WORKINGSETMIN = 1200
More information on these parameters and Oracle memory management on
Windows is available in the Oracle document number 46001.1, “Oracle Database
and the Windows NT Memory Architecture, Technical Bulletin.”
◆ In the Initialization Parameter file (such as initoracle_sid.ora), increase the value of
LARGE_POOL_SIZE to a large value that is appropriate for the particular
system.

File types not supported for PowerSnap backup

Specific types of Oracle files, such as control files, cannot be backed up through a
PowerSnap backup. This is an Oracle constraint.
The Oracle documentation for the particular Oracle Server release provides more
information on the Oracle file types that are not supported for PowerSnap backups.

250 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Control file versus recovery catalog

Note: For PowerSnap instant backups, use an RMAN recovery catalog instead of a control file.

The control file of an Oracle database can store only a limited number of backup
entries. When the maximum number of entries is exceeded, old entries in the control
file are overwritten by new ones. You can determine the number of entries in a
control file from the appropriate Oracle dynamic view. The Oracle documentation
provides more information.
Instant backups use control file entries of type PROXY COPY. For instant backups, an
RMAN recovery catalog (instead of a control file) can be used, since there is no limit
on the number of entries a recovery catalog can contain.

IMPORTANT
If you use a control file as the RMAN catalog during an instant backup, ensure that
the control file contains enough free entries for the backup. RMAN creates a new
entry in the control file for each file backed up in an instant backup. The backup of
a large database with many files can quickly use all the free entries in the control
file and start overwriting old entries. When entries are overwritten, the
corresponding backups cannot be restored.

Configuring the NWORA resource file

To enable PowerSnap backups, the NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE parameter resource
must be set to either enabled or disabled in the NWORA resource file, as described in
“NWORA resource file” on page 265. If the resource value is not set, PowerSnap
backups fail.
To enable catalog synchronization, perform the configuration procedures in “Catalog
synchronization for Oracle PowerSnap backups” on page 263. Catalog
synchronization must be configured before any PowerSnap backups of a database are
performed.
If catalog synchronization is enabled, the NWORA resource file must contain a SID
resource for each Oracle database to be backed up. Use the NSR_ORACLE_SID
parameter in NWORA resource file to specify the Oracle SID value. Set the
NSR_ORACLE_SID parameter to the same value as the ORACLE_SID parameter in
the NMDA configuration file.

Creating RMAN scripts for Oracle PowerSnap backups

The information on RMAN backup scripts in “RMAN scripts for manual backups” on
page 101 also applies to RMAN scripts for Oracle PowerSnap backups.
These added requirements apply to RMAN scripts for Oracle PowerSnap backups:
◆ The appropriate parameters must be set, as described in “Set the parameters for
Oracle PowerSnap operations” on page 253.
◆ The proxy or proxy only option must be specified with each RMAN backup
command.

Note: Certain options of the RMAN backup command, such as maxsetsize, filesperset,
and diskratio, are not supported with the proxy option. Contact Oracle Corporation for
more information on the RMAN options that are not supported.

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 251

Snapshot Backups and Restores

◆ As required by Oracle for PowerSnap backups, the %p variable must be included

in the format string, either explicitly or implicitly within %U. The appropriate
Oracle backup and recovery documentation provides more information.
◆ Allocate only one channel in the RMAN script. Do not allocate more than one
channel in the RMAN script in an attempt to distribute the PowerSnap backup
over more than one channel.

Note: PowerSnap backup parallelism is defined by the PowerSnap parameter

NSR_PS_SAVE_PARALLELISM. Table 28 on page 246 provides more information.

The following sample RMAN script performs a PowerSnap backup of an entire

Oracle database that resides on one or more primary storage devices:
run {
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
send ’NSR_ENV=(
NSR_PROXY_PFILE=/oracle/rman/proxy.cfg)’;
backup full proxy only
format ’FULL_%d_%U’
(database);
release channel t1;
}

NSR_PROXY_PFILE is an optional NMDA parameter used for PowerSnap backups.

“Set the parameters for Oracle PowerSnap operations” on page 253 provides details.

Multiple channels in RMAN scripts

The allocation of multiple channels in an RMAN script does not control the degree of
backup or restore parallelism. Oracle uses only one of the allocated channels for the
PowerSnap backup or restore, unless specific backup options are used.

Example 31 RMAN scripts with multiple channels

The proxy backup performed with the following RMAN script is written to either the
OracleVolume1 or OracleVolume2 volume pool (not to both volume pools) because
Oracle uses only one of the allocated channels for the proxy backup:
run {
allocate channel c1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
allocate channel c2 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
send channel c1 ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=OracleVolume1)’;
send channel c2 ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=OracleVolume2)’;
backup proxy only tablespace tbs1, tbs2, tbs3, tbs4;
release channel c1;
release channel c2;
}

The following RMAN script shows a configuration that NMDA does not support. The
script is intended to distribute proxy backups over two channels, but NMDA does not
support this configuration as Oracle uses only one of the channels for the proxy
backup:
run {
allocate channel c1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
allocate channel c2 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
send channel c1 ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=OracleVolume1)’;
send channel c2 ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=OracleVolume2)’;
backup proxy
(tablespace tbs1, tbs2 channel c1)
(tablespace tbs3, tbs4 channel c2);

252 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

release channel c1;

release channel c2;
}

To ensure that the proxy backup succeeds, use the following RMAN script to replace
both of the preceding two backup scripts:
run {
allocate channel c1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
send channel c1 ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=OracleVolume1)’;
backup proxy tablespace tbs1, tbs2, tbs3, tbs4;
release channel c1;
}

You might want to allocate more than one channel if you know that some of the data
does not reside on supported primary storage devices. In this case, one channel is
used for PowerSnap backups and all the others are used for regular backups.

Set the parameters for Oracle PowerSnap operations

Two types of parameters can be set for the Oracle PowerSnap backups and restores:
◆ The NMDA parameters described in Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and
Configuration File.”
The parameters must be set by using one of the methods in “About NMDA
parameters” on page 294.
◆ The PowerSnap Module parameters described in “PowerSnap parameter
settings” on page 253.

PowerSnap parameter settings

The PowerSnap parameters must be set by using one of the following methods:
◆ By setting the parameters in the send command in one of these ways:
• With the rman command on the operating system command line.
• In the RMAN backup or restore script.
“The send command” on page 324 provides more information on how to use the
send command.
◆ By setting the parameters in a user-defined configuration file. The complete
pathname of the file must be specified in the parameter NSR_PROXY_PFILE, as
described in “NSR_PROXY_PFILE” on page 317.
The configuration file consists of a separate line such as the following for each
parameter setting:
parameter_name=parameter_value

where:
• parameter_name is the parameter name, such as RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER.
• parameter_value is the parameter value, such as pit.

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 253

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Use the following guidelines to set PowerSnap parameters:

◆ A parameter setting in the configuration file takes precedence over a parameter
setting in the send command.
If the same PowerSnap parameter is set to different values in the configuration
file and send command, the value in the configuration file is the one used for the
PowerSnap operation.
◆ In the configuration file, the first valid occurrence of a PowerSnap parameter
takes precedence over any other occurrences of the same parameter in the same
file.
◆ The following are not supported:
• The use of the parms option in the configure channel command to set
PowerSnap parameters.
• The use of the setenv command on the operating system command line to set
PowerSnap parameters.
The following provide examples of PowerSnap parameter settings: Example 30 on
page 246, Example 32 on page 254, Example 33 on page 254.
Table 28 on page 246 provides a basic list of supported PowerSnap parameters.

Example 32 Setting the PowerSnap parameter NSR_SNAPSHOT_POSTCMD

The Oracle-specific parameter NSR_SNAPSHOT_POSTCMD can optionally specify a

user-provided script that the software runs immediately after the snapshot is
completed but before the Oracle PowerSnap backup is sent to NetWorker devices, if
applicable.
“NSR_SNAPSHOT_POSTCMD” on page 246 provides details on the parameter,
which can be set through the send command, parms options, or in a user-defined
configuration file specified through the NSR_PROXY_PFILE parameter.
For example, if the Oracle PowerSnap backup is performed in mount mode, the
NSR_SNAPSHOT_POSTCMD script can be used to open the database, which results
in the database being offline for a shorter time period during the backup. In this
RMAN backup script, the parameter is set with the send command:
run {
allocate channel t1 device type sbt;

send channel t1
'NSR_ENV=(NSR_PROXY_PFILE=/space/myorcl/rman/pfileclar.txt,
NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=Oracle,
NSR_SNAPSHOT_POSTCMD=/space/myorcl/rman/snap.ksh)';

backup proxy database;

release channel t1;
}

Example 33 Setting the PowerSnap parameter RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER

To set the PowerSnap parameter RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER for a PowerSnap restore,

a configuration file named /oracle/rman/proxy.cfg can be created, which consists of
the following line:
RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER=rollback:pit:conventional

254 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

In this case, the NMDA parameter NSR_PROXY_PFILE must be set to

/oracle/rman/proxy.cfg by using the send command. For example, the following
command sets the parameter correctly:
allocate channel t1 device type ’SBT_TAPE’;
send ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_PROXY_PFILE=/oracle/rman/proxy.cfg)’;

“Configuring a PowerSnap restore and recovery” on page 245 provides more

information.

Checking configuration consistency

During a scheduled backup, NMDA checks for consistency between the NetWorker
Group resource configuration and the RMAN backup session.
If NMDA finds a discrepancy between the Group resource configuration and the
RMAN session, warning messages are generated or the backup fails, as described in
the following sections:
◆ “With a group configured for PowerSnap backups” on page 255
◆ “With a group configured for regular backups” on page 256

With a group configured for PowerSnap backups

If the Snapshot attribute in the NetWorker Group resource is set to True, the resource
is configured for PowerSnap backups. However, this configuration does not
guarantee that a PowerSnap backup is executed. RMAN might still perform only
regular Oracle backups if either of the following exists:
◆ None of the backup commands in the RMAN script include the proxy or proxy
only option.
◆ The backup commands in the RMAN script include the proxy or proxy only
option, but none of the Oracle database objects (tablespaces or datafiles) specified
in the backup commands reside on a primary storage device that the PowerSnap
Module supports.
If RMAN performs only regular Oracle backups due to one of these conditions,
NMDA generates the following warnings in the savegroup completion report:
WARNING: Snapshot savegrp is completed but no Oracle proxy backup is
detected.
WARNING: Either fix your RMAN script or reconfigure the group resource
without snapshot flag.

While the resulting backups are valid regular (not PowerSnap) backups, correct the
RMAN script or relocate the Oracle datafiles to a supported primary storage device,
as required to enable PowerSnap backups.
The current EMC compatibility guides provide details on the primary storage devices
supported for PowerSnap backups.
If a backup command in the RMAN script includes the proxy only option and the
Oracle data objects reside on volumes that do not support snapshots, the scheduled
backup fails since RMAN cannot perform a regular backup of the objects. The Oracle
documentation provides a detailed description of the difference between the proxy
and proxy only options.

Note: If the PowerSnap Module software involved in a snapshot backup cannot determine if a
file is snapshotable, the PowerSnap backup fails.

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 255

Snapshot Backups and Restores

With a group configured for regular backups

If the Snapshot attribute in the NetWorker Group resource is set to False, the resource
is configured for regular backups. In this case, the use of the proxy or proxy only
option with a backup command in the RMAN script is not supported. Any
PowerSnap backup specified in the RMAN script will fail. If there are regular and
PowerSnap backups in the same RMAN script, RMAN might complete one or more
regular backups before a PowerSnap backup fails.
Notes:
◆ If RMAN terminates any of the PowerSnap backups in an RMAN script, the
savegroup completion report lists failure of the scheduled backup.
◆ If any PowerSnap backups in an RMAN script fail, RMAN still performs a regular
backup of the corresponding archived redo logs.

Example 34 Oracle PowerSnap backup failure

A scheduled backup includes the following RMAN script, with the database files
residing on volumes that support snapshots while archived logs reside on volumes
that do not support snapshots. However, the Snapshot attribute in the Group
resource is set to False. As a result, the PowerSnap database backup fails:
run {
allocate channel ch1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
backup proxy database plus archivelog;
}

Despite the PowerSnap backup failure, RMAN performs a regular backup of the
archived redo logs. The savegroup completion report lists failure of the scheduled
backup.

Performing Oracle PowerSnap backups

An Oracle PowerSnap backup can be started only by automatic or manual invocation
of the scheduled NetWorker backup group.
NMDA creates temporary files for processing purposes in the following directory:
◆ On UNIX systems, the directory is /nsr/apps/tmp.
◆ On Windows systems, the directory is NetWorker_install_path\apps\tmp, where
NetWorker_install_path is the root directory of the NetWorker installation path.

Note: During RMAN operations, do not modify any files in this directory.

PowerSnap backup summary line in savegroup report

The savegroup completion report for a PowerSnap backup contains a summary line
that includes the backup size and number of files. The summary line refers to backup
data written to secondary storage only.
The summary line for an instant backup includes the size of only the metadata stored
for the backup, not the size of the files stored on the primary storage as a
point-in-time copy. The number of files includes the number of entries generated for
the metadata plus the number of entries generated for the backup pieces.

256 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Savegroup completion status

When a deferred live backup is run as part of a scheduled group, the backup process
involves two steps:
1. An instant backup is performed. At the end of the instant backup, the backup
entries for the point-in-time copy are recorded in the NetWorker indexes and
RMAN catalog.
2. The deferred live backup is performed. At the end of the deferred live backup, the
backup entries for data stored on the secondary storage are recorded in the
NetWorker indexes.
“PowerSnap backup processes” on page 239 provides more details.
If the instant backup succeeds but the deferred live backup fails, the entire scheduled
backup is reported as failed. However, the point-in-time copy created during the
instant backup is a valid backup and can be used for instant or rollback restore.

Note: If RMAN performs only a regular Oracle backup during the instant backup step
(“Checking configuration consistency” on page 255 provides details on when this can happen),
the deferred live backup fails because there is no point-in-time copy to be moved to secondary
storage. The entire backup is reported as failed, but the data is stored on tape and can be used
for restore.

NWORA resource file backup

If a PowerSnap backup completes successfully, NMDA automatically backs up the
NWORA resource file, described in “NWORA resource file” on page 265.
The NWORA resource file backup is performed at the backup level specified in the
Schedule resource (for example, incremental). Oracle backups are always performed
at the full level. The NetWorker server selects the pool for the NWORA resource file
backup based on existing resource configurations. The setting of the parameter
NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL does not affect the pool selection.
The savegroup completion report contains a summary line for the backup that
includes the phrase "NWORA Resource Backup." The information is also written to
the backup debug log file, located in either of the following:
◆ Directory specified by NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST
◆ Default directory, /nsr/apps/logs (UNIX) or NetWorker_install_path\apps\logs
(Windows)
In the NetWorker indexes, the save set name for the NWORA resource file backup is
the same as the file pathname. You can use the NetWorker mminfo command to
display the save set name. “NWORA resource file backup in the NetWorker indexes”
on page 259 provides information on how the backup is represented in the
NetWorker indexes.
The NWORA resource file backup can be restored by using the NetWorker recover
command or nwrecover GUI program. The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide
provides more information.

Note: The file is stored under the "backup" namespace, not the "oracle" namespace.

The browse and retention policies applied to the NWORA resource file backup are
the most conservative policies associated with the given NetWorker client, not the
policies that are applied to the Oracle backups. As a result, you may see a difference
between the policies assigned to the NWORA resource file backup and the Oracle
backups.

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 257

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Enabling point-in-time recovery without a Recovery Catalog

Note: If a point-in-time recovery will be performed with an RMAN Recovery Catalog, the
information in this section does not apply.

During an Oracle PowerSnap backup, Oracle backs up the control file after the
PowerSnap backup of the datafiles is complete. In a large database production
environment, there might be a delay between the end time of the datafile backup and
the start time of the control file backup.
During this time delay, if the physical structure of the database is changed (for
example, a new datafile is added), the control file must be backed up in a separate
RMAN session before the changes occur. This is due to the fact that the control file
backup from the PowerSnap database backup session will include information on the
new database structure.

Oracle PowerSnap backup information in NetWorker indexes

The NetWorker server maintains information about each backup in its online
indexes. “Importance of backups” on page 25 provides more information.
The index entry for a PowerSnap backup is stored in the NetWorker client file index
of the database server host, for example, under the "db2" or "oracle" namespace (as is
the case for a regular backup).
The NetWorker client file index and media database each contain a different value for
the name of the save set for an Oracle PowerSnap backup (as is the case for a regular
scheduled backup).
Query the online NetWorker indexes by using the NetWorker commands, nsrinfo
and mminfo:
◆ Type the nsrinfo command to query the NetWorker client file index. For
example:
nsrinfo -n oracle -s NetWorker_server Oracle_Server_hostname

◆ Type the mminfo command to query the NetWorker media database. For
example:
mminfo -v -s NetWorker_server -c Oracle_Server_hostname

The EMC NetWorker Command Reference Guide and the UNIX man pages provide more
information on these NetWorker commands.

Entries in the client file index

For a backup piece created through an Oracle PowerSnap backup, the client file index
contains three types of backup entries under the "oracle" namespace:
◆ One entry is generated for the backup piece name assigned by RMAN, such as
/PROXY_O901JB_811_1/ in Example 35 on page 259.
◆ The second entry is generated for the point-in-time metadata, such as
/brcmeta.1/ in Example 35 on page 259. This entry is created for an instant
backup only.
◆ The third entry is generated for the Oracle datafile that is backed up to secondary
storage, for example, /JBOD13_NMDA11_MVOL3/tbspc4_data1.dbf in
Example 35 on page 259. This entry is created for a live backup only.

258 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Example 35 Oracle PowerSnap backup entries in the client file index

The nsrinfo command provides information on the PowerSnap backup entries in the
NetWorker client file index:
nsrinfo -n oracle marmaris

scanning client ’marmaris’ for all savetimes from the oracle namespace
/PROXY_O901JB_811_1/, date=1279735274 Wed Jul 21 14:01:14 EDT 2010
/brcmeta.1/, date=1279735271 Wed Jul 21 14:01:11 EDT 2010
Physical files to rollover:
/JBOD13_NMDA11_MVOL3/tbspc4_data1.dbf
/JBOD13_NMDA11_MVOL3/tbspc4_data1.dbf, date=1279735277 Wed Jul 21
14:01:17 EDT 2010

Entries in the media database

For a backup piece created through a PowerSnap backup, the media database
contains two types of entries:
◆ One entry is generated for the point-in-time metadata. This entry is created for an
instant backup only.
In the mminfo command output for this entry:
• The Size field contains the size of the metadata stored on the NetWorker
device.
• The Flag field (fl) includes the letter P, representing the point-in-time copy.
To list the entries for an instant backup only, type the following mminfo
command:
mminfo -v -c Oracle_Server_hostname -q ’snap’

The NetWorker PowerSnap Module documentation provides more information.

◆ The other entry is generated for the Oracle datafile that is backed up to secondary
storage. This entry is created for a live backup only.
Both entries in the media database include the name of the RMAN backup script used
for the PowerSnap backup, such as /space1/home/oracle/bp1 in Example 36 on
page 259.

Example 36 Oracle PowerSnap backup entries in the media database

The mminfo command provides information on the PowerSnap backup entries in the
NetWorker media database:
mminfo -v -c marmaris

volume client date time size

nmda.002 marmaris 07/21/10 14:01:11 102 MB
snap.001 marmaris 07/21/10 14:01:13 2 KB

ssid fl lvl name

4064690015 cb full /space1/home/oracle/bp1
4098244417 cbP full /space1/home/oracle/bp1

NWORA resource file backup in the NetWorker indexes

In the NetWorker indexes, the NWORA resource file backup is stored under the
"backup" namespace. As a result, the NetWorker recover or nwrecover program can
be used to restore the backup. The save set name for the backup is the same as the file
pathname.

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 259

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Query the NetWorker indexes for information about the NWORA resource file
backup by using the NetWorker commands nsrinfo and mminfo.

Example 37 Resource file backup entry in the client file index

The nsrinfo Oracle_Server_hostname command provides information on the NWORA

resource file backup entry in the NetWorker client file index:
nsrinfo marmaris

scanning client ’marmaris’ for all savetimes from the backup namespace

/nsr/res/nwora.res, date=1279735271 Wed Jul 21 14:01:11 EDT 2010

/nsr/res/, date=1279735271 Wed Jul 21 14:01:11 EDT 2010
/nsr/, date=1279735271 Wed Jul 21 14:01:11 EDT 2010
/, date=1279735271 Wed Jul 21 14:01:11 EDT 2010

Note: This entry is not displayed with the nsrinfo -n oracle command because it is stored
under the "backup" namespace, not the "oracle" namespace. The "backup" namespace is the
default namespace for the nsrinfo command.

Example 38 Resource file backup entry in the media database

The mminfo -v -c Oracle_Server_hostname command provides information on the

NWORA resource file backup entry in the NetWorker media database:
mminfo -v -c marmaris

volume client date time size

nmda.002 marmaris 07/21/10 14:01:11 4 KB

ssid fl lvl name

3863367791 cb full /nsr/res/nwora.res

The EMC NetWorker Command Reference Guide and the UNIX man pages provide more
information on these NetWorker commands.

Restoring an Oracle PowerSnap backup

Review the following information specific to Oracle PowerSnap restores:
◆ “Create RMAN scripts for Oracle PowerSnap restores” on page 260
◆ “Performing Oracle PowerSnap restores” on page 261
◆ “Relocating files during an Oracle PowerSnap restore” on page 262
◆ “Catalog synchronization for Oracle PowerSnap backups” on page 263
“PowerSnap backups and restores on cluster systems” on page 276 provides
information on PowerSnap restores in a cluster environment.

Create RMAN scripts for Oracle PowerSnap restores

The same RMAN script used for a regular Oracle restore can also be used for an
Oracle PowerSnap restore.

Note: The RMAN restore command does not include a proxy option.

260 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

To create an RMAN script for a PowerSnap restore, follow the instructions in

Chapter 4, “Data Restore and Recovery.”
To perform a PowerSnap restore, the appropriate parameters must be set, as
described in “Set the parameters for Oracle PowerSnap operations” on page 253.

Performing Oracle PowerSnap restores

The following requirements apply to Oracle PowerSnap restores:
◆ The PowerSnap Module software must be installed, according to the instructions
in the NetWorker PowerSnap Module documentation (refer to the PowerSnap
Module version for the primary storage system).
◆ Each element of the restore path must exist. Otherwise, the restore fails. For
example, to restore a file backup to /space1/oradata/file.dbf, the path
/space1/oradata must exist.
◆ An Oracle PowerSnap restore of a symbolic link restores the Oracle file to the
location pointed to by the symbolic link. Both the symbolic link and the restore
path must exist. Otherwise, the restore fails.
◆ For a rollback restore, the psrollback.res file must be set up properly, as described
in “Rollback restore” on page 261.
◆ For user-specified relocation of files during a PowerSnap restore, the relocation
path must be specified as described in “Relocating files during an Oracle
PowerSnap restore” on page 262.
◆ After an Oracle restore is complete, a database administrator must recover the
database by using the standard Oracle recover command.

Concurrent restore streams

During a PowerSnap restore, the PowerSnap Module creates concurrent restore

streams to optimize the restore.
The maximum number of concurrent restore streams is defined by the PowerSnap
parameter NSR_MAX_STREAMS. Table 28 on page 246 provides more information.

Directory created for Oracle data restore

During a PowerSnap restore of Oracle data, a .nworapc subdirectory (with 0700

permissions) is created under the restore directory for the temporary relocation of the
files being restored. (This relocation is independent of user-specified relocation.) The
empty .nworapc subdirectory persists after the restore and can be deleted manually,
if required.
If a PowerSnap restore of Oracle data fails, the non-empty .nworapc subdirectory
persists after the restore, and can be deleted manually, if required. Do not use any
datafiles from this subdirectory for Oracle recovery, or database corruption might
occur. If you restart the failed restore, NMDA automatically cleans this subdirectory.
Rollback restore

The psrollback.res file lists all the files, directories, partitions, and volumes that are to
be excluded from the rollback safety check. The items excluded from the safety check
will be overwritten during a rollback operation.

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 261

Snapshot Backups and Restores

For a rollback restore, the psrollback.res file must contain the directory name
.nworapc. The file is located as follows:
◆ On UNIX systems: /nsr/res/psrollback.res
◆ On Windows systems: NetWorker_install_path\res\psrollback.res, where
NetWorker_install_path is the root directory of the NetWorker installation path
Add the directory name to the file by using a text editor as either the root user on
UNIX or a member of the Microsoft Windows Administrators group.
The following sources provide more information on the psrollback.res file:
◆ NetWorker PowerSnap Module documentation for the primary storage system.
◆ Comments within the psrollback.res file itself.

Note: The NetWorker PowerSnap Module documentation provides information on whether

rollback is supported on a particular storage platform.

Rollback restore on Celerra NAS devices

The NMDA software supports the rollback safety check feature for rollback restores
on Celerra NAS devices.

Note: For NMDA systems, “.etc” must be added to the psrollback.res file.

To enable remount of the NAS file system at the end of a rollback operation, place an
entry for the target file system in the appropriate file:
◆ /etc/vfstab on Solaris
◆ /etc/fstab on HP-UX
◆ /etc/file systems on IBM AIX
If this is not done, the remount at the end of the rollback fails. The data is recovered,
but the file system must be remounted manually and the tablespace brought back
online.

Relocating files during an Oracle PowerSnap restore

This section describes the user-specified relocation of a Oracle PowerSnap restore
with NMDA.

IMPORTANT
Relocation is not supported during a rollback restore. If the
RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER parameter includes the rollback value and the RMAN
restore script specifies relocation, the restore fails, even if the parameter includes
other values.

During an Oracle PowerSnap restore, NMDA supports and controls relocation,

which is the restore of datafiles (regular files or raw volumes) to a new location. The
new location can be specified by using the RMAN set newname command.

Note: During a regular Oracle restore, relocation is also supported, but it is controlled by the
Oracle Server.

262 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

To relocate a regular file or raw volume during an Oracle PowerSnap restore, the set
newname command must specify the name of the relocated file as one of the
following:
◆ The complete pathname of the relocated file.
◆ The complete pathname of a symbolic link that points to the location where the
file will be restored.

Example 39 Symbolic link specified in the set newname command

If the symbolic link /tmp/file1 points to /dbapps/proddb/file2 and the symbolic

link /tmp/file1 is specified in the set newname command, the backed-up file will be
restored to /dbapps/proddb/file2.

IMPORTANT
The procedure to relocate a raw volume includes a restriction that does not apply
when relocating a regular file.

To relocate a raw volume, the base filename (the filename without the directory path)
of the original backed-up raw volume must be identical to one of the following:
◆ The base filename of the relocation path specified in the set newname command.
◆ If the set newname command specifies a symbolic link, the base filename in the
symbolic link.

Example 40 Relocation of a raw volume

If a backed-up raw volume is named /dev/volume_one/rvol1, the

/dev/volume_two/rvol1 relocation path can be specified in the set newname
command. This can occur because the original and relocation paths have the same
base filename, rvol1. However, specifying the /dev/volume_one/rvol2 path in the
set newname command would cause the PowerSnap restore to fail, since the original
and relocation paths have different base filenames.
The following procedure is one way to relocate /dev/volume_one/rvol1 to
/dev/volume_one/rvol2:
1. Create a symbolic link named /tmp/rvol1 that points to
/dev/volume_one/rvol2.
2. Specify /tmp/rvol1 in the set newname command in the RMAN restore script.
In this case, the relocation succeeds because both the original path and symbolic link
name have the same base filename, rvol1.

Catalog synchronization for Oracle PowerSnap backups

During Oracle backups, RMAN stores information about each backup piece in the
RMAN repository, also known as the "RMAN catalog". Similarly, NMDA stores
information about each backup piece in the NetWorker indexes, or what Oracle
documentation refers to as the "MML catalog."
During Oracle restores, the following occurs:
◆ The RMAN catalog determines the data to be restored.
◆ The NetWorker indexes provide information that NMDA requires to perform the
restore.

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 263

Snapshot Backups and Restores

It is important to keep the RMAN catalog and NetWorker indexes synchronized,

especially when performing instant backups.
The catalogs are unsynchronized when one of the following exists:
◆ The RMAN catalog contains backup piece entries that do not have corresponding
NetWorker index entries.
◆ The NetWorker indexes contain backup piece entries that do not have
corresponding RMAN catalog entries.

Extra entries in the catalogs

Extra entries in the NetWorker indexes do not cause problems as long as the extra
entries contain unique backup piece names that RMAN does not attempt to reuse for
backups.
However, extra entries in the RMAN catalog can cause problems. When the RMAN
catalog contains extra entries (without corresponding entries in the NetWorker
indexes), the following types of problems can occur:
◆ When RMAN backup optimization is enabled, RMAN might skip backing up
certain files.
◆ The RMAN catalog might expire backups that are required for restores.
◆ RMAN restores might fail when RMAN attempts to restore backup pieces that
have no corresponding NetWorker index entries.
Extra entries can occur in the RMAN catalog when corresponding NetWorker index
entries are removed through either expiration or NetWorker commands such as
nsrmm. This does not have much impact on nonproxy backups, but becomes a more
serious problem for proxy backups. The severity of the problem increases with the
frequency of instant backups. PowerSnap instant backups are often configured to
expire quickly (within hours). When an instant backup expires, the NetWorker index
entries are removed. Catalog synchronization is designed to address the problem.

Removing instant backup entries from the NetWorker indexes

Instant backup entries in the NetWorker indexes are removed in one of the following
ways:
◆ At the start of an instant backup, if the number of existing instant backups equals
the value of the Retain Snapshots attribute in the NetWorker Snapshot Policy
resource, the oldest instant backup is automatically expired and its NetWorker
index entries are removed.

Note: This automatic expiration and index entry removal does not apply to instant backups
performed with the nsrdasv -c different_client_name option, where different_client_name is a
different name than the one used in the Client resource for the backup.

◆ When an instant backup expires due to reaching the expiration time defined in
the NetWorker Snapshot Policy resource, the NetWorker process nsrim prunes
the backup entries from the NetWorker indexes.
◆ The DBA uses a NetWorker command, such as nsrmm, to remove a snap set.

Automatic catalog synchronization for PowerSnap backups

The NMDA software provides automatic catalog synchronization that resolves the
issues described in “Extra entries in the catalogs” on page 264. When you enable
catalog synchronization in NMDA, the proxy backup entries in the RMAN catalog
and NetWorker indexes are synchronized automatically.

264 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

IMPORTANT
To enable automatic catalog synchronization for PowerSnap backups:
- The parameter ORACLE_SID must be properly set in the NMDA configuration
file at the time of the PowerSnap backup. “Oracle-specific NMDA parameters” on
page 315 provides details.
- An NWORA resource file must include the required resources, as described in
“NWORA resource file” on page 265.

The NMDA program nsroraclecat uses the NWORA resources in the file to perform
automatic synchronization of the RMAN catalog and NetWorker indexes.

Note: DBAs can also synchronize the catalogs manually by using RMAN commands.

The following sections provide details on how to configure and perform the catalog
synchronization:
◆ “NWORA resource file” on page 265
◆ “Automatic catalog synchronization with the nsroraclecat program” on page 273

NWORA resource file

PowerSnap backups require the NWORA resource file to exist in the following
location:
◆ On UNIX systems: /nsr/apps/res/nwora.res
◆ On Windows systems: NetWorker_install_path\apps\res\nwora.res, where
NetWorker_install_path is the root directory of the NetWorker installation path
The NWORA resource file is created and maintained by the nsroraadmin program.
To enable automatic catalog synchronization for proxy backups with the PowerSnap
Module, specific NWORA resources must be added to the file.

Note: The NWORA resource file must not be edited manually. All resources in the file must be
added, modified, or deleted by using the nsroraadmin program only. The nsroraadmin
program must be run by either the root user on UNIX or a member of the Microsoft Windows
Administrators group.

“Configuring the NWORA resource file with the nsroraadmin program” on page 270
provides details on the nsroraadmin program.
The NWORA resource file must contain two types of resources, NWORA parameter
resources and NWORA SID resources. The following sections provide more
information:
◆ “NWORA parameter resources” on page 265
◆ “NWORA SID resources” on page 268
NWORA parameter resources

To enable NMDA proxy backups with the PowerSnap Module, the NWORA resource
file must exist. The NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE parameter must be set to either
enabled or disabled. The following parameters are required for proxy backups:
◆ “NSR_NWPATH” on page 266
◆ “NSR_ORACLECAT_DEBUG_FILE” on page 266
◆ “NSR_ORACLECAT_LOG_FILE” on page 266

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 265

Snapshot Backups and Restores

◆ “NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE” on page 266

◆ “NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE” on page 266

Note: The parameter resources listed in Table 30 on page 266 are the only ones supported. Do
not attempt to add other parameter resources to the NWORA resource file.

Table 30 NWORA parameter resources

Parameter resource Description Default and valid values

NSR_NWPATH Specifies the directory location of the NetWorker binary • Directory pathname for the location of
nsrsnapck. nsrsnapck (default).
• Valid directory pathname for the location of
Note: If you use NMDA with Sun-branded NetWorker, you the NetWorker binary nsrsnapck.
must set NSR_NWPATH by using the following nsroraadmin
command:
nsroraadmin -r update NSR_NWPATH=/usr/sbin/nsr

NSR_ORACLECAT_DEBUG_FILE Specifies the debug file used by the nsroraclecat program. • Undefined (default).
Set this parameter only for the purpose of debugging the • Valid pathname of the nsroraclecat debug
nsroraclecat program. file.
Note: The nsroraclecat debug file must be created in a Note: If undefined, debug information is not
secure location since it includes a copy of the strings from the generated.
RMAN connection file.

NSR_ORACLECAT_LOG_FILE Specifies the operations log file used by the nsroraclecat • Undefined (default).
program. The logged information includes the backup pieces • Valid pathname of the nsroraclecat log file.
successfully removed from the RMAN catalog, and those that
failed to be removed during automatic catalog Note: If undefined, logging information is written
synchronization. to the /nsr/applogs/nsroraclecat.log file by
default.

NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE Specifies whether automatic catalog synchronization is • Undetermined (default).

enabled or disabled during PowerSnap backups. • Enabled.
• Disabled.

Note: Instant backups require the resource value

to be set to either "enabled" or "disabled". If the
value is not set, instant backups fail.

NSR_ORACLE_NLS_LANG Required to enable catalog synchronization in a non-English • Undetermined (default).

environment only. Specifies the non-English locale value, as • Valid locale value, same as set in the
set in the NLS_LANG environment variable. “Configuring NLS_LANG environment variable.
internationalization (I18N) support” on page 57 provides more
information. Note: If the value is not set to the same value as
the NLS_LANG variable in a non-English
environment, catalog synchronization fails.

NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE Specifies whether the corresponding NetWorker index entries • FALSE (default).
are removed when the nsroraclecat program fails to remove • TRUE.
one or more RMAN catalog entries during automatic catalog
synchronization. “Automatic catalog synchronization with the
nsroraclecat program” on page 273 provides more
information.

266 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Using the nsroraadmin command to set parameter resources

When the nsroraadmin command (with any options) is used for the first time after
the NMDA installation, the NWORA resource file, is automatically created. The
parameter resources from Table 30 on page 266 are included in the new NWORA.res
file.

Note: The NWORA.res file is also used to configure save set bundling and policy uniformity
through the NSR_BUNDLING and NSR_INCR_EXPIRATION parameter settings,
respectively. “Configure save set bundling for scheduled Oracle backups” on page 107 and
“Configure policy uniformity for scheduled Oracle backups” on page 108 provide details.

Depending on the nsroraadmin command options used, the parameter resources are
set to either default or customized values.

Note: The NWORA parameter resources cannot be deleted. However, the parameter values can
be modified with the nsroraadmin command.

To view the NWORA parameter resources in the resource file, use the nsroraadmin -r
list command.
To modify NWORA parameter resource settings, use the nsroraadmin -r update
command.
“Configuring the NWORA resource file with the nsroraadmin program” on page 270
provides details on how to use the nsroraadmin command.

Example 41 Default NWORA parameter resources

After the NMDA installation, if the first nsroraadmin command used is nsroraadmin
-r list (to list the NWORA resource file contents), the command adds the following
NWORA parameter resources to the resource file:
NSR_NWPATH=NetWorker_binary_path
NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE=enabled
NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE=undetermined
NSR_ORACLE_NLS_LANG=
NSR_ORACLECAT_LOG_FILE=
NSR_ORACLECAT_DEBUG_FILE=
NSR_TMPDIR=
NSR_BUNDLING=disabled
NSR_INCR_EXPIRATION=disabled

NetWorker_binary_path is the pathname of the directory that contains the NetWorker

binary nsrsnapck.

Note: The NSR_TMPDIR, NSR_BUNDLING, and NSR_INCR_EXPIRATION parameters are

not used for PowerSnap snapshot backups.

To enable proxy backups with the PowerSnap Module, NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE

must be set to either enabled or disabled by using the nsroraadmin -r update
command.
This default NWORA resource file does not yet contain any NWORA SID resources,
as described in “NWORA SID resources” on page 268.

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 267

Snapshot Backups and Restores

NWORA SID resources

An NWORA SID resource comprises a specific group of parameters for a single

Oracle database. If automatic catalog synchronization is enabled
(NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE is set to enabled), the NWORA resource file must
contain an NWORA SID resource for each Oracle database (ORACLE_SID). The
NWORA SID resource can include only the parameters described in Table 31 on
page 268.
However, an unlimited number of NWORA SID resources can be added to the
resource file.

IMPORTANT
If automatic catalog synchronization is enabled, but you do not create an NWORA
SID resource for an Oracle database, catalog synchronization of that database
might fail. As a result, the catalogs can become unsynchronized unless you
synchronize them manually by using RMAN commands. “Automatic catalog
synchronization with the nsroraclecat program” on page 273 provides more
information.

Note: Each NWORA SID resource must have a unique NSR_ORACLE_SID value.

Table 31 NWORA SID resource components (page 1 of 2)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_ORACLE_CONNECT_FILE Mandatory. Specifies the location of the file containing the • Undefined (default).
connection strings required to create an RMAN session. “The • Valid pathname of the RMAN connection file.
connection file” on page 269 provides more information.

NSR_ORACLE_HOME Mandatory. Specifies the home directory of the Oracle • Undefined (default).
installation. The RMAN executable must be located in • Valid pathname of the Oracle home directory.
subdirectory bin of this directory.
Note: The value must be equal to the Oracle
parameter $ORACLE_HOME value.

NSR_ORACLE_LIB_PATH Optional. Specifies the pathname of the directory containing • Undefined (default).
the Oracle shared libraries on UNIX, typically • Valid pathname of the Oracle shared library
$ORACLE_HOME/lib. directory on UNIX.

Note: This parameter is not required on

Windows systems.

268 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Table 31 NWORA SID resource components (page 2 of 2)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_ORACLE_SID Mandatory. Specifies the SID value of the Oracle database • Undefined (default).
whose RMAN catalog is to be synchronized. • Valid SID value of the Oracle database.

Note: The value must be equal to the

ORACLE_SID value in the NMDA configuration
file used for the database backup.
“Oracle-specific NMDA parameters” on page 315
provides more information.

NSR_ORACLE_TNS_ADMIN Optional. Specifies the pathname of the directory containing • Undefined (default).
the Oracle Net configuration files. • Valid pathname of Oracle network
configuration directory.

Note: The value must be equal to the Oracle

parameter $TNS_ADMIN value.

Using the nsroraadmin command to set SID resources

To add an NWORA SID resource to the resource file, use the nsroraadmin -r add
command. Example 43 on page 272 shows an example of how to use this command.
To modify NWORA SID resource settings, use the nsroraadmin -r update command.
“Configuring the NWORA resource file with the nsroraadmin program” on page 270
provides details on how to use the nsroraadmin command.

The connection file

Catalog synchronization requires the connection file for an Oracle database. The
nsroraclecat program uses the information in the connection file to delete RMAN
catalog entries.
In the NWORA SID resource for the target database, the parameter
NSR_ORACLE_CONNECT_FILE must be set to the pathname of the connection file.
“NWORA SID resources” on page 268 provides more information.

IMPORTANT
A DBA must create the connection file in a secure location.

The connection file must include the following:

◆ The connection string that is required to connect to the target database.
◆ If an RMAN recovery catalog is used, the connection string that is required to
connect to the RMAN recovery catalog.

Note: The connection file must not include any lines starting with the # symbol.

If the connection file does not contain a connection string for an RMAN recovery
catalog, the nsroraclecat program assumes that a control file is used as the RMAN
repository.

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 269

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Example 42 Connection file contents

If the following lines exist in the connection file, an RMAN recovery catalog is used as
the RMAN repository:
connect target sys/oracle@proddb;
connect rcvcat rman/rman@oracat;

Note: RMAN catalog deletions fail if the connection file does not exist or does not contain valid
connection strings.

Configuring the NWORA resource file with the nsroraadmin program

All resources in the NWORA resource file must be added, modified, or deleted by
using the nsroraadmin program only.
To run the program, type the nsroraadmin command at the operating system
command line, as the root user on UNIX or as a member of the Microsoft Windows
Administrators group.
“The nsroraadmin command syntax and options for PowerSnap backups” on
page 270 provides details on the command syntax and options.
Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista requirements for the nsroraadmin command
On Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista, you must run the nsroraadmin
command in the Command Prompt window as an administrator:
1. Click Start.
2. Right-click Command Prompt.
3. Select Run as administrator.
4. Run the nsroraadmin command in the open Command Prompt window.
The nsroraadmin command syntax and options for PowerSnap backups
The nsroraadmin command syntax and options used to configure PowerSnap
backup settings are as follows:
nsroraadmin [-D debug_level] -r list [ResourceName | SidName]

nsroraadmin [-D debug_level] -r add ResourceName ResourceValue

nsroraadmin [-D debug_level] -r add sid=SidName home=OracleHome

connect=ConnectFilePath [lib=LibraryPath] [tns=TNSPath]

nsroraadmin [-D debug_level] -r update ResourceName ResourceValue

nsroraadmin [-D debug_level] -r update sid=SidName [home=OracleHome]

[connect=ConnectFilePath] [lib=LibraryPath] [tns=TNSPath]

nsroraadmin [-D debug_level] -r delete SidName

where:
◆ debug_level is the level of debug information generated.
◆ ResourceName is the name of an NWORA parameter resource.
◆ SidName is the value of the NSR_ORACLE_SID parameter of an NWORA SID
resource.
◆ ResourceValue is the value of the NWORA parameter resource.

270 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

◆ OracleHome is the value of the NSR_ORACLE_HOME parameter of the NWORA

SID resource.
◆ ConnectFilePath is the value of the NSR_ORACLE_CONNECT_FILE parameter of
the NWORA SID resource.
◆ LibraryPath is the value of the NSR_ORACLE_LIB_PATH parameter of the
NWORA SID resource.
◆ TNSPath is the value of the NSR_ORACLE_TNS_ADMIN parameter of the
NWORA SID resource.
Only the -D and -r options are supported:
◆ The -D option causes the nsroraadmin command to print debug information.
◆ The -r option must be followed by the appropriate keywords, which determine
the NWORA resource operation to be performed.
Command options and settings in brackets ([ ]) are optional. Do not include the
brackets when typing the command.
The following sections provide examples of how to use the nsroraadmin command to
list, add, update, and delete NWORA resources:
◆ “List the NWORA resources” on page 271
◆ “Add the NWORA resources” on page 271
◆ “Update the NWORA resources” on page 272
◆ “Delete the NWORA SID resources” on page 272
The following sources provide more information on the nsroraadmin command:
◆ nsroraadmin man page on a UNIX Oracle Server that contains the NMDA
software.
◆ nsroraadmin entry in the EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications
Command Reference Guide on the Powerlink website.
List the NWORA resources
◆ To display the entire NWORA resource file contents, type the following:
nsroraadmin -r list

◆ To display the NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE parameter resource only, type the

following:
nsroraadmin -r list NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE

◆ To display an NWORA SID resource with the NSR_ORACLE_SID value of

proddb, type the following:
nsroraadmin -r list proddb

Add the NWORA resources

◆ Automatic catalog synchronization is enabled for proxy backups with PowerSnap
when the NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE parameter resource is set to enabled. To
add the NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE parameter resource with the value of
enabled, type one of the following:
nsroraadmin -r add NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE enabled

nsroraadmin -r add NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE=enabled

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 271

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Note: If the NWORA parameter resource already exists in the resource file, use of the add
keyword causes the resource value to be updated.

◆ To add a new NWORA SID resource with the NSR_ORACLE_SID value of

proddb and other specific values, use the information in Example 43 on page 272.

Example 43 Adding an NWORA SID resource

Prior to performing proxy backups of an Oracle database with an ORACLE_SID

value of proddb, the following command is used to add an NWORA SID resource to
the resource file:
nsroraadmin -r add sid=proddb
home=/dbapps/proddb/app/oracle/product/10.2.0/Db_1
connect=/dbapps/proddb/connect.file lib=/usr/lib
tns=/dbapps/proddb/tns

Note:
- When adding an NWORA SID resource, the keywords sid, home, and connect are mandatory;
the keywords lib and tns are optional.
- If an NWORA SID resource with the same NSR_ORACLE_SID value already exists, the
command updates the values of the existing resource.

After the nsroraadmin command is run, the NWORA SID resource includes the
following settings:
NSR_ORACLE_CONNECT_FILE=/dbapps/proddb/connect.file
NSR_ORACLE_HOME=/dbapps/proddb/app/oracle/product/10.2.0/Db_1
NSR_ORACLE_LIB_PATH=/usr/lib
NSR_ORACLE_SID=proddb
NSR_ORACLE_TNS_ADMIN=/dbapps/proddb/tns

In this sample, the RMAN connection file is /dbapps/proddb/connect.file and the

Oracle home directory is /dbapps/proddb/app/oracle/product/10.2.0/Db_1.
Update the NWORA resources
◆ To update the value of the NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE parameter resource to
enabled, type one of the following:
nsroraadmin -r update NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE enabled

nsroraadmin -r update NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE=enabled

◆ To update the values of the parameters NSR_ORACLE_HOME and

NSR_ORACLE_CONNECT_FILE in an NWORA SID resource with the
NSR_ORACLE_SID value of proddb, type the following:
nsroraadmin -r update sid=proddb home=/dbapps/proddb/10.2.0/Db_1
connect=/dbapps/oracle/connect/proddb.connect

Note: When updating an NWORA SID resource, the keyword sid is mandatory. The
keywords home, connect, lib, and tns are optional.

Delete the NWORA SID resources

To delete an NWORA SID resource with the NSR_ORACLE_SID value of proddb,
type the following:
nsroraadmin -r delete proddb

272 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Note: Only NWORA SID resources can be deleted from the resource file. NWORA parameter
resources cannot be deleted.

Automatic catalog synchronization with the nsroraclecat program

Automatic catalog synchronization is managed jointly by the NetWorker server and

NMDA programs. To remove the NMDA Oracle proxy backup entries from the
NetWorker indexes, the NetWorker server invokes the nsrsnapck program. Prior to
removing the index entries, nsrsnapck invokes the nsroraclecat program to remove
the corresponding RMAN catalog entries.

Note: To perform manual catalog synchronization, you can use specific RMAN commands, as
described in “Crosscheck and delete Oracle backups” on page 136. The appropriate Oracle
documentation provides more information on RMAN commands.

Review the following information on automatic catalog synchronization:

◆ “RMAN catalog entry removals with nsroraclecat” on page 273
◆ “Failure of the nsroraclecat program” on page 274
◆ “NetWorker index entry removals with nsrsnapck” on page 275
◆ “Catalog synchronization after PowerSnap Oracle backup volume is relabeled
manually” on page 275
RMAN catalog entry removals with nsroraclecat
The nsroraclecat program runs on the Oracle Server host that is backed up by the
NMDA and PowerSnap Module software:
◆ Do not attempt to run the nsroraclecat program manually.
◆ The nsroraclecat program is run automatically by the nsrsnapck program.
◆ Only one nsroraclecat program can run at a time. If two nsroraclecat programs
are started, the one started first completes its operation before the second one
proceeds.
To remove the RMAN catalog entries, nsroraclecat obtains information from the
NWORA resource file and generates temporary RMAN scripts that include an
RMAN change...delete command for each backup piece to be removed.
One script is created for all the backup pieces from the same database (or
ORACLE_SID). A separate script is created for each database.
The nsroraclecat program names each RMAN script as follows:
◆ On UNIX systems:
/nsr/apps/tmp/.nworapc/nsroracat_date_pid

◆ On Windows systems:
NetWorker_install_path\apps\tmp\.nworapc\nsroracat_date_pid

where:
• NetWorker_install_path is the root directory of the NetWorker installation path.
• date is the current date.
• pid is the nsroraclecat process ID.
The nsroraclecat program runs each script in an RMAN session. After the scripts
have finished running, the program removes them.

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 273

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Note: The nsroraclecat program generates information about the backup piece entries
removed from the RMAN catalog. The information is written to the nsroraclecat log and debug
files. “NSR_ORACLECAT_LOG_FILE” and “NSR_ORACLECAT_DEBUG_FILE” on page 266
provide more information on these files.

The following sources provide more information on the nsroraclecat program:

◆ The nsroraclecat man page on a UNIX Oracle Server that contains the NMDA
software.
◆ The nsroraclecat entry in the EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications
Command Reference Guide on the Powerlink website.
Failure of the nsroraclecat program
The nsroraclecat program fails to remove expired backup pieces from the RMAN
catalog in the following cases:
◆ The nsrsnapck program passes invalid information to nsroraclecat, for example,
an invalid NetWorker client name or an invalid save time of a backup piece.
◆ The nsroraclecat program cannot connect to the NetWorker server to query the
NetWorker indexes.
◆ The nsroraclecat program cannot locate the required backup pieces in the
NetWorker indexes.
To diagnose the cause of a nsroraclecat program failure, review the nsroraclecat log
files specified by NSR_ORACLECAT_DEBUG_FILE and
NSR_ORACLECAT_LOG_FILE. The operations log file is
/nsr/applogs/nsroraclecat.log by default.
If the nsroraclecat program fails to remove the expired backup pieces, then the
nsrsnapck program removes the corresponding NetWorker index entries by using
the procedures described in “NetWorker index entry removals with nsrsnapck” on
page 275.
The following files (if they exist) need to be removed:
◆ Files in one of these directories:
• On UNIX systems: /nsr/apps/tmp/.nworapc
• On Windows systems: NetWorker_install_path\apps\tmp\.nworapc, where
NetWorker_install_path is the root directory of the NetWorker installation path
◆ Files in either the temporary directory /tmp on UNIX systems or the temporary
directory specified by the TEMP system variable on Windows systems, where the
files have the name nwora_bp_sid_pid:
• sid is an ORACLE_SID value.
• pid is a nsroraclecat process ID.

Note: If nsroraclecat fails continuously, disable catalog synchronization (by setting

NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE to disabled) until the cause of the problem is determined.

IMPORTANT
After a nsroraclecat program failure occurs or while catalog synchronization is
disabled, the DBA must synchronize the catalogs manually by using specific
RMAN commands. The appropriate Oracle documentation provides more
information.

274 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

NetWorker index entry removals with nsrsnapck

Once the nsroraclecat program has successfully removed the expired backup pieces
from the RMAN catalog, the nsrsnapck program removes the corresponding
NetWorker index entries.
If nsroraclecat fails to remove some of the backup entries from the RMAN catalog,
the nsrsnapck program does the following:
◆ Removes the corresponding NetWorker index entries when
NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE is set to TRUE.
◆ Does not remove the corresponding NetWorker index entries when
NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE is set to FALSE.

Note: When NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE is set to FALSE, nsrsnapck removes only

those NetWorker index entries that correspond to removed RMAN catalog entries.

IMPORTANT
The NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE setting controls whether a corresponding
NetWorker index entry is removed when the nsroraclecat program fails to remove
an expired RMAN backup piece.
- In general, NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE should be set to TRUE, to enable
NetWorker index entries to be removed, even if the RMAN catalog entries are not
removed. Otherwise, if entries are not removed from the NetWorker index, the
DBA must synchronize the catalogs manually with the RMAN commands. The
Oracle documentation provides more information.
- If RMAN backup optimization is enabled, NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE
should be set to FALSE, to prevent the removal of NetWorker index entries.
Otherwise, RMAN might skip backing up certain files.

Catalog synchronization after PowerSnap Oracle backup volume is relabeled

manually
If you relabel a NetWorker volume containing PowerSnap Oracle backups, the
NMDA program nsroraclecat is not used to remove the corresponding entries from
the RMAN catalog during the NetWorker label operation.
In this case, you must perform the following procedures to synchronize the RMAN
and NetWorker catalogs.
Ensure that NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE is set to TRUE in the NWORA resource
file. Synchronize the RMAN catalog entries manually by using the RMAN crosscheck
command.
Example 44 on page 275 provides an example of manual synchronization.
The appropriate Oracle documentation provides more information on the RMAN
crosscheck command.

Example 44 Using RMAN commands to synchronize the RMAN catalog entries

The following example shows the RMAN commands used to synchronize the RMAN
catalog entries after a PowerSnap Oracle backup volume was relabelled manually:
Recovery Manager: Release 11.2.0.1.0 - Production on Mon Jul 26
10:39:28 2010
Copyright (c) 1982, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights
reserved.
RMAN> connect target
connected to target database: DB11GR2 (DBID=1557076238)

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 275

Snapshot Backups and Restores

RMAN> allocate channel for maintenance type 'SBT_TAPE' parms

'ENV=(NSR_SERVER=NetWorker_server)';
using target database control file instead of recovery catalog
allocated channel: ORA_MAINT_SBT_TAPE_1
channel ORA_MAINT_SBT_TAPE_1: SID=200 device type=SBT_TAPE
channel ORA_MAINT_SBT_TAPE_1: NMDA Oracle v1.2.0
RMAN> crosscheck backup;

PowerSnap backups and restores on cluster systems

NMDA can perform PowerSnap backups and restores of a database configured on an
active-passive cluster system. This section provides details on the support of cluster
and failover for the NMDA PowerSnap operations.

IMPORTANT
The parameter NSR_CLIENT is not supported for PowerSnap backups on a cluster
system. This parameter is used for restores and regular backups on a cluster
system, as described in Chapter 6, “Cluster Systems.”

Review the following information, specific to PowerSnap operations on a cluster

system:
◆ “PowerSnap backup failover” on page 276
◆ “PowerSnap backups from a virtual cluster client” on page 276
◆ “PowerSnap backups from a physical cluster client” on page 277
◆ “Restores from PowerSnap backups on a cluster system” on page 279

PowerSnap backup failover

During a PowerSnap scheduled backup where the database server software is
configured to fail over (for example, by using Oracle Fail Safe with MSCS on a
Windows system), the NetWorker server retries a failed backup on the failover node
if the Client Retries attribute is set to a nonzero value in the Group resource. The retry
occurs at the RMAN script level, whereby the RMAN script restarts from the
beginning.

Note: To avoid restarting the backups of all objects in the RMAN script during the NetWorker
retry, you can use the Oracle restartable backups feature. This feature enables you to back up
only the files that have not been backed up since a specified time, for example, by using the
’sysdate -1’ option. “Restartable backups” on page 41 provides more information.

PowerSnap backups from a virtual cluster client

A PowerSnap backup from a virtual cluster client (virtual host) protects the data on
shared cluster disks.
To set up a PowerSnap backup from a virtual cluster client:
1. Install the NMDA software on each physical node of the cluster, along with the
NetWorker client and appropriate PowerSnap Module software.
2. Create a NetWorker Client resource for the virtual host and each physical host, as
described in “Configure the NetWorker Client resource” on page 243:
• In the Backup Command attribute, always specify the -c client_name option in
nsrdasv -z config_filepath -c client_name if the client is a virtual host.

276 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

• In the Remote Access attribute in the Client resource for a virtual cluster client,
specify the Oracle user from each physical client that can store and retrieve
backups.
• In the Save Set attribute, specify the complete pathname of the RMAN script
to back up the Oracle data on the shared disk.
3. Configure the other NetWorker resources required for PowerSnap backups, as
described in “Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations” on page 249:
• To enable backup failover, specify a nonzero value in the Client Retries
attribute in the NetWorker Group resource for the scheduled backup. This
value causes the NetWorker server to restart the failed Oracle backup on the
failover node.
• Specify other recommended attribute settings in the Group resource, as
described in the cluster support information of the EMC NetWorker
Administration Guide.
4. Configure the NWORA resource file on each node of the cluster, as described in
“Configuring the NWORA resource file” on page 251.
5. If the PowerSnap backup entries are to be stored in a NetWorker client file index
other than the virtual client index (for example, in a physical client index), specify
the Oracle user from the virtual host in the Remote Access attribute of the Client
resource for client_name.
If the PowerSnap backup entries are stored in a NetWorker index other than the
virtual client index, the expiration of instant backups created with the
-c client_name option setting is different from the expiration of the instant backups
created without the setting.
At the start of an instant backup, if the number of existing instant backups created
by a client equals the value of the Retain Snapshots attribute in the NetWorker
Snapshot Policy resource, nsrsnapck automatically expires the oldest instant
backup and removes its NetWorker index entries based on the NetWorker
snapshot policy. The nsrsnapck program performs the automatic expiration
based on the hostname of the NetWorker Client resource (it is not aware of the
-c client_name option). As a result, the instant backup of -c client_name is not
automatically removed.
Notes:
• The host specified by client_name must have access to instant backups.
• The NMDA and PowerSnap Module software must be installed and
configured on the host specified by client_name.
• When the backup is started from the virtual cluster client, the backup entries
are stored in the NetWorker client file index of the virtual client by default.

Example 45 PowerSnap backup entries in the index of a physical cluster client

To specify that the backup entries be stored in the index of the physical cluster client
mars.emc.com, specify nsrdasv -z config_filepath -c mars.emc.com in the Backup
Command attribute of the NetWorker Client resource.

PowerSnap backups from a physical cluster client

A PowerSnap backup from a physical cluster client protects Oracle data on private
disks. This type of backup is similar to a regular scheduled Oracle backup on a
non-cluster system.

Oracle considerations for PowerSnap operations 277

Snapshot Backups and Restores

The following sources provide information on how to set up a PowerSnap backup

from a physical cluster client:
◆ “Configuring the required Oracle settings” on page 250
◆ “Checking configuration consistency” on page 255
◆ “Performing Oracle PowerSnap backups” on page 256
◆ EMC NetWorker Administration Guide (chapter on cluster support)
When the backup is started from the physical client, the backup entries are stored in
the NetWorker index of the physical client by default.

Note: The entries for the NWORA resource file backup are stored in the NetWorker index of
the physical client by default.

To specify that the PowerSnap backup entries be stored in a NetWorker client file
index other than the physical client index, for example, in a virtual client index:
◆ Specify nsrdasv -z config_filepath -c client_name in the Backup Command attribute
in the Client resource for client_name.

Note: When the client is a physical host, the backup is indexed under the hostname of the
physical host by default. You need to specify the -c client_name option only when you want
the index to be stored under a different hostname.

◆ Specify the Oracle user from the physical host in the Remote Access attribute in
the Client resource for client_name.
If the PowerSnap backup entries are stored in a NetWorker index other than the
virtual client index, the expiration of instant backups created with the -c client_name
option setting is different from the expiration of the instant backups created without
the setting.
At the start of an instant backup, if the number of existing instant backups created by
a client equals the value of the Retain Snapshots attribute in the NetWorker Snapshot
Policy resource, nsrsnapck automatically expires the oldest instant backup and
removes its NetWorker index entries based on the NetWorker snapshot policy. The
nsrsnapck program performs the automatic expiration based on the hostname of the
NetWorker Client resource (it is not aware of the -c client_name option). As a result,
the instant backup of -c client_name is not automatically removed.
Notes:
◆ The host specified by client_name must have access to instant backups.
◆ The NMDA and PowerSnap Module software must be installed and configured
on the host specified by client_name.

Example 46 PowerSnap backup entries in the index of a virtual cluster client

To specify that the backup entries be stored in the index of the virtual client
monalisa.emc.com, specify nsrdasv -z config_filepath -c monalisa.emc.com in the
Backup Command attribute of the NetWorker Client resource.

278 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Restores from PowerSnap backups on a cluster system

To set up a restore from a PowerSnap backup on a cluster system, perform the
following:
1. Set the parameter NSR_CLIENT to the correct value by using one of the methods
in “About NMDA parameters” on page 294:
• To restore a backup from a virtual cluster client, set NSR_CLIENT to the name
of the virtual cluster client.
• To restore a backup from a physical cluster client, set NSR_CLIENT to the
name of the physical cluster client.
2. In the Remote Access attribute of the Client resource, specify the hostname of the
client on which the restore is to be started.

Note: When a failover occurs during a restore, the restore must be restarted manually on the
failover node.

Replication Manager snapshot operations with Oracle ASM

Oracle does not support PowerSnap backups of Oracle data that resides on the Oracle
Automatic Storage Management (ASM). You cannot use the NMDA and PowerSnap
Module software to perform a PowerSnap snapshot backup of Oracle ASM data.
When ASM is used as the Oracle data storage, if you attempt a PowerSnap backup of
the Oracle ASM data by using the methods in “PowerSnap snapshot operations” on
page 236, one of the following occurs:
◆ If you did not specify proxy only in the RMAN backup command, then the
PowerSnap snapshot backup fails over to a regular RMAN backup.
◆ If you specified proxy only, then the PowerSnap snapshot backup fails.
By using EMC Replication Manager, the NMDA software can perform snapshot or
split-mirror-based backups of the Oracle ASM data through disk replication
technology. This section describes how to configure the required integration of
NMDA with Replication Manager, and then use the integrated solution to perform
snapshot backups and restores of Oracle ASM data.

Note: Replication Manager cluster support for Oracle is primarily for Oracle RAC. Replication
Manager supports RAC, with or without ASM, but converts the RAC database into a single
instance database for the replica. While the solution described in this section also applies to
Oracle RAC, the scripts must be adjusted accordingly. The Replication Manager
documentation provides details on additional settings required for Oracle RAC.

About NMDA integration with Replication Manager

Replication Manager is an EMC software product that manages the creation and
expiration of point-in-time replicas (clones or snapshots) of databases and file systems
that reside on supported storage arrays.
When NMDA is integrated with Replication Manager, the NMDA software can back
up and restore the replicas created by Replication Manager. The data in the replicas
can also be used for reporting, analysis, and other repurposing.

Replication Manager snapshot operations with Oracle ASM 279

Snapshot Backups and Restores

During the snapshot backups of the Oracle ASM data, the replicas of Oracle ASM
volumes are created on the production (source) host, mounted to a separate mount
host, and backed up from the mount host, to reduce the backup overhead on the
production host.
A snapshot backup of an Oracle database on ASM storage with Replication Manager
involves the following processes:
1. Replication Manager creates and mounts the replica database from the Oracle
production database host to the mount host.
2. Oracle RMAN connects to the “replica” database on the mount host, and backs
up the data to NetWorker by using NMDA.
Configuration of the snapshot backups of Oracle ASM data includes separate
configuration procedures on the four main nodes involved in the backups:
◆ Replication Manager server
◆ Oracle production database host (contains Replication Manager Agent software)
◆ Oracle mount host (contains Replication Manager Agent software)
◆ NetWorker server

Backup of Oracle database components

The following describes the backup requirements of the individual database
components:
◆ Datafiles — The datafiles in the replica database on the mount host must be
backed up through RMAN scripts. Although the datafiles are from the replica
database, the backups can be used to restore and recover the original database.
◆ Control file — When the replica database is mounted, the control file is a current
control file, but is a different version from the production current control file. The
current control file must be converted to the “backup” type (backup control file)
to obtain a new timestamp for the backup control file. The “RMAN and Split
Mirror Disk Backups” Metalink note (302615.1), which can be obtained from
Oracle, provides more details.
RMAN does not back up the backup control file on the mount host. Back up the
control file through the regular NMDA Oracle backup procedures on the
production database host by using one of the following options:
1. Set up autobackup of the control file to the NetWorker backup devices, as
described in “Control file and server parameter file autobackups” on page 38.
2. Run the backup current control file command.
◆ Parameter files — The SPFILE must be backed up through the regular NMDA
Oracle backup procedures on the production database host.

Note: If an SPFILE is not used, RMAN cannot back up the parameter file or PFILE. You
must back up a PFILE on the original database host through a file system backup.

◆ Archived redo logs — Replication Manager can replicate the archived redo log
directory. The archived redo logs on the mount host can then be backed up
through RMAN scripts.
To back up additional archived redo logs generated after the replication, you can
use the regular NMDA Oracle backups on the original database host.

280 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

If the archived redo logs do not reside on a supported storage array, then you
must use the regular NMDA Oracle backups on the production database host to
back up the archived redo logs.
◆ Flash Recovery Area (FRA) — All of the procedures used for the archived redo
logs backups also apply to the FRA backups.

Requirements for snapshot backups of Oracle ASM data

Ensure that you meet the following requirements for snapshot backups of the Oracle
ASM data:
◆ An Oracle RMAN recovery catalog is used for the Oracle database. The use of the
Oracle control file as an RMAN catalog is not supported for the snapshot
backups.
◆ All of the Oracle and ASM configuration and setup requirements are met as
described in the EMC Replication Manager Product Guide and EMC Replication
Manager Release Notes.
For example, Replication Manager supports only the external redundancy level
for Oracle ASM.
Confirm that the particular platform is supported with Oracle ASM.
If you are using Oracle RAC, refer to the Replication Manager documentation for
additional Oracle configurations for RAC in ASM environments.

Configuring snapshot backups of Oracle ASM data

To configure the snapshot backups of Oracle ASM data, perform the required
configuration steps on the four different nodes involved in the snapshot backups:
◆ “Configuration on the Replication Manager server” on page 281
◆ “Configuration on the Oracle production database host (Replication Manager
Agent)” on page 285
◆ “Configuration on the Oracle mount host (Replication Manager Agent)” on
page 285
◆ “Configuration on the NetWorker server host” on page 288

Configuration on the Replication Manager server

The EMC Replication Manager Product Guide provides details on the configuration
steps on the Replication Manager server.
Perform the following configuration steps by using the Replication Manager console
on the Replication Manager server:
1. Create an application set for the Oracle production database. Ensure that the
application credentials are set properly for the application set. Figure 18 on
page 282 shows a sample of the application credentials.

Replication Manager snapshot operations with Oracle ASM 281

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Figure 18 Application Credentials window in the Replication Manager console

2. If required, add storage and create a storage pool.

3. Create a job for the application set that was created in step 1 :
a. In the Advanced Replication Settings window, specify the proper settings for
backup and recovery purposes:
– To perform an online backup, select Online using hot backup mode.
Note: Do not select Online without hot backup mode for backup and recovery
purposes. The Use consistent split option is not required for the online hot backup
mode, but selecting the option has no impact.
– To perform an offline backup, select Offline by shutting down the
database.
Replication Manager shuts down the database before creating a replica,
and restarts the database after the replica is created. Ensure that the
snapshot backup schedule corresponds to a time when the database can be
placed offline.
– To back up archived redo logs from the replica through RMAN scripts,
select Replicate archive log directory.

282 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

– To back up the FRA from the replica through RMAN scripts, select
Replicate Flash Recovery Area.
– If required, select the appropriate setting for Copy parameter file to RM
Server.
Figure 19 on page 283 shows a sample of the advanced replication settings.

Figure 19 Advanced Replication Settings in the Replication Manager console

b. Specify the following mount options:

– Select a physical host that is different from the mount host.
– Under Path options for data residing on file systems, select Original
path.
– Select Recover the database, and specify the following under that option:
–Select Prepare only for Recovery type.
–Specify the proper ORACLE_HOME value and user credentials.
– Under ASM Options, specify the proper value for ORACLE_HOME.
You can specify a different ORACLE_HOME for the ASM instance from
the one used by the database instance. Replication Manager requires the
same operating system user to access both the ASM instance and the
database instance. Before you run the job, ensure the instructions are
completed for “Configuration on the Oracle mount host (Replication
Manager Agent)” on page 285.
– Under Other Mount Options, select Fail the replica if the mount fails.

Replication Manager snapshot operations with Oracle ASM 283

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Note: Do not select Unmount the replica on job completion. The replica must
remain mounted during the RMAN backup. After the RMAN backup, the replica is
unmounted gracefully through the POSTCMD script described in “Configuration
on the Oracle mount host (Replication Manager Agent)” on page 285.
Figure 20 on page 284 shows a sample of the required mount options.

Figure 20 Mount options in the Replication Manager console

4. In the Starting the Job window of the job wizard, select Manually, or using a
third party scheduler. This setting is required to perform a manual or scheduled
NetWorker backup.
Figure 21 on page 285 shows the required setting in the job wizard.

284 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Figure 21 Starting the Job window in the job wizard

Configuration on the Oracle production database host (Replication Manager Agent)

Perform the following configuration steps on the Oracle production database host:
1. Ensure that the Replication Manager Agent software is installed and configured,
and the required Oracle configuration steps are completed according to the
Oracle procedures in the EMC Replication Manager Product Guide.
For example, verify that the tnsnames.ora file contains at least one entry with a
dedicated connection to be used by Replication Manager. This dedicated
connection should be used when defining an Oracle application set.
2. Install the NetWorker client and NMDA software according to the instructions in
the EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Installation Guide.

Configuration on the Oracle mount host (Replication Manager Agent)

Perform the following configuration steps on the Oracle mount host:
1. Ensure that the Oracle software is installed properly:
• The same Oracle software version must be installed on both the production
database host and mount host.
• You can install and use a different ORACLE_HOME for ASM from the one for
the database instance host, if this is the setup used on the original database
host.
2. If ASM is used, ensure that the Cluster Synch Services (CSS) daemon is running.
3. Ensure that the Replication Manager Agent software and all the other required
software (for example, Solutions Enabler) is installed and configured according to
the Replication Manager documentation.

Replication Manager snapshot operations with Oracle ASM 285

Snapshot Backups and Restores

4. (Optional) Set up the RMCLI initialization file to identify the following:

• Replication Manager server host and port
• Username and password for the connection
If the initialization file is not set up, the Replication Manager server host, port,
and credentials must be provided in a PRECMD and POSTCMD scripts that are
used by NMDA. The scripts are described in step 8 and step 9 .
5. Install the NetWorker client and NMDA software according to the instructions in
the EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Installation Guide.
If you set up the mount host as a NetWorker storage node to avoid network data
transfer, the NetWorker client does not need to be installed separately.
6. Configure the local Oracle Net listener and Net service names to enable you to
connect to the Recovery Catalog database and the replica database once the
replica database is mounted.
The following are samples of the network files used to configure the Net listener
and service names. In this case, bu-star1 is the host where the RMAN catalog
database is running, and bu-star2.lss.emc.com is the mount host:
• $ORACLE_HOME/network/admin/listener.ora:
LISTENER =
(DESCRIPTION_LIST =
(DESCRIPTION = (ADDRESS = (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST =
bu-star2.lss.emc.com)(PORT = 1521)))
)

• $ORACLE_HOME/network/admin/tnsnames.ora:
ORCL110REP =
(DESCRIPTION =
(ADDRESS_LIST = (ADDRESS = (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST =
bu-star2)(PORT = 1521)))
(CONNECT_DATA = (SERVICE_NAME = orcl110))
)
CATALOG =
(DESCRIPTION =
(ADDRESS_LIST = (ADDRESS = (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST =
bu-star1)(PORT = 1521)))
(CONNECT_DATA = (SERVICE_NAME = catalog))
)

7. Copy the production database password file to the mount host under
$ORACLE_HOME/dbs. For example:
scp bu-star1:/db/app/oracle/product/11.1.0/db/dbs/orapworcl110
bu-star2:/db/app/oracle/product/11.1.0/db/dbs/

8. Create a PRECMD script, which is a preprocessing script with its full pathname
specified by the PRECMD parameter in the NMDA configuration file.
Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides details on
the NMDA parameters and configuration file.
The PRECMD script must do the following:
• Create and mount the database replica by starting the Replication Manager job
described in “Configuration on the Replication Manager server” on page 281.
• Mount the ASM instance.

286 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

• Convert the control file from current mode to the backup mode, and mount
the database, according to the instructions in the “RMAN and Split Mirror
Disk Backups” Metalink note (302615.1).
• Register the replica instance explicitly to the listener by using alter system
register, and catalog the archived redo logs generated during hot backup
mode if online backups are used.
A sample PRECMD script is provided in “Preprocessing script for Oracle ASM
backups” on page 289.
9. Create a POSTCMD script, which is a postprocessing script with its full pathname
specified by the POSTCMD parameter in the NMDA configuration file.
The POSTCMD script must unmount the database replica gracefully by using
RMCLI.
A sample POSTCMD script is provided in “Postprocessing script for Oracle ASM
backups” on page 291.
10. Create an RMAN script to perform the required snapshot backup. In the script,
set the NSR_CLIENT parameter to the hostname of the production database host.
This NSR_CLIENT setting enables the production database host to access the
backup entries generated by the backup on the mount host, for catalog
maintenance operations and restore.
The following sample RMAN script is used to run an NMDA Oracle manual
backup after the "replica" database is mounted. This script backs up the full
database to the NetWorker server, bu-rocky, including all the archived redo logs
not backed for a day. The production database host is bu-star1. The script
connects to an RMAN Recovery Catalog database named catalog:
connect target sys/oracle@orcl110rep;
connect catalog rman/rman@catalog;
run {
allocate channel ch1 type 'SBT_TAPE';
allocate channel ch2 type 'SBT_TAPE';
send device type 'SBT_TAPE'
'NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=bu-rocky, NSR_CLIENT=bu-star1)';
backup full
format 'RM_NMDA_DB_%d_%U'
database
plus archivelog not backed up since time 'sysdate - 1';
release channel ch1;
release channel ch2;
}

11. If you will perform scheduled backups, create the NMDA configuration file with
required parameter settings, as described in Appendix A, “NMDA Parameters
and Configuration File.” Ensure that you set the following parameters in the file:
PRECMD=full_pathname_of_PRECMD_script
POSTCMD=full_pathname_of_POSTCMD_script

where:
• full_pathname_of_PRECMD_script is the complete pathname of the
preprocessing script created in step 8 .
• full_pathname_of_POSTCMD_script is the complete pathname of the
postprocessing script created in step 9 .

Replication Manager snapshot operations with Oracle ASM 287

Snapshot Backups and Restores

Configuration on the NetWorker server host

The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide and NMC online help provide details on
how to configure NetWorker resources.
Perform the required configuration steps on the NetWorker server host:
◆ For manual snapshot backups, use NMC to create basic (dummy) Client
resources for the production database host and mount host. Ensure that the
Remote Access attribute in the Client resource of the production database host
contains the following:
Oracle_user@mount_host

◆ For scheduled backups, perform the following:

1. Configure the required NetWorker Group and Schedule resources.
2. Create a NetWorker Client resource of the mount host that contains the
following attribute settings:
– Backup Command — nsrdasv -z NMDA_configuration_filepath, where the
NMDA configuration file includes the parameters set in step 11 of
“Configuration on the Oracle mount host (Replication Manager Agent)” on
page 285.
– Group — Name of the NetWorker backup group configured in step 1 .
– Save Set — RMAN:full_path_of_RMAN_script, where the RMAN script is
the script created in step 10 of “Configuration on the Oracle mount host
(Replication Manager Agent)” on page 285.
3. Create another NetWorker Client resource for the production database host to
back up the parameter file and control file. Ensure that the Remote Access
attribute contains the following:
Oracle_user@mount_host

Performing backups and restores of Oracle ASM data

To perform the snapshot backups and restores of Oracle ASM data, follow the
instructions in the appropriate section:
◆ “Manual snapshot backups of Oracle ASM data” on page 288
◆ “Scheduled snapshot backups of Oracle ASM data” on page 289
◆ “Incremental backups on the mount host” on page 289
◆ “Restore and recovery of Oracle ASM backups” on page 289

Manual snapshot backups of Oracle ASM data

To perform a manual snapshot backup:
1. Log in to the mount host as an Oracle user.
2. Run the PRECMD script, described in step 8 of “Configuration on the Oracle
mount host (Replication Manager Agent)” on page 285.
3. Run the following command to perform the backup:
rman @RMAN_script_name

4. Run the POSTCMD script, described in step 9 of “Configuration on the Oracle

mount host (Replication Manager Agent)” on page 285.

288 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Scheduled snapshot backups of Oracle ASM data

The NetWorker server automatically starts scheduled backups based on the specified
backup schedule. “Performing a scheduled NMDA backup” on page 116 provides
more information on scheduled backups.
To manually start and test a scheduled backup group, you can use the NMC
NetWorker Administration GUI, or the savegrp command with the appropriate
options.
The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide and NMC online help provide details on
using the NMC GUI program. The EMC NetWorker Command Reference Guide provides
details on the savegrp command.

Incremental backups on the mount host

You can perform regular RMAN incremental backups on the mount host.
You can also use additional scripting to perform the new incremental backup with
change tracking, available in Oracle 10g and known as Block Change Tracking (BCT).
The EMC whitepaper titled “Reducing Backup Window and Recovery Time with
Oracle Database 11g RMAN and EMC TimeFinder/Clone” provides details.

Restore and recovery of Oracle ASM backups

To restore and recover a snapshot backup of Oracle ASM data, you must perform an
RMAN restore with NMDA, as described in Chapter 4, “Data Restore and Recovery.”
Replication Manager is not involved in the restore and recovery of the Oracle ASM
backups.

Sample preprocessing and postprocessing scripts

The following sections provide sample preprocessing and postprocessing scripts for
the snapshot backups of Oracle ASM data on UNIX or Linux.

Preprocessing script for Oracle ASM backups

The following shows a sample script used to perform preprocessing tasks on UNIX or
Linux, prior to a snapshot backup of Oracle ASM data. The main preprocessing
script, precmd, calls each of the following scripts in turn:
◆ create_replica.sh
◆ mountasm.sql
◆ convertcf.sql
◆ catalog.sql
You must specify the complete pathname of the main preprocessing script with the
PRECMD parameter in the NMDA configuration file:
$ more precmd

#!/bin/ksh
echo on
# This script creates and mounts the replica database
# by starting the job configured on the RM server.
# If the replica cannot be mounted, the script fails.
DATE=$(date +%Y%m%d)
LOGFILE=/db/home/ora110/rman/rm_rman_backup_$DATE.log
RM_HOME=/opt/emc/rm/gui
ORACLE_SID=orcl110

Replication Manager snapshot operations with Oracle ASM 289

Snapshot Backups and Restores

echo "*** Starting the Oracle database replica for $ORACLE_SID ****"
>> $LOGFILE
RM_COMMAND_LINE="$RM_HOME/rmcli host=bu-caspian.lss.emc.com
port=65432 login user=Administrator password=password
file=/db/home/ora110/rman/create_replica.sh >> $LOGFILE "
eval ${RM_COMMAND_LINE} &
Pid=$!
wait $Pid
rm_status=$?
if [ $rm_status != 0 ] ; then
echo "The RM job returned status of "$rm_status
echo $0 "exiting."
exit 1
fi
# Switch to the Oracle user
su - ora110
# Mount the ASM instance
export ORACLE_SID=+RM0001
eval "sqlplus /nolog < /db/home/ora110/rman/mountasm.sql >>$LOGFILE"
&
# Change the CONTROL FILE type to backup type and mount the "replica"
database
export ORACLE_SID=orcl110
eval "sqlplus /nolog < /db/home/ora110/rman/convertcf.sql >>$LOGFILE"
&
# Catalog the archived redo logs generated during hot backup mode
eval "rman @/db/home/ora110/rman/catalog.sql >>$LOGFILE" &
exit 0

$ more /db/home/ora110/rman/create_replica.sh

if run-job name=orcl110_replica appset=orcl110_appset then exit 0

else exit 1

$ more /db/home/ora110/rman/mountasm.sql

connect sys/oracle as sysdba;

startup mount;
exit

$ more /db/home/ora110/rman/convertcf.sql

connect erm/oracle as sysdba;

startup mount;
recover database using backup controlfile until cancel;
CANCEL
shutdown immediate;
startup mount;
alter system register;

$ more /db/home/ora110/rman/catalog.sql

connect target erm/oracle@orcl110rep;

# catalog the archived redo log generated during hot backup mode
catalog start with '/tmp/orcl110/arch/';

290 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Snapshot Backups and Restores

Postprocessing script for Oracle ASM backups

The following shows a sample script used to perform postprocessing tasks on UNIX
or Linux, after a snapshot backup of Oracle ASM data has finished. The main
postprocessing script, postcmd, calls the unmount_replica.sh script.
You must specify the complete pathname of the main postprocessing script with the
POSTCMD parameter in the NMDA configuration file:
$ more postcmd

#!/bin/ksh
echo on
# This script unmounts the replica database
# If the replica cannot be unmounted, the script fails.
DATE=$(date +%Y%m%d)
LOGFILE=/db/home/ora110/rman/rm_rman_backup_$DATE.log
RM_HOME=/opt/emc/rm/gui
ORACLE_SID=orcl110
echo "*** Unmounting the Oracle database replica for $ORACLE_SID ****"
>> $LOGFILE
RM_COMMAND_LINE="$RM_HOME/rmcli host=bu-caspian.lss.emc.com
port=65432 login user=Administrator password=password
file=/db/home/ora110/rman/unmount_replica.sh >> $LOGFILE "
eval ${RM_COMMAND_LINE} &
Pid=$!
wait $Pid
rm_status=$?
if [ $rm_status != 0 ] ; then
echo "The RM job returned status of "$rm_status
echo $0 "exiting."
exit 1
fi
exit 0

$ more /db/home/ora110/rman/unmount_replica.sh

if unmount-replica position=last appset=orcl110_appset then exit 0

else exit 1

Replication Manager snapshot operations with Oracle ASM 291

Snapshot Backups and Restores

292 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 A
NMDA Parameters and
Configuration File

This appendix includes the following major sections:

◆ About NMDA parameters ......................................................................................... 294
◆ NMDA configuration file........................................................................................... 294
◆ Common NMDA parameters.................................................................................... 296
◆ DB2-specific NMDA parameters .............................................................................. 303
◆ Informix-specific NMDA parameters ...................................................................... 306
◆ Lotus-specific NMDA parameters............................................................................ 307
◆ Oracle-specific NMDA parameters .......................................................................... 315
◆ Sybase-specific NMDA parameters.......................................................................... 319

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File 293

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

About NMDA parameters

This appendix describes the parameters that you can set for the NMDA backups and
restores.

Note: Unless noted otherwise, the parameters are supported for both regular backups and
restores and PowerSnap snapshot backups and restores. The PowerSnap snapshot operations
are supported for DB2 and Oracle only.

If you perform client-side configuration (without the configuration wizard), then you
must set specific parameters for an NMDA scheduled or manual backup or an
NMDA restore, typically in the NMDA configuration file.
“NMDA configuration file” on page 294 provides details on the NMDA
configuration file and the exceptions to setting the parameters in the file.
“Common NMDA parameters” on page 296 describes the parameters that NMDA
uses for backups and restores of all the supported databases and applications.
The following sections describe the parameters that NMDA uses for backups and
restores of specific databases and applications only:
◆ “DB2-specific NMDA parameters” on page 303
◆ “Informix-specific NMDA parameters” on page 306
◆ “Lotus-specific NMDA parameters” on page 307
◆ “Oracle-specific NMDA parameters” on page 315
◆ “Sybase-specific NMDA parameters” on page 319

NMDA configuration file

As part of a client-side configuration for backup or restore operations, you must
typically set the required NMDA parameters in the NMDA configuration file.
The only exceptions to setting the NMDA parameters in the configuration file are as
follows:
◆ For Informix manual backups and restores, parameters must be set in the
environment.
◆ For Oracle backups and restores, certain parameters must be set in the RMAN
script, as described in “Oracle-specific NMDA parameters” on page 315.
◆ For Sybase restores, parameters must be set as nsrsybrc command options, if
possible. If a parameter cannot be set as a nsrsybrc command option, then it must
be set in the environment.
Five templates for the NMDA configuration file are installed with the NMDA
software:
◆ nmda_db2.cfg — Template for DB2 parameters
◆ nmda_informix.cfg — Template for Informix parameters
◆ nmda_lotus.cfg — Template for Lotus parameters
◆ nmda_oracle.cfg — Template for Oracle parameters
◆ nmda_sybase.cfg — Template for Sybase parameters

294 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

The configuration file templates are installed in the following directory:

◆ On UNIX systems: /nsr/apps/config
◆ On Windows systems: NetWorker_install_path\apps\config, where
NetWorker_install_path is the root directory of the NetWorker installation path, for
example, C:\Program Files\Legato\nsr
You should make a copy of the required configuration file templates (for example, in
the original directory or an alternate location) because the original templates are
removed when the NMDA software is uninstalled.
To create the NMDA configuration file for backups and restores of a particular
database or application, copy the appropriate template file to any location on the
client host, and customize the parameter settings in the file.
You can name the configuration file with any suitable name. You must specify the
configuration file pathname with the -z option in the appropriate backup or restore
command.

IMPORTANT
Ensure that the NMDA configuration file is stored in a secure location, and is
accessible by privileged users only. If possible, make this file readable and
writeable by the administrative or application user that performs the operation.

Syntax rules for the NMDA configuration file

The contents of the NMDA configuration file must conform to the following
syntax rules:
◆ Each parameter setting must be in one of the following formats:
NAME = value
NAME = value1, value2, value3
where:
• NAME is the parameter name.
• value, value1, value2, value3 are values assigned to the parameter.
◆ Parameter names and values are case-sensitive, unless specified otherwise in this
appendix.
◆ Parameter settings can optionally be grouped within braces as follows:
keyword {
...parameter_settings...
}
where keyword is one of the following case-insensitive keywords, to signify that the
parameter settings apply to a particular type of database or application:
• DB2
• INFORMIX
• LOTUS
• LOTUS_DAOS
• ORACLE
• SYBASE

NMDA configuration file 295

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Note: The LOTUS_DAOS keyword is used only to set parameters for a Lotus DAOS
backup. The LOTUS_DAOS{} section must appear after the LOTUS{} section in the same
configuration file. “Configure an integrated Lotus DAOS backup” on page 98 provides
details on setting parameters in the LOTUS_DAOS{} section.

◆ A group of parameters enclosed by braces cannot be nested inside another group

of parameters.
◆ Multiple values for a parameter must be separated by commas.
◆ The values of a parameter can be specified over multiple lines if each line ends in
a comma. For example:
NAME = value1,
value2,
value3
◆ If the line specifying a parameter does not end in a comma, the next line must
contain a new parameter setting.
◆ White space is ignored.
◆ Text on a line after the # symbol (where # is not enclosed in quotes) is considered
a comment, and is ignored. A comment may appear after a parameter setting on
the same line.

Common NMDA parameters

The following sections describe the common NMDA parameters, which NMDA uses
for backups and restores of all the supported databases and applications.
Table 32 on page 296 provides the definitions of the common NMDA parameters.

Table 32 Common NMDA parameters (page 1 of 7)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_AES_ENCRYPTION Specifies whether the NetWorker server encrypts the • FALSE (default) = Data is not encrypted through
backup data through 256-bit AES encryption, which 256-bit AES encryption during the backup.
uses the key or pass phrase that is set in the Datazone • TRUE = Data is encrypted through 256-bit AES
pass phrase attribute of the NetWorker Server encryption during the backup.
resource.
Optional for a backup.
Be careful when you change the pass phrase on the
NetWorker server. If the pass phrase on the server is
changed and you cannot remember the pass phrase
originally used for an NMDA backup, the encrypted data
cannot be recovered. The EMC NetWorker
Administration Guide provides more information on
pass phrases.

Note: Record each key (pass phrase) used for 256-bit

AES encryption. The key is required to restore the
backup later.

296 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 32 Common NMDA parameters (page 2 of 7)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_CHECKSUM Specifies whether the NetWorker software performs • FALSE (default) = NetWorker software does not
checksumming on the backup data. perform checksumming.
Optional for a backup. • TRUE = NetWorker software performs
checksumming.
Note: If you restore an NMDA Sybase backup that was
created with NSR_CHECKSUM set to TRUE and a
“CRC mismatch” error occurs during the restore
(indicating that the restored data does not match the
backed-up data due to backup corruption), then the
error message is not printed to the screen as expected.
The error message is printed only in the
nmda_sybase.messages.raw file and the Sybase
Backup server error log.

NSR_CLIENT Specifies the NetWorker Client resource to use for a • Hostname of the physical host on which the session
backup or restore. runs (default).
Recommended for a backup or restore in a cluster, DB2 • Valid NetWorker client hostname.
DPF, Informix MACH 11, Oracle RAC, or Sybase ASE
Cluster Edition system, and for a redirected restore (to
a different host). Chapter 6, “Cluster Systems” provides
more details.

NSR_COMPRESSION Specifies whether the NetWorker software performs • FALSE (default) = The NetWorker software performs
compression on the backup data. no compression.
Optional for a backup. • TRUE = The NetWorker software performs
compression.

NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL Specifies the name of the NetWorker volume pool to • Most appropriate pool, selected by the NetWorker
use for the backup. server (default).
For PowerSnap snapshot backups (DB2 and Oracle • Valid name of a NetWorker volume pool.
only), specifies the volume pool for live backups only • For a manual Oracle backup, the name must be
(backups to secondary storage only). different from the name used by the parameter
Optional for a DB2, Informix, Lotus, or Sybase manual NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL1,
backup. NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL2, or
Mandatory for an Oracle manual backup that uses the NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL3.
set duplex command (with duplex set to 1, 2, 3, or 4)
or other RMAN commands to generate backup copies.
For an Oracle manual backup that generates backup
copies, set this parameter with the parms option in the
RMAN script (not with the send command or send
option.).

Note: For a scheduled backup, this parameter

overrides any pool associated with the scheduled
backup group if the Pool attribute of the Client resource
is not set. The parameter is ignored if the Pool attributte
is set.

Common NMDA parameters 297

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 32 Common NMDA parameters (page 3 of 7)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL Specifies the level of debug messages that NMDA • 0 (default) = Debug messages are not generated.
writes to the debug log file, located in the directory • 1 to 9 = Debug messages are written to the debug
specified by NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST or in the log file (name has .log extension). The level of detail
default directory, /nsr/apps/logs (UNIX) or in the generated debug messages increases with
NetWorker_install_path\apps\logs (Windows). the debug level.
Note: Use this parameter for debugging purposes with
assistance from EMC Customer Support only.

Optional for a backup or restore.

For an Oracle operation, set this parameter either in the
configuration file or with the parms option in the RMAN
script (not with the send command or send option).

NSR_DEDUP_BACKUP Specifies whether Avamar deduplication is performed • FALSE (default) = Avamar deduplication is not
during a manual NMDA backup. performed during an NMDA backup. Other
Mandatory for a manual Avamar deduplication backup. NSR_DEDUP* parameters are ignored.
Do not set this parameter for a scheduled Avamar • TRUE = Avamar deduplication is performed during
deduplication backup. an NMDA backup. If NSR_DEDUP_NODE is not
set, the backup fails.
Note: For a scheduled Avamar deduplication backup,
set the De-duplication Backup attribute in the
NetWorker Client resource, instead of setting this
parameter.

NSR_DEDUP_CACHE_ENABLED Specifies whether a hash cache is used during an • TRUE (default) = A hash cache is used to increase
Avamar deduplication backup. performance during an Avamar deduplication
Optional for an Avamar deduplication backup. backup. This value is recommended in most cases.
The nsravtar process creates the cache in the • FALSE = A hash cache is not used during an
/nsr/dedup/cache directory (or the equivalent directory Avamar deduplication backup. The parameter
on Windows). Use of the cache increases both the NSR_DEDUP_CACHE_TAG is ignored.
Avamar deduplication backup performance and disk
usage in the cache directory.

Note: Setting this parameter requires knowledge of the

potential effects on Avamar server operations.

298 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 32 Common NMDA parameters (page 4 of 7)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_DEDUP_CACHE_TAG Specifies the tag to be used to generate the hash cache • Application-specific default value:
name for an Avamar deduplication backup. - For DB2 (non-PowerSnap backup):
Mandatory for Informix parallel deduplication backups <DB2_node_name>_<backup_session_number>,
when caching is enabled. where the backup session number is supplied by
Mandatory for an Oracle deduplication backup the DB2 server.
configured without the wizard. - For DB2 (PowerSnap backup): / (forward slash).
- For Informix: <XBSA objectName.pathName>,
Optional for a DB2, Lotus, or Sybase deduplication supplied by the IDS server.
backup. - For Lotus: Same value as the save set name.
For an Oracle deduplication backup: - For Oracle: / (forward slash); all RMAN channels
• If multiple channels are used on Windows, set this (concurrent backup processes will have the same
parameter with the send command (not the parms cache tag, which will cause the backup to fail).
option) in the RMAN script. - For Sybase: <database>_<stripe_number> if a
• If automatic channel allocation is used (and multiple database is provided for backup; otherwise,
channels are not used on Windows), set this <instance>_<stripe_number>.
parameter with the parms option (not the send Default value is the recommended value for all
command) in the RMAN script. application backups except Informix parallel
• Set this parameter to a different value for each backups and Oracle backups.
channel; if the same tag value is used for more than • String value of the tag that will generate a
one channel, the deduplication backup fails. deduplication cache name. Do not include the client
name in the value. Set the parameter to a different
value for each concurrent NMDA process.
• Recommended value for an Oracle backup:
<ORACLE_SID or Net_service_name>_<channel_ID>
For example: ORCL102_t1

Note: The software uses the tag value to generate the

cache name through hashing. The actual cache name
does not contain this parameter value.

NSR_DEDUP_CHUNK_SIZE Specifies the size in bytes that the Avamar server uses • 0 (default). Signifies that variable sizes are used for
for data chunks in a deduplication backup. the data chunks, as determined by the Avamar
If a nonzero value is specified, the Avamar server uses server. This value is recommended in most cases.
the fixed size for all of the data chunks saved in the • Size (greater than zero) in bytes to use for all of the
deduplication backup. data chunks in a deduplication backup; for example,
Optional for an Avamar deduplication backup. 1024, 2048, 5096, 8194, or a value recommended in
the Avamar documentation.
Note: Setting this parameter requires knowledge of the
potential effects on Avamar server operations.

NSR_DEDUP_NODE Specifies the hostname of the Avamar server that will • Undefined (default).
store the deduplicated client data. The hostname must • Avamar server hostname set in the NetWorker
be the same as the Avamar server hostname set in the De-duplication Node resource.
NetWorker De-duplication Node resource.
Mandatory for a manual Avamar deduplication backup.
Do not set this parameter for a scheduled Avamar
deduplication backup.

Note: For a scheduled Avamar deduplication backup,

set the De-duplication Node attribute in the NetWorker
Client resource instead of setting this parameter.

Common NMDA parameters 299

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 32 Common NMDA parameters (page 5 of 7)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_DEVICE_INTERFACE Specifies whether the backup should always be stored • By default, backup data is stored on the most
on the Data Domain device from the given pool. appropriate device from a given pool, as determined
Optional for manual deduplication backups with the by NetWorker.
Data Domain media type only. Set this parameter when • DATA_DOMAIN = Backup data is always stored on
the backup pool contains a mixture of Data Domain the Data Domain device.
devices and other types of devices, for example, AFTD,
tape, and so on.
Do not set for a scheduled deduplication backup. For a
scheduled deduplication backup, ensure that the Data
Domain Backup attribute is set in the NMDA Client
resource when the pool has mixed devices.

NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST Specifies the directory location of all the NMDA log files, • By default, the NMDA log files are generated in the
including the debug, operational, and error logs. directory /nsr/apps/logs or
Optional for a backup or restore. NetWorker_install_path\apps\logs.
For an Oracle operation, set this parameter either in the • Valid directory pathname for the location where all
configuration file or with the parms option in the RMAN the NMDA log files are generated.
script (not with the send command or send option).

NSR_DIRECT_ACCESS Specifies the method used to perform a deduplication • Default (default) = Data Domain backup attempts to
backup to a NetWorker Data Domain device. use the client direct method that deduplicates data
This parameter is ignored during restores. on the NMDA host and sends unique blocks directly
“Deduplication backups and restores with Data to the Data Domain device. If the client direct
Domain” on page 27 provides information on restore method cannot be used, the backup is deduplicated
behavior. on the storage node.
• No = The client direct method is not attempted. The
Data Domain backup is deduplicated on the storage
node or the Data Domain device.
• Yes = Data Domain backup uses only the client
direct method. If this method cannot be used, the
backup fails.

NSR_DPRINTF Specifies whether NetWorker core debug messages • FALSE (default) = NetWorker core debug messages
are written to the NMDA debug log files, as described are not written to the NMDA debug log files.
for “NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL” on page 298. • TRUE = NetWorker core debug messages are
Optional for a backup or restore. Used for debugging written to the NMDA debug log files.
purposes with assistance from EMC Customer Support
only.
For an Oracle operation, set this parameter either in the
configuration file or with the parms option in the RMAN
script (not with the send command or send option).

NSR_ENCRYPTION_PHRASES Specifies one or more encryption phrases for • By default, an NMDA restore obtains the encryption
decrypting data during an NMDA restore. If this phrase from the Datazone pass phrase attribute of
parameter is not set, the NMDA restore obtains the the NetWorker Server resource, as described in
encryption phrase from the NetWorker server. “Datazone pass phrase” on page 61.
Optional for a restore. • One or more encryption phrases to use during an
If both of the following are true, set this parameter to the NMDA restore. Each phrase must be a string
phrase used to originally back up the data: enclosed in quotes. Multiple phrases must be
• The data that is being restored was backed up with separated by commas. For Oracle restores only, the
256-bit AES encryption. entire group of phrases must be surrounded by
outer quotes that are different from the inner quotes.
• The encryption phrase on the NetWorker server has For example, the parameter is set for an Oracle
changed since the data was backed up. restore:
For an Oracle restore, set this parameter with the send NSR_ENCRYPTION_PHRASES="’key1’,’key2’"
command in the RMAN script. - NMDA itself supports double ("), single (’), and
backward (‘) quotes.
- Certain shells, databases, or applications might not
support certain types of quotes.

300 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 32 Common NMDA parameters (page 6 of 7)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_NO_BUSY_ERRORS Specifies whether a backup or restore fails immediately • FALSE (default) = The backup or restore waits for
when the NetWorker server is busy or waits for the the NetWorker server to accept the connection.
NetWorker server to accept the connection. • TRUE = The backup or restore fails immediately
Optional for a backup or restore. when the NetWorker server is busy.

Note: This parameter has no effect for PowerSnap

snapshot backups or restores.

NSR_NWPATH Specifies the pathname of the directory that contains • Platform-specific default location of the NetWorker
the NetWorker binaries. client binaries (default).
Mandatory for the following Avamar deduplication • If an Avamar deduplication backup will be performed
backups: on 64-bit Windows, valid directory pathname of the
• Sybase deduplication backup on 64-bit Windows NetWorker client binaries.
• Any deduplication backup when 32-bit NMDA is • If NetWorker PowerSnap software (nsrsnapck
installed on 64-bit Windows binary) is installed in a nondefault location, valid
Mandatory for Oracle backup deletions if the NetWorker directory pathname of the PowerSnap binary.
client binaries are located in a nondefault directory on • If NetWorker client software (nsravtar binary) is
the Oracle Server host. installed in a nondefault location, valid directory
Recommended for a PowerSnap snapshot or pathname of the nsravtar binary.
deduplication backup or restore if any of the following is • If Sun-branded NetWorker software is used,
true: /usr/sbin/nsr.
• NetWorker PowerSnap software (nsrsnapck
binary) is installed in a nondefault location.
• NetWorker client software (nsravtar binary) is
installed in a nondefault location.
• Sun-branded NetWorker software is used.

Note: NSR_NWPATH is not supported for

deduplication PowerSnap backups or restores.

NSR_PHYSICAL_HOST_LICENSE Specifies whether the NMDA software is licensed per • FALSE (default) = NMDA is licensed per virtual
cluster node or per virtual cluster name in an cluster name in the active-passive cluster.
active-passive cluster environment with NetWorker • TRUE = NMDA is licensed per cluster node in the
server 7.6 SP1 or later. active-passive cluster.
Optional in an active-passive cluster.

NSR_RECOVER_POOL Specifies the name of the NetWorker volume pool to • Pool determined by the NetWorker server (default).
use for a restore. You can use this option to restore • Valid name of a NetWorker volume pool that
data from a specified volume pool if there are multiple contains a cloned backup to use for a restore.
copies (clones) of the backup on different volume pools.
Optional for a restore. Supported for a regular restore
only, not a PowerSnap snapshot restore.

NSR_SAVESET_BROWSE Specifies the browse policy of a backup, as the date • Browse policy specified in the NetWorker Client
when the entry for the backup is to be removed from the resource for the client (default).
NetWorker client index. • Valid date in nsr_getdate(3) format.
Optional for a manual backup.

Note: This parameter overrides the browse policy

specified in the NetWorker Client resource.

Common NMDA parameters 301

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 32 Common NMDA parameters (page 7 of 7)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_SAVESET_RETENTION Specifies the retention policy of a backup, as the date • Retention policy specified in the NetWorker Client
when the save set becomes recyclable. resource for the client (default).
Optional for a manual backup. • Valid date in nsr_getdate(3) format.

Note: This parameter overrides the retention policy

specified in the NetWorker Client resource.

NSR_SERVER Specifies the hostname of the NetWorker server to • Hostname of the NetWorker server detected on the
perform the backup or restore. client host (default).
Mandatory for a manual backup or restore if the • Valid hostname of a NetWorker server.
NetWorker server host is different from the client host.
For an Oracle operation:
• If backup copies will be generated, set this
parameter with the parms option in the RMAN script
(not with the send command or send option).
• If backup copies will not be generated, set this
parameter with the send command or send option
in the RMAN script.

POSTCMD Specifies a postprocessing script to be run after a • Undefined (default).

scheduled backup: • Valid complete pathname of a postprocessing script
• The postprocessing script file might need to have file. The pathname must not contain any spaces.
permissions that allow execution by the root user. For example, instead of setting POSTCMD to
• The script should return a zero value when it C:\Program Files\Legato\nsr\postcmd.bat, set the
succeeds, and a nonzero value when it fails. parameter to C:\Progra~1\Legato\nsr\postcmd.bat.
• On UNIX, the first line of the script must contain the • If the value is undefined or invalid, a postprocessing
following interpreter directive: script is not run after the scheduled backup.
#!/bin/sh
Optional for a scheduled backup. Do not set this
parameter for a manual backup.

Note: If the scheduled backup fails, the postprocessing

script is still run.
If the postprocessing script fails, an error message is
generated but the scheduled backup is reported as
successful.

PRECMD Specifies a preprocessing script to be run before a • Undefined (default).

scheduled backup: • Valid complete pathname of a preprocessing script
• The preprocessing script file might need to have file. The pathname must not contain any spaces.
permissions that allow execution by the root user. For example, instead of setting PRECMD to
• The script should return a zero value when it C:\Program Files\Legato\nsr\precmd.bat, set the
succeeds, and a nonzero value when it fails. The parameter to C:\Progra~1\Legato\nsr\precmd.bat.
return of a nonzero value causes the scheduled • If the value is undefined or invalid, a preprocessing
backup to fail. script is not run before the scheduled backup.
• On UNIX, the first line of the script must contain the
following interpreter directive:
#!/bin/sh
Optional for a scheduled backup. Do not set this
parameter for a manual backup.

Note: If the preprocessing script fails, a scheduled

backup is not performed, an error message is
generated, and any postprocessing script is not run.

302 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

DB2-specific NMDA parameters

For the following DB2 operations, all the parameters (both common and DB2-specific)
must be set in the NMDA configuration file, as described in “NMDA configuration
file” on page 294:
◆ DB2 scheduled backups configured without the wizard (client-side configuration)
◆ DB2 manual backups
◆ DB2 restores
“Common NMDA parameters” on page 296 describes the common parameters.
Table 33 on page 303 describes the DB2-specific parameters.
The parameters used for DB2 transaction log backups or restores should be set in a
separate configuration file, for example, nmda_db2_tlogs.cfg, which is specified in the
LOGARCHOPT1 setting. “Configure DB2 automatic transaction log backups” on
page 93 provides details.

Table 33 DB2-specific NMDA parameters (page 1 of 4)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

DB2_ALIAS Specifies the database alias of the DB2 database to be • Undefined (default).
backed up. This alias is typically the same as the • Valid DB2 Alias Name.
database name.
If not set, this parameter and the partition number are
derived from the DB2 save set name. The DB2 save
set will retain its current form of
DB2:/DB_NAME/NODEXXXX, where XXXX is the
partition number.
Optional for a DB2 scheduled backup only.

DB2_APPLY_NW_LEVELS Specifies whether backups are performed at the levels • FALSE (default) = Backup level set in the
specified in either the NMDA configuration file (for configuration file is used and mapped to the
example, nmda_db2.cfg) or in the NetWorker NetWorker schedule as follows:
Schedule resource. - DB2BACKUP_FULL is mapped to the full level in
Optional for a DB2 scheduled backup only. the schedule.
- DB2BACKUP_INCREMENTAL is mapped to the
incr level in the schedule.
- DDB2BACKUP_DELTA is mapped to whatever
level is set in the NetWorker schedule. If the
schedule does not specify a level from 1 to 9, then
level 9 is applied.
• TRUE = Backup is performed with the level defined
in the NetWorker schedule. Backup level set in the
configuration file is ignored. Levels in the
NetWorker schedule are mapped to DB2 levels as
follows:
- The full level is mapped to DB2BACKUP_FULL..
- The incr level is mapped to
DB2BACKUP_INCREMENTAL..
- The levels from 1 to 9 are mapped to
DDB2BACKUP_DELTA.

DB2-specific NMDA parameters 303

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 33 DB2-specific NMDA parameters (page 2 of 4)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

DB2INSTANCE (UNIX) Specifies the name (not the alias) of the DB2 instance • Undefined (default).
that contains the database to be backed up. • Valid name of the DB2 instance that contains the
Mandatory for a DB2 scheduled backup on UNIX only. database.

Note: Ensure that this parameter is set correctly. The

appropriate IBM DB2 documentation provides details.

DB2_NODE_NAME Specifies the alias of the DB2 instance to which the • Undefined (default).
user must connect for the backup. • Valid alias of the DB2 instance. If the node you are
Mandatory for a DB2 scheduled backup only. usiing is through a local connection, specify the
instance name.

DB2_OPTIONS Specifies the DB2 backup options. • Undefined (default).

Optional for a DB2 scheduled backup only. • One or more of the following values
(case-sensitive), where multiple values must be
Note: At a minimum, specify either DB2BACKUP_DB separated by commas:
or DB2BACKUP_TABLESPACE, not both. - DB2BACKUP_COMPRESS
- DB2BACKUP_DB
- DB2BACKUP_DELTA
- DB2BACKUP_EXCLUDE_LOGS
- DB2BACKUP_FULL
- DB2BACKUP_INCLUDE_LOGS
- DB2BACKUP_INCREMENTAL
- DB2BACKUP_OFFLINE
- DB2BACKUP_ONLINE
- DB2BACKUP_TABLESPACE

DB2_PARTITION_LIST Specifies which nodes to back up for a DPF backup. • Undefined (default). If not specified, the backup will
Optional for a DB2 DPF backup only. Set this back up a single node only.
parameter only for DB2 release 9.5 or later. • Value “all” or any integer that specifies an individual
node to back up. Use commas to separate multiple
integers.

DB2PATH (Windows) Specifies the path where the DB2 binaries are located. • Undefined (default).
Mandatory for a DB2 scheduled backup on Windows • Valid path where the DB2 binaries to be used for
systems only. the backup are located.

DB2_QUIESCE Specifies whether to quiesce the DB2 database during • FALSE (default) = DB2 database is not quiesced
a backup. during a backup.
Optional for a DB2 scheduled backup only. • TRUE = DB2 database is quiesced during a
backup.

Note: DB2_ALIAS parameter must also be set.

DB2_SESSIONS Specifies the number of parallel NMDA sessions to be • 1 (default).

run with the NetWorker server for the DB2 backup. • Integer number of parallel NMDA sessions.
Optional for a DB2 scheduled backup only.

DB2_TBS_LIST Specifies a list of tablespaces to be backed up. • Undefined (default).

Mandatory for a DB2 scheduled backup only. Set this • List of tablespace names, with multiple names
parameter for a tablespace backup only, not for a separated by commas. For example:
database backup. DB2_TBS_LIST = SYSCATSPACE,
USERSPACE1

304 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 33 DB2-specific NMDA parameters (page 3 of 4)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

DB2_USER Specifies the name of the DB2 user that connects to • Undefined (default).
the DB2 instance for the backup. The password of the • Valid DB2 username.
user is specified by the USER_PSWD parameter.
Mandatory for a DB2 scheduled backup only.

DB2_VENDOR_LIB_PATH Specifies the complete pathname of the NMDA shared • On UNIX systems, the default location is assumed
library on the DB2 host. if not specified. For example, on Solaris systems:
Path can point to various library versions to test and /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.so
evaluate hot fixes. • On Windows systems, the default path is obtained
Optional for a DB2 scheduled backup only. automatically from the registry.

INSTHOME (UNIX) Specifies the path where the DB2 binaries are located. • Undefined (default).
Mandatory for a DB2 scheduled backup on UNIX only. • Valid path where the DB2 binaries to be used for
the backup are located.

NSR_DB2_RESTORE_ Specifies the full timestamp for a tablespace to be • Undefined (default).

TABLESPACE_BKUP restored. • Full timestamp that includes the year, month, day,
Set this parameter if restoring a tablespace with no hour, minute, and second, in that order.
timestamp or only a partial timestamp. For example:
Optional for a DB2 restore only. 20081113142149
(A partial timestamp would be 20081113.)

NSR_DR_BACKUP_INFO Specifies whether additional disaster recovery and • TRUE (default) = Additional disaster recovery and
support information is backed up along with a support information is backed up, as detailed in
scheduled backup. “DB2 disaster recovery” on page 185.
If the additional information fails to be backed up, an • FALSE = Additional disaster recovery and support
error message is generated but the backup is reported information is not backed up.
as successful.
Optional for a DB2 scheduled backup only. Note: The following parameters must also be set:
- DB2_ALIAS
- DB2PATH (Windows)
- INSTHOME (UNIX)

NSR_DR_FILE_LIST Specifies a file that contains a list of files to be backed • Undefined (default).
up in addition to the database backup. These files will • Valid complete pathname of the file (containing the
be backed up as part of the scheduled backup, before list of extra files to be backed up).
any postprocessing script (defined with POSTCMD) For example, NSR_DR_FILE_LIST is set to
runs. nmda_savelist.txt, which is a file that contains:
If the extra files fail to be backed up, an error message /space12/vendor.cfg
is generated.
/space12/db2inst1/sqllib/db2nodes.cfg
Optional for a DB2 scheduled backup only.

NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL Specifies the volume pool to use for a backup of the • Predefined NetWorker volume pool named Default
transaction logs. (default).
Optional for a DB2 backup. • Valid name of a NetWorker volume pool for the
transaction logs.

NSR_MAX_START_RETRIES Specifies how many times the NMDA software • 4 (default).

attempts to start the DB2 backup before it fails. For • Integer number of DB2 backup retries.
example, the NetWorker server is not ready because
the devices are not mounted.
Optional for a DB2 backup.

DB2-specific NMDA parameters 305

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 33 DB2-specific NMDA parameters (page 4 of 4)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

USER_PSWD Specifies the encrypted password for the DB2 user • Undefined (default).
that connects to the DB2 instance, as specified by the • Encrypted DB2 user password, which must be set
DB2_USER parameter. with the nsrdaadmin -P command, for example:
Mandatory for a DB2 scheduled backup only. nsrdaadmin -P -z
configuration_file
The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and
Applications Command Reference Guide provides
details on the nsrdaadmin command.

Informix-specific NMDA parameters

For Informix scheduled backups configured without the wizard (client-side
configuration), all the parameters (both common and Informix-specific) must be set in
the NMDA configuration file, as described in “NMDA configuration file” on
page 294.
For Informix manual backups and restores, parameters must be set in the
environment.
“Common NMDA parameters” on page 296 describes the common parameters.
Table 34 on page 306 describes the Informix-specific parameters.

Table 34 Informix-specific NMDA parameters (page 1 of 2)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

DO_LOGFILE_BACKUPS Specifies whether to perform the logical log file backup • TRUE (default) = Logical log file backup is
after the dbspace backup. performed after the dbspace backup.
Optional for an Informix scheduled backup only. • FALSE = Logical log file backup is not performed
after the dbspace backup.
Note: If DO_WHOLE_SYSTEM_BACKUP is set to
TRUE, DO_LOGFILE_BACKUPS is ignored. Note: If DO_LOGFILE_BACKUPS is set to TRUE, the
onbar -b -l -c command is run after the backups of any
Informix dbspaces are completed.

DO_WHOLE_SYSTEM_BACKUP Specifies whether to back up the logical log files during • TRUE (default) = Logical log files are backed up
a scheduled backup. during a scheduled backup. This is equivalent to
Optional for an Informix scheduled backup only. running onbar with the -w option.
• FALSE = Logical log files are not backed up during
Note: If DO_WHOLE_SYSTEM_BACKUP is set to a scheduled backup.
TRUE, DO_LOGFILE_BACKUPS is ignored.

INFORMIXDIR Specifies the pathname of the directory where the • Undefined (default).
Informix RDBMS is installed. • Valid directory pathname of the Informix RDBMS
Mandatory for an Informix scheduled backup only. installation.

INFORMIXSQLHOSTS Specifies the name of the Informix SQL hosts file. • Undefined (default).
Mandatory for an Informix scheduled backup on UNIX • Valid name of the Informix SQL hosts file.
only.
Optional for an Informix scheduled backup on
Windows systems only.

306 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 34 Informix-specific NMDA parameters (page 2 of 2)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_DR_BACKUP_INFO Specifies whether an additional set of files is backed • TRUE (default) = The following additional
up along with a scheduled backup, as additional information is backed up with a scheduled backup:
disaster recovery and support information. - Informix ONCONFIG file
If the additional files fail to be backed up, an error - ixbar file
message is generated but the backup is reported as - onconfig boot file
successful. - sqlhosts file (UNIX only)
Optional for an Informix scheduled backup only. - sm_versions file
- Copy of Windows registry information under
Note: If Avamar deduplication is enabled, the boot file "HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Informix"
(Windows only)
is not deduplicated.
• FALSE = The additional information is not backed
up with a scheduled backup.

NSR_DR_FILE_LIST Specifies a file that contains a list of files to be backed • Undefined (default).
up in addition to the database backup. These files will • Valid complete pathname of the file that contains
be backed up as part of the scheduled backup, before the list of extra files to be backed up.
any postprocessing script (defined with POSTCMD) For example, NSR_DR_FILE_LIST is set to
runs. nmda_savelist.txt, which is a file that contains a list
If the extra files fail to be backed up, an error message of the extra file pathnames.
is generated but the backup is reported as successful.
Optional for an Informix scheduled backup only. Note: NSR_DR_BACKUP_INFO must also be set to
TRUE to enable the NSR_DR_FILE_LIST setting.

NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL Specifies the volume pool to use for a backup of the • Predefined NetWorker volume pool named Default
logical logs. (default).
Optional for an Informix scheduled backup only. • Valid name of a NetWorker volume pool for the
logical logs.

ONCONFIG Specifies the name of the Informix RDBMS • Undefined (default).

configuration file. • Valid name of the Informix RDBMS configuration
Mandatory for an Informix scheduled backup only. file.

Lotus-specific NMDA parameters

For the following Lotus operations, all the parameters (both common and
Lotus-specific) must be set in the NMDA configuration file, as described in “NMDA
configuration file” on page 294:
◆ Lotus scheduled backups configured without the wizard (client-side
configuration)
◆ Lotus manual backups
◆ Lotus restores
“Common NMDA parameters” on page 296 describes the common parameters.
Table 35 on page 308 describes the Lotus-specific parameters.

Lotus-specific NMDA parameters 307

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 35 Lotus-specific NMDA parameters (page 1 of 6)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

LOTUS_USER Specifies the name of the Lotus Domino or Notes user. • Undefined (default).
Mandatory for a Lotus scheduled backup on UNIX and • Valid name of the Lotus Domino or Notes user.
Linux.

Notes_ExecDirectory Specifies the complete pathname of the Lotus Domino • Undefined (default).
or Notes directory that contains the application library. • Valid pathname of the Lotus Domino or Notes
Mandatory for a Lotus backup or restore. directory that contains the libnotes.xx or nnotes.dll
library file.

NSR_APPLY_LOGS Specifies whether to apply the transaction logs after a • TRUE (default) = Transaction logs are applied after
Lotus backup is restored. the backup is restored.
Optional for a Lotus restore. • FALSE = Transaction logs are not applied after the
backup is restored.

NSR_AUTO_RESTORE Specifies whether the Lotus database or file restore • FALSE (default) = Lotus database or file restore
occurs automatically without user interaction. occurs with user interaction.
Optional for a Lotus restore. • TRUE = Lotus database or file restore occurs
automatically without user interaction.

NSR_BACKUP_ALL_EXTENSIONS Specifies whether all Lotus files or only the default set • FALSE (default) = Only Lotus files with names
of Lotus files (with specific filename extensions) are ending in .box, .dic, .dsk, .id, .ncf, .njf, .nsf, and .ntf
backed up. and the notes.ini file in the specific directory are
Optional for a Lotus backup. backed up.
• TRUE = All Lotus files (with names ending in all
extensions) are backed up.

NSR_BACKUP_LEVEL Specifies the level of Lotus backup to perform. • full (default) = Perform a full backup.
Optional for a Lotus manual backup. Do not set this • incr = Perform an incremental backup.
parameter for a scheduled backup.

NSR_BACKUP_LOGS_MODE Specifies the level of transaction log backup to perform • 0 (default) = Transaction logs are not processed.
during a full backup. • 1 = Transaction logs are backed up and marked as
Optional for a Lotus full backup only. Ignored for an reusable.
incremental backup. • 2 = Transaction logs are marked as reusable, but
are not backed up.
Note: Transaction logs are always backed up during a
Lotus incremental backup. Note: Use the NSR_BACKUP_LOGS_MODE = 2
setting with extreme caution. With this setting, the
transaction logs are not backed up and will be recycled
by the Domino server. When a log backup is missing,
you might not be able to recover a database to any
point in time; only the restore to the time of a given
backup is guaranteed.

NSR_BACKUP_LOTUS_DIR Specifies whether files in the Lotus Domino or Notes • FALSE (default) = Lotus directories and files
data directory are backed up. specified with NSR_BACKUP_PATHS are backed
• On UNIX systems, the data directory is defined as up.
the first Lotus data directory that NMDA finds in the • TRUE = Lotus data directory is backed up. On
parameter PATH. Windows systems, the notes.ini file is included in
• On Windows systems, the data directory is defined the backup, whether or not it resides in the default
as the first Lotus data directory that NMDA finds in data directory.
the Windows registry.
Optional for a Lotus backup. Note: The NSR_BACKUP_ALL_EXTENSIONS setting
determines whether all Lotus files or only the default
Note: You cannot use this parameter with the set of Lotus files (with specific filename extensions) in
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS parameter. the Lotus data directory are backed up.

308 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 35 Lotus-specific NMDA parameters (page 2 of 6)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_BACKUP_PATHS For a backup or restore, specifies the complete • Undefined (default).

pathnames of one or more directories or files or both. • For a backup or restore, valid pathnames of one or
“Wildcard support for Lotus operations” on page 313 more directories or files or both, with multiple
provides details on using wildcards in the pathnames. names being separated by commas. The
Optional for a Lotus backup or restore. pathnames must not include the NOTES: prefix.
• For a restore only, NOTES: keyword by itself,
Note: For a backup, you cannot use this parameter specifying to restore all the Lotus data backed up
with the NSR_BACKUP_LOTUS_DIR parameter. from the given client. Do not use the keyword for a
For a restore, you cannot use this parameter with the partitioned Domino server or multiple Domino
NSR_RECOV_LIST_FILE parameter. installations on a single UNIX host.

NSR_BROWSELIST_CACHE_DEST Specifies the complete pathname of a directory to • By default, the browselist file is created in this
contain the browselist file, a temporary file that stores directory:
browselist data during a backup. - /nsr/apps/tmp (UNIX)
The first 10 MB of generated browselist data is stored - NetWorker_install_path\apps\tmp (Windows)
in a memory cache. Additional browselist data is • Valid complete pathname of a directory on a
stored in the browselist file on disk, named writable device that will contain the browselist file.
BrowselistCache_PID[_PID], where PID is the process
ID. The browselist file is deleted when the backup
ends or is terminated in a controlled manner.
Optional for a Lotus backup.

NSR_CATALOGFILE Specifies the complete pathname of the backup • If not specified, the backup catalog file is not
catalog file, which contains detailed information about generated (default).
each file that is backed up. The information is • Valid complete pathname of a backup catalog file.
appended to the file after each backup. The directory path to the file must exist. The file is
created during the backup if it does not exist.
Note: The catalog file does not list the files from an
integrated DAOS backup, but does list the files from a
stand-alone DAOS backup. The catalog file also
includes all the other details for a DAOS backup, same
as for other Lotus backups.

If the specified catalog file cannot be accessed, the

backup still proceeds as usual. At the end of the
backup, an error message appears for the failed
catalog file operation.
Optional for a Lotus backup.

NSR_COMFORT_SPAN Specifies the comfort span value to use for an • Undefined (default).
incremental backup. “Comfort span” on page 96 • Integer value between 65536 and 65536000,
provides details on the comfort span. inclusive.
Optional for a Lotus incremental backup.

NSR_CROSS_MOUNT_POINTS Specifies whether the NMDA software crosses mount • FALSE (default) = Lotus backup does not cross
points during a Lotus backup. mount points.
Optional for a Lotus backup. • TRUE = Lotus backup crosses mount points.

NSR_DBIID Specifies that NMDA assigns either a new DBIID, or • Undefined (default).
both a new DBIID and new replica ID, to a restored • 1 = A new DBIID is assigned to the restored
database. database.
Optional for a Lotus restore. • 2 = A new DBIID and a new replica ID are assigned
to the restored database.

Lotus-specific NMDA parameters 309

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 35 Lotus-specific NMDA parameters (page 3 of 6)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_EXCLUDE_FILE Specifies the complete pathname of a file that lists file • If not specified, then no pathnames are excluded
pathnames to exclude from the Lotus backup. from the backup paths that the user specifies.
Optional for a Lotus backup. • Valid complete pathname of a file that lists file
“Wildcard support for Lotus operations” on page 313 paths to exclude from the Lotus backup.
provides details on using wildcards in the pathnames.

Note: If both NSR_EXCLUDE_FILE and

NSR_EXCLUDE_LIST are set, then all the files and
objects specified through both parameters are
excluded from the Lotus backup.
NSR_EXCLUDE_FILE is a deprecated parameter that
will be removed in a future release. Use the
NSR_EXCLUDE_LIST parameter instead.

NSR_EXCLUDE_LIST Specifies the pathnames of database files or • If not specified, then no pathnames are excluded
directories to exclude from the Lotus backup. If a from the backup paths that the user specifies.
directory is specified, then all its data (including all • Valid pathnames of one or more database objects
subdirectories) is excluded from the backup. to exclude from the Lotus backup, with multiple
Optional for a Lotus backup. names being separated by commas.
“Wildcard support for Lotus operations” on page 313
provides details on using wildcards in the pathnames.

Note: If both NSR_EXCLUDE_LIST and

NSR_EXCLUDE_FILE are set, then all the files and
objects specified through both parameters are
excluded from the Lotus backup.

NSR_FOLLOW_LINKS Specifies which of the following actions occur when • TRUE (default) = Both the Lotus link files and the
Lotus link files are to be backed up or restored: data files or directories that the links point to are
• Both the Lotus link files and the data files or backed up or restored.
directories that the link files point to are backed up • FALSE = Only the Lotus link files are backed up or
or restored. restored.
• Only the Lotus link files are backed up or restored.
Optional for a Lotus backup or restore.

NSR_LOG_DIR Specifies the complete pathname of the log directory • Undefined (default).
of a partitioned Domino server for disaster recovery • Valid complete pathname of the log directory.
only.
Optional for a Lotus restore.

NSR_LOTUS_DATA_DIR Specifies the complete pathname of the directory that • Undefined (default).
contains the Lotus Notes data. • Valid complete pathname of the directory that
Optional for a Lotus backup. Required for a partitioned contains the Lotus Notes data.
Domino server or multiple Domino installations.

Note: This parameter does not specify that the data

will be backed up.

NSR_MAX_START_RETRIES Specifies how many times the NMDA software • 4 (default).

attempts to start the Lotus backup before it fails. For • Integer number of Lotus backup retries.
example, the NetWorker server is not ready because
the devices are not mounted.
Optional for a Lotus backup.

310 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 35 Lotus-specific NMDA parameters (page 4 of 6)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_MAX_TXN_LOGS Specifies the number of transaction logs that are • 10 logs per save set (default).
stored in a single save set during a Lotus backup. • Integer number of logs per save set.
The logs are marked reusable after the successful
backup of all the logs in the save set. If a backup fails,
then none of the logs from the incomplete save set are
marked reusable.
Optional for a Lotus backup of transaction logs.

NSR_NO_NOTES_INIT Specifies whether the Notes API is initialized during a • FALSE (default) = Notes API is initialized during the
disaster recovery. disaster recovery.
Optional for a Lotus restore. • TRUE = Notes API is not initialized during the
disaster recovery.

NSR_NOTES_CONNECT_TIMEOUT Specifies a timeout value in seconds during which • 30 (default); signifies a timeout of 30 seconds.
NMDA retries a Lotus backup in either of the following • Integer value of timeout in seconds.
cases:
• A Lotus database is offline while the Domino server
runs a fixup command against the database.
• In-place compaction of a Lotus database is in
progress on the Domino server.
NMDA cannot back up a database in either of these
cases. NMDA retries the database backup after every
five seconds, until either the database becomes
accessible or the timeout is reached. If the timeout is
reached first:
• If NSR_SKIPDBERRORS = TRUE, NMDA skips
the database and proceeds to back up the next
database.
• If NSR_SKIPDBERRORS = FALSE, NMDA fails
the backup with an error.
Optional for a Lotus backup.

NSR_NOTES_INI_PATH Specifies the complete pathname of the notes.ini file, • Undefined (default).
including the filename. • Valid complete pathname of the notes.ini file.
Recommended for a Lotus backup or restore.

NSR_NUMBER_LOGS Specifies the number of transaction logs to recover • Undefined (default).

during a disaster recovery only. • Integer number of transaction logs to recover
Optional for a Lotus restore. during a disaster recovery.

NSR_PARALLELISM Specifies the maximum number of concurrent backup • Value determined by the NetWorker server, based
or restore streams that can be sent to or from the on the NetWorker client and server parallelisms
NetWorker server during a backup or restore. (default).
Optional for a Lotus backup or restore. • Integer number of the maximum concurrent backup
or restore streams.

NSR_PREFETCH_LOGS Specifies the number of transaction log files that the • 0 (default) = NMDA does not prefetch extra logs.
NMDA software retrieves in advance when it is NMDA restores only a log that is requested by
applying logs to a restored Lotus database. Domino.
Optional for a Lotus restore. • Integer number of transaction logs retrieved in
advance, typically the number of logs backed up in
a single backup.

Lotus-specific NMDA parameters 311

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 35 Lotus-specific NMDA parameters (page 5 of 6)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_RECOV_INTERACT Specifies the default overwrite response when the • Undefined (default).
name of a file being restored conflicts with an existing • n = Do not restore the current file.
filename. • N = Do not restore any files with conflicting names.
The value of the parameter must be a single letter: No prompts appear.
• If the letter is lowercase, it applies to the current file • y = Overwrite the existing file with the restored file.
only, and the overwrite prompt continues to appear • Y = Overwrite all existing files with conflicting
for subsequent files. names. No prompts appear.
• If the letter is uppercase, it applies to all the files • r = If restoring a logged database, do not rename
being restored and no prompts appear unless as the existing file, and restore the backed-up file with
specified for the R value. a name that begins with a tilde (~). If restoring a
Optional for a Lotus restore. database that is not logged, rename the existing file
by adding a tilde to the start of the filename, and
restore the backed-up file with its original name.
• R = Apply the actions of the r option to all existing
files with conflicting names. No prompts appear.

NSR_RECOV_LIST_FILE Specifies the complete pathname of a file that lists the • Undefined (default).
files or directories to restore. • Valid complete pathname of a file that lists Lotus
Optional for a Lotus restore. Notes files or directories to restore. The file must
contain one pathname per line, without any
Note: You cannot use this parameter with the commas or other punctuation.
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS parameter.

NSR_RECOVER_TIME Specifies the point in time to which a database will be • By default, NMDA recovers the following:
recovered. - Recovers a database in archived log mode to the
Optional for a Lotus restore or recovery. current time.
“Setting the NSR_RECOVER_TIME parameter” on - Restores a database not in archived log mode to
page 314 provides details on setting this parameter. the most recent available backup.
• Valid time in nsr_getdate(3) format.

NSR_RELOCATION_DEST Specifies the complete pathname of a directory to • Undefined (default).

which the Lotus database files are restored. • Valid complete pathname of the directory to which
Optional for a Lotus restore. the database files are restored.

NSR_RESOURCE_DIR Specifies the location of the directory that contains the • Undefined (default).
Lotus resource files. • Valid complete pathname of the Lotus directory that
Mandatory for a Lotus backup on UNIX only. contains the resource files.

NSR_RETAIN_NUM_LOGS Specifies the number of archived transaction logs to • 0 = Mark all transaction logs reusable after a
retain after a Lotus backup without marking them backup (default).
reusable. • 1 or greater = Number of transaction logs to retain
Optional for a Lotus backup. without marking them reusable. If the number is
greater than the number of logs involved in the
backup, retain all the logs without marking them
reusable.

NSR_SAVESET_NAME Specifies the base name for the save sets of a Lotus • Undefined (default).
DAOS backup. If more than one save set is created, • Base name to use for DAOS backup save sets, for
NMDA appends a numeric extension to the name to example, notes_DAOS.
create the additional save set names.
Optional for a Lotus DAOS backup only.

312 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 35 Lotus-specific NMDA parameters (page 6 of 6)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_SKIPDBERRORS Specifies whether NMDA continues a Notes database • FALSE (default) = NMDA does not continue a
backup if a noncritical error is encountered while Notes database backup if a noncritical error is
backing up Notes database files (not flat files). encountered.
A noncritical error is one that allows NMDA to recover • TRUE = NMDA continues a Notes database
from the problem, and to continue operations without backup if a noncritical error is encountered.
compromising the backup data integrity. A noncritical
error occurs when NMDA cannot access a Notes Note: If NSR_SKIPDBERRORS is set to TRUE, check
database while generating a list of files to back up. In the output log after a backup to see if any databases
this case, the file is skipped and the backup continues. were skipped due to errors.
A critical error occurs later if NMDA cannot access the
file while trying to read the data to be saved. This error
is critical because NMDA cannot safely skip the file
and continue.
During the backup of multiple databases,
NSR_SKIPDBERRORS enables NMDA to skip the
backup of problematic databases while continuing to
back up good databases.
Optional for a Lotus backup.

NSR_VERBOSITY Specifies whether NMDA prints a list of backed-up or • TRUE (default) = Successfully backed-up or
restored files to standard output or to the NetWorker recovered pathnames are written to standard
User for Lotus GUI. output or to the NetWorker User for Lotus GUI.
Optional for a manual backup or restore. • FALSE = Successfully backed-up or recovered
pathnames are not written to standard output or to
the NetWorker User for Lotus GUI.

NSR_XBSA_DEBUG Specifies whether debug messages from the • FALSE (default) = XBSA library debug messages
NetWorker XBSA library are written to the NMDA are not written to the NMDA Lotus log.
Lotus log at the level set by NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL, • TRUE = XBSA library debug messages are written
described in “NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL” on page 298. to the NMDA Lotus log.
Optional for a backup or restore.

PATH Specifies the pathnames of the Domino data directory • Undefined (default).
and Lotus software directory. • Valid directory pathnames of the Domino data
Recommended for a Lotus backup or restore. directory and the directory where the Lotus binaries
are installed.

Wildcard support for Lotus operations

For a client-side configuration of a Lotus scheduled or manual backup (configured
with the NMC method, not with the wizard), you can use wildcards to specify the
pathnames of Lotus directories or files (or both) to be backed up or restored with the
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS parameter in the NMDA configuration file.
You can also use wildcards to specify the pathnames of Lotus directories or files (or
both) to be excluded from a backup by setting the NSR_EXCLUDE_LIST or
NSR_EXCLUDE_FILE parameter in the NMDA configuration file or the Exclude Path
field in the wizard.
The following restrictions apply to using wildcards that are expanded by NMDA:
◆ Wildcard expansion supports only asterisks (*) and question marks (?):
• An asterisk (*) stands for any number of characters, including zero.
• A question mark (?) stands for only one character.

Lotus-specific NMDA parameters 313

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

For example:
• *.nsf matches abc.nsf and a.nsf, but not data.ntf.
• *.n?f matches abc.nsf, a.nsf, and data.ntf, but not test.nf.
• * matches all filenames.
• ?.nsf matches a.nsf, b.nsf, and c.nsf, but not ab.nsf.
◆ For NSR_BACKUP_PATHS, a wildcard can be used in the last component only of
a pathname. For example, the following includes an invalid pathname that the
NMDA software cannot expand:
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = /local/*/*.nsf
This restriction does not apply to the exclusion of files from backup through the
NSR_EXCLUDE_LIST or NSR_EXCLUDE_FILE parameter or the wizard. The
following pathname is valid and supported by the NMDA software:
NSR_EXCLUDE_LIST = /local/*/*.nsf
This setting excludes all the files under /local and its subfolders with filenames
such as address.nsf and nmda_d5.nsf.

Setting the NSR_RECOVER_TIME parameter

The information in this section applies to both the nsrnotesrc and nsrdocrc
commands.
To restore a database that is not in archived log mode or to restore a nondatabase
(flat) file from a backup earlier than the last one, set the NSR_RECOVER_TIME
parameter to the time of that backup or to a time after that backup but before the next
backup. Use the nsrinfo command to determine the time. For example:

> nsrinfo -n notes -s bu-terminator mail1 | grep test_file

NOTES:/C:/IBM/Lotus/Domino/data/test_file.nsf, date=1304540291
2011/05/04 16:18:11
NOTES:/C:/IBM/Lotus/Domino/data/test_file.nsf, date=1304453871
2011/05/03 16:17:51
NOTES:/C:/IBM/Lotus/Domino/data/test_file.nsf, date=1304367455
2011/05/02 16:17:35

If test_file.nsf is a database in nonarchived log mode, then setting

NSR_RECOVER_TIME to any time between 1304453871 (May 3rd backup) and
1304540290 (1 second before the May 4th backup) restores the database to its state at
the time of the backup performed on May 3rd.
If test_file.nsf is a database in archived log mode, then setting NSR_RECOVER_TIME
to any time between 1304458034 and 1304540290 restores the database from the
May 3rd backup and then applies the transaction logs to the specified point in time.
The 1304458034 time is the save time of the directory that contains the test_file.nsf file
and not the save time of the file itself. For example:

> nsrinfo -n notes -s bu-terminator –V mail1 | grep 05/03

NOTES:/C:/IBM/Lotus/Domino/data/, date=1304458034 2011/05/03 17:27:14

NOTES:/C:/IBM/Lotus/Domino/data/test_file.nsf, date=1304453871
2011/05/03 16:17:51

314 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Setting NSR_RECOVER_TIME to any time between the start and end time of a
backup (for example, between 1304453871 and 1304458034 for the May 3rd backup)
might cause the following error to be generated when recovering a logged database:
Backup was later than recovery point in time
To prevent this error, ensure that NSR_RECOVER_TIME is set to a time outside of
the backup window.

Note: The parameter cannot be set to a value earlier than the time of the first backup because
the client file index does not have any entries before that time.

Oracle-specific NMDA parameters

You must set the following NMDA parameters for Oracle scheduled backups in the
NMDA configuration file, as described in “NMDA configuration file” on page 294:
◆ NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL (enables debug messages for scheduled backups)
◆ NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST (changes the diagnostic file locations for scheduled
backups)
◆ NSR_DPRINTF (enables DPRINTF debug messages for scheduled backups)
◆ NSR_RMAN_ARGUMENTS
◆ ORACLE_HOME
◆ ORACLE_SID
◆ ORACLE_USER
◆ PRECMD
◆ POSTCMD
◆ TNS_ADMIN
You must set all the other NMDA parameters for Oracle operations in the RMAN
script only.
When you set an NMDA parameter in the RMAN script, use one of the following
methods unless specified otherwise in Table 32 on page 296 (common parameters) or
Table 36 on page 316 (Oracle-specific parameters):
◆ If you do not use the automatic channels or backup copies feature, set the
parameter with the RMAN send command (recommended), as one of the following:
• The rman send command on the operating system command line for manual
backups.
• The send command in the RMAN session or script.
◆ If you use the automatic channels or backup copies feature, set the parameter
with the parms option in the configure channel command.

Note: With Oracle version 11gR2 or later, use parms ‘SBT_PARMS=(...)’ instead of
parms ‘ENV=(...)’.

“Automatic channel allocation” on page 38 provides more details on automatic

channels. “Backup copies” on page 39 provides more details on backup copies.

Oracle-specific NMDA parameters 315

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Setting a parameter through the parms ‘ENV=(...)’option is not recommended. On

Windows systems, when a parameter is set through the parms ‘ENV=(...)’ option, the
value of that parameter remains in effect for all subsequent allocated channels, and
for all subsequent RMAN sessions until one of the following occurs:
◆ The Oracle database is shut down.
◆ The parameter is set to a different value by using the parms ‘ENV=(...)’ option for
subsequent allocated channels.
◆ The parameter is unset for the channel by using the parms ‘ENV=(...)’ option, as
in the following example:
run {
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’
parms ’ENV=(NSR_SERVER=,NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=)’;
:
:
release channel t1;
}

Note: On Windows systems, this does not occur if the parameters are set with the send
command in all RMAN sessions.

Table 36 Oracle-specific NMDA parameters (page 1 of 3)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL1 Specifies the name of the volume pool to use for a • Undefined (default).
duplexed Oracle backup. • Valid NetWorker pool name that is different from the
Mandatory for an Oracle manual backup that uses the name used by the parameter
set duplex command (with duplex set to 2, 3, or 4) or NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL,
other RMAN commands to generate two or more NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL2, or
backup copies. NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL3.
Set this parameter with the parms option in the RMAN
script (not with the send command or send option).

NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL2 Specifies the name of the volume pool to use for a • Undefined (default).
duplexed Oracle backup. • Valid NetWorker pool name that is different from the
Mandatory for an Oracle manual backup that uses the name used by the parameter
set duplex command (with duplex set to 3 or 4) or NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL,
other RMAN commands to generate three or more NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL1, or
backup copies. NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL3.
Set this parameter with the parms option in the RMAN
script (not with the send command or send option).

NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL3 Specifies the name of the volume pool to use for a • Undefined (default).
duplexed Oracle backup. • Valid NetWorker pool name that is different from the
Mandatory for an Oracle manual backup that uses the name used by the parameter
set duplex command (with duplex set to 4) or other NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL,
RMAN commands to generate four backup copies. NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL1, or
Set this parameter with the parms option in the RMAN NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL2.
script (not with the send command or send option).

NSR_MMDB_RETRY_TIME Specifies the number of minutes that NMDA should try • 0 (default) = NMDA does not try to reconnect to the
to connect to the NetWorker media database before media database if the first attempt fails.
terminating the operation (backup, restore, or RMAN • Valid integer = Number of minutes that NMDA tries
maintenance commands). When the media database is to connect to the media database.
busy, NMDA tries to reconnect after sleeping for five
seconds between attempts.
Optional for an Oracle backup or retore.

316 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 36 Oracle-specific NMDA parameters (page 2 of 3)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_NO_MULTIPLEX When set for a specific RMAN channel, specifies • FALSE (default) = Multiplexing is enabled on the
whether multiplexing is disabled during a backup on the device that the RMAN channel is using.
NetWorker device that the RMAN channel is using. If • TRUE = Multiplexing is disabled on the device that
multiplexing is disabled, no other save sets can be the RMAN channel is using.
written to the device.
Optional for an Oracle backup. Note: Do not set this parameter to TRUE if you use a
To optimize restore operations, RMAN requires Oracle random access NetWorker device, such as an
backups not to be multiplexed. advanced file device.
Setting the parameter to TRUE may affect the backup
performance. For example, the device may sit idle
during part of the backup. If the performance is
adversely affected, reset the parameter to FALSE.

NSR_PROXY_PFILE Specifies the complete pathname of a configuration file • Undefined (default).

that contains PowerSnap parameter settings for a • Valid pathname of the configuration file.
snapshot backup or restore.
Mandatory for an Oracle backup or restore if Note: If undefined or an invalid pathname, parameter
PowerSnap parameters are set in a configuration file. settings in the preferred configuration file are ignored.
Supported for a PowerSnap snapshot backup or restore
only.

NSR_RETENTION_DISABLED Specifies whether the NetWorker browse and retention • FALSE (default) = NetWorker browse and retention
policies are disabled. policies are enabled and used to manage the
Optional for an Oracle backup. lifecycle of the NMDA backup data.
Set this parameter to TRUE to use Oracle policies only • TRUE = NetWorker browse and retention policies
(not NetWorker policies) to manage the backup data are disabled. Only Oracle policies are used to
lifecycle. Then the RMAN catalog and NetWorker manage the lifecycle of the NMDA backup data.
indexes cannot become unsynchronized, for example,
when a NetWorker index entry is expired but the
corresponding RMAN catalog entry is not expired.

NSR_RMAN_ARGUMENTS Specifies any valid combination of options for the • Undefined (default).
RMAN executable, rman(.exe). The appropriate Oracle • String that contains any valid combination of options
Recovery Manager documentation provides details on for the RMAN executable, rman(.exe).
the valid options. For example, set the parameter to append RMAN
Optional for an Oracle scheduled backup. output to message log file /nsr/apps/logs/msglog.log
Set this parameter in the configuration file only. if a Recovery Catalog is not used:
NSR_RMAN_ARGUMENTS=nocatalog
msglog ’/nsr/apps/logs/msglog.log’
append

NSR_SERVER_NIC Specifies the name of a network interface card (NIC) on • Undefined (default).
a NetWorker server. • Valid name of a NetWorker server NIC.
Optional for an Oracle backup or restore.
When this parameter is set with the RMAN send
command for an allocated channel, its value overrides
the NSR_SERVER setting for that channel only.

Note: You must explicitly set this parameter for each

channel to which it applies. Setting this parameter is the
only supported way to override the NSR_SERVER
value for a scheduled backup.

ORACLE_HOME Specifies the home directory pathname of the Oracle • Undefined (default).
Server installation. • Valid pathname of the home directory of the Oracle
Mandatory for an Oracle scheduled backup. Server installation.
Set this parameter in the configuration file only.

Oracle-specific NMDA parameters 317

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 36 Oracle-specific NMDA parameters (page 3 of 3)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

ORACLE_SID Specifies the system identifier (SID) value of the Oracle • Undefined (default).
database to be backed up. • Valid SID value of the Oracle database to be backed
Mandatory for an Oracle scheduled backup in the up.
following cases: For example, if catalog synchronization is enabled
• The connect target and connect rcvcat for PowerSnap snapshot backups, and orcl10 is the
commands for the scheduled backup are stored in a SID of the Oracle database to be backed up:
separate file, and the connect commands are ORACLE_SID=orcl10
invoked in the RMAN script by using the @
command.
• Save set bundling is enabled for the scheduled
backup.
• A PowerSnap snapshot backup is performed with
catalog synchronization enabled. Chapter 8,
“Snapshot Backups and Restores,” provides details
on PowerSnap snapshot backups.
• Oracle operating system authentication is used on
UNIX or Linux. ORACLE_USER must also be set,
as described in “ORACLE_USER (UNIX)” on
page 318.
Set this parameter in the configuration file only.

ORACLE_USER (UNIX) To enable a scheduled backup for operating system • Undefined (default).
authentication, specifies the username of the Oracle • Valid username of the Oracle operating system user
operating system user that is set up to connect to the that is set up to connect to the Oracle database
Oracle database through operating system through operating system authentication.
authentication. ORACLE_SID must also be set, as
described in “ORACLE_SID” on page 318.
Optional for an Oracle scheduled backup in a
client-side configuration (configured with the NMC
method, not the wizard) on UNIX systems only.
Set this parameter in the configuration file only.

Note: Using ORACLE_USER to perform an Oracle

backup through operating system authentication is not
supported for the following:
- Scheduled backup that is configured through the
configuration wizard.
- Scheduled backup on a Windows system.
- Probe-based backup.
- PowerSnap snapshot backup.

TNS_ADMIN Specifies the directory pathname of the Oracle Net • Undefined (default).
configuration files. • Valid pathname of the directory that contains the
Mandatory for an Oracle scheduled backup if Oracle Oracle Net configuration files.
Net configuration files are located in a directory other
than the default $ORACLE_HOME/network/admin
directory.
Set this parameter in the configuration file only.

318 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Sybase-specific NMDA parameters

For the following Sybase operations, all the parameters (both common and
Sybase-specific) must be set in the NMDA configuration file, as described in “NMDA
configuration file” on page 294:
◆ Sybase scheduled backups configured without the wizard (client-side
configuration)
◆ Sybase manual backups
For Sybase restores:
◆ Set a parameter as a nsrsybrc command line option, if possible. The EMC
NetWorker Command Reference Guide and UNIX man pages provide more details
on the nsrsybrc command.
◆ If a parameter cannot be set as a nsrsybrc command line option, then set the
parameter in the environment.
“Common NMDA parameters” on page 296 describes the common parameters.
Table 37 on page 319 describes the Sybase-specific parameters.

Table 37 Sybase-specific NMDA parameters (page 1 of 4)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

DBCCOPT Specifies one or more -o options to be passed to the • Undefined (default).

nsrsybcc command, which performs a database • One or more of the following options of the
consistency check for the Sybase backup. nsrsybcc command, with a single option or
Optional for a Sybase backup. multiple space-separated options enclosed in
The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and double quotes:
Applications Command Reference Guide provides -o ckdb
details on the nsrsybcc command and its options. -o ckal
-o ckcat
Note: If USE_CONSISTENCY_CHECK is set to TRUE
-o ckdbnoidx
and DBCCOPT is undefined, nsrsybcc performs all
the possible checks prior to a backup. -o ckstor
For example:
DBCCOPT=”-o ckcat -o ckal -o ckdb”

LD_LIBRARY_PATH Specifies the directory pathname of the Open Client • Undefined (default).
Server (OCS) library. • Directory pathname of the OCS library, which must
Mandatory for a Sybase scheduled backup on the be the same value as set in the SYBASE.sh or
following platforms: SYBASE.csh script.
• HP-UX Itanium
• Linux AMD64/EM64T
• Solaris SPARC
Optional for a Sybase manual backup on these
platforms.
For a Sybase manual backup, this parameter can
alternately be set as an environment variable.

LD_LIBRARY_PATH_64 Specifies the directory pathname of the Open Client • Undefined (default).
Server (OCS) library. • Directory pathname of the OCS library, which must
Mandatory for a Sybase scheduled backup on Solaris be the same value as set in the SYBASE.sh or
AMD64/EM64T. SYBASE.csh script.
Optional for a Sybase manual backup on Solaris
AMD64/EM64T.
For a Sybase manual backup, this parameter can
alternately be set as an environment variable.

Sybase-specific NMDA parameters 319

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 37 Sybase-specific NMDA parameters (page 2 of 4)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

LIBPATH Specifies the directory pathname of the Open Client • Undefined (default).
Server (OCS) library. • Directory pathname of the OCS library, which must
Mandatory for a Sybase scheduled backup on AIX. be the same value as set in the SYBASE.sh or
Optional for a Sybase manual backup on AIX. SYBASE.csh script.
For a Sybase manual backup, this parameter can
alternately be set as an environment variable.

NSR_ASE_PASSWORD Specifies an unencrypted password to add to the • Undefined (default).

Sybase dump command, as a method of • Unencrypted password, from 6 to 30 characters in
password-protecting the Sybase backup data. length, which is added with the passwd= clause to
Optional for a Sybase backup only. the Sybase dump command.

Note: This unencrypted password value is stored in

the NMDA configuration file.

NSR_ASE_VERIFY Specifies one of the following options for backup • Undefined (default).
verification: • One of the following values:
• full - full = Verify both the header information and rows
• header structure (full verification of the backup).
Optional for a Sybase backup only. - header = Verify the page header information only.
For example, the following specifies a full
verification of the backup:
NSR_ASE_VERIFY=full

NSR_BACKUP_LEVEL Specifies the level of Sybase manual backup to • full (default) = A full level backup is performed,
perform. which backs up the database.
Optional for a Sybase manual backup. Do not set this • incr = An incremental level backup is performed,
parameter for a scheduled backup. which backs up the transaction logs.

NSR_BACKUP_PATHS Specifies the backup of either the entire Sybase server • Undefined (default).
instance, or one or more Sybase databases. • Valid pathnames in either of the following forms,
Mandatory for a Sybase manual backup only. with multiple database names being separated by a
comma:
Note: Do not specify both an instance name and a list SYBASE:/ASE_server_name (backs up the entire
of databases. server instance)
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database_name
[,SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database_name...]

NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT Specifies options for the transaction log backup in case • Undefined (default).
of an emergency, such as a lack of free log space or a • One of the following values:
failed media database. - “no_log” = Truncate the transaction log without
Optional for a Sybase backup only. recording the operation.
“Sybase transaction log backups” on page 110 - “no_truncate” = Back up the transaction log
provides more details on using the options for without truncating it.
transaction log backups. - “truncate_only” =Truncate the transaction log
without backing it up.
Note: This parameter should be set only when there is For example, the following specifies to back up the
an emergency during the transaction log backup. transaction log without truncating it:
NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT=”no_truncate”

NSR_EXCLUDE_FILE Specifies the complete pathname of a file that lists • Undefined (default).
databases to exclude from a backup of a Sybase • Valid complete pathname of an ASCII file that lists
server instance. the databases to exclude from the backup of the
Optional for a Sybase backup of a server instance. server instance. The file lists each database on a
separate line in the following format:
Note: Do not specify this parameter for a Sybase SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database_name
backup of one or more databases.

320 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 37 Sybase-specific NMDA parameters (page 3 of 4)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL Specifies the volume pool to use for a backup of the • Predefined NetWorker volume pool named Default
transaction logs. (default).
Optional for a Sybase backup. • Valid name of a NetWorker volume pool for the
transaction logs.
Note: The metadata from a transaction log backup is
backed up to a regular (non-log) volume pool. “Volume
pools for incremental Sybase backups” on page 110
provides details.

NSR_PARALLELISM Specifies the number of stripes to use to back up each • 1 (default).

database during the backup. During a multistripe • Integer value of 1 or greater for the number of
backup, multiple data streams are extracted in parallel multistripe sessions.
from a database and written in parallel to one or more
media devices.
Optional for a Sybase backup only.

Note: NMDA does not support multistripe backups for

the backup of transaction logs.

NSR_PROMOTE_FULL Specifies whether to promote an incremental backup • TRUE (default) = Promote an incremental backup
to a full backup when an incremental backup cannot be to a full backup if an incremental backup cannot be
performed. performed.
Optional for a Sybase backup only. • FALSE = Do not promote an incremental backup to
a full backup if an incremental backup cannot be
performed.

PATH Specifies the following: • Undefined (default).

• On UNIX systems, the pathname of the directory • Valid directory pathnames as follows:
where the NetWorker binaries are installed. - On UNIX, the directory pathname of the
• On Windows systems, the pathnames of the NetWorker binaries.
directories where the Open Client Server (OCS) - On Windows, the directory pathnames of the OCS
library and the NetWorker binaries are installed. library and the NetWorker binaries, with a
Mandatory for a Sybase scheduled backup on semicolon separating the pathnames.
Windows only if the paths of the NetWorker client For example, set the parameter as follows to add
binaries and OCS library are not in the system path. the OCS library pathnames on Windows:
Set on UNIX only if the NetWorker client binaries are PATH=%PATH%;%SYBASE%\%SYBASE_OCS%
relocated. \bin;%SYBASE%\%SYBASE_OCS%\dll

SHLIB_PATH Specifies the directory pathname of the Open Client • Undefined (default).
Server (OCS) library. • Directory pathname of the OCS library, which must
Mandatory for a Sybase scheduled backup on HP-UX be the same value as set in the SYBASE.sh or
PA-RISC. SYBASE.csh script.
Optional for a Sybase manual backup on HP-UX
PA-RISC.
For a Sybase manual backup, this parameter can
alternately be set as an environment variable.

SYBASE Specifies the pathname of the directory where the • Undefined (default).
Sybase ASE software is installed. • Valid directory pathname for the Sybase ASE
Mandatory for a Sybase backup or restore. software installation.
Set the parameter through the required method:
• For a scheduled backup, set it in the configuration
file.
• For a manual backup, set it in either the
configuration file or the environment.
• For a restore, set it in the environment.

Sybase-specific NMDA parameters 321

NMDA Parameters and Configuration File

Table 37 Sybase-specific NMDA parameters (page 4 of 4)

Parameter Description Default and valid values

SYBASE_USER Specifies the name of the Sybase user that connects • Undefined (default).
to the Sybase server instance for the backup. The • Valid Sybase username.
password of the user is specified by the USER_PSWD
parameter.
Mandatory for a Sybase backup.

USE_CONSISTENCY_CHECK Specifies whether the nsrsybcc command performs a • FALSE (default) = Database consistency check
database consistency check before a backup occurs. command, nsrsybcc, is not run before a backup.
Optional for a Sybase scheduled backup only. • TRUE = Database consistency check command,
nsrsybcc, is run before a backup. The specific
checks performed depend on the DBCCOPT
setting.

USER_PSWD Specifies the encrypted password for the Sybase user • Undefined (default).
that connects to the Sybase server instance, as • Encrypted Sybase user password, which must be
specified by the SYBASE_USER parameter. set through the nsrdaadmin -P command, for
Mandatory for a Sybase backup only if the Sybase example:
instance has a password. nsrdaadmin -P -z
configuration_file
The EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and
Applications Command Reference Guide provides
details on the nsrdaadmin command.

322 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 B
Oracle RMAN
Commands

This appendix includes the following major sections, which describe Oracle RMAN
commands that you can use in the RMAN scripts for Oracle backups and restores:
◆ The pool option of the backup command................................................................ 324
◆ The send command..................................................................................................... 324

Oracle RMAN Commands 323

Oracle RMAN Commands

The pool option of the backup command

IMPORTANT
NMDA does not support the pool option of the RMAN backup command, with the
exception of pool=0.

If any nonzero value is specified for the pool option of the RMAN backup command,
the RMAN session terminates and NMDA returns the following error message:
sbtbackup: Oracle pools are not supported
“NMDA Oracle-specific error messages” on page 347 provides more information on
this error message.
To specify the NetWorker volume pool that NMDA will use, set the parameter
NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL in the RMAN script. Appendix A, “NMDA
Parameters and Configuration File,” provides more information.

The send command

The NMDA implementation of the send command enables you to set the NMDA
parameters, both common and Oracle-specific.
Set the parameter values by using the methods described in “Oracle-specific NMDA
parameters” on page 315. The use of the send command is recommended where
possible.
The following sections describe the send command syntax and precedence rules and
how to use the send command to set the parameters:
◆ “Syntax rules” on page 324
◆ “Two ways to run the send command” on page 326
◆ “Precedence rules” on page 328

Note: In the following sections, brackets ([]) are used to denote the optional portions of a
command, for example, command options and corresponding settings. When typing the
command, do not include the brackets.

Syntax rules
The send command must have the following format:
send [ device_type ’device_specifier’ | channel channel_id ]
’NSR_ENV=(name1=value1 [, name2=value2, ...])’
These sections describe the syntax rules for the two main parts of the send command:
◆ “The send command string” on page 325
◆ “The send command options” on page 325

324 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Oracle RMAN Commands

The send command string

The command string in the send command is the string inside the quotes,
’NSR_ENV=(name1=value1...)’.
Follow these syntax rules for the send command string:
◆ Oracle restricts the maximum length of the command string to 512 bytes,
including the terminating NULL.
◆ The NSR_ENV keyword and the parameter names must be all uppercase.
◆ Between the NSR_ENV keyword and left parenthesis, an equal sign and spaces
are optional. For example, these commands are all correct:
send ’NSR_ENV = (NSR_SERVER=server1)’
send ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=server1)’
send ’NSR_ENV (NSR_SERVER=server1)’
send ’NSR_ENV(NSR_SERVER=server1)’
◆ The parentheses in the command string are mandatory.
◆ Inside the parentheses, you must include one or more NMDA parameter names
and the corresponding parameter values.
◆ Inside the parentheses, spaces are not allowed around the equal signs. A space
before an equal sign becomes part of the parameter name. A space after an equal
sign becomes part of the parameter’s value.
◆ Commas separating the name=value entries are mandatory.
◆ Comments are not allowed inside the quotes. In the following example,
“# NSR_SERVER” is considered the first parameter’s name:
run {
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
send ’NSR_ENV=(
# NSR_SERVER=server1,
NSR_CLIENT=oracle)’;
:
◆ A send command in an RMAN script can span multiple lines. For example:
send ’NSR_ENV=(
NSR_SERVER=server1,
NSR_CLIENT=oracle)’;

The send command options

Run the send command with only one of the following:
◆ send with no option (only the quoted command string) sets the parameters for all
allocated channels.
◆ send device_type SBT sets the parameters for all channels allocated for NMDA.
◆ send channel sets the parameters for the specified channels only.

IMPORTANT
You can use the device_type or the channel option in the send command in an
RMAN script only. You cannot use either option in the send command on the
operating system command line. “The send command on the operating system
command line” on page 326 provides more information.

The send command 325

Oracle RMAN Commands

Example 47 A send command sets the parameters for a specified channel

In the following sample script, the parameters are set for channel t1 only, not for
channel t2:
run {
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
allocate channel t2 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
send channel t1 ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=server1,
NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=MondayFulls)’;
:
}
This sample RMAN script is referenced in Table 38 on page 326.
Table 38 on page 326 lists the values for options used with the send command. The
example referred to is Example 47 on page 326.

Table 38 Option values in the send command

Option value Describes

device_specifier The device type as specified in an allocate channel command in the RMAN script. For a
backup tape device, use SBT or SBT_TAPE.

channel_id The channel identifier as specified in an allocate channel command in the RMAN script. In
the example, the identifier is t1.

name1 The first NMDA parameter name. In the example, the first parameter name is
NSR_SERVER.

value1 The value assigned to the first parameter. In the example, the first value is server1.

name2 The second NMDA parameter name. In the example, the second parameter name is
NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL.

value2 The value assigned to the second parameter. In the example, the second value is
MondayFulls.

Two ways to run the send command

There are two different ways to run the send command:
◆ As an option of the rman command on the operating system command line, as
described in “The send command on the operating system command line” on
page 326.
◆ In the run job of the RMAN script, as described in “The send command in the
RMAN script” on page 327.

The send command on the operating system command line

To run the send command as an option of the rman invocation on the operating
system command line, type the command in the following format:
rman send ”’NSR_ENV=(name1=value1[, name2=value2, ...])’”
◆ If more than one send option appears in the rman command, only the last send
command is executed.
◆ Follow all the send command syntax rules listed in “The send command string”
on page 325, except for the last rule, which applies only to a send command in an
RMAN script.
◆ Do not use either the device_type or channel option. “The send command
options” on page 325 provides more information.

326 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Oracle RMAN Commands

◆ Use two sets of quotes around the command string, each set consisting of a single
and double quote. The single quote can be either before or after the double quote,
but the second set of quotes must be opposite to the first set. For example, this
command is also correct:
rman send ’”NSR_ENV=(name1=value1[, name2=value2, ...])”’
Two sets of quotes are required to prevent some operating system shells (for
example, ksh) from treating spaces inside the quotes as meta (special) characters
and attempting to tokenize the string.
◆ The parameter values in the quoted string are applied to all channels allocated
during the RMAN session. These values are applied before any parameter values
specified in send commands within the RMAN script itself. “Precedence rules”
on page 328 provides more information.

Example 48 An rman send command sets a parameter for all channels

In the following example, the NSR_SERVER parameter value (mars.emc.com) is

applied to all three channels (t1, t2, t3) allocated in the RMAN script:
rman send ”’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=mars.emc.com)’”
(RMAN script:)
run {
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
allocate channel t2 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
allocate channel t3 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
}

The send command in the RMAN script

To run the send command in the run job of the RMAN script, type the command in
the following format, at the required point within the run command brackets:
send [ device_type ’device_specifier’ | channel channel_id ]
’NSR_ENV=(name1=value1 [, name2=value2, ...])’
◆ Follow all the send command syntax rules listed in “The send command string”
on page 325.
◆ Use either the device_type or channel option (if required) with the send
command in an RMAN script, as described in “The send command options” on
page 325.
◆ Specify the correct option values in the send command, as described in “The send
command options” on page 325.
◆ RMAN commands are run in the order that they appear in the backup or restore
script. For a parameter value to be in effect during a backup or restore, put the
send command (setting the value) before the backup or restore command in the
script, but after the allocate channel commands for those channels to which the
parameter value applies.
◆ If no channel is allocated when the send command runs, an RMAN error appears.
The following sample RMAN script performs an Oracle backup of the entire database
to the volume pool MondayFulls of the (remote) NetWorker server mars.emc.com:
run {
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
allocate channel t2 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
send ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=mars.emc.com,
NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL=MondayFulls)’;

The send command 327

Oracle RMAN Commands

backup full filesperset 4

format ’FULL_%d_%U’
(database);
release channel t1;
release channel t2;
}
This script is the same as the sample script on page 101. The single send command
sets the parameters for both channels.

Precedence rules
Parameters are set for channels allocated during the RMAN session in the following
order:
1. In the parms option in the allocate channel or configure channel command
(configure channel is used only for automatic channel allocation).

Note: With Oracle version 11gR2 or later, if you use both ‘SBT_PARMS=(...)’ and
‘ENV=(...)’ with the parms option, parameters set with parms ‘ENV=(...)’ are ignored.

2. In the rman send command on the operating system command line.

3. In the send command in the run job of the RMAN script.

IMPORTANT
If both the send command on the operating system command line and the send
option in the configure channel command are used at the same time, Oracle
executes only the send option in the configure channel command.

To prevent confusion and simplify the task of setting parameters in a specific order,
do not mix these different ways of setting parameters in the same RMAN session.

Example 49 Order of parameters set according to the precedence rules

In the following example, the parameters NSR_SERVER and NSR_CLIENT are set in
this order:
◆ NSR_SERVER is set to server1 (by rman send), changed to server2 (by the first
send command), and finally changed to server3 (by send channel).
◆ NSR_CLIENT is set to client1 (by rman send), changed to client2 (by the first
send command), and finally changed to client3 (by send channel):
rman send ”’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=server1, NSR_CLIENT=client1)’”
(RMAN script:)
run {
allocate channel t1 type ’SBT_TAPE’;
send ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=server2, NSR_CLIENT=client2)’;
send channel t1 ’NSR_ENV=(NSR_SERVER=server3,
NSR_CLIENT=client3)’;
}

328 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 C
Troubleshooting and
Error Messages

This appendix includes the following major sections:

◆ General troubleshooting tips ..................................................................................... 330
◆ NMDA error messages ............................................................................................... 332
◆ DB2-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages.......................................... 335
◆ Informix-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages.................................. 339
◆ Lotus-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages ....................................... 340
◆ Oracle-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages...................................... 345
◆ Sybase-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages ..................................... 358

Troubleshooting and Error Messages 329

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

General troubleshooting tips

Use the following list to troubleshoot basic problems in running backup and restore
operations with NMDA.
To properly set up an NMDA backup and restore system:
1. Ensure that the database or application server system and any network services
(if used) are configured according to the instructions in the appropriate
documentation.
2. Verify that the combination of the operating system, database or application
server, NetWorker server, NetWorker client, and NMDA software is supported
and correctly installed and configured.
The following provide details on installation and configuration requirements:
• EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Installation Guide
• EMC Information Protection Software Compatibility Guide
• EMC NetWorker Installation Guide
• EMC NetWorker Administration Guide
• Chapter 2, “Backup Configuration”
Verify the version of NMDA installed by using one of the following commands to
check the version of the nsrdasv program file, where filename is the complete
pathname of the nsrdasv binary:
• On UNIX systems:
what filename
• On Linux systems:
strings filename | grep "@(#)"
• On Windows systems:
1. Open Windows Explorer, and locate the nsrdasv.exe file in the
NetWorker_install_path\bin directory.
2. Right-click the file icon, and select Properties.
3. In the Properties dialog box, select the Version tab to display the version
information.
For example, the following command displays version information for the
nsrdasv binary on Solaris:
what /usr/sbin/nsrdasv
To display the NMDA version number, enter the appropriate command for the
operating system:
• On AIX:
lslpp -L all | grep -i lgtonmda
• On HP-UX:
swlist -l product NMDA
• On Linux:
rpm -qa | grep -i lgtonmda
• On Solaris:
pkginfo -l LGTOnmda

330 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

3. Ensure that you can perform a manual backup with NMDA according to the
instructions in “Performing a manual NMDA backup” on page 119.
4. Ensure that you can perform a scheduled backup with NMDA according to the
instructions in “Performing a scheduled NMDA backup” on page 116.

Debug log files

You can set the following parameters in the configuration file (if not using the wizard)
or in the wizard to specify settings for the NMDA debug logs:
◆ “NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL” on page 298
◆ “NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST” on page 300
The NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL parameter specifies the level of debug messages that the
NMDA software generates. The valid parameter values are 0 to 9:
◆ If the parameter is not set or if it is set to 0, NMDA does not generate debug
messages.
◆ If the parameter is set to a value between 1 and 9, NMDA generates debug
messages in the debug log file on the NMDA host. The level of detail in the debug
messages increases with the debug level.
The NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST parameter specifies the directory location of all the
NMDA log files, including debug, operations, and error logs. If the parameter is not
set, the debug logs are located in the following default directory:
◆ On UNIX systems: /nsr/apps/logs
◆ On Windows systems: NetWorker_install_path\apps\logs

Note: When 32-bit NMDA is installed on a 64-bit Windows system, the logs generated by the
32-bit NMDA software are stored in the NetWorker_client_install_dir\nsr\apps\logs directory
instead of the C:\Program Files\Legato (x86)\nsr\apps\logs directory where NMDA is
installed.
As a workaround, set the NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST parameter to the pathname of the
preferred logs directory, for example:
NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST=C:\Program Files\Legato (x86)\nsr\apps\logs

The NMDA log files have this filename format:

binaryname[_app].date.time.pid[_threadid].log
where app indicates the type of application:
◆ db2
◆ informix
◆ lotus
◆ oracle
◆ sybase
The NetWorker server also writes diagnostic information from a manual or
scheduled backup to specific log files on the NetWorker server. The EMC NetWorker
Administration Guide provides more information on these log files.

General troubleshooting tips 331

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Wizard backup configuration fails, authentication denied

If the configuration wizard fails to create a scheduled backup, an error message
might indicate that authentication is denied, or denied for username.
The lockbox with the database connection credentials was not accessible by the
superuser on the client host where the backup failed and the message appeared.
As a solution, use the NMC program to ensure that the Lockbox resource is created
for the given client and the Users attribute contains the superuser of the client.
The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides details on lockbox password
management.

Backup hangs
If the backup hangs, the NetWorker server might be temporarily unavailable at the
start of the backup. The backup waits until the NetWorker server becomes available.
As a solution, edit the NMDA configuration file or (for Oracle backups only) the
RMAN backup scripts, and set this parameter to TRUE:
NSR_NO_BUSY_ERRORS=TRUE
“NSR_NO_BUSY_ERRORS” on page 301 describes this parameter.
If the NSR_NO_BUSY_ERRORS parameter is set to TRUE and the backup still hangs,
determine if the nsrexecd program is running as follows:
# ps -ef | grep nsrexecd
If nsrexecd is not running, start the program with the following command:
# nsrexecd

NMDA error messages

During a backup or restore, the NMDA software records the NMDA error messages
in an error log file on the NMDA host.
You can set the NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST parameter to specify the directory
location of all the NMDA log files, including debug, operations, and error logs.
“NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST” on page 300 provides details.
If the NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST parameter is not set, the error log file is located in
the following default directory:
◆ On UNIX systems: /nsr/apps/logs
◆ On Windows systems: NetWorker_install_path\apps\logs
A separate error log is generated for each different application involved in the
NMDA backups and restores. The error log file has the following filename:
nmda_app.messages.raw
where app indicates the type of application:
◆ db2
◆ informix
◆ lotus

332 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

◆ oracle
◆ sybase
NMDA generates error messages in the nmda_app.messages.raw file in a
language-independent form, readable by the nsr_render_log program only.
The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides information on how to use the
nsr_render_log program to read any language-independent binary file, such as
nmda_app.messages.raw.

NetWorker XBSA error messages

During a DB2, Informix, Lotus, or Sybase backup or restore, the NMDA software
records error messages generated by the NetWorker X/Open Backup Services
Application (XBSA) API in the NMDA error log or xbsa.messages file, located in the
same directory as the NMDA error logs.
NetWorker XBSA error messages are not generated during Oracle operations.
NetWorker XBSA error messages appear in the following format:
XBSA-1.0 NMDA_release_branch. process_id day month date hh:mm:ss year
function_name: BSA_RC_message_code: message
Table 39 on page 333 lists the relevant NetWorker XBSA error messages.

Table 39 NetWorker XBSA error messages (page 1 of 3)

Error message Description

BSA_RC_ABORT_SYSTEM_ERROR A general system error occurred within a NetWorker XBSA function call. This error is
System detected error due to explanation. Operation aborted returned for all NetWorker errors that do not map cleanly to XBSA errors.

BSA_RC_BAD_CALL_SEQUENCE An API call sequence was made that does not conform to the XBSA Data Movement
The sequence of API calls is incorrect. Must call item1 before API State Diagram document.
item2

BSA_RC_BAD_HANDLE The value passed into the function for bsaHandle contained a NULL pointer.
The handle used to associate this call with a previous BSAInit()
call is invalid because explanation

BSA_RC_BAD_PARAMETER An invalid parameter was received.

received parameter parm with value value, which is invalid

BSA_RC_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL The buffer is too small to hold the object entry to be returned.
Buffer is too small to hold the object entry to be returned.
n bytes required for the object entry

BSA_RC_DESCRIPTION_TOO_LONG The Description field in one of the supplied structures contained more than
The description field contained too many characters (n >= n) BSA_MAX_DESC characters, and the structure could not be used for the requested
operation.

BSA_RC_INVALID_COPYTYPE The copyType field in one of the supplied structures has a value that is not in the
the copyType field contained an unrecognized value of n NetWorker XBSA libraries implementation of this enumerated type.

BSA_RC_INVALID_DATABLOCK The fields of a supplied DataBlock parameter are not internally consistent. This can
the dataBlock parameter contained inconsistent values: occur under one of the following conditions:
bufferLength: n, bufferPtr: n, numBytes: n • When the bufferLen field is less than the numBytes field while data is being sent.
• When the bufferLen field is nonzero and the bufferPtr field is NULL.

NMDA error messages 333

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 39 NetWorker XBSA error messages (page 2 of 3)

Error message Description

BSA_RC_INVALID_KEYWORD One of the environment strings passed into the function did not have a valid structure.
an entry in the environment structure is invalid (variable=value) The value structure of an environment keyword is KEYWORD = VALUE, where
KEYWORD is a white space delimited string and VALUE is a white space delimited
string followed by a null terminator. This can indicate a number of possible errors:
• The KEYWORD was not in the reserved word list. This error is not returned by the
NetWorker XBSA libraries because other environment variables might be passed
into the library along with valid keywords.
• The KEYWORD and VALUE strings were not separated by a '=' character. This
type of error is also used to detect environment vectors that are not properly
terminated with a (char *)NULL entry, as well as invalid KEYWORD VALUE pair
formats.
• The VALUE string was invalid.
• The VALUE string could not be validated, as in the case of a hostname string that
could not be found by the gethostbyname() function.

BSA_RC_INVALID_OBJECTSTATUS The objectStatus field in one of the supplied structures has a value that is not in the
the objectStatus field contained an unrecognized value of n NetWorker XBSA libraries’ implementation of this enumerated type.

BSA_RC_INVALID_OBJECTTYPE One of the object type parameters was either passed in directly or contained in one of
the objectType is invalid (n) the following structures: ObjectDescriptor QueryDescriptor was not in the range of
BSAObjectType_ANY to BSAObjectType_DIRECTORY.

BSA_RC_INVALID_TIME An invalid time value was received.

a time field contained an unrecognized value of n

BSA_RC_MATCH_EXISTS The object already exists in the NetWorker server being used by the NetWorker XBSA
object matching the specified predicate already exists session and that the requested operation cannot be completed.

BSA_RC_MORE_DATA This has two meanings in the XBSA Data Movement API:
more data is available. Data can be obtained through • Object Data Retrieval – There is more data available for an object being read from
BSAGetData() or BSAGetNextQueryObject() the NetWorker server than is being used by the NetWorker XBSA session. Use
BSAGetData to retrieve the next DataBlock from the NetWorker server (see also
“BSA_RC_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL” on page 333 and
“BSA_RC_NO_MORE_DATA” on page 334). This message is not returned by the
BSAGetObjectF function because all data for an object is written to a file descriptor
by this function.
• Query Result Retrieval – There are more objects matching the requested query
descriptor from the NetWorker server than is being used by the NetWorker XBSA
session. Use BSAGetNextQueryObject to retrieve the next object descriptor from
Backup Services (see also “BSA_RC_NO_MORE_DATA” on page 334).

BSA_RC_NO_MATCH The client index and media database are out of synch. To resynchronize the client
The ResourceType predicate value of D does not match the index and media database, run the nsrck -X command. Alternatively, wait for
reference value of L NetWorker to run nsrck automatically.

BSA_RC_NO_MATCH No objects matching the specified QueryDescriptor were found in the NetWorker
The variable predicate value of value does not match the server that is being used by the NetWorker XBSA session.
reference value of variable

BSA_RC_NO_MORE_DATA This has two meanings in the XBSA Data Movement API:
there is no more data for the current object • Object Data Retrieval – This is used when all the data for an object being retrieved
from a NetWorker server was placed into the given DataBlock parameter for a
function call (see also “BSA_RC_NO_MORE_DATA” on page 334).
• Query Result Retrieval – This is used when the last (or only) object matching a
query is returned to the caller (see also “BSA_RC_NO_MORE_DATA” on
page 334).

BSA_RC_NULL_APIVERSION A pointer to an ApiVersion structure, passed into the function, was NULL and is
an ApiVersion pointer is required required as input.

334 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 39 NetWorker XBSA error messages (page 3 of 3)

Error message Description

BSA_RC_NULL_DATABLOCK The DataBlock pointer parameter for the called function was NULL. The caller is
a data block pointer is required responsible for allocating and passing in the DataBlock structure to the NetWorker
XBSA library (see also “BSA_RC_INVALID_DATABLOCK” on page 333).

BSA_RC_NULL_OBJECTNAME The ObjectName parameter passed into the called function was NULL.
an object name is required

BSA_RC_NULL_OBJECTOWNER A pointer to an object-owner structure was NULL and is required as input.

an ObjectOwner pointer is required

BSA_RC_OBJECTINFO_TOO_LONG The ObjectInfo parameter passed into the function, either directly or in one of the
The objectInfo field contained too many characters following data structures, was found to have more than BSA_MAX_OBJINFO
characters: ObjectDescriptor

BSA_RC_OBJECTSPACENAME_TOO_LONG The string objectSpaceName contains more than BSA_MAX_OBJECTSPACENAME

The objectSpaceName field contained too many characters characters in an ObjectName structure.

BSA_RC_PATHNAME_TOO_LONG The string pathname contains more than BSA_MAX_PATHNAME characters in an

The pathName field contained too many characters ObjectName structure.

BSA_RC_RESOURCETYPE_TOO_LONG The string resourceType contains more than BSA_MAX_RESOURCETYPE

The resourceType field contained too many characters (n >= n) characters and might be corrupt.

BSA_RC_SUCCESS The called function did not fail and is returned by all NetWorker XBSA function calls.
the function was successful

BSA_RC_TRANSACTION_ABORTED The current transaction was aborted by the BSAEndTxn function call. A transaction
the transaction was aborted can either be aborted by an internal error, or by user request through the Vote
parameter to this function.

DB2-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages

The following sections provide NMDA DB2-specific troubleshooting tips and error
messages.

Removal of failed backup

When a backup fails and does not roll back, a faulty record might be written to the
NetWorker indexes and corrupted data might be saved. To prevent issues during a
subsequent restore, the faulty record should be manually removed from the
NetWorker indexes so that the failed backup cannot be restored.

Note: The NetWorker man pages, the EMC NetWorker Command Reference Guide, and the EMC
NetWorker Administration Guide provide details on NetWorker commands used to remove a
failed backup.

To remove a failed backup:

1. On the NetWorker server, type the following command to view backup records
for the DB2 server in the media database:
$ mminfo -v -c client_name.mydomain.com
where client_name.mydomain.com is the hostname of the DB2 server where the
database resides.

DB2-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 335

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Note: In a cluster environment, use the virtual hostname.

2. Inspect the output of the mminfo command to determine if a save set was created
for a failed backup and was not automatically removed by the server. Note the
save set ID (ssid).
3. Use the following command to remove the faulty save set from the media
database:
$ nsrmm -S ssid -d
Ensure that you have the NetWorker user privileges required to perform the
operation, as described in Table 5 on page 61.

The load libnsrdb2 command

Table 40 on page 336 provides the path and suffix information for the load libnsrdb2
command.
Use the path and suffix information to determine the correct shared library for the
operating system.

Table 40 Path and suffix for the load libnsrdb2 command

Operating system Path with suffix

AIX /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.o

HP-UX /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.sl

Linux, Solaris, HP-UX Itanium /usr/lib/libnsrdb2.so

Microsoft Windows NetWorker_install_path\bin\libnsrdb2.dll

DB2-specific error messages

Table 41 on page 337 describes DB2 SQL error messages that are specific to DB2
operations with the NMDA software.
The IBM DB2 reference documentation provides more information about SQL
messages.

IMPORTANT
Identical messages are listed in the table for different causes. For these multiple
listings, examine each cause.

“NetWorker XBSA error messages” on page 333 describes the error messages
generated by the NetWorker XBSA interface.

336 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 41 DB2 SQL error messages (page 1 of 2)

Error message Description

SQL1268N The NSR_ENCRYPTION_PHRASES parameter does not contain the datazone pass
A rollforward recovery stopped due to error "SQL1042" while phrase that was used to back up the transaction logs.
retrieving log file <logfile> for database <db> on node "0". Set the NSR_ENCRYPTION_PHRASES parameter to the proper phrase.
“NSR_ENCRYPTION_PHRASES” on page 300 provides details.

SQL2025N The client is not registered on the NetWorker server to which the NMDA software is
An I/O error "3" occurred on media "VENDOR". backing up.
Create a valid client on the NetWorker server.
Test to ensure that the connection between the client and server is valid:
save -s servername/testfile

SQL2025N The NSR_CLIENT parameter is set to an invalid client name while running a backup.
An I/O error "3" occurred on media "VENDOR". Set the NSR_CLIENT parameter to the name of the client from which the backup is
running. “NSR_CLIENT” on page 297 provides details.

SQL2025N In the vendor configuration file, the NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL parameter is set to

An I/O error "3" occurred on media "VENDOR". a pool name that does not exist, while attempting to run a backup.
If possible, remove the DB2 vendor.cfg file. “DB2-specific NMDA parameters” on
page 303 provides details. Otherwise, do as follows:
• Create a pool to the same name that the NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL is set.
• Change the value of NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL to a valid pool.

SQL2025N There is no NMDA license on the server. A separate client license is required for each
An I/O error "3" occurred on media "VENDOR". client.
Obtain a valid NMDA license.

SQL2025N For a manual deduplication backup, the deduplication backup attribute is not enabled
An I/O error "3" occurred on media "VENDOR". in the corresponding NetWorker Client resource.
Ensure that the corresponding NetWorker Client resource is defined on the
NetWorker server and the deduplication backup attribute is enabled.

SQL2025N For a manual or scheduled deduplication backup, the Avamar server is already in
An I/O error "3" occurred on media "VENDOR". maintenance mode before the backup starts.
Ensure that the Avamar server is available for the backup operation.

SQL2025N The NSR_ENCRYPTION_PHRASES parameter does not contain the datazone pass
An I/O error "25" occurred on media "VENDOR". phrase that was used to back up the database.
Set the NSR_ENCRYPTION_PHRASES parameter to the proper phrase.
“NSR_ENCRYPTION_PHRASES” on page 300 provides details.

SQL2025N The user does not have the restore privilege on the NetWorker server.
An I/O error "25" occurred on media "VENDOR". Add the "recover local data" privilege for the user.

SQL2025N For the restore of a deduplication backup, the Avamar server is already in
An I/O error “25” occurred on media “VENDOR”. maintenance mode before the restore starts.
Ensure that the Avamar server is available for the restore operation.

SQL2062N Permissions or ownership of debug files are incorrect for the database instance.
An error occurred while accessing media "/usr/lib/libnsrdb2.so". Ensure that each database instance has a unique debug filename.
Reason code: "0".

SQL2062N The NSR_CLIENT parameter was set to an incorrect client name while running a
An error occurred while accessing media "/usr/lib/libnsrdb2.so". restore.
Reason code: "4". Set the NSR_CLIENT parameter to the name of the client from which the restore is
Table 40 on page 336 provides the correct libnsrdb2 path and running. “NSR_CLIENT” on page 297 provides details.
suffix information.

DB2-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 337

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 41 DB2 SQL error messages (page 2 of 2)

Error message Description

SQL2062N The client is not registered on the NetWorker server to which the module is restoring:
An error occurred while accessing media "/usr/lib/libnsrdb2.so". 1. Create a valid client on the NetWorker server.
Reason code: "4". 2. Test to make sure the connection between the client and server is valid:
Table 40 on page 336 provides the correct libnsrdb2 path and save -s servername/testfile
suffix information.

SQL2062N No matching backups were found. Restore of the deduplicated save set failed
An error occurred while accessing media "/usr/lib/libnsrdb2.o". because the save set on the Avamar server was deleted.
Reason code: "11" Restore the save set to the Avamar server prior to restoring the deduplicated save
set.

SQL2062N A valid timestamp for the object being restored was not specified. Specify a valid
An error occurred while accessing media "/usr/lib/libnsrdb2.so". timestamp.
Reason code: "11". Or:
Failed to restore a database from one instance to another. The Applications
Information attribute in the Client resource is missing instance information. Specify
Applications Information:
DB2_R=database_name: db2inst1:db2inst2:
“Restore DB2 data” on page 145 provides details.

SQL2062N The NSR_SERVER parameter is set to an invalid server name. For example, the
An error occurred while accessing media "/usr/lib/libnsrdb2.so". server might not exist and you cannot ping it.
Reason code: "11". Set the NSR_SERVER parameter to a valid NetWorker server that has the DB2
Table 40 on page 336 provides the correct libnsrdb2 path and server defined as a client. “NSR_SERVER” on page 302 provides details.
suffix information.

SQL2062N Unable to back up the database_name database due to backup request failure. The
An error occurred while accessing media "libnsrdb2.o". BRC API call pb_open failed. Deduplication backup is supported only for serverless
Reason code: "25" backups.
Perform a serverless type of backup for the PowerSnap deduplication backup of the
database.

SQL2071N Missing NMDA DB2 library, libnsrdb2.dll, is not in the correct place as indicated.
An error occurred while accessing the shared library. Reinstall NMDA or place the libnsrdb2.dll library into the correct location as indicated.
"c:\progra~1\legato\nsr\bin\libnsrdb2.dll". Reason code: "1".

SQL2071N An error message occurs when you use:

An error occurred while accessing the shared library • 32-bit NMDA software to back up a 64-bit database.
"/usr/lib/libnsrdb2.so". Reason code: "2". • 64-bit NMDA software to back up a 32-bit database.
Table 40 on page 336 provides the correct libnsrdb2 path and Use the correct version of NMDA for the database.
suffix information. For example, a 64-bit version of NMDA is required to back up a 64-bit database.

SQL2079N The stack size is insufficient for the db2syscs.exe file.

On a Windows system, the backup failed for DB2 version 9.5. To increase the stack size:
An error was reported by the shared library: 1. Stop the database engine with the db2stop command.
"c:\progra~1\legato\nsr\bin\libnsrdb2.dll". Return code: "30". 2. Use the db2hdr.exe utility to increase the stack size to a minimum of 512, for
example:
C:\Program Files\IBM\SQLLIB\BIN> ..\misc\db2hdr db2syscs.exe /s 512,32
3. Start the database engine with the db2start command.

SQL2079N The VENDOROPT parameter is null.

An error was reported by the shared library during an attempted Assign the VENDOROPT parameter a value that points to the nmda_db2.cfg file, for
recovery: example:
“/usr/lib/libnsrdb2.so”. Return code “30”. db2 update db cfg using vendoropt @/db/nmda_db2.cfg

SQL2079N The configuration file is not found for either backup or recovery.
An error was reported by the shared library Specify the correct pathname for the NMDA DB2 configuration file (nmda_db2.cfg).
"/usr/lib/libnsrdb2.so". Return code: "30".

338 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Informix-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages

The following sections provide NMDA Informix-specific troubleshooting tips and
error messages.

No dbspaces/blobspaces found to back up or restore

If you attempt to back up a dbspace or blobspace that does not exist, the savegroup
completion message indicates an ON-Bar error:
* mars:INFORMIX:/venus/bogus_space onbar returned status of 147
The ON-Bar BAR_ACT_LOG file displays a related list of messages:
2010-06-25 12:56:24 15612 15606 WARNING: DB/BLOBspace bogus_space does
not exist.
2010-06-25 12:56:24 15612 15606 ERROR: There are no DB/BLOBspaces to
backup/restore
You might also see these error messages if you attempt a point-in-time restore to a
time period before the first dbspace backup for the instance occurred.
To resolve the problem, ensure that you have the correct spelling, pathname, or point
in time, then retry the backup or restore operation.

Unable to open connection to server

If you attempt to back up an Informix Dynamic Server instance that does not exist or
is in offline mode during the backup, the savegroup completion message indicates an
ON-Bar error:
* mars:INFORMIX:/venus onbar returned status of 151
The ON-Bar BAR_ACT_LOG file displays a related list of messages:
2010-06-25 13:07:29 15671 15665 onbar -b -L 0
2010-06-25 13:07:29 15671 15665
ERROR: Unable to open connection to server.
To resolve the problem, ensure that you have the correct spelling and pathname for
the instance, check that the instance is in online mode, and then retry the backup.

Default value assigned to LTAPEDEV causes failure

Setting the LTAPEDEV configuration parameter in the ONCONFIG file to /dev/null
causes logical logs to be erroneously marked as backed up (U-B----). This error occurs
when the Dynamic Server switches to the next log before ON-Bar has a chance to
send the logical log data to the NetWorker server. With the LTAPEDEV parameter
assigned the value /dev/null, you can perform only whole system restores.
If LTAPEDEV is undefined or set to /dev/null in the ONCONFIG file, an ON-Bar
logical log backup returns the error code 131 and a message is sent to
BAR_ACT_LOG:
2010-06-25 10:50:00 12441 12404
ERROR: Unable to start the logical log backup: Log backup to device
/dev/null not allowed

Informix-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 339

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

The NetWorker savegroup completion message also returns an error message:

--- Unsuccessful Save Sets ---
* mars:INFORMIX:/venus/rootdbs onbar returned status of 131
* mars:INFORMIX:/venus/rootdbs /usr/sbin/nsrdasv exiting.
To ensure that your logical logs are successfully backed up, set the LTAPEDEV
parameter in the ONCONFIG file to anything other than /dev/null.

ON-Bar returned codes 2 through 34

The error codes 2 through 34 are returned by the NMDA library libnsrifmx.xx or
libxbsa.dll.
“NetWorker XBSA error messages” on page 333 describes the error messages
generated by the NetWorker XBSA interface.

Lotus-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages

The following sections provide NMDA Lotus-specific troubleshooting tips and error
messages.

"Invalid Time Specified" error

If you attempt to restore files by using the European date format (dd/mm/yy), an
“Invalid Time Specified” error appears. The nsrnotesrc command is unable to
interpret European date formats. When restoring files with the nsrnotesrc command,
the date specified for the NSR_RECOVER_TIME parameter must be in the American
format (mm/dd/yy).
For example, to restore files from a save set that is timestamped 06/26/10 15:08:34,
ensure that the NMDA configuration file contains the following parameter settings:
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS = /notes/names.nsf
NSR_RECOVER_TIME = "06/26/10 15:08:34"
NSR_SERVER = spain

Backup failure caused by time conversion

An NMDA Lotus backup fails when there is a problem with the time conversion or
when opening a file to obtain the modification times:
◆ On Windows systems, the date and time formats (including DateOrder and
DateSeparator) are read from the country settings specified on the operating
system level.
◆ On UNIX and Linux systems, the Domino server ignores these settings in the
locale that would affect the format used to display a date or time or both, and
instead uses defaults that are coded in the appropriate Lotus Domino .res files.

340 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

The following notes.ini settings on the Domino server can be used to overwrite these
defaults:
◆ DateOrder — May be set to DMY, YMD, MDY
◆ ClockType — May be set to 24_HOUR
◆ DateSeparator — May be set to an arbitrary string and may be longer than one
character, if required.
◆ TimeSeparator — May be set to an arbitrary string and may be longer than one
character, if required.
The Domino Administrator help provides additional information.

Notes API 525 error

The call to the Notes API function NSFDBOpen() might return a 525 error, for
example:
NSFDBOpen() failed for D:\Domino\Data\mail\tsk.nsf with error = 525
(This database is currently in use by another person or process, and
cannot be accessed at this time. In order to share a Notes database, it
must be accessed via a Domino Server by all users of the database.)
To prevent this error:
◆ On Windows, do not run the backup through Remote Desktop (Terminal)
Services.
◆ On UNIX or Linux, ensure that the Domino installation directories and data
directories do not contain operating system symbolic links.
To store data files outside of the Domino data directory, use only the Lotus
database or directory links.
◆ Check with IBM Technical Support about setting NSF_DbCache_Disable=1 in the
notes.ini file or issuing the appropriate command to disable caching from the
Domino console.

NMC Group Details window displays “command not found”

The NMC Group Details window might display the following messages for the Lotus
scheduled backup of a UNIX client:
sh: ps: command not found
sh: grep: command not found
The messages do not affect the backup of the Domino data. The Domino server
generates the messages and passes them to the NetWorker server during the backup.
To prevent the messages, specify the paths of the grep command (/usr/bin) and ps
command (/bin) in the PATH parameter setting in the NMDA configuration file on
the UNIX Domino client.
For example, on a SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 client, the following PATH setting
in the NMDA configuration file includes the grep and ps command paths:
PATH = /opt/ibm/lotus/notes/latest/linux:/usr/bin:/bin

Lotus-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 341

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Restore problem due to NSR_BACKUP_PATHS=NOTES:

If the restore parameter NSR_BACKUP_PATHS is set to the value NOTES: for a
partitioned Domino server or multiple Domino installations on a single UNIX host,
the NMDA software attempts to restore the data for all the partitions or Domino
installations, which can cause data corruption.
Do not set the NSR_BACKUP_PATHS parameter to the keyword NOTES:. Instead,
set the parameter to a specific pathname.
“NSR_BACKUP_PATHS” on page 309 provides more details on the restore
parameter.

Failure of a document-level recovery on a remote Domino server

The NMDA software does not support document-level recovery on a remote Domino
server through the nsrdocrc command.
On Windows systems only, the NMDA software supports document-level recovery of
selected (modified) and deleted Notes documents on a remote Domino server
through the Notes client program.
If a remote document-level recovery through the Notes client program fails with an
"Authentication failure" error, ensure the following:
◆ The user that runs the Notes client on the local host is:
• Listed in the Remote Access attribute in the NetWorker Client resource of the
remote Domino server.
• Granted administrative privileges on the remote Domino server.
◆ A NetWorker Client resource is configured on the same NetWorker server for the
host where the Notes client program runs.

NMDA Lotus-specific error messages

This section describes error messages that you might encounter while using the
NMDA software for Lotus operations, and the possible resolutions for the errors.
The NMDA programs for Lotus backups and restores generate error messages in the
following format:
error_message_text (function_name | error_type | error_code |
error_number)
where:
◆ error_message_text is the text of the NMDA error message.
◆ function_name is the name of the NMDA function that generated the error
message.
◆ error_type, error_code, error_number are internal numbers representing an error
type or code to report to technical support, reached through EMC Customer
Service at the EMC Powerlink website.
Certain fields might be null or 0 if the information was not available at the time when
the error message was generated.

342 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

“NetWorker XBSA error messages” on page 333 describes the error messages
generated by the NetWorker XBSA interface. To ensure that XBSA error and debug
messages are included in the NMDA Lotus debug log, set the parameter
NSR_XBSA_DEBUG=TRUE as described in “NSR_XBSA_DEBUG” on page 313.
Table 42 on page 343 lists error messages generated during Lotus backup and restore
operations, in alphabetical order. Messages that are common to both backups and
restores are listed first, followed by backup messages and then restore messages.

Table 42 Error messages from Lotus backups and restores (page 1 of 2)

Error message Description

Error messages common to both Lotus backups and restores:

A NW server with a NSR client resource for hostname could not The NMDA software cannot access the NetWorker server for the backup.
be located on the network. To resolve the error, ensure that the NetWorker server name is spelled correctly and
the server contains a Client resource for the NMDA client.

System error: error message is not available. A problem occurred in the XBSA code. To obtain more debugging information about
the problem, set NSR_XBSA_DEBUG=TRUE and NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL to a value
greater than 3.

The call to NotesInitExtended failed: Notes_API_error_number. The NMDA software cannot initialize the Notes session.
To resolve the error, locate the error message for the given Notes_API_error_number
and perform the appropriate corrective action. If the error number is 421, set the
NSR_NOTES_INI_PATH parameter.

The LoadLibrary() call failed. The NMDA software cannot find or load the libnotes.xx or nnotes.dll library file.
To resolve the error, ensure that the Notes_ExecDirectory parameter is set to the
directory path containing the Lotus library.

Error messages from Lotus backups:

Could not open file: filename. The NMDA software cannot open the file to back it up.
To resolve the error, ensure that the file has the correct permissions.

Directory link points to its own directory. The NMDA software has detected a circular link.
To resolve the error, delete the directory link file or correct the path set in the file.

Duplicate entry: file_pathname. Ignoring. The NMDA software is not adding another entry for the file to the backup list because
the file is already on the list.
This is an informational message only, and does not require a resolution.

Either nothing was specified to backup or system is down. The NMDA software cannot derive a list of files to back up.
To resolve the error, ensure that the manual or scheduled backup is configured and
performed correctly, according to the instructions in this administration guide.

Error finding last backup instance for filename; error = The NMDA software cannot find an existing backup for the file, and performs a full
error_description. backup of the file. This error typically occurs during an incremental backup.
To resolve the error, ensure that the NetWorker server is up and accessible to the
Lotus user on the client computer.

Failed to build exclude list, ignoring exclude list entries. The NMDA software cannot correctly process the values specified with the
NSR_EXCLUDE_FILE or NSR_EXCLUDE_LIST parameter, so nothing is excluded
from the backup.
To resolve the error, ensure that the parameters specify the correct values.

Failed to open directory link file: filename, errno = The NMDA software cannot open the file.
error_number. To resolve the error, ensure that the file has the correct pathname or permissions or
both.

Lotus-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 343

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 42 Error messages from Lotus backups and restores (page 2 of 2)

Error message Description

Failed to open exclude list file, errno = error_number. The exclude list file does not exist or does not have the correct access permissions.
To resolve the error, ensure the following:
The correct pathname is specified for the exclude list file with the NSR_EXCLUDE file
parameter.
The exclude list file has the correct permissions.

pathname is not a directory. The pathname contained in the Domino directory link (.dir) file is not a directory.
To correct the error, delete the .dir file from the directory if it is not used.

The password file lookup for the user Notes_user failed. The An invalid Notes user is specified with the LOTUS_USER parameter.
user name may be invalid. To resolve the error, ensure that the LOTUS_USER parameter specifies the name of
a Lotus Notes user that is running the server to be backed up.

The ReadFile() call failed. The NMDA software cannot read the contents of a file to be backed up.
To resolve the error, ensure that the file is a readable file.

Error messages from Lotus restores:

Full backup not found, cannot recover without full backup The NMDA software cannot find a full backup for the file in the NetWorker index.
filename. To resolve the error, ensure that the path for the filename matches the case-sensitive
path in the NetWorker index.

No objects found for recover. Either nothing is specified for recovery or the specified items have been removed from
the recovery list.
To resolve the error, perform one of the following:
Specify the required items for recovery.
Set the parameter NSR_RELOCATION_DEST to enable relocated recovery, or set
NSR_RECOV_INTERACT to y or r to enable renaming of the file.

The list of items to recover includes Notes databases. The NSR_NO_NOTES_INIT parameter is specified during a database recovery.
NSR_NO_NOTES_INIT parameter cannot be used when To resolve the error, specify either the NSR_NO_NOTES_INIT parameter or a list of
recovering Notes databases. databases (not both) for the recovery. The NSR_NO_NOTES_INIT parameter is used
for a disaster recovery only.

The log directory may only be number characters in length. The log directory pathname specified with the NSR_LOG_DIR parameter is too long.
To resolve the error, specify a different (shorter) pathname with the NSR_LOG_DIR
parameter.

The recover time '-t' was either not specified or contained an During a document-level recovery, the mandatory -t option is not correctly specified
invalid value. with nsrdocrc command.
To resolve the error, specify the -t time option correctly by using the nsr_getdate()
format for the time. To recover the backup to the current time, use the -t now option.

344 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Oracle-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages

The following sections provide NMDA Oracle-specific troubleshooting tips and error
messages.

Diagnosing Oracle-specific problems

In addition to “General troubleshooting tips” on page 330, use the following list to
troubleshoot problems in running NMDA Oracle backup and restore operations:
◆ Without NMDA installed on the Oracle Server host, it should be possible to
perform a backup and restore by using the allocate channel t1 type disk
command.
◆ On UNIX or Linux, ensure that the correct libnsrora.* library file is linked
according to the linking commands in the EMC NetWorker Module for Databases
and Applications Installation Guide.
Compare the library file with the libnsrora.* file in the NMDA software package;
the two files should be identical. Ensure that Oracle is not linked to the wrong
libnsrora.* or other library file.
◆ Perform a manual Oracle backup by using NMDA and the proper RMAN script.
Set the required NMDA parameters in either the RMAN backup script or the
rman send command on the operating system command line. Appendix A,
“NMDA Parameters and Configuration File,” provides details on how to set the
parameters. “RMAN scripts for manual backups” on page 101 provides a simple
startup RMAN script.
If the manual backup fails, check the debug files for NMDA and the NetWorker
server. “Debug log files” on page 331 provides more details.
If RMAN fails with the following error, ensure that both NMDA and Oracle have
the same bitness, and refer to the RMAN user guide for details on how to test that
the media management library is integrated correctly:
ORA-19554: error allocating device, device type: SBT_TAPE, device
name:
ORA-27211: Failed to load Media Management Library
Additional information: 25
If RMAN fails with another error, check the RMAN output or the trace file as
described in “The trace option of the backup command” on page 346.
◆ Perform a scheduled Oracle backup by using NMDA and the proper RMAN
scripts.
In the working RMAN manual backup script, add the connect target and connect
rcvcat commands, as described in “RMAN scripts for scheduled backups” on
page 102.
◆ If an Oracle RMAN session fails on Windows, check for any nsrsbtcn.exe
processes that are still running and terminate the processes manually in the Task
Manager.

Oracle-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 345

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

RMAN error messages

Note: If the scheduling portion of an Oracle scheduled backup succeeds but the actual backup
fails, error messages and debug information might be generated in the locations described in
this section.

RMAN stores information and RMAN-specific error messages in the log file specified
by using the msglog option. Review the RMAN information in this log file after each
backup.
To specify the name of the RMAN log file:
◆ For a manual Oracle backup, specify the msglog option in the rman command on
the command line:
rman target ... rcvcat ... msglog filename
◆ For a scheduled Oracle backup, specify the msglog option in the parameter
NSR_RMAN_ARGUMENTS in the NMDA configuration file. “Oracle-specific
NMDA parameters” on page 315 provides more information.
The appropriate Oracle error messages guide provides more information on specific
RMAN error messages and recommended courses of action.

Note: During a backup on an AIX or Windows system, if an NMDA parameter is set to an

invalid value, the resulting error message might be truncated in the RMAN output. This is due
to an Oracle RMAN limitation.

The trace option of the backup command

Set the trace option of the RMAN backup command to the value 0, 1, or 2. The
default value of trace is 0.
The output of trace is written to the Oracle sbtio.log file.
The output of trace is also written to the log file nmda_oracle.messages.raw, located
in the directory specified by the NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST parameter (if set) or in
the default directory:
◆ On UNIX systems: /nsr/apps/logs
◆ On Windows systems: NetWorker_install_path\apps\logs, where
NetWorker_install_path is the root directory of the NetWorker installation path
These log files contain NMDA error messages when a failure occurs in the libnsrora.x
library that is loaded by Oracle (known as the Media Management Library in Oracle
documentation).
NMDA writes error messages in the nmda_oracle.messages.raw file in a
language-independent binary form, readable by the nsr_render_log program only.
The EMC NetWorker Administration Guide provides information on how to use the
nsr_render_log program to read any language-independent binary file, such as
nmda_oracle.messages.raw.

346 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 43 on page 347 outlines the conditions that are traced when the trace option is
set to each of the three valid values.

Table 43 Trace option values and conditions traced

Trace value Conditions traced

0 (default) All error conditions.

1 • All error conditions.

• Entry and exit for each System Backup to Tape (SBT) function (the NMDA implementation
of the Oracle SBT interface).

2 • All error conditions.

• Entry and exit for each SBT function (the NMDA implementation of the Oracle SBT
interface).
• Values of all function parameters.
• First 32 bytes of each read/write buffer.

NMDA Oracle-specific error messages

This section describes error messages that you might encounter while using the
NMDA software for Oracle operations, and the possible resolutions for the errors:
◆ “Error messages from Oracle backups and restores” on page 347
◆ “Error messages from the nsroraadmin program” on page 355
◆ “Error messages from the nsrorainfo program” on page 357

Error messages from Oracle backups and restores

Table 44 on page 347 lists error messages generated during Oracle backups and
restores with the NMDA software, in alphabetical order. The libnsrora.xx messages
from nonproxy operations are listed first, followed by libnsrora.xx messages from
proxy operations and then messages from scheduled backups (nsrdasv process).
The error messages appear in the following format:
function_name: error_message (error_type:error_code:error_number)
where:
◆ function_name is the name of the NMDA function that produced the error.
◆ error_message is the text of the error message, as shown in the table.
◆ error_type, error_code, error_number are internal numbers that represent an error type
or code. Their significance for the user is as follows:
• If error_code is 1, the system is out of memory.
• If error_code is 3, 13, or 17, a code-level error has occurred. Report the error
message to Technical Support.

Table 44 Error messages from Oracle backups and restores (page 1 of 9)

Error message Description

Error messages from nonproxy backups and restores:

A connection to NW server 'server' could not be established NMDA could not connect to the NetWorker client file index due to the given reason.
because 'reason'. The client might not be configured as a client on the server. Take the corrective action
suggested by the error message.

Oracle-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 347

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 44 Error messages from Oracle backups and restores (page 2 of 9)

Error message Description

Could not create the LNM index lock file 'filename' (errno) NMDA failed to create the lock file required for an index deletion operation. Report the
error number (errno) to Technical Support.

Could not decode the 'sf_check' value: xdrs = 0xvalue This is an internal XDR error caused by a network read or write operation. Report the
error to Technical Support.

Could not decode the 'sf_magic' value: xdrs = 0x%value This is an internal XDR error caused by a network read or write operation. Report the
error to Technical Support.

Could not decode the 'sf_more' flag: xdrs = 0xvalue This is an internal XDR error caused by a network read or write operation. Report the
error to Technical Support.

Could not locate the LNM save file 'backup_piece_name' on NMDA could not locate an index record for the backup piece. The index record is
server 'server'. probably missing. Use the mminfo and nsrinfo commands to verify the status of the
index record.

Could not locate the LNM save time 'save_time' on server NMDA could not locate an index record for the save time in the client file index. The
'server'. index record is probably missing. Use the mminfo and nsrinfo commands to verify
the status of the index record.

Could not lock 'filename' for index deletion. There were number NMDA was able to create the lock file required for an index deletion operation, but
attempts. (errno) could not lock the file after the given number of attempts. Report the error number
(errno) to Technical Support.

Error in mmdb lookup by time: reason A lookup in the media database failed for the given reason. Use the mminfo
command to verify the status of the media database record. Take the corrective action
suggested by the error message.

Exceeded the number of retries. The NetWorker server may be NMDA could not contact the NetWorker index service nsrindexd. This was probably
down or unreachable. caused by the NetWorker services being shutdown. Restart the NetWorker services
on the server, as required.

Exceeded the number of retries for nsr_init(). The NetWorker After a maximum of five attempts, NMDA failed to call the NetWorker core function,
server may be down or unreachable. nsr_init(). This was probably caused by the NetWorker services being shut down.
Restart the NetWorker services on the server, as required.

Exceeded the number of retries for nsr_start(). The NetWorker After a maximum of five attempts, NMDA failed to call the NetWorker core function,
server may be down or unreachable. nsr_start(). This was probably caused by the NetWorker services being shut down.
Restart the NetWorker services on the server, as required.

Invalid browse and retention policies. Values Ignored. The NSR_SAVESET_BROWSE and NSR_SAVESET_RETENTION parameters both
had invalid time values. Ensure that the parameters NSR_SAVESET_BROWSE and
NSR_SAVESET_RETENTION in the RMAN script both have valid values in the
NetWorker date format.

Invalid browse policy browse_time. Value Ignored. The NSR_SAVESET_BROWSE parameter had an invalid time value, browse_time.
Ensure that the parameter NSR_SAVESET_BROWSE in the RMAN script has a valid
value in the NetWorker date format.

Invalid KEY word The syntax of the string in the RMAN send command was incorrect. “The send
command” on page 324 provides the correct send command syntax.

Invalid retention policy: retention_time. Value Ignored. The NSR_SAVESET_RETENTION parameter had an invalid time value,
retention_time. Ensure that the parameter NSR_SAVESET_RETENTION in the RMAN
script has a valid value in the NetWorker date format.

NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOLn is not set. Multiple copies of the backup data were requested, but the required
NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL parameters were not set. In the message, n was
replaced by a number corresponding to the missing pool parameter. When multiple
copies of backup data are requested, set the required NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL
parameters. “NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL” on page 297 provides more information.

348 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 44 Error messages from Oracle backups and restores (page 3 of 9)

Error message Description

ORA-19511: Error received from media manager layer, error An NMDA backup failed because a valid NWORA resource file does not exist or is not
text: available. If you do not use the wizard to configure a scheduled backup with save set
Could not create the NWORA resource lock file (13) bundling, use the nsroraadmin command to create a valid NWORA resource file,
(103:105:13) according to instructions in Chapter 2, “Backup Configuration” or Chapter 8,
“Snapshot Backups and Restores.”

Oracle pools are not supported NMDA does not support Oracle pools. NMDA supports NetWorker pools only.
Remove the pool option of the backup command in the RMAN script or set the pool
option to zero. “The pool option of the backup command” on page 324 provides more
information.

'string' should be in format: KEY=(xxxxx) The syntax of the string in the RMAN send command was incorrect. “The send
command” on page 324 provides the correct send command syntax.

The ASDF body could not be unwrapped. The incoming recover stream of data could not be decoded due to a possible network
error or data corruption. Report the error to Technical Support.

The backup file already exists: backup_piece_name NMDA could not complete the backup because the backup piece name already
existed in the NetWorker client file index. Change the format option string of the
RMAN command to produce a unique backup piece name, or remove obsolete
backup pieces. Then restart the backup operation.

The call to nsr_init() failed with the message: A call of the NetWorker core function, nsr_init(), failed due to the given reason. Take
reason the corrective action suggested by the error message. If required, report the error to
Technical Support.

The call to nsr_start() failed with the message: A call of the NetWorker core function, nsr_rtart(), failed due to the given reason. Take
reason the corrective action suggested by the error message. If required, report the error to
Technical Support.

The current time could not be obtained (errno). NMDA could not obtain the current time due to an operating system error. Report the
operating system error (errno) to the appropriate vendor.

The data could not be XDR'd from the stream. The incoming recover stream of data could not be decoded due to a possible network
error or data corruption. Report the error to Technical Support.

The function mm_retrieve() failed with the error: reason During a restore, a call of the NetWorker core function, mm_retrieve(), failed due to
the given reason. Take the corrective action suggested by the error message. If
required, report the error to Technical Support.

The function nsr_bind_recov_mm() failed with the error: reason During a restore, a call of the NetWorker core function, nsr_bind_recov_mm(), failed
due to the given reason. Take the corrective action suggested by the error message.
If required, report the error to Technical Support.

The function nsr_end() failed with the error message: reason A call of the NetWorker core function, nsr_end(), failed due to the given reason. Take
the corrective action suggested by the error message. If required, report the error to
Technical Support.

The function nsr_rstart() failed with the error: reason During a restore, a call of the NetWorker core function, nsr_rstart(), failed due to the
given reason. Take the corrective action suggested by the error message. If required,
report the error to Technical Support.

The function sbtinit2() has already been called. This is an internal error caused by Oracle calling the function sbinit2() twice. Report
the error to Technical Support.

The functions sbtinit() or sbtinit2() have not been called. This is an internal error caused by Oracle not calling the two SBT initialization
routines. Report the error to Technical Support.

The index entry failed the cross check: During an index lookup, the entry was located in the client file index but not in the
cfx_name(backup_piece_name) save_time(save_time) media database. Restart the NetWorker services, and use the mminfo and nsrinfo
commands to verify the backup information in the indexes. Run the nsrck program to
resolve any corruption of the indexes.

Oracle-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 349

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 44 Error messages from Oracle backups and restores (page 4 of 9)

Error message Description

The lookup of 'backup_piece_name' on server 'server' failed - NMDA could not locate backup_piece_name in the indexes due to the reason. The
'reason' indexes might be corrupted. Run the nsrck program to resolve any corruption of the
indexes.

The name of the NSR client could not be determined. The name of the NetWorker client could not be determined. Set the parameter
NSR_CLIENT to the NetWorker client name by using the send command.

The name of the NSR server could not be determined. The name of the NetWorker server could not be determined. Set the parameter
NSR_SERVER to the NetWorker server name by using the send command.

The NSR client name could not be determined. The name of the NetWorker client could not be determined. Set the parameter
NSR_CLIENT to the NetWorker client name by using the send command.

The NSR server name could not be determined. The name of the NetWorker server could not be determined. Set the parameter
NSR_SERVER to the NetWorker server name by using the send command.

The NSR_CLIENT parameter was not set. The name of the NetWorker client could not be determined. Set the parameter
NSR_CLIENT to the NetWorker client name by using the send command.

The NSR_SERVER parameter was not set. The name of the NetWorker server could not be determined. Set the parameter
NSR_SERVER to the NetWorker server name by using the send command.

The NW authentication for client 'client' was refused by server NMDA could not obtain the required authentication to connect to the NetWorker client
'server' because 'reason'. file index due to the given reason. The client might not be configured as a client on the
server. Take the corrective action suggested by the error message.

The NW client has not been set. The name of the NetWorker client could not be determined. Set the parameter
NSR_CLIENT to the NetWorker client name by using the send command.

The NW server does not have a valid NMDA proxy copy license. The NetWorker server attempted a proxy operation without the required license.
Ensure that the NetWorker server has the required license for the proxy operation.

The NW server has not been set. The name of the NetWorker server could not be determined. Set the parameter
NSR_SERVER to the NetWorker server name by using the send command.

The NWORA file ID could not be XDR'd. This is an internal XDR error caused by a network read or write operation. Report the
xdrm: 0xvalue error to Technical Support.
NWORA fid: 0xvalue
ssid: 0xvalue
ssoff: 0xvalue

The record obtained has the wrong save time 'save_time1'. The NMDA located an index record in the client file index, but it had an unexpected save
save time queried was 'save_time2'. time. The indexes might be corrupted. Restart the NetWorker services, and run the
nsrck program to resolve any corruption of the indexes.

The removal of SSID 'save_set_id' failed with error: reason An index deletion operation failed for the given reason. Use the mminfo and nsrinfo
commands to verify the status of the index record. If required, report the error to
Technical Support.

The savefile_fini() call failed. reason During a restore, a call of the NetWorker core function, savefile_fini(), failed due to the
given reason. Take the corrective action suggested by the error message. If required,
report the error to Technical Support.

The sfhead could not be XDR'd. This is an internal XDR error caused by a network write operation. Report the error to
Technical Support.

The SS browse time is not in the future: The specified browse policy time was in the past. This might be due to a problem with
current time: current_time the operating system time setting. Ensure that the browse policy time is set correctly.
browse: browse_time If required, ensure that the operating system time is set correctly.

350 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 44 Error messages from Oracle backups and restores (page 5 of 9)

Error message Description

The SS retention time is not in the future: The specified retention policy time was in the past. This might be due to a problem
current time: current_time with the operating system time setting. Ensure that the retention policy time is set
retention: rentention_time correctly. If required, ensure that the operating system time is set correctly.

The UNIX attributes could not be XDR'd. This is an internal XDR error caused by a network read or write operation. Report the
xdrm: 0xvalue error to Technical Support.
ua: 0xvalue

Error messages from proxy backups and restores:

Attempted to restore file 'filename' to raw device 'device_name'. A proxy restore of a regular file to a raw device was attempted. This type of restore is
not supported. Do not attempt to restore a regular file to a raw device.

Attempted to restore raw device 'device_name' to file 'filename'. A proxy restore of a raw device file to a regular file was attempted. This type of restore
is not supported. Do not attempt to restore a raw device file to a regular file.

Cannot back up object object_name with proxy copy. The RMAN backup command included the proxy only option, but the object
object_name did not reside on a primary storage device that the PowerSnap Module
supports. When the backup command includes the proxy only option, ensure that
the object object_name resides on a primary storage device that the PowerSnap
Module supports.

Could not find the nsrsnapck binary. During an index removal for a proxy backup, NMDA could not locate the nsrsnapck
binary, which is probably in a nondefault location. Ensure that the parameter
NSR_NWPATH is set correctly.

Could not lstat - filename The lstat() system call failed. The file filename either did not exist or had invalid
permissions. Ensure that the file is an existing file with valid permissions.

Could not lstat secondary link - filename The lstat() system call failed. The file filename was a symbolic link that pointed to a file
that either did not exist or had invalid permissions. Ensure that the symbolic link points
to an existing file with valid permissions.

Could not obtain NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE from NWORA The error was caused by one of the following conditions:
resource file. • The NWORA resource file does not exist.
• The NWORA resource file has incorrect permissions.
• The NWORA resource file is corrupted.
Based on the condition, perform one of the following:
• If the NWORA resource file does not exist, create the file.
• Ensure that the NWORA resource file has correct permissions.
• If the NWORA resource file is corrupted, re-create the file.
“NWORA resource file” on page 265 provides more information.

Could not read link - pathname A proxy backup failed due to the pathname that was an invalid symbolic link. Before a
proxy backup, ensure that any symbolic link is a valid link.

Error creating staging directory 'directory'. During a proxy restore of a regular file, the permissions of the destination directory
were possibly invalid. NMDA was not able to create the required staging subdirectory,
.nworapc. Ensure that the destination directory has valid permissions for a proxy
restore.

Invalid source path argument A proxy backup failed due to an invalid source pathname. Perform a proxy backup
with a valid source pathname only.

nsrsnapck_binary_name process failed with error - reason During an index removal for a proxy backup, the nsrsnapck binary failed. The binary
name is nsrsnapck on UNIX systems and nsrsnapck.exe on Windows systems.
Report the error to Technical Support.

Path pathname is too long. A proxy backup failed because the given pathname exceeded the limit of 1,024 bytes.
Ensure that any pathname involved in a proxy backup does not exceed 1,024 bytes.

Oracle-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 351

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 44 Error messages from Oracle backups and restores (page 6 of 9)

Error message Description

pb_init() failed with (reason): invalid BRCAPI version The version number of the BRC API that was reported by the PowerSnap Module was
corrupted. Report the error to Technical Support.

Proxy copy is not supported. A proxy operation was attempted on a platform that NMDA does not support for proxy
operations. Do not attempt a proxy operation on an unsupported platform. The EMC
Information Protection Software Compatibility Guide on the Powerlink website
provides details on supported platforms.

The BRC API did not return an error string for the SBTPC An unknown error occurred during a BRC API function call by the PowerSnap Module.
object: object_name Report the error to Technical Support.

The BRC status of logical object 'filename' was failure: The PowerSnap Module reported a failure during a proxy backup of the file filename.
file_status Report the error to Technical Support.

The call to pb_environment() failed with error: During a proxy operation, a pb_environment() function call failed due to the given
reason reason. Take the corrective action suggested by the error message. If required, report
the error to Technical Support.

The call to pb_open() failed with error: During a proxy operation, a pb_open() function call failed due to the given reason.
reason Take the corrective action suggested by the error message. If required, report the
error to Technical Support.

The call to pb_prepare() failed with error: During a proxy operation, a pb_prepare() function call failed due to the given reason.
reason Take the corrective action suggested by the error message. If required, report the
error to Technical Support.

The call to pb_status() failed for object 'object_name' with the During a proxy operation, a pb_status() function call failed due to the given reason.
error: Take the corrective action suggested by the error message. If required, report the
reason error to Technical Support.

The call to pb_status() for object 'object_name' failed with error: During a proxy operation, a pb_status() function call failed due to the given reason.
reason Take the corrective action suggested by the error message. If required, report the
error to Technical Support.

The canonical OS file name path is invalid: filename The operating system filename specified for a proxy operation was not a valid
pathname. Ensure that the file pathname specified for a proxy operation is a valid full
pathname that is not a directory.

The data source is neither a file or a RAW volume - filename The file filename involved in a proxy backup was not recognized as a regular file or
raw volume. For proxy backups, NMDA supports only regular files and raw volumes.
Ensure that filename is either a regular file or raw volume, as required for proxy
backups.

The destination does not have the same terminating name as A proxy restore of a raw device was attempted to a location with a different basename
the source 'device_name'. from the backed-up source. For example, c1t2d0s2 is the basename (or terminating
name) of /dev/rdsk/c1t2d0s2. Perform a proxy restore of the raw device to a location
with the same basename as the backed-up source.

The file being recovered could not be found in its staging During a proxy restore, an error occurred at the point where the file filename was to be
location: filename moved from the staging directory .nworapc to the destination directory. Ensure that
there are no permission or other problems with the destination directory and the
staging directory .nworapc, and then restart the proxy restore. If the error recurs,
report it to Technical Support.

The file 'filename' cannot be removed from the staging directory During a proxy restore of the file filename, a file with the same name was found in the
(errno). .nworapc subdirectory, probably left there by a previous failed restore. The errno is
the error number from the failed attempt to remove the existing file. Remove the file
file_name from the .nworapc subdirectory, and restart the proxy restore.

The NMDA BRCAPI version version is outside the range NMDA 1.2 does not support the PowerSnap Module release that was used for a proxy
supported by the BRC service: earliest_version - latest_version operation. Ensure that a supported release of the PowerSnap Module is installed. The
EMC Information Protection Software Compatibility Guide on the Powerlink website
provides details on supported releases.

352 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 44 Error messages from Oracle backups and restores (page 7 of 9)

Error message Description

The NWORA resource file does not exist. Please create it with A proxy backup failed because the NWORA resource file did not exist. Create the
nsroraadmin. NWORA resource file by using the nsroraadmin command, and restart the proxy
backup. “NWORA resource file” on page 265 provides details.

The NWORA resource lock file does not exist. Please create it A proxy backup failed because the NWORA resource lock file did not exist. Create the
by running 'nsroraadmin -r list' NWORA resource lock file by using the nsroraadmin -r list command, and restart the
proxy backup. “NWORA resource file” on page 265 provides details.

The NWORA resource NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE is in the In the NWORA resource file, NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE was set to the default value
'undetermined' state. of undetermined. Set the value of NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE to either enabled or
disabled (as required) by using the nsroraadmin command.

The object 'filename' is not a file. A proxy backup failed because the file filename is not a data file—neither a raw file
nor a regular file. Perform a proxy backup of a supported type of data file only.

The ORACLE_SID must be set when performing proxy copy During a scheduled proxy backup, the parameter ORACLE_SID was not set in the
backups. configuration file. In the configuration file, set the parameter ORACLE_SID to the SID
value of the Oracle database.

The OS file name has been specified multiple times by Oracle: This is an internal Oracle error caused by Oracle specifying the same filename twice
filename during a proxy operation. Report the error to Technical Support.

The parameter file cannot be open: filename The configuration file specified by the parameter NSR_PROXY_PFILE could not be
opened. The file should contain PowerSnap parameter settings for a proxy backup or
restore. Ensure that the value specified by the parameter NSR_PROXY_PFILE is a
valid pathname of the configuration file.

The pb_cancel() call for object 'object_name' returned the error The pb_cancel() function call failed during a proxy operation. Report the error to
message: Technical Support.
error

The pb_inquiry() call failed for object 'object_name': The pb_inquiry() function call failed during a proxy operation. Report the error to
error Technical Support.

The pb_inquiry() for object 'object_name' failed because: The pb_inquiry() function call failed during a proxy operation. Report the error to
error Technical Support.

The pb_inquiry() of object 'object_name' returned error: The pb_inquiry() function call failed during a proxy operation. Report the error to
error Technical Support.

The pb_restore() for object 'object_name' failed with error: The pb_restore() function call failed during a proxy operation. Report the error to
error Technical Support.

The pb_save() of object 'object_name' returned error: The pb_save() function call failed during a proxy operation. Report the error to
error Technical Support.

The pb_snapshot() call for object 'object_name' failed with error: The pb_snapshot() function call failed during a proxy operation. Report the error to
error Technical Support.

The restore destination path is not valid: filename During a proxy restore operation, NMDA found the specified restore destination,
filename, to be invalid. Ensure that the specified restore destination is a valid
pathname.

The restore operation for the file failed for an unknown reason: During a proxy restore, an error occurred at the point where the file filename was to be
filename moved from the staging directory .nworapc to the destination directory. Ensure that
there are no permission or other problems with the destination directory and the
staging directory .nworapc, and then retry the proxy restore. If the error occurs again,
report it to Technical Support.

The SBTPC object could not determine the destination of the During a proxy restore operation, NMDA was unable to determine where to restore
restore. the file. Report the error to Technical Support.

Oracle-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 353

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 44 Error messages from Oracle backups and restores (page 8 of 9)

Error message Description

The SBTPC object is not in the PB_TYPE_PREPARE state: During a proxy operation, NMDA and the PowerSnap Module became
object_name unsynchronized as to the status of the object object_name. Report the error to
Technical Support.

The SBTPC object is not in the SBTPCSTATUS_NOTREADY During a proxy operation, NMDA and the PowerSnap Module became
state: object_name unsynchronized as to the status of the object object_name. Report the error to
Technical Support.

The SBTPC object 'object_name' failed with the error message: The proxy backup or restore of a file failed during a PowerSnap Module operation, for
reason the given reason. Report the error to Technical Support.

The SBTPC object 'object_name' is entering the SBTPCSTART During a proxy operation, NMDA and the PowerSnap Module became
backup state but its BRC type is: type unsynchronized as to the status of the object object_name. Report the error to
Technical Support.

The SBTPC object 'object_name' is entering the SBTPCSTART During a proxy operation, NMDA and the PowerSnap Module became
restore state but its BRC type is: type unsynchronized as to the status of the object object_name. Report the error to
Technical Support.

The SBTPC object 'object_name' is entering the SBTPCSTART During a proxy operation, NMDA and the PowerSnap Module became
state but its status is: status unsynchronized as to the status of the object object_name. Report the error to
Technical Support.

The SBTPC object 'object_name' is leaving the BRC prepare During a proxy operation, NMDA and the PowerSnap Module became
state but its status is: status unsynchronized as to the status of the object object_name. Report the error to
Technical Support.

The SBTPC object 'object_name' is leaving the BRC save state During a proxy operation, NMDA and the PowerSnap Module became
but its status is: status unsynchronized as to the status of the object object_name. Report the error to
Technical Support.

The SBTPC object 'object_name' is leaving the BRC snapshot During a proxy operation, NMDA and the PowerSnap Module became
state but its status is: status unsynchronized as to the status of the object object_name. Report the error to
Technical Support.

The SBTPC object 'object_name' was aborted by the BRC The PowerSnap Module terminated the proxy operation. Examine the PowerSnap
service. Please check the PowerSnap logs for an explanation. Module logs for a possible reason for the termination.

The sbtpccommit() function was called during restore. This is an internal Oracle error that occurred during a proxy restore. Report the error
to Technical Support.

The staging directory 'directory' has invalid permissions (errno). During a proxy restore, NMDA was unable to write to the staging directory, directory.
The errno is the error number from the function call that failed. Ensure that the staging
directory has valid permissions for a proxy restore.

There are no SBTPC objects that have not returned their status. This is an internal error during a proxy operation caused by Oracle expecting more
files to be processed whereas NMDA has completed its file processing. Report the
error to Technical Support.

This backup piece name is already used in the SBTPC session: This is an Oracle error caused by Oracle specifying the same backup piece name
backup_piece_name twice during a proxy operation. Report the error to Technical Support.

Error messages from scheduled backups (nsrdasv):

client: WARNING! The NWORA resource file 'save' process The NWORA resource file could not be backed up after a successful RMAN backup.
output error messages. Analyze the log_file and if it includes an error message, take the corrective action
client: Please check the save log file for more information: suggested by the error message.
log_file

ORACLE_HOME is not defined. Cannot start RMAN. ORACLE_HOME was not set properly in the configuration file. Set ORACLE_HOME
properly in the configuration file.

354 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 44 Error messages from Oracle backups and restores (page 9 of 9)

Error message Description

The backup config did not contain a string. The nsrdasv program was run with the -C option, but the Backup Config attribute was
not set properly in the Client resource. Remove this Client resource, and re-create the
Client resource by using the backup configuration wizard.

The NSR client resource for client_name does not contain any The nsrdasv program was run with the -C option, but the Backup Config attribute was
backup configuration. not set properly in the Client resource. Remove this Client resource, and re-create the
Client resource by using the backup configuration wizard.

The temporary file 'rman_script_path' could not be created The scheduled backup binary, nsrdasv, could not create the file rman_script_path to
(errno). write the RMAN script generated by the backup configuration wizard. Ensure that the
root user on UNIX or the Windows Administrator has "write" permissions on the
directory path of the rman_script_path file.

Error messages from the nsroraadmin program

Table 45 on page 355 lists error messages generated by the nsroraadmin program in
alphabetical order.
The error messages appear in the following format:
nsroraadmin: error_message
where error_message is the text of the error message as shown in the table.

Table 45 Error messages from the nsroraadmin program (page 1 of 3)

Error message Description

Command line arguments are not understood. The nsroraadmin command included one or more invalid options. Use the
nsroraadmin command with the correct options. “Configuring the NWORA resource
file with the nsroraadmin program” on page 270 provides details.

Could not create the NWORA resource file (errno) The nsroraadmin command could not create the NWORA resource file, possibly due
invalid permissions. Ensure that valid permissions exist to allow the nsroraadmin
command to create the NWORA resource file. “NWORA resource file” on page 265
provides details.

Could not create the NWORA resource lock file (errno) The nsroraadmin command could not obtain the required lock file in the /nsr/tmp or
NetWorker_install_path\tmp directory. The lock file is required for accessing the
NWORA resource file. Report the error to Technical Support.

Could not open resource file 'filename' (errno). The nsroraadmin command could not open the NWORA resource file, possibly due
invalid permissions. Verify that the NWORA resource file exists and has valid
permissions. If required, create or repair the file by using the nsroraadmin command,
or modify the file permissions.

No command line parameters are set. The nsroraadmin command options were missing. Use the nsroraadmin command
with the correct options.

NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE can only be set to 'enabled', In the nsroraadmin command, the NSR_ORACLE_CAT_MODE parameter resource
'disabled' or 'undetermined'. was set to a value other than enabled, disabled, or undetermined. In the nsroraadmin
command, set the NSR_ORACLE_CAT_MODE parameter resource to enabled or
disabled for instant backups. “Configuring the NWORA resource file with the
nsroraadmin program” on page 270 provides details.

NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE can only be set to 'TRUE' or In the nsroraadmin command, the NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE parameter
'FALSE'. resource was set to a value other than TRUE or FALSE. In the nsroraadmin
command, set the NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE parameter resource to either TRUE
or FALSE only.

Oracle-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 355

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 45 Error messages from the nsroraadmin program (page 2 of 3)

Error message Description

NWORA parameter resources must be specified in the In the nsroraadmin command, an NWORA parameter resource name and value
'ResourceName ResourceValue' format. were not specified in the correct format. In the nsroraadmin command, specify the
NWORA parameter resource name and value in the correct format.

NWORA SID resource must be specified when doing deletion. In the nsroraadmin command with the -r delete option, the SID value of an Oracle
database was not specified. In the nsroraadmin command with the -r delete option,
specify the correct SID value.

The '-r' flag cannot be set multiple times. The nsroraadmin command contained more than one -r option. Use the
nsroraadmin command with only one -r option.

The '-r' option requires an NWORA resource specification. The nsroraadmin command with the -r option did not include the required resource
specification. In the nsroraadmin command with the -r option, specify the required
resource name and value.

The '-r' option requires either an 'add', 'update', 'list' or 'delete' In the nsroraadmin command, the -r option did not include one of the required
option. keywords: add, update, list, or delete. In the nsroraadmin command, include one of
the required keywords with the -r option. “Configuring the NWORA resource file with
the nsroraadmin program” on page 270 provides details.

The first NWORA resource is not a header (errno). The NWORA resource file is probably corrupted. Verify the contents of the NWORA
resource file. If required, repair the resource file by using the nsroraadmin command.

The NWORA resource file does not contain the NSR_NWPATH The NWORA resource file does not contain the mandatory NSR_NWPATH parameter
resource. resource. The file might be corrupted. Verify the contents of the NWORA resource file.
If required, repair the resource file by using the nsroraadmin command.

The NWORA resource file does not exist. The NWORA resource file does not yet exist. Create the NWORA resource file by
using the nsroraadmin command.

The NWORA resource named 'resource_name' is not found. The nsroraadmin command specified the name of a resource that does not exist in
the NWORA resource file. In the nsroraadmin command, specify a valid resource
name from the NWORA resource file.

The NWORA resource parameter list can only contain one The NWORA resource file includes multiple values for a resource, which is not
entry. supported. The file is probably corrupted. The file might have been edited manually,
which is not supported. Repair the NWORA resource file by using the nsroraadmin
command.

The NWORA resource parameter list contains the invalid The NWORA resource file contains an invalid resource name. The file is probably
element 'resource_name'. corrupted. The file might have been edited manually, which is not supported. Repair
the NWORA resource file by using the nsroraadmin command. “Configuring the
NWORA resource file with the nsroraadmin program” on page 270 provides details.

The NWORA resource parameter list for a SID requires the The nsroraadmin command for creating or updating an NWORA SID resource was
item1, item2 and item3 information. missing the required items. In the nsroraadmin command for creating or updating an
NWORA SID resource, include the required items.

The NWORA resource 'resource_name' is not a SID resource. The nsroraadmin command with the -r delete option did not include a valid name of
an NWORA SID resource. In the nsroraadmin command with the -r delete option,
specify a valid name of an NWORA SID resource.

The NWORA resource specified is not supported: In the nsroraadmin command, an invalid name or value were specified for an
resource_name = resource_value NWORA parameter resource. In the nsroraadmin command, specify a valid name
and value for an NWORA parameter resource. “NWORA parameter resources” on
page 265 provides details.

The NWORA SID resource for 'sid_value' already exists. The nsroraadmin command attempted to add an NWORA SID resource that already
existed. In the nsroraadmin command, specify the values for a new NWORA SID
resource.

356 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 45 Error messages from the nsroraadmin program (page 3 of 3)

Error message Description

The SID token 'connect' is an empty string. The nsroraadmin command did not include the required pathname of the RMAN
connection file with the connect keyword. In the nsroraadmin command, specify a
valid pathname of the RMAN connection file with the connect keyword. “Configuring
the NWORA resource file with the nsroraadmin program” on page 270 provides
details.

The SID token 'home' is an empty string. The nsroraadmin command did not include the required pathname of the Oracle
home directory with the home keyword. In the nsroraadmin command, specify a
valid pathname of the Oracle home directory with the home keyword.

The SID token 'ORACLE_SID' is invalid. In the nsroraadmin command with the sid keyword, the specified SID value of the
Oracle database was invalid. In the nsroraadmin command, specify a valid SID value
with the sid keyword.

The SID token 'sid' is an empty string. The nsroraadmin command did not include the required SID value of the Oracle
database with the sid keyword. In the nsroraadmin command, specify a valid SID
value with the sid keyword.

The tokens 'sid', 'home' and 'connect' must be set when adding The nsroraadmin command to add an NWORA SID resource did not include the
a SID. settings of the mandatory sid, home, and connect keywords. In the nsroraadmin
command to add an NWORA SID resource, include the settings of the sid, home, and
connect keywords.

The value of the NWORA resource is missing. In the nsroraadmin command with the -r update option, the NWORA resource value
was not specified with the resource name. In the nsroraadmin command with the -r
update option, specify the NWORA resource value with the resource name.

Unrecognized argument 'option'. The nsroraadmin command included the unrecognized option option. Use the
nsroraadmin command with the correct options. “Configuring the NWORA resource
file with the nsroraadmin program” on page 270 provides details.

You must be the super-user to update the NWORA resource The nsroraadmin command was typed by the wrong user. Type the nsroraadmin
file. command as the root user on UNIX, or as a member of the Microsoft Windows
Administrators group.

Error messages from the nsrorainfo program

Table 46 on page 357 lists error messages generated by the nsrorainfo program, in
alphabetical order.
The error messages appear in the following format:
The NW volume information lookup failed:
error_message
where error_message is the text of the error message as shown in the table.

Table 46 Error messages from the nsrorainfo program (page 1 of 2)

Error message Description

A connection to NW server 'server' could not be established NMDA could not connect to the NetWorker client file index due to the given reason.
because 'reason'. The client might not be configured as a client on the server. Take the corrective action
suggested by the error message.

Could not locate the LNM save file 'backup_piece_name' on NMDA could not locate an index record for the backup piece. The index record is
server 'server'. probably missing. Use the mminfo and nsrinfo commands to verify the status of the
index record.

Could not locate the LNM save time 'save_time' on server NMDA could not locate an index record for the save time in the client file index. The
'server'. index record is probably missing. Use the mminfo and nsrinfo commands to verify
the status of the index record.

Oracle-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 357

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 46 Error messages from the nsrorainfo program (page 2 of 2)

Error message Description

Error in mmdb lookup by time: reason A lookup in the media database failed for the given reason. Use the mminfo
command to verify the status of the media database record. Take the corrective action
suggested by the error message.

Exceeded the number of retries. The NetWorker server may be NMDA could not contact the NetWorker index service nsrindexd. This was probably
down or unreachable. caused by the NetWorker services being shutdown. Restart the NetWorker services
on the server, as required.

The file 'filename' could not be opened. The file specified with the -f option of the nsrorainfo command could not be
accessed. Ensure that the specified file exists, and then type the nsrorainfo
command again with the -f option.

The file name provided is NULL. In the nsrorainfo command, the -f option did not include the required filename. In the
nsrorainfo command, include the required filename with the -f option.

The index entry failed the cross check: During an index lookup, the entry was located in the client file index but not in the
cfx_name(backup_piece_name) save_time(save_time) media database. Restart the NetWorker services, and use the mminfo and nsrinfo
commands to verify the backup information in the indexes. Run the nsrck program to
resolve any corruption of the indexes.

The lookup of 'backup_piece_name' on server 'server' failed - NMDA could not locate backup_piece_name in the indexes due to the reason. The
'reason' indexes might be corrupted. Run the nsrck program to resolve any corruption of the
indexes.

The NW authentication for client 'client' was refused by server NMDA could not obtain the required authentication to connect to the NetWorker client
'server' because 'reason'. file index due to the given reason. The client might not configured as a client on the
server. Take the corrective action suggested by the error message.

The record obtained has the wrong save time 'save_time1'. The NMDA located an index record in the client file index, but it had an unexpected save
save time queried was 'save_time2'. time. The indexes might be corrupted. Restart the NetWorker services, and run the
nsrck program to resolve any corruption of the indexes.

Sybase-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages

The following sections provide NMDA Sybase-specific troubleshooting tips and error
messages.

NMDA Sybase-specific error messages

This section describes error messages that you might encounter while using the
NMDA software for Sybase operations, and the possible resolutions for the errors.
“NetWorker XBSA error messages” on page 333 describes the error messages
generated by the NetWorker XBSA interface.
The following sections describe the Sybase-specific error messages:
◆ “Error messages from Sybase consistency checks, backups, and restores” on
page 359
◆ “Sybase backup server and libnsrsyb error messages” on page 362

358 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Error messages from Sybase consistency checks, backups, and restores

Table 47 on page 359 lists error messages generated during Sybase operations with
the NMDA software in alphabetical order. Messages that are common to all the
Sybase operations are listed first, followed by messages from consistency checks,
backups, and then restores.

Table 47 Error messages from Sybase consistency checks, backups, and restores (page 1 of 4)

Error message Description

Error messages common to all the Sybase operations:

CS-LIBRARY or CT-LIBRARY error: error_message. An error occurred in the Sybase Open Client library layer. The operating system part
Operating system error number(n): error_message. of the error message appears only if an operating system error occurred. These error
messages normally appear when the master database is recovered because this
operation shuts down the Sybase server, but they are not normal during other
operations. The error message text describes the specific problem.

error from server Sybase_server : Msg number, Level number, The Sybase server returned an error. Check the error message that follows this
State number message to determine the reason for the error.

No database names were specified. The nsrdasv, nsrsybrc, and nsrsybcc commands each operate on a database (or,
for nsrsybrc and nsrsybcc, a list of databases). No database names were specified
on the command line.

no NetWorker server was specified The NetWorker server was not specified or could not be found. The NetWorker server
to which the command is to be issued can be specified with the -s NetWorker_server
option.

non fatal internal error from server server_name: Msg number, The Sybase server returned a nonfatal error. This error does not stop the operation.
Level number, State number Examine the message to ensure that the error does not lead to future problems.

path needs to begin with SYBASE:. The command line has the The database name option for the nsrsybcc program did not begin with the
form SYBASE:/instance_name[/database_name] characters “SYBASE:”. All Sybase server save sets must begin with this name.

the command line may specify the entire instance or a list of Either the entire instance (SYBASE:/ASE_server_name) or a list of databases
individual databases, but not both (SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database_name1
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database_name2) can be specified at the command
line. An instance name and a list of databases cannot be specified at the same time.

The command line specifies more than one Sybase instance. Each invocation of the nsrdasv, nsrsybcc, or nsrsybrc program can operate on a
Only a single instance may be supplied with each command single Sybase server because the user ID and password supplied are unlikely to be
line. the same over multiple servers. Retry the command and run it once for each Sybase
server.

the database name database_name has a length greater than The database name supplied at the command line was longer than 30 characters. The
the maximum of 30 maximum database name length is 30 characters.

The instance name was not provided in the command line The database to be processed was specified as “SYBASE:”, but the instance name
command_line_value. The command line has the form was not supplied.
SYBASE:/instance_name[/database_name].

unable to write environment variables to the temporary file The system could not write to the temporary file used to pass environment variables
between nsrdasv, nsrsybrc, and libnsrsyb. Check for file access or disk problems.

user name is required and was not supplied A username must be supplied for Sybase log in. This username can be queried from
the Client resource in the NetWorker server, entered on the command line, or
obtained from the environment variable, $USER.

Error message from Sybase consistency checks:

invalid check option -o value was supplied The database consistency check option that was supplied is not valid. Refer to the
EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Command Reference Guide
or to the nsrsybcc man page for a list of supported options.

Sybase-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 359

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 47 Error messages from Sybase consistency checks, backups, and restores (page 2 of 4)

Error message Description

Error messages from Sybase backups:

a full database backup is required and will be done before the The incremental backup failed because a full backup must first be performed. Perform
transaction log backup a full backup, then retry the transaction log backup.

An invalid backup level was supplied. Valid backup levels are The backup level supplied to the nsrdasv command is not permitted.
full, incremental, and skip

cannot find database database_name in instance server_name The database to be backed up does not exist in the Sybase server.

PRECMD or POSTCMD did not return a result. It needs to The PRECMD or POSTCMD did not return a status value.
return zero on success and nonzero on failure.

process process_number running command PRECMD or The PRECMD or POSTCMD exited with a nonzero result code. Check the PRECMD
POSTCMD completed with a result of n or POSTCMD exit code for details. Also verify that the settings of PRECMD or
POSTCMD are valid. The following provide details:
• “PRECMD” on page 302
• “POSTCMD” on page 302

the exit status of process process_number could not be The PRECMD or POSTCMD that was run did not exit, but the process no longer
determined exists.

The LNM level parameter value must be between 'FULL' and '9' The environment variable NSR_BACKUP_LEVEL specified a level other than full,
incremental, or skip.

the NSR_BACKUP_PATHS parameter was not set in the The required setting of the NSR_BACKUP_PATHS parameter could not be found in
configuration file the configuration file.

The Sybase user name was not set. Please specify the Sybase Supply a username for Sybase login through the SYBASE_USER parameter setting
user in the configuration by setting the SYBASE_USER in the configuration file.
parameter

unable to create directory entries The directory entries could not be created. Check the xbsa.messages file for the
specific reason that the entries could not be created.

unable to determine whether database and log are on separate The database to be backed up is not in a state in which it can be queried to determine
segments whether incremental backups are allowed. The error message from the Sybase server
that was displayed prior to this message indicates the reason the database cannot be
queried.

unable to dump database database_name in instance The dump database command failed. The error message from the Sybase server
server_name that was displayed prior to this message indicates the reason the database was not
dumped.

unable to dump the transaction log for database The command to dump the transaction log failed. The error message from the Sybase
database_name in instance server_name server that was displayed prior to this message indicates the reason the transaction
log was not dumped.

unable to dump the transaction log without truncating it for The command to dump the transaction log with the no_truncate option failed. The
database database_name error message from the Sybase server that was displayed prior to this message
indicated the reason the transaction log was not truncated.

unable to execute the command PRECMD or POSTCMD The PRECMD or POSTCMD could not be found. Ensure the command exists in one
contents of the directories specified in $PATH.

unable to print savegrp completion message After the backup occurred, the NetWorker software could not find the save sets in the
media database.

Unable to print summary. One or more parameters are not set The parameters that NetWorker software expected to find for the function that prints
the savegrp summary were not supplied.

unable to spawn process to issue the PRECMD or POSTCMD The PRECMD or POSTCMD could not be run because a process needed to run them
command was not available.

360 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 47 Error messages from Sybase consistency checks, backups, and restores (page 3 of 4)

Error message Description

unable to truncate the transaction log for database The command to truncate the transaction log failed. The error message from the
database_name Sybase server that was displayed prior to this message indicated the reason the
transaction log was not truncated.

unable to truncate the transaction log for database The command to truncate the transaction log failed. The error message from the
database_name with the no_log option Sybase server that was displayed prior to this message indicates the reason the
transaction log was not truncated.

Error messages from Sybase restores:

cannot restore database “database_name” because it does not The nsrsybrc command could not find a backup of the database specified for
exist in “instance_name” recovery. Run the nsrinfo command to see if a backup exists, and ensure that the
user ID used for the nsrsybrc command matches the object owner that is displayed.
Run the Sybase Backup server and the nsrsybrc and nsrdasv commands from the
same user ID to avoid this problem.

cannot restore to the destination database database_name The database to which the nsrsybrc command is recovering does not exist. Create
because it does not exist in the instance server_name the database and try the nsrsybrc command again.

If master is being restored, no others can be restored in the A list of databases to recover was specified, and the master database was listed
same session. The database must be in master recover mode along with others. Recovering the master database shuts down the Sybase server,
to recover master, and this precludes restoring any other which makes recovering other databases impossible.
database.

if the destination is an instance, the source must be an instance, The -d destination option was used to specify a server instance, but the item to be
too recovered is a single database. Retry the command and specify the destination
database. For example:
nsrsybrc -U sa -P xxx -d SYBASE:/destination_server/destination_database
SYBASE:/source_server/source_database

Note: The Sybase server and database names are case-sensitive and must be in the
same case as recorded in the NetWorker backup indexes.

if the source is an instance, the destination must be an instance, The object to be recovered is an entire Sybase server instance, but the destination
too specified to recover the instance to is a database name. Retry the command and
specify the destination as an instance. For example:
nsrsybrc -U sa -P xxx -d SYBASE:/destination_server SYBASE:/source_server

Note: The Sybase server names are case-sensitive and must be in the same case as
recorded in the NetWorker backup indexes.

internal error. Full backup expected but not found. A full backup was found, but was then no longer available before the nsrsybrc
command recovered the database. For example, this error occurs when the volume
containing the full backup is manually relabeled at the same time the incremental
backup that depends on that full backup is being recovered.

invalid time specification: time value The -t time option supplied with the nsrsybrc command was not valid. This option
should be supplied in the nsr_getdate form. The nsr_getdate man page provides
details.

no NetWorker server was specified The NetWorker server was not specified or could not be found. Specify the NetWorker
server to which the command is to be issued with the -s server_name option.

Recover option validation error. Either the entire instance (SYBASE:/ASE_server_name) or a list of databases
(SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database_name1
SYBASE:/ASE_server_name/database_name2) must be specified at the command
line. Both an instance name and a list of databases cannot be specified at the same
time.

the command line did not specify a database or an instance to The name of the database or Sybase server instance to be recovered must be
restore supplied when using the nsrsybrc command.

Sybase-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 361

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 47 Error messages from Sybase consistency checks, backups, and restores (page 4 of 4)

Error message Description

there are no databases to restore in instance server_name There were no databases found in the directory entry for the Sybase server database.

there is no backup of the instance for the time supplied No backup could be found for the Sybase server name supplied. Make sure that the
nsrsybrc command is run with the same user ID that was used to run the nsrdasv
command. Otherwise, ensure that the time used is correct. If a time is not entered, the
current time is used.

there is no full backup of database database_name in instance Backups of this database exist, but there was not a full backup available for the time
server_name for the time supplied requested. Try an earlier time, or run the nsrinfo command to determine when the
last full backup occurred. For example, if the full backup has passed its browse policy,
the full backup might be listed in the media database but not in the client index. In this
situation, re-create the entry in the client index with the scanner -i command, and
then recover the database with the nsrsybrc command.

unable to query backup There was an error querying the backup from the server. Check the xbsa.messages
file for the specific error text.

Sybase backup server and libnsrsyb error messages

When the Sybase Backup server encounters an error or condition requiring a
warning, it writes a message to the Sybase Backup server error log.
The default error log location is $SYBASE/$SYBASE_ASE/install.
Table 48 on page 362 lists libnsrsyb error messages that are logged in the Sybase
Backup server error log. The Sybase documentation provides details on other Sybase
Backup server errors.

Table 48 Sybase backup server and libnsrsyb error messages (page 1 of 2)

Error message Description

libnsrsyb opened with an unknown mode: internal error The libnsrsyb shared library was opened with a mode other than read or write.

there is insufficient memory to continue There is not enough memory to complete the operation.

The time stamp dddddddd has non digits in it. Timestamps are The timestamp supplied for the load command from the isql command line has a
composed of digits in the form YYYYMMDDhhmmsslll. timestamp with an incorrect format. The timestamp must have the format
YYYYMMDDhhmmsslll, where:
• YYYY indicates the year.
• MM indicates the month.
• DD indicates the day.
• hh indicates the hour.
• mm indicates the minutes.
• ss indicates the seconds.
• lll indicates the milliseconds. The l millisecond position is optional. Alternatively,
000 can be entered for the milliseconds.

time stamps are not valid for dump command The isql command line specified a timestamp for a dump command. Timestamps are
not valid with the dump command.

unable to close and create save set The BSA call to create and close the save set for a database or transaction dump
failed. Check the xbsa.messages file for specific details.

unable to close save set The call to close the save set failed during a load of a database or a transaction log.
Check the xbsa.messages file for specific details.

unable to create environment variables The resources required to create the internal environment variable array were not
available. This might be due to access problems in the /nsr/tmp directory.

362 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Troubleshooting and Error Messages

Table 48 Sybase backup server and libnsrsyb error messages (page 2 of 2)

Error message Description

Unable to create save set. There is likely a configuration or The save set could not be created on the NetWorker server. If the debug level is at
enabler problem. Set the debug level to at least 2, retry the least 2 (the default), check the xbsa.messages file for the error text. If the debug level
operation, and check the /nsr/applogs/xbsa.messages file for is not set at 2, change the setting to 2 and retry the operation. Check the
the underlying reason. xbsa.messages file for specific details.

unable to create the save set on the server The call to create the save set on the NetWorker server failed. Check the
xbsa.messages file for specific details.

unable to end the current read session During a load database or load transaction log operation, the read session of the data
from the NetWorker software could not be closed. Check the xbsa.messages file for
specific details.

Unable to find backup of the (database or transaction log) The item to be loaded could not be found. Use the nsrinfo command to check that the
SYBASE:/server_name/database_name. Check the command object-owner for the backup is the same as the process that launched the Sybase
line for errors in the instance or database name or use nsrinfo to Backup server and that backups exist for this database.
see which save sets are available.

Unable to find full backup of the database database_name for No backup could be found in the NetWorker server. If no time was supplied, the time
the time supplied. used is the current time, which means that no backup exists. Use the nsrinfo
Unable to find incremental backup of the database command to check which backups are available and make sure that the object owner
database_name for the time supplied. shown there is the same as the user ID that launched the Sybase Backup server.
Unable to find backup of the database database_name for the
time supplied.

unable to parse stripe specifier The isql command line had a poorly formatted stripe specifier.

unable to read the requested number of bytes from the save set During a load database or load transaction log operation, the save set could not be
read. Check the xbsa.messages file for specific details.

unable to send data to save set During a database or transaction log dump, the data could not be written to the save
set. Check the xbsa.messages file for specific details.

unknown backup type supplied The backup type supplied from the NetWorker server was not a database or a
transaction log.

Sybase-specific troubleshooting tips and error messages 363

Troubleshooting and Error Messages

364 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Glossary

This glossary contains the definitions of terms found in this manual. Most of the
terms are specific to the NMDA software. For terms specific to the NetWorker
software, refer to the latest EMC NetWorker Administration Guide.

A
active-active Type of cluster configuration where a group of linked virtual or physical hosts with
application cluster shared storage, called cluster nodes, can access the database data from multiple nodes
concurrently.

active-passive cluster Type of cluster configuration where the data server runs on the active physical node,
and other nodes are passive nodes that maintain data updates and wait to take over if
the active node fails.

administrator Person who normally installs, configures, and maintains software on network
computers, and who adds users and defines user privileges.

attribute Feature of a NetWorker resource. A setting or information that the resource provides.

auto media Feature that enables the storage device controlled by the NetWorker server to
management automatically label, mount, and overwrite a volume it considers unlabeled. Volumes
that are eligible for reuse are also automatically recycled.

autochanger See ”library.”

B
backup 1. Duplicate of database or application data or an entire computer system stored
separately from the original, which can be used to recover the original if it is
destroyed or damaged.
2. Operation that saves data to a volume for use during a recovery.

backup cycle Full or level 0 backup and all the subsequent incremental backups that are dependent
on that backup.

backup level See ”level.”

backup volume See ”volume.”

blobspace (Binary large object space) Informix logical unit of storage consisting of one or more
data chunks, used to store large objects, such as multimedia images.

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 365
Glossary

bootstrap Save set that is essential for disaster recovery procedures with the NetWorker server.
The bootstrap consists of three components that reside on the NetWorker server: the
media database, the resource database, and a server index.

browse policy NetWorker policy that specifies the period of time during which backup entries are
retained in the client file index. The index makes the associated backed-up data
readily accessible for recovery. See also ”retention policy.”

C
catalog Process that removes a PowerSnap backup entry from the database server catalog
synchronization when the corresponding backup entry is removed from the NetWorker indexes. See
also ”NWORA resource file.”

client Database or application server whose data can be backed up and restored with the
NMDA software.

client file index Database maintained by the NetWorker server that tracks every database object, file,
or file system backed up. The NetWorker server maintains a single index file for each
client computer. The tracking information for each backup is deleted from the index
when the browse policy of the backup expires.

client-initiated See ”manual backup.”

backup

client-side NetWorker module backup configuration, made without the configuration wizard,
configuration that is performed through the NetWorker Management Console and configuration
files or parameters stored on the client host, as compared to server-side
configuration. See also ”server-side configuration.”

clone Duplicate copy of backed-up data, which is indexed and tracked by the NetWorker
server. Single save sets or entire volumes can be cloned.

clone volume Exact duplicate of a backup or archive volume. NetWorker software can track four
types of volumes (backup, archive, backup clone, and archive clone). Save sets of
these different types may not be intermixed on one volume. Clone volumes may be
used in exactly the same way as the original backup or archive volume.

cluster nodes A group of linked virtual or physical hosts with shared storage in a cluster, which
work together and represent themselves as a single host called a virtual cluster host.

cold backup See ”offline backup.”

Console server See ”NetWorker Management Console (NMC).”

D
daemon Process on UNIX systems that runs in the background and performs a specified
operation at predefined times or in response to certain events.

dbobject Informix database object, a term that can refer to a blobspace, dbspace, or logical log
file.

dbspace Informix logical unit of storage that consists of one or more chunks. An IDS instance
might consist of one or more dbspaces.

366 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Glossary

DD Boost An optimized library and communication framework with a special Data Domain
API that allows the NetWorker software to define and interact with storage devices
on the Data Domain system.

deduplication Type of backup in which redundant data blocks are identified and only unique
backup blocks of data are stored. When the deduplicated data is restored, the data is returned
to its original native format.

deferred live backup Type of snapshot backup in which an existing point-in-time copy (snapshot) of data,
which was created on the primary storage unit by an instant backup, is backed up to
secondary storage. The snapshot is retained on the primary storage.

destination client Computer to which database files are restored in a directed recovery.

device 1. Storage unit that can contain a backup volume. A storage unit can be a tape
device, optical drive, autochanger, or disk connected to the server or storage
node.
2. General term that refers to storage hardware.
3. Access path to the physical drive, when dynamic drive sharing (DDS) is enabled.

directed recovery Method that recovers data that originated on one client host and re-creates it on a
different client host, known as the destination client.

disaster recovery Restore and recovery of business operations and data in the event of hardware failure
or software corruption.

distributed segment Part of the DD Boost interface, which enables data deduplication to be performed on
processing (DSP) a host before the data is sent to the Data Domain system for storage.

E
emergency boot file Informix ON-Bar ASCII file that contains all of the information stored in the ON-Bar
catalog tables that pertain to critical dbspaces.

event-based backup See ”probe-based backup.”

expiration date Date when a volume changes from read/write to read-only.

expired save set Save set that has exceeded its browse time and has been removed from the
NetWorker client file index. Expired save sets can no longer be browsed.

F
firewall A system designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from a private network.

full backup See ”level.”

G
group Client computer or group of clients that are configured to back up files during a
NetWorker scheduled backup, according to a single designated schedule or set of
conditions.

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 367
Glossary

H
high-availability System of multiple computers configured as cluster nodes on a network that ensures
system the application services continue despite a hardware or software failure.

host Computer on a network.

hot backup See ”online backup.”

I
immediate live Type of snapshot backup in which an existing point-in-time copy (snapshot) of data,
backup which was created on the primary storage during an instant backup, is immediately
backed up to secondary storage. The snapshot is automatically deleted from the
primary storage.

incremental backup See ”level.”

instant backup Type of snapshot backup that creates a point-in-time copy (snapshot) of data on the
primary storage unit, which may be immediately recovered as a backup copy.

instant restore Type of snapshot restore that copies data created during an instant backup to its
original location or to an alternate location.

internationalization Process of adapting software to accept input and output of data in various languages
(I18N) and locales.

J
jukebox See ”library.”

L
label Electronic header on a volume used for identification by NetWorker or other data
mover application.

legacy NetWorker One of the NetWorker modules that NMDA replaces: NMDB2, NMI, NML, NMO, or
module NMS.

level Backup configuration option that specifies how much data is saved during a
scheduled or manual backup:
◆ A full backup backs up all data objects, regardless of when they last changed.
◆ An incremental backup backs up only data objects that have changed since the
previous backup.
Table 8 on page 71 describes the backup levels supported for each type of database or
application.

library Hardware device containing one or more removable media drives, as well as slots for
pieces of media, media access ports, and a robotic mechanism for moving pieces of
media between these components. Libraries automate media loading and mounting
functions during backup and recovery. The term library is synonymous with
autochanger, autoloader, carousel, datawheel, jukebox, and near-line storage.

368 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Glossary

live backup Backup to secondary storage media of a previously created snapshot. Also known as
a rollover. The two types of live backup are as follows:
◆ “deferred live backup”
◆ “immediate live backup”

localization (L10N) Process of translating software for a user language or locale.

M
manual backup Backup that a user performs from the client, also known as an unscheduled,
on-demand, or ad hoc backup.

mean time to recover Time specified to perform a recovery. For example, you might set 10 minutes as the
(MTTR) goal for a recovery from a disk failure.

media Physical storage, such as magnetic tape, optical disk, or file system, to which backup
data is written. See also ”volume.”

media index Database that contains indexed entries of storage volume location and the life cycle
status of all data and volumes managed by the NetWorker server. Also known as
media database.

media pool See ”pool.”

multiple session Method of backing up or restoring multiple parallel streams of data simultaneously
backup and restore between a database and multiple media devices. Also known as multistripe.

multiplex To simultaneously write data from more than one save set to the same storage device.

N
NetWorker Data A logical storage device created on a Data Domain server, which is used to store
Domain device deduplicated NetWorker backups. Each device appears as a folder on the Data
Domain system and is listed with a storage volume name in NMC.

NetWorker Software program that is used to manage NetWorker servers and clients. The NMC
Management server also provides reporting and monitoring capabilities for all NetWorker
Console (NMC) processes.

NetWorker Module for Add-on module for NetWorker software that provides backup, restore, and storage
Databases and management solutions for supported database or application software. NMDA is an
Applications (NMDA) aggregate of individual NetWorker modules for DB2 (NMDB2), Informix (NMI),
Lotus Domino/Notes (NML), Oracle (NMO), and Sybase (NMS) data.

NetWorker server Computer on a network that runs the NetWorker server software, contains the online
indexes, and provides backup and restore services to the clients and storage nodes on
the same network.

notification Message sent to the NetWorker administrator about important NetWorker events.

NWORA resource file NMDA Oracle resource file in which resources must be defined to enable Oracle
proxy backups and (optionally) catalog synchronization.

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 369
Glossary

O
offline backup Backup of database objects performed while the corresponding database or instance
is shut down and unavailable to users.

online backup Backup of database objects performed while the corresponding database or instance
is running and available to users.

online indexes Databases located on the NetWorker server that contain all the information
pertaining to the client backups (client file index) and backup volumes (media index).

Oracle Recovery Collection of Oracle database tables maintained by RMAN, which includes
Catalog information about Oracle backup sets and pieces, image and proxy copies, archived
redo logs, stored scripts, and the target database schema.

Oracle Recovery Oracle utility that acts as an intelligent interface to Oracle databases for the backup
Manager (RMAN) and restore of Oracle database objects.

P
parallelism Method that backs up or recovers data for multiple clients, or multiple save sets for
one client, at the same time.

pathname Set of instructions to the operating system for accessing a file:

◆ An absolute pathname indicates how to find a file starting from the root directory
and working down the directory tree.
◆ A relative pathname indicates how to find a file starting from the current location.

performing client Host where a directed recovery is initiated by using the NetWorker User for Lotus
program.

physical cluster client NetWorker client that is bound to a physical host in the cluster and can have its own
resources (private or local).

point-in-time copy Fully usable copy of a defined collection of data, such as a consistent file system,
(PIT copy) database, or volume, which contains an image of the data as it appeared at a single
point in time. A PIT copy is also called a shadow copy or a snapshot.

policy Set of defined rules for client backups that can be named and applied to multiple
groups. Groups have dataset, schedule, browse, and retention policies.

policy uniformity Consistency of the browse and retention policies in a group of co-dependent Oracle
save sets from the same scheduled backup cycle or save set bundle, enforced by
NMDA to ensure that incremental Oracle backups do not persist after other Oracle
backups they depend on have expired.

pool 1. NetWorker sorting feature that assigns specific backup data to be stored on
selected media volumes.
2. Collection of NetWorker backup volumes to which specific data has been
backed up.

PowerSnap EMC NetWorker Module that provides point-in-time snapshots of data to be backed
up. Applications that are running on the host system continue to write data during
the snapshot operation, and data from open files is included in the snapshots.

370 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Glossary

primary storage Server storage subsystem that contains application data and any persistent snapshot
backups of data. See also ”secondary storage.”

probe-based backup Type of scheduled backup, also known as an event-based backup, where the
NetWorker server initiates the backup only when specified conditions are met, as
determined by one or more probes.

proxy backup Backup of Oracle data that creates a point-in-time (snapshot) copy on primary
storage through the PowerSnap Module. The snapshot is optionally backed up to
secondary storage. See also ”instant backup” and “live backup.”

proxy client host Host used in PowerSnap backups that is separate from the database server host, with
access to the primary storage unit. During a PowerSnap live backup, either the
database server host or proxy client host backs up a point-in-time copy (snapshot)
from the primary storage to secondary storage.

proxy restore Restore of Oracle data from a proxy backup through the PowerSnap Module. See also
”instant restore,” “rollback restore,” and “restore from secondary storage.”

Q
quiesce Database or application state that enables a consistent backup to be performed.

R
recover To restore data files from a backup volume to a client disk and apply transactional
(redo) logs to the data to make it consistent with a given point in time.

recyclable save set Save set whose browse and retention policies have expired in the NetWorker indexes.
Recyclable save sets are removed from the media database.

recyclable volume NetWorker volume whose data has exceeded both its browse and retention policies
and is now available to be relabeled and reused.

remote device Storage device that is attached to a storage node that is separate from the NetWorker
server.

resource NetWorker software component that describes details of the NetWorker server or its
clients. Clients, devices, schedules, groups, and policies are all NetWorker resources.
Each resource has configurable attributes that define its properties.

resource database NetWorker database of information about each configured resource.

restore To retrieve individual data files from backup media and copy the files to disk,
without applying transaction logs. See also ”recover.”

restore from Type of DB2 or Oracle restore that restores a proxy backup from a secondary storage
secondary storage medium.

retention policy NetWorker setting that determines the minimum period of time that backup data is
retained on a volume available for recovery. After this time is exceeded, the data is
eligible to be overwritten. See also ”browse policy.”

RMAN See ”Oracle Recovery Manager (RMAN).”

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 371
Glossary

roll forward To apply transactional logs to a recovered database to restore it to a state that is
consistent with a given point in time.

rollback restore PowerSnap process by which a specific point-in-time copy (snapshot) of data is
restored to the source location by using the hardware's particular capabilities. A
rollback restore is a destructive save set restore.

rollover save set See ”live backup.”

S
save NetWorker command that backs up client files to backup media volumes and makes
data entries in the online index.

save set Group of data from a single client computer, which is backed up on storage media.

save set bundle Group of co-dependent Oracle save sets from the same scheduled backup cycle,
assembled into a bundle according to configuration settings.

save set consolidation Process that performs a level 1 backup and merges it with the last full backup of a
save set to create a new full backup.

save set ID (ssid) Internal identification number assigned to a save set.

save stream Data and save set information that is written to a storage volume during a backup. A
save stream originates from a single save set.

scanner NetWorker command used to read a backup volume when the online indexes are not
available.

scheduled backup Type of backup that is configured to start automatically at a specified time for a
group of one or more NetWorker clients. A scheduled backup generates a bootstrap
save set.

secondary storage Storage library attached to the NetWorker server or storage node, used to store
regular backups or snapshot backups. See also ”primary storage.”

server index See ”client file index.”

server-side NetWorker module backup configuration that is performed through the

configuration configuration wizard, with settings saved on the NetWorker server, as compared to
client-side configuration. See also ”client-side configuration.”

shared disk Storage disk that is connected to multiple nodes in the cluster.

snap set Group of files, volumes, or file systems from a single client that describes the
collection of data for which a point-in-time copy is created on an external disk
subsystem, such as a storage array.

snapshot Point-in-time, read-only copy of data created on a primary storage system during an
instant backup.

snapshot policy Set of rules that control the lifecycle of a snap set. The snapshot policy specifies the
frequency of snapshots and how long snapshots are retained before recycling.

ssid See ”save set ID (ssid).”

372 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Glossary

stage To move data from one storage medium to a less costly medium, and later removing
the data from its original location.

storage device See ”device.”

storage node Storage device physically attached to a computer other than the NetWorker server,
whose backup operations are administered from the controlling NetWorker server.

T
tablespace Oracle database structure that consists of one or more data files.

target database Database that the NetWorker server backs up as a safeguard against data loss.

transaction log Record of named database transactions or list of changed files in a database, stored in
a log file to execute quick restore and rollback transactions.

U
unscheduled backup See ”manual backup.”

V
virtual cluster client NetWorker client that is not permanently bound to one physical host but is managed
by a cluster manager. It is also referred to as a logical cluster client or a virtual client.

volume 1. Unit of physical storage medium, such as a magnetic tape, optical disk, or file
system used to store data. Backup data must be stored on a backup volume and
cannot be stored on an archive volume or a clone volume.
2. Identifiable unit of data storage that may reside on one or more computer disks.

volume ID (volid) Internal identification that NetWorker software assigns to a backup volume.

volume name Name that you assign to a backup volume when it is labeled. See also ”label.”

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 373
Glossary

374 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Index

Symbols B
(Avamar) Deduplication Backup attribute backup
in Client resource 72 Client resource 243
(Avamar) Deduplication Node attribute command 251, 327
in Client resource 72 command (pool option) 324
command (trace option) 346
copies 105
Numerics delete 134
32-bit and 64-bit coexistence 232
error messages 332, 346
from NetWorker User for Lotus 124, 175
A from NetWorker User for Sybase 124, 175
active-active application cluster 210 Group resource 70, 242
active-passive cluster 202 levels supported 34
ADDRESS_LIST parameter 222 multiple session 89
Administrator, NetWorker partitioned Domino server 96
Client resource 243 required Sybase roles 109
Device resource 63 Schedule resource 71
Group resource 70, 242 transaction logs 93
Pool resource 63, 242 Backup Command attribute
Schedule resource 71 in Client resource 72, 243
Server resource 60 backup copies during manual backups 105
Snapshot Policy resource 238, 242 backup current control file command 196
User Group resource 61 backup failover 203
Advanced Copy Services (ACS) 247 backup hangs, troubleshooting 332
AES encryption 296 Backup Snapshots attribute
Aliases attribute in Snapshot Policy resource 238
in Client resource 72 backup spfile command 196
allocate channel command backup types
parms option 328 archived redo log 193, 226
archive logging 32 Avamar deduplication 27, 76
archived redo log control file 193, 196
backup 193, 226 Data Domain deduplication 27, 80
restore 226 deferred live 238, 257
sharing across RAC nodes 225 immediate live 238
attributes for resources instant 238, 256, 264
Client resource 63 manual 25, 27, 119
Server resource 60 NetWorker bootstrap 53
automatic catalog synchronization for proxy backups 273 NWORA resource file 257, 259
automatic channel allocation 38, 101, 103 password file 193
Avamar deduplication probe-based 28
backup 27, 76 proxy 236
backup in a cluster 208 registry files 193
restore 27 scheduled 25, 26, 116

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 375
Index

bootstrap backup 251, 327

backup 25 backup (pool option) 324
NetWorker 53 backup (trace option) 346
records 184 backup current control file 196
Browse Policy attribute backup spfile 196
in Client resource 72, 243 change...crosscheck 136
browse policy uniformity 44 change...delete 273
browse time 176 configure channel, parms option 254, 315
bundling, save set 42 crosscheck 136
delete expired backup 136
nsrorainfo 163
C nsrsybcc 123
canceling
nsrsybrc 109
manual backup 130
restore 327
nonresponding backup 118
rman 122, 169
proxy backup 244
rman send 315, 326, 328
scheduled backup 103, 117
rman.exe 122, 169
catalog synchronization for proxy backups 273
savefs 52
change...crosscheck command 136
savegrp 52
change...delete command 273
send 253, 315, 324, 325
channel option, send command 325
send (channel option) 325
Checkpoint enabled attribute
send (device_type option) 325
in Client resource 72
send (NSR_ENV keyword) 325
Checkpoint granularity attribute
send (precedence rules) 328
in Client resource 72
Command attribute
circular logging 32
in Probe resource 85
client direct method 80, 300
Command Options attribute
client file index 25, 258, 259, 260
in Probe resource 85, 86
Client resource 243
configuration
Client resource attributes
Client resource 243
(Avamar) Deduplication Backup 72
Device resource 63
(Avamar) Deduplication Node 72
Group resource 70, 242
Aliases 72
manual backup 119
Backup Command 72
Pool resource 63, 242
Browse Policy 72
roadmap 56
Checkpoint enabled 72
Schedule resource 71
Checkpoint granularity 72
scheduled backup 116
Data Domain Backup 73
Server resource 60
Group 73
Snapshot Policy resource 238, 242
Name 73
User Group resource 61
Parallelism 73
configuration file
Remote Access 73
transaction logs 93
Retention Policy 73
configuration template
Save Set 73, 74
nmda_db2.cfg 294
Schedule 74
nmda_informix.cfg 294
Scheduled Backup 74
nmda_lotus.cfg 294
Storage Nodes 74
nmda_oracle.cfg 294
Client Retries attribute
nmda_sybase.cfg 294
in Group resource 277
configure channel command
cluster
parms option 254, 315
active-active application 210
connection file, for catalog synchronization 266, 268, 269
active-passive 202
control file
Avamar deduplication backup 208
backup 193, 196
Data Domain deduplication backup 209
control files, mirrored 193
manual backups 208
convert backup settings from earlier releases 205
probe-based backup 209
crosscheck command 136
restoring backups 210
systems 30, 276
coexistence, 32-bit and 64-bit 232 D
command Data Domain Backup attribute
allocate channel, parms option 328 in Client resource 73

376 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Index

Data Domain deduplication NLS_LANG 59

backup 27, 80 error messages 332, 336
backup in a cluster 209 RMAN 346
restore 27
database
F
manual backup 25, 119
failover
scheduled backup 25, 116
backup 203
Database Partitioning Feature (DPF) 212
connect-time 222
Datazone pass phrase attribute
proxy backup 276
in Server resource 61
FAILOVER parameter 222
DB2
fetched logs method of rollforward recovery 148
DPF systems 212
history file 32, 135
history pruning 248 G
prune command 134 generic Client resource 206
resource file 248 Group attribute
restore and recovery 143 in Client resource 73, 243
restore to same or different instance 145 Group resource 70, 242
DB2 transaction logs 32
DB2_ALIAS parameter 303
DB2_APPLY_NW_LEVELS parameter 303
H
DB2_NODE_NAME 215, 217 high availability 202
DB2_NODE_NAME parameter 304 history pruning 32, 248
DB2_OPTIONS 215, 217
DB2_OPTIONS parameter 304 I
DB2_PARTITION_LIST 217 I18N (internationalization) 57
DB2_PARTITION_LIST parameter 304 immediate live backup 238
DB2_QUIESCE parameter 304 incremental backups
DB2_SESSIONS parameter 304 threshold procedure 113
DB2_TBS_LIST parameter 304 Informix
DB2_USER 215, 217 restore and recovery 149
DB2_USER parameter 305 Informix Multi-instance Active Cluster for
DB2_VENDOR_LIB_PATH parameter 305 High-availability (MACH 11) 218
DB2INSTANCE parameter 304 Informix restore through onbar
DB2PATH parameter 248, 304 combined restore 151
DBCCOPT parameter 319 logical restore 151
DBID 193, 194 physical restore 151
deferred live backup 238, 257 point-in-time restore 152
delete INFORMIXDIR parameter 306
backup 134 INFORMIXSQLHOSTS parameter 306
snapshots 248 initialization parameter file
delete expired backup command 136 initoracle_sid.ora 223
destructive restores 239 PFILE 193, 194, 196
Device resource 63 SPFILE 193, 196
device_type option, send command 325 INSTANCE_NAME parameter 223
direct file access (DFA) 28 instant backup 238, 256, 264
disaster recovery 184 instant restore 239
preparation 193 INSTHOME 215, 217
distributed segment processing (DSP) 28 INSTHOME parameter 305
DO_LOGFILE_BACKUPS parameter 306 internationalization (I18N) 57
DO_WHOLE_SYSTEM_BACKUP parameter 306 isql commands
DPF partitions 212 threshold procedure 113

E L
enabling LD_LIBRARY_PATH parameter 319
policy uniformity 108 LD_LIBRARY_PATH_64 parameter 319
save set bundling 107 LIBPATH parameter 320
encryption live backup
AES encryption 296 deferred 238, 257
environment variable immediate 238

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 377
Index

LOCAL_LISTENER parameter 223 Pool resource 63, 242

Lockbox resource, in cluster 206 roadmap 56
LOG_THRESHOLD parameter 85 Schedule resource 71
logs, transaction Server resource 60
backup levels 34 Snapshot Policy resource 238, 242
Lotus NetWorker PowerSnap Modules 28, 61, 236
restore types 36 NetWorker User for Lotus
Lotus restartable backups 35, 100, 133 backup 124, 175
LOTUS_NSF_FILE parameter 85 NetWorker User for Sybase
LOTUS_USER parameter 308 backup 124, 175
NLS_LANG environment variable 59
nmda_app.messages.raw file 332
M nmda_db2.cfg template file 294
MACH 11 systems 218
nmda_db2_tlogs.cfg configuration file 93
manual backup 25, 119
nmda_informix.cfg template file 294
canceling 130
nmda_lotus.cfg template file 294
cluster 208
nmda_oracle.cfg template file 294
configuration 75
nmda_oracle.messages.raw file 346
from NetWorker User for Lotus 124, 175
nmda_sybase.cfg template file 294
from NetWorker User for Sybase 124, 175
nonresponding Oracle backup, canceling 118
levels supported 34
Notes_ExecDirectory parameter 308
monitoring 130
NSR_AES_ENCRYPTION parameter 296
roadmap 119
NSR_APPLY_LOGS parameter 308
manual catalog synchronization for proxy backups 273
NSR_ASE_PASSWORD parameter 320
master database, recovering 197
NSR_ASE_VERIFY parameter 320
media database 25, 259, 260
NSR_AUTO_RESTORE parameter 308
media management
NSR_BACKUP_ALL_EXTENSIONS parameter 308
storage devices 63
NSR_BACKUP_LEVEL parameter 308, 320
volume pools 63
NSR_BACKUP_LOGS_MODE parameter 308
mirrored
NSR_BACKUP_LOTUS_DIR parameter 308
control files 193
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS parameter 309, 320
online redo logs 193
NSR_BROWSELIST_CACHE_DEST parameter 309
MML catalog 263
NSR_BUNDLING parameter 107
monitoring
NSR_CATALOGFILE parameter 309
manual backup 130
NSR_CHECKSUM parameter 297
scheduled backup 118
NSR_CLIENT 215, 217
Multi-instance Active Cluster for High-availability 218
NSR_CLIENT parameter 297
multiple
NSR_COMFORT_SPAN parameter 309
applications on same host 31
NSR_COMPRESSION parameter 297
devices and sessions 144
NSR_CROSS_MOUNT_POINTS parameter 309
session backups 89, 144
NSR_DATA_MOVER parameter 246
NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL* parameters 63, 297, 316
N NSR_DB2_RESTORE_TABLESPACE_BKUP parameter
Name attribute 305
in Client resource 73 NSR_DB2CAT_MODE parameter 248
in Probe resource 85 NSR_DBIID parameter 309
in Server resource 61 NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL parameter 85, 298
network files NSR_DEDUP_BACKUP parameter 298
listener.ora 193, 194, 222 NSR_DEDUP_CACHE_ENABLED parameter 298
sqlnet.ora 193, 194 NSR_DEDUP_CACHE_TAG parameter 299
tnsnames.ora 193, 194, 222 NSR_DEDUP_CHUNK_SIZE parameter 299
NetWorker NSR_DEDUP_NODE parameter 299
bootstrap backup 53 NSR_DEVICE_INTERFACE parameter 300
client file index 25, 258, 259, 260 NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST parameter 85, 300
media database 25, 259, 260 NSR_DIRECT_ACCESS parameter 300
staging 42 NSR_DPRINTF parameter 300
NetWorker configuration NSR_DR_BACKUP_INFO parameter 305, 307
Client resource 63, 243 NSR_DR_FILE_LIST parameter 305, 307
Device resource 63 NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT parameter 320
Group resource 70, 242 NSR_ENCRYPTION_PHRASES parameter 300

378 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Index

NSR_ENV keyword in send command 325 nsrdasv program 52

NSR_EXCLUDE_FILE parameter 310, 320 nsrexecd service 52
NSR_EXCLUDE_LIST parameter 310 nsrindexd service 54
NSR_FOLLOW_LINKS parameter 310 nsrnotesrc options
NSR_GROUP parameter 104 skip Notes API 190, 191
NSR_INCR_EXPIRATION parameter 108 nsrnotesv options
NSR_LOG_DIR parameter 310 number of transaction logs 192
NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL parameter 305, 307, 321 nsroraadmin program 267, 269, 270
NSR_LOTUS_DATA_DIR parameter 310 nsroraclecat program 265, 273
NSR_MAX_START_RETRIES parameter 305, 310 nsrorainfo command 163
NSR_MAX_STREAMS parameter 246 nsrsnapck program 273, 274
NSR_MAX_TXN_LOGS parameter 311 nsrsybcc
NSR_MMDB_RETRY_TIME parameter 316 command syntax 123
NSR_NO_BUSY_ERRORS parameter 301 Sybase roles command nsrsybcc 109
NSR_NO_MULTIPLEX parameter 317 nsrsybrc
NSR_NO_NOTES_INIT parameter 311 Sybase roles 109
NSR_NOTES_CONNECT_TIMEOUT parameter 311 nsrsybsv
NSR_NOTES_INI_PATH parameter 311 Sybase roles 109
NSR_NUMBER_LOGS parameter 311 NWORA parameter resources
NSR_NWPATH parameter 241, 266, 301 NSR_ORACLE_NLS_LANG 266
NSR_ORACLE_CONNECT_FILE parameter 86, 268 NSR_ORACLECAT_DEBUG_FILE 266
NSR_ORACLE_HOME parameter 268 NSR_ORACLECAT_LOG_FILE 266
NSR_ORACLE_LIB_PATH parameter 268 NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE 266, 274
NSR_ORACLE_NLS_LANG parameter 242 NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE 266
NSR_ORACLE_NLS_LANG parameter resource 266 NWORA resource file 265, 267, 268, 269
NSR_ORACLE_SID parameter 269 backup 257, 259
NSR_ORACLE_TNS_ADMIN parameter 269 NWORA SID resources 268, 269
NSR_ORACLECAT_DEBUG_FILE parameter resource nworapc directory 261
266
NSR_ORACLECAT_LOG_FILE parameter resource 266
O
NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE parameter resource 266, 274
ONCONFIG parameter 307
NSR_PARALLELISM parameter 311, 321
online indexes 131
NSR_PHYSICAL_HOST_LICENSE parameter 301
online NetWorker indexes 25
NSR_PREFETCH_LOGS parameter 311
online redo logs, mirrored 193
NSR_PROMOTE_FULL parameter 321
Oracle
NSR_PROXY_PFILE parameter 317
DBID 193, 194
NSR_PS_SAVE_PARALLELISM parameter 246
manual backup script 101, 252, 327
NSR_RECOV_INTERACT parameter 312
mirrored
NSR_RECOV_LIST_FILE parameter 312
control files 193
NSR_RECOVER_POOL parameter 301
online redo logs 193
NSR_RECOVER_TIME parameter 312
password file 103
NSR_RELOCATION_DEST parameter 312
recover 24, 140, 170
NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE parameter resource 266
Recovery Catalog database
NSR_RESOURCE_DIR parameter 312
connection to 103
NSR_RETAIN_NUM_LOGS parameter 312
restore 24, 25, 140, 165, 226
NSR_RETENTION parameter 73
restore and recovery 161
NSR_RETENTION_DISABLED parameter 317
sbtio.log file 346
NSR_RMAN_ARGUMENTS parameter 317
scheduled backup script 103
NSR_SAVESET_BROWSE parameter 72, 301
Oracle Automated Storage Management (ASM) 249
NSR_SAVESET_NAME parameter 312
Oracle Enterprise Manager Backup Management Tools
NSR_SAVESET_RETENTION parameter 302
169
NSR_SERVER 215, 217
Oracle Net 221, 222
NSR_SERVER parameter 104, 302
Oracle Real Application Cluster (RAC) 221
NSR_SERVER_NIC parameter 317
ORACLE_HOME parameter 317
NSR_SKIPDBERRORS parameter 313
ORACLE_SERVICE parameter 86
NSR_SNAPSHOT_POSTCMD parameter 246
ORACLE_SID parameter 318
NSR_VERBOSITY parameter 313
ORACLE_USER parameter 318
NSR_XBSA_DEBUG parameter 313
ORACLER_USER parameter 318
nsrd service 52
nsrdaprobe program 28, 87

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 379
Index

P NSR_CROSS_MOUNT_POINTS 309
Parallelism attribute NSR_DATA_MOVER 246
in Client resource 73 NSR_DATA_VOLUME_POOL* 63, 297, 316
in Server resource 61 NSR_DB2_RESTORE_TABLESPACE_BKUP 305
parameter NSR_DB2CAT_MODE 248
ADDRESS_LIST 222 NSR_DBIID 309
FAILOVER 222 NSR_DEBUG_LEVEL 85, 298
INSTANCE_NAME 223 NSR_DEDUP_BACKUP 298
LOCAL_LISTENER 223 NSR_DEDUP_CACHE_ENABLED 298
SERVICE_NAME 222, 223 NSR_DEDUP_CACHE_TAG 299
SID_LIST_LISTENER 222, 223 NSR_DEDUP_CHUNK_SIZE 299
parameter resources NSR_DEDUP_NODE 299
NSR_ORACLE_NLS_LANG 266 NSR_DEVICE_INTERFACE 300
NSR_ORACLECAT_DEBUG_FILE 266 NSR_DIAGNOSTIC_DEST 85, 300
NSR_ORACLECAT_LOG_FILE 266 NSR_DIRECT_ACCESS 300
NSR_ORACLECAT_MODE 266, 274 NSR_DPRINTF 300
NSR_REMOVE_ON_FAILURE 266 NSR_DR_BACKUP_INFO 305, 307
parameters NSR_DR_FILE_LIST 305, 307
DB2_ALIAS 303 NSR_DUMP_LOG_OPT 320
DB2_APPLY_NW_LEVELS 303 NSR_ENCRYPTION_PHRASES 300
DB2_NODE_NAME 304 NSR_EXCLUDE_FILE 310, 320
DB2_OPTIONS 304 NSR_EXCLUDE_LIST 310
DB2_PARTITION_LIST 304 NSR_FOLLOW_LINKS 310
DB2_QUIESCE 304 NSR_GROUP 104
DB2_SESSIONS 304 NSR_INCR_EXPIRATION 108
DB2_TBS_LIST 304 NSR_LOG_DIR 310
DB2_USER 305 NSR_LOG_VOLUME_POOL 305, 307, 321
DB2_VENDOR_LIB_PATH 305 NSR_LOTUS_DATA_DIR 310
DB2INSTANCE 304 NSR_MAX_START_RETRIES 305, 310
DB2PATH 248, 304 NSR_MAX_STREAMS 246
DBCCOPT 319 NSR_MAX_TXN_LOGS 311
DO_LOGFILE_BACKUPS 306 NSR_MMDB_RETRY_TIME 316
DO_WHOLE_SYSTEM_BACKUP 306 NSR_NO_BUSY_ERRORS 301
INFORMIXDIR 306 NSR_NO_MULTIPLEX 317
INFORMIXSQLHOSTS 306 NSR_NO_NOTES_INIT 311
INSTHOME 305 NSR_NOTES_CONNECT_TIMEOUT 311
LD_LIBRARY_PATH 319 NSR_NOTES_INI_PATH 311
LD_LIBRARY_PATH_64 319 NSR_NUMBER_LOGS 311
LIBPATH 320 NSR_NWPATH 241, 266, 301
LOG_THRESHOLD 85 NSR_ORACLE_CONNECT_FILE 86, 268
LOTUS_NSF_FILE 85 NSR_ORACLE_HOME 268
LOTUS_USER 308 NSR_ORACLE_LIB_PATH 268
Notes_ExecDirectory 308 NSR_ORACLE_NLS_LANG 242
NSR_AES_ENCRYPTION 296 NSR_ORACLE_SID 269
NSR_APPLY_LOGS 308 NSR_ORACLE_TNS_ADMIN 269
NSR_ASE_PASSWORD 320 NSR_PARALLELISM 311, 321
NSR_ASE_VERIFY 320 NSR_PHYSICAL_HOST_LICENSE 301
NSR_AUTO_RESTORE 308 NSR_PREFETCH_LOGS 311
NSR_BACKUP_ALL_EXTENSIONS 308 NSR_PROMOTE_FULL 321
NSR_BACKUP_LEVEL 308, 320 NSR_PROXY_PFILE 317
NSR_BACKUP_LOGS_MODE 308 NSR_PS_SAVE_PARALLELISM 246
NSR_BACKUP_LOTUS_DIR 308 NSR_RECOV_INTERACT 312
NSR_BACKUP_PATHS 309, 320 NSR_RECOV_LIST_FILE 312
NSR_BROWSELIST_CACHE_DEST 309 NSR_RECOVER_POOL 301
NSR_BUNDLING 107 NSR_RECOVER_TIME 312
NSR_CATALOGFILE 309 NSR_RELOCATION_DEST 312
NSR_CHECKSUM 297 NSR_RESOURCE_DIR 312
NSR_CLIENT 297 NSR_RETAIN_NUM_LOGS 312
NSR_COMFORT_SPAN 309 NSR_RETENTION 73
NSR_COMPRESSION 297 NSR_RETENTION_DISABLED 317

380 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Index

NSR_RMAN_ARGUMENTS 317 cluster 209

NSR_SAVESET_BROWSE 72, 301 program
NSR_SAVESET_NAME 312 nsrd 52
NSR_SAVESET_RETENTION 302 nsrdaprobe 28, 87
NSR_SERVER 104, 302 nsrdasv 52
NSR_SERVER_NIC 317 nsrexecd 52
NSR_SKIPDBERRORS 313 nsrindexd 54
NSR_SNAPSHOT_POSTCMD 246 nsroraadmin 267, 269, 270
NSR_VERBOSITY 313 nsroraclecat 265, 273
NSR_XBSA_DEBUG 313 nsrsnapck 273, 274
ONCONFIG 307 savefs 52
ORACLE_HOME 317 savegrp 52
ORACLE_SERVICE 86 scanner 141
ORACLE_SID 318 proxy
ORACLE_USER 318 backup 236
PATH 313, 321 restore 239, 260
PowerSnap 246, 252, 253, 254 prune unwanted backups 135
RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER 246, 262 pruning of DB2 snapshots 248
SHLIB_PATH 321 pruning of snapshots 32
SYBASE 321 psrollback.res file 262
SYBASE_USER 322
TNS_ADMIN 318
R
USE_CONSISTENCY_CHECK 322
RAC nodes as storage nodes 210
USER_PSWD 306, 322
RAC systems 221
parms option
recover 24, 140, 170
allocate channel command 328
rollforward 148
configure channel command 254, 315
recoveries, types of
partitioned Domino server
redirected restore 173
backup 96
recovering
recovery 156
databases not on the master device 198
password file 103
master database 197
backup 193
recovery
PATH parameter 313, 321
partitioned Domino server 156
permissions, Sybase 109
Recovery Catalog database
persistent settings 38, 103
connection to 103
PFILE 193, 194, 196
Recovery Catalog, backup 193, 196
physical cluster client, proxy backups from 277
Recovery Manager (RMAN)
point-in-time (PIT) copies 236
commands 323
point-in-time copy 29, 238, 242, 243, 259
error messages 346
policy
proxy backup scripts 251, 252
browse 72
proxy restore scripts 260
retention 73
restore scripts 165
uniformity 44
scheduled backup scripts 103, 104
pool option, backup command 324
recovery options
Pool resource 63, 242
number of transaction logs 192
pool, volume
skip Notes API 190, 191
defined 63
redo logs, mirrored 193
label template for 63
registry files
postcommand script 194
backup 193
PowerSnap Modules 28, 61, 236
relocating files during proxy restores 262, 263
PowerSnap parameters 246, 252, 253, 254
Remote Access attribute
PowerSnap snapshot
in Client resource 73, 277
serverless backup 238
resource
precedence rules for send command 328
types of
primary storage 29, 236, 238, 255
Client 243
Probe resource attributes
Device 63
Command 85
Group 70, 242
Command Options 85, 86
Pool 63, 242
Name 85
Schedule 71
probe-based backup 28
Server 60

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 381
Index

Snapshot Policy 238, 242 secondary storage 238, 239

User Group 61 send command 253, 315, 324, 325
restartable backups 35, 100, 133 channel option 325
restore device_type option 325
archived redo log 226 NSR_ENV keyword 325
Avamar deduplication 27 precedence rules 328
cluster data 210 Server resource
command 327 attributes
Data Domain deduplication 27 Datazone pass phrase 61
DB2 data 143 Name 61
determining required volumes 163 Parallelism 61
from secondary storage 239 service
Informix data 149 nsrd 52
instant 239 nsrexecd 52
Oracle data 24, 25, 140, 161, 165 nsrindexd 54
physical restore 151 SERVICE_NAME parameter 222, 223
proxy 239, 260 SHLIB_PATH parameter 321
redirected restore 173 SID_LIST_LISTENER parameter 222, 223
rollback 239, 262 snapshot 29, 238, 242, 243, 259
Sybase data 170 backup and restore operations 236
RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER 245 backup processes 240
RESTORE_TYPE_ORDER parameter 246, 262 deletion 248
Retain Snapshots attribute restore 247
in Snapshot Policy resource 264 Snapshot attribute in Group resource 255, 256
Retention Policy attribute Snapshot Policy resource 238, 242
in Client resource 73, 243 Snapshot Pool attribute in Group resource 242
retention policy uniformity 44 SPFILE 193, 196
RMAN catalog 263 SQL error messages 336
rman command 122, 169 staging 42
RMAN repository 263 stopping
rman send command 315, 326, 328 manual backup 130
rman.exe command 122, 169 nonresponding backup 118
roadmap scheduled backup 103
manual backup 119 storage devices
scheduled backup 116 Device resource 63
rollback restore 239, 262 volume pool 63
rollforward recovery 148 Storage Nodes attribute
with DB2 transaction logs 32 in Client resource 74
Sybase
restore and recovery 170
S Sybase ASE Cluster Edition systems 226
Save Set attribute
SYBASE parameter 321
in Client resource 73, 74, 277
SYBASE_USER parameter 322
save set bundling 42
synchronization
savefs command 52
automatic catalog 273
savegroup completion report for proxy backup 256
manual catalog 273
savegrp command 52
sbtio.log file 346
scanner program 141 T
Schedule attribute tablespace
in Client resource 74 manual backup 25, 119
Schedule resource 71 scheduled backup 25, 116
scheduled backup 25, 116 target database
canceling 103, 117 connection to 103
cluster environment 205 template file
configuring Group resource 70 nmda_db2.cfg 294
configuring Schedule resource 71 nmda_informix.cfg 294
monitoring 118 nmda_lotus.cfg 294
roadmap 116 nmda_oracle.cfg 294
Scheduled Backup attribute nmda_sybase.cfg 294
in Client resource 74 threshold procedure, sample 113

382 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide
 Index

TNS_ADMIN parameter 318

trace option, backup command 346
transaction logs
backup 93
backup levels 34
configuration file 93
recovery with 148
rollforward recovery 93
troubleshooting 330
manual backup 331
scheduled backup 104, 331
types of backup
archived redo log 193, 226
manual 25, 119
NetWorker bootstrap 53
scheduled 25, 116

U
uniformity, policy 44
USE_CONSISTENCY_CHECK parameter 322
User Group resource 61
USER_PSWD parameter 306, 322

V
VENDOROPT 135, 149
virtual cluster client, proxy backups from 276
virtual host 206
volume pool
Default pool 63
defined 63
resource 63, 242
specifying 63
volumes, determining for restore 163

W
wizard fails to create backup, troubleshooting 332

EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide 383
Index

384 EMC NetWorker Module for Databases and Applications Release 1.2 Administration Guide